Manual Scriptcase9 En-Us

1
General View
HOME INTRODUCTION
Whats ScriptCase?
ScriptCase is a complete development tool. Having a friendly web interface, ScriptCase creates PHP applications extremely fast, with quality, saving your time, reducing costs,
gain productivity and integrating your development team. Youll be able to create applications of the type Grid, Chart, Form, Calendars and many other applications that
ScriptCase offers. Installing on a web server, ScriptCase can be accessed simultaneously by many developers from the browser, allowing remote and collaborative development.
The source code is in PHP and it works independently of the tool, allowing your deployment to work on any Web Server thats has PHP enables
How does ScriptCase work?

ScriptCase works with the generation of web applications in PHP, relating the content always with the most used databases on the market.
Source Code
ScriptCase generates (PHP, JavaScript, HTML and AJAX) source code. The generated code is totally independent from the tool and can be published on a PHP enabled web server.
The PHP language is free(GNU) and can be used on (Windows, Linux or Mac), each PHP process is done on the Server.
1
Accessing Scriptcase
HOME INTRODUCTION ACCESSING SCRIPTCASE
When accessing ScriptCase youll be presented the initial screen of the tool, where youll inform the username and password.
At your first access, the username and password is admin
Login Screen
After validating the username and password according to the profile, ScriptCase will offer the options that the user has access.
The user of the type Administrator has access privileges to all the functionalities of ScriptCase, also the ability to create new users.
1
General View
HOME SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION
The ScriptCase installer comes with PHP 7.0, Apache 2.4 and IonCube Loader.
The installation process will be described according with the Operating System.
Its really simple to install ScriptCase, select your operating system, follow the tutorial and in a few steps learn how to install and use ScriptCase.
1
ScriptCase Installer for Windows
HOME SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION SCRIPTCASE INSTALLER FOR WINDOWS
ScriptCases installer is an executable file for Windows. An application that automatically extracts the configuration of the APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE to your operating
system.
Itll be installed automatically on your Operating System:
Apache Web Server 2.4.15
PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.
Source Guardian 11.0.6
Scriptcase 9
Before proceeding with the installation, its recommended not having any other web environment installed (XAMP, Zend Server, etc) installed on the operating system. We
recommend using the SQLite database for the ScriptCase installation.
This manual describes the installation of ScriptCase in 2 steps:
1: Select the configurations of the installer.
2: Execute ScriptCase.
Selecting the configurations on the installer

1 - Selecting the language of the installation.
Language: We can select the language that the content will be displayed in the installation process. This step doesnt select the language for the interface of ScriptCase, only for the
installation.
Click on Ok to continue.
2 - Welcome Message.
This window displays the Welcome message of the installer.
Click on Next to continue.
3 - License Agreement.
2
Do you accept this license? : You should accept the terms before continuing.
4 - Installation Directory.
The predetermined installation path is C:\Program Files (x86)\NetMake\v9". Dont alter this path unless its necessary.
Installation Directory : Define the installation path for ScriptCase.
: This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.
5 - Apache Configuration.
Port : This defines the port on which the Apache service will run. We recommend using the predetermined value.
Administrator Email: This is the email for the Apache administrator. Itll be a configuration for the Apache, and not for ScriptCase.
Apache Domain: The Apache Domain should be defined here. We recommend using the predetermined value.
PHP Timezone: Select your Timezone.
6 - Ready to Install.
3
Click on Next to install ScriptCase.
Progress Bar : Displays the overall progress of the installation.
7 - All the Apache to run in a private and public network (Firewall)
You should check the two options so that the execution of the ScriptCase Apache can work on your Operating System.
8 - Completing the Installation.

4
View Readme File : When clicking on finish, the Readme file
Open Scriptcase 9.0 : When clicking on finish, ScriptCase will start.
Click on Finish to complete the process.
Using ScriptCase
To access your ScriptCase, open the browser and inform the local IP and the port that you informed in the installation ( Apache Configuration).
Ex: http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase
1
ScriptCase Installer for Linux
HOME SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION SCRIPTCASE INSTALLER FOR LINUX
ScriptCases installer is an executable file for Linux. An application that automatically extracts the configuration of the APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE to your operating system.
Scriptcase 9
Before proceeding with the installation, its recommended not having any other web environment installed (XAMP, Zend Server, etc) installed on the operating system. Its
recommend to know the basic shell commands to use the terminal(shell). We recommend using the SQLite database for the ScriptCase installation.
1: Execute the ScriptCase Installer.
Executing the ScriptCase Installer

1 - Access the folder where the installer is stored using the command cd .
Ex: user@computer:~$ cd /folder/of/downloads
The installer requires permissions to do some changes to your system. We need to give the administrator permission (also known as root permission) to the installer.
2 - Request access to the root using sudo su and informing the password (if necessary).
Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ sudo su
3 - Give permissions to run the installation file.
Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ chmod 777 scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run
4 - Execute the installation file.
Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ ./scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run

installation.
2
The predetermined installation path is /opt/NetMake/v9/. Dont alter this path unless its necessary.
![Installation Browsing][browse_img_install] : This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.
3
![Firewall Permission][permiso_apache_install]

4
Using ScriptCase
1
ScriptCase Installer for MacOS
HOME SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION SCRIPTCASE INSTALLER FOR MACOS
ScriptCases installer is an executable file for MacOS. An application that automatically extracts the configuration of the APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE to your operating system.
Scriptcase 9
Before proceeding with the installation, its recommended not having any other web environment installed (XAMP, Zend Server, etc) installed on the operating system. Its
recommend to know the basic shell commands to use the terminal(shell). We recommend using the SQLite database for the ScriptCase installation.

installation.
2
The predetermined installation path is /Applications/NetMake/v9/. Dont alter this path unless its necessary.
: This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.
3
![Firewall Permission][permiso_apache_install]
Using ScriptCase
4
1
Installing PHP 7.0 - Windows
HOME SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION INSTALLING PHP 7.0 - WINDOWS
This Article will describe the PHP 7.0 installation with Apache 2.4 to use ScriptCase.
Supported Operating Systems:
Windows Server
2008 SP2
2008 R2 SP1
2012
2012 SP2
2016
Windows
7 SP1
Vista SP2
8.1
10
Necessary Files:
PHP 7.0: Click Here
Apache 2.4: Click Here
mod_Fcgi: Click Here
SourceGuardian Loader: Click Here
You should download PHP 7.0 NTS ( x86 or x64 ), Apache 2.4 ( x86 or x64 ) and mod_fcgi ( x86 or x64 ).
After downloading, extract the PHP and Apache files in your C: drive of your Operating System
Rename the PHP folder to php and the Apache folder to Apache24
Extract the modfcgi file, and copy the file mod_fcgid.so to the folder C:\Apache24\modules
Setting up Apache
Edit the file httpd.conf located in C:\Apache24\conf\
Add the content below after the last line of the #LoadModule
LoadModule fcgid_module modules/mod_fcgid.so FcgidInitialEnv PHPRC "c:/php" AddHandler fcgid-script .php FcgidWrapper "c:/php/php-cgi.exe" .php
Still in the httpd.conf look for #ServerName www.example.com:80 and alter is to #ServerName localhost:80
Change the content of the directive <IfModule dir_module> acoording to example below:
<IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html index.php index.phtml </IfModule>
Add the text: Options ExecCGI on the directive Directory c/:Apache24/htdocs

2
Look for IfModule mime_module and add the content below: `<Directory c:/php> AllowOverride None Options None Require all granted
</Directory>`
Apache Installation
Access the command prompt with the Administrator privileges and run the command below:
c:\apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k install
Important: In cas of an error, and informed that the file msvcr110.dll is missing, you can download the file clicking here. Extract and place the file in the directory :
C:\Windows\System and C:\Windows\System32. Run the command again in the command prompt.
Setting up PHP
Access the PHP folder in C:\ and rename the file php.ini-development to php.ini
Edit the file php.ini , look for extension_dir and apply this value C:\php\ext
Activate the extensions listed below (just remove the (;) from the start of each line) extension=php_bz2.dll extension=php_curl.dll extension=php_gd2.dll extension=php_imap.dll
extension=php_interbase.dll extension=php_ldap.dll extension=php_mbstring.dll extension=php_exif.dll extension=php_mysql.dll extension=php_mysqli.dll extension=php_oci8.dll
extension=php_pdo_firebird.dll extension=php_pdo_mssql.dll extension=php_pdo_mysql.dll extension=php_pdo_oci.dll extension=php_pdo_odbc.dll extension=php_pdo_pgsql.dll
extension=php_pdo_sqlite.dll extension=php_pgsql.dll extension=php_pspell.dll extension=php_shmop.dll extension=php_sqlite.dll extension=php_sqlite3.dll extension=php_xmlrpc.dll
extension=php_xsl.dll extension=php_zip.dll
Important: By default some of the PHP functions are disable, but they are important for ScriptCase. Access the php.ini file and alter the line of the item disable_functions
according to the example below: * disable_functions=
3
Setup the TimeZone according to your region. You need to use the value available at the PHP documentation Click Here to view
Save the modifications.
Restart the Apache service using the command ( in the cmd with Administrator privileges ):
c:\apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k restart
Enabling SourceGuardian Loader

Extract the file below
Copy the file ixed.7.0.win to the folder c:\php\ext
Edit the file php.ini, at the end of the file place the content below:
[SourceGuardian] zend_extension=C:\php\ext\ixed.7.0.win
Restart the Apache service using the command (in the cmd with Administrator privileges):
c:\apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k restart
1
Installing PHP 7.0 - Linux
HOME SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION INSTALLING PHP 7.0 - LINUX
Linux
Debian
CentOS\RHEL
OpenSuse
Necessary Files:
Setting up PHP
Access the terminal ( shell ) and execute the command below to use the superuser (root):
sudo su
Execute the command below to install PHP:

apt-get install php-7.0 php7.0-dev php7.0-cli php7.0-pear
Accept the installation of the dependencies.
Verify the version of the PHP by executing the command below:

php -v
Important: By default some of the PHP functions are disable, but they are important for ScriptCase. Access the php.ini file ( /etc/php5/apache2/php.ini ) and alter the line of the
item disable_functions according to the exemple below:
Setup the TimeZone according to your region. You need to use the value available at the PHP documentation Click Here to view
Activating the extension of the Database:

Microsoft SQL Server:
apt-get install php7.0-mssql
PostgreSQL:
apt-get install php7.0-pgsql
MySQL:
apt-get install php7.0-mysql
SQLite:
apt-get install php7.0-sqlite
FireBird:
apt-get install php7.0-interbase
Odbc:
apt-get install php7.0-odbc
Activating the GD library
This library is necessary to render the images.
Use the command below:

apt-get install php7.0-gd
Accept the installation of the dependencies.

Create a folder to place the file ixed.7.0.lin
sudo mkdir /usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian
Copy the file ixed.7.0.lin that was downloaded according to your architecture to the folder /usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian
cp ixed.7.0.lin /usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian
Configure the permission to Total Control for this folder:

2
chmod 777 -R /usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian
Edit the file php.ini and add the to the end of the file the content below:
[SourceGuardian] zend_extension=/usr/lib/php7/sourceguardian/ixed.7.0.lin
Restart the Apache service using the command below:

sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 restart
1
Installing PHP 7.0 - Mac
HOME SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION INSTALLING PHP 7.0 - MAC
Mac
El Captain
Sierra
Necessary Files:
Setting up PHP
Access the terminal (shell) and execute the command below to use the superuser (root):
sudo su
Execute the command below to install PHP:

curl -s http://php-osx.liip.ch/install.sh | bash -s 7.0
Installation Directory
/usr/local/php7
Setting up Apache
Edit the file httpd.conf:
nano /etc/apache2/httpd.conf
Add the content below to the end of the modules:

LoadModule php7_module /usr/local/php7/libphp5.so
Edit the file paths:

sudo nano /etc/paths
Add the content below to the start of the file:

/usr/local/php7/bin
In /Library/WebServer/Documents/ create a file called info.php with the content below:

<?php phpinfo(); ?>
Access, it using the browser:

http://localhost/info.php

Copy the file ixed.7.0.dar that was downloaded according to your architecture to the folder /usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions
cp ixed.7.0.dar /usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions
Configure the permission for the file:

chmod 777 -R /usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions/ixed.7.0.dar
Edit the file php.ini in /usr/local/zend/etc/ and add them to the end of the file the content below:
[SourceGuardian] zend_extension=/usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions/ixed.7.0.dar`
Restart the Apache service using the command below:

sudo /usr/sbin/apachectl stop
sudo /usr/sbin/apachectl start

1
ScriptCase Manual Installation
HOME SCRIPTCASE INSTALLATION SCRIPTCASE MANUAL INSTALLATION
Download ScriptCase with the extension zip at www.scriptcase.net and extract it on the root of your webserver.
After extracting, rename the folder to scriptcase.
Access Scriptcase from your browser using the url below:

http://127.0.0.1/scriptcase
By default, the selected language is English.
By default the selected language is English.
Verifying the necessary extensions for ScriptCase to work and the modules for the database connections.
Verifying the necessary extensions for ScriptCase to work and the modules for the database connections.
Typical Installation
On this option, ScriptCase will be installed with the default settings.
On this option, ScriptCase will be installed with the default settings.
Login Screen.
2
Login Screen.
Custom Installation
On this option, the user will choose the settings for the installation.
On this option, the user will choose the settings for the installation.
Verify the permissions of the system directory
Verify the permissions of the system directory
We can choose the database that ScriptCase will use to store the data in.
We can
choose the database that ScriptCase will use to store the data in.
Displaying the creation of the ScriptCase tables.

3
Displaying the creation
of the ScriptCase tables.
Setting up the user to access ScriptCase.
Setting up the user to access ScriptCase.
Finishing the custom installation
Finishing the custom installation
Login Screen.
4
Login Screen.
1
General View
HOME GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE
Main Menu
On the superior part of the page, is available the main menu containing all the available options in ScriptCase.
Toolbar
Right below the main menu is located the toolbar. You can find the main functions that are used in the applications development.
Project List
On this part is located the list of all the projects for the logged user.
Project Explorer
On this area, you can find all the folders created to organize the applications. Theres also the folder that contains all the applications of the project in one place.
2
List of Applications
After opening the project youll see the page below, on which you can view a list of the applications that are in the selected folder in the Project Explorer present on the left side.
Taskbar
This bar holds the tabs of all applications that were opened for editing.
1
Main Menu
HOME GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE MAIN MENU
On the main menu is all of the functionalities of the tools for the projects and the applications. These functionalities are organized in these items below:
File
New Project : Starts the process to create a new project.
Open Project : List all the projects that the current user has permission to access.
Close Project : Closes the current project.
New Application : Opens the application wizard that supports the creation of the applications (Grids, Report PDF, Forms, Tabs, Control, Menu, Search, Dashboard or Blank).
Batch Applications: Allows you to create various applications simultaneously.
Restore Applications : Displays the last applications edited, allowing to select a restore point and the Applications name to which itll be restored too.
Export Project : Used to export projects developed in ScriptCase.
Import Project : Used to import projects developed in ScriptCase (Same Version).
Home: Navigate to the Project Explorer.
Logout: Logout of ScriptCase
View
Source Code : Displays the generated source code of the current application thats be edited.
Data in Session : Displays all the session variables of the current applications in runtime, also the ScriptCase session variables.
Project
Properties: Displays the page that has the configurations of the project.
Default Values : Displays the list of all default values for the current project.
Version History: Displays the list of all versions of the current project.
Increment Version : Increments the version of current project.
Generate Source Code : Generate Source Code for all the applications in the current project.
Deploy Applications : Opens the wizard for the deployment procedure.
Export Applications : Generates an export file containing an application of the current project.
Import Applications : Imports a backup file that contains an application from another or the same project.
Delete Project : Deletes the current project.
Reports:
Application List : List the applications of the current project.
Developers Summary : Displays the total of applications in the current project by Developers.
Show Diagram : Displays the Project Diagram.
Application Search : Allows you to search for texts in the entire project.
Database
New Connection : Displays the wizard to create a new connection for the current project.
Edit Connection : Allows to edit the connections of the current project.
Import ACCESS: Allows you to import an ACCESS database to one of your other database connections.
Import EXCEL: Allows you to import an EXCEL to one of your databases.
Import CSV : Allows you to import an CSV to one of your databases.
SQL Builder: Tool that rapidly generates SELECT statements.
Database Builder: An interface that allows you to Administrate your database from within ScriptCase.
Application
Save Application : Saves the current Application.
Generate Source Code : Generate Source Code for the current Applications.
Run Application: Run the current Application.

2
Tools
Data Dictionary: Allows the user to define standards for the tables (Names, Field Types, etc.).
_Express Edit : Opens a Window to edit various applications at once.
HelpCase: Tool that allows you to create a documentation for your current project.
External Libraries: Allows you to create scripts in various languages that can be used in the whole project.
Internal Libraries: Allows you to create PHP scripts thatll be used in various applications.
To-Do List : Allows you to create a To-Do list.
Messages : Send messages between developers.
Converters:
Version 5 : Converts your projects from ScriptCase version 5 to this current version.
Layout
CSS Applications (Themes) : This option allows you to create themes for the applications.
CSS Buttons : This option allows you to create button themes.
HTML Templates : This option allows you to modify a diversity of elements of HTML that will contain your application.
CSS Menus : This option allows you to change CSS of the menus.
Menu Icons: Allows you to change the icons of the menu application.
Image Manager : This option manages the existing images in the project also allowing you to add, delete and copy images.
Chart Themes : This option allows you to modify the themes used in the Chart applications.
HTML Editor Templates : Allows you to configure the functionalities present in the html editor field that the application will use.
Locales
Application Language: Allows to define custom messages thatll be used in different applications.
Regional Settings : Allows you to define some parameters of monetary units, date and numbers according to the Country or Region where your application will be used.
Modules
Security: This option allows you to implement access rules to your system, creating a complete system with access control in your project.
Log :
Create/Edit Log Module : Allows you to create and/or edit a log module.
Applications Related to the log : Allows you to reference which applications will use the log.
Create Query with Log Report : Allows you to create a Grid application thatll display a log report.
Options
Settings: Access all the ScriptCase settings.
My ScriptCase : Allows you to customize the settings for the current user.
Change Password: Allows the current user to change their current password.
My Toolbar : Allows you change the position of the icons on the toolbar.
Help
WebHelp : Allows you to access the manual.
Technical Support: Access ScriptCase online support.
Diagnosis: Displays the settings of the Environment/Server where ScriptCase is installed.
Check Version : Verifies if the version is updated.
Update Version: Allows you to update ScriptCase to the latest version available.
License Registration : Access the page to register your ScriptCase.
About: Information about ScriptCase.

1
Toolbar
HOME GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE TOOLBAR
On the toolbar is located the main elements that can be used in the applications.
1. Home: Returns to the Project Explorer.

2. New Project : Starts the process to create a new project.
3. Open Project : List all the projects that the current user has permission to access.
4. Close Project : Closes the current project.
5. New Connection : Displays the wizard to create a new connection for the current project.
6. Edit Connection : Allows to edit the connections of the current project.
7. SQL Builder: Tool that rapidly generates SELECT statements.
8. New Application : Opens the application wizard.
9. Batch Applications: Allows you to create various applications simultaneously.
10. Save Application : Saves the current Application.
11. Generate Source Code : Generate Source Code for the current Applications.
12. Run Application: Saves the current application, generates the source code and runs the applications.
13. Deploy Applications : Opens the wizard for the deployment procedure.
14. Data Dictionary: Allows the user to define standards for the tables (Names, Field Types, etc.).
15. Application Language: Allows to define custom messages thatll be used in different applications.
16. Help : Allows you to access the manual.
17. Logout: Logout of ScriptCase
1
Project List
HOME GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE PROJECT LIST
In this area is located all the projects that the user has access to.
1
Project Explorer
HOME GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE PROJECT EXPLORER
On this area, you can find all the folders created to organize the applications.
1. Create : Create a new folder to organize the applications of the project.

2. Rename: Rename the selected folder.
3. Delete: Deletes the selected folder.
4. All Applications: Lists all applications from the folders and the existing subfolders.
5. My Applications : Lists all the applications from the folders and subfolders that the current user created.
6. Recent: List of all the recent generated applications.
7. Search : Does the search of the names of the applications.
1
HOME GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE LIST OF
APPLICATIONS
On this area, all the applications are listed.
Application: Applications Name.
Friendly URL : Friendly URL for the application.
Description: Application Description.
Creator: Application Creator.
Generation: Date of Source Code Generation.
Status: Status of the application (updated and outdated).
Options: Activity buttons to Run, Copy, Edit and Rename the Application. (These buttons are also available at the footer of the application list).
1
Taskbar
HOME GETTING TO KNOW SCRIPTCASE TASKBAR
This bar contains the tabs of all the applications that were opened for editing.
This bar is only displayed when at least one application has been opened.
The applications open in tabs in the taskbar, where you can navigate between applications in a fast and easy way.
The x presented at the side of the Application name is used to close the application.
1
General View
HOME PROJECT
To manage the development of the applications in ScriptCase, theres the concept of projects, a practical way to organize the development of systems. In a project, its possible to
define the standards of development of the applications, work with project versioning, deploy all the applications or part of them, create reports of the workflow of the
developers, display diagrams of the applications and other options.
1
New Project
HOME PROJECT NEW PROJECT
The process of creating a project is very simple and intuitive, this process is divided in 5 steps thatll be detailed below.
Start Configuring the Project

First, well define the name of the project, we can inform the description and also insert an image for the project.
On this first moment, we can import one of our System Templates. These templates are complete systems that demonstrate some of the functionalities of the tool. These
projects can be imported in your ScriptCase and are available for the databases MySQL, Postgres, SQLite, Oracle, SQL Server, Firebird and Access.
List of all the options to create a project.
Project Details.
Project Icon - You can select a project icon for display purposes in the project list.
Project Name - The name of the project is required for its creation, on this field we should inform a name for the project.
Project Description - This where youll give a brief description of the project and its not required, also able to inform after the creation of the project.
Version - Version of the project thats being created.

2
Language
On this second step, you should select the languages thatll be available for the development of the system. The offers the possibility to develop the creation of a Multilanguage
system.
Language - List of languages that are used in the projects.
Regional Settings - Contains the standard regional settings for the selected language. Regional Settings allows you to define some parameters of monetary units, dates and numbers
according to the country or region where your application will be used.
Charset - Defines the encoding used by the selected language.
Default - Defines the default language for the project, all the applications created will be executed with the default selected language.
Trash Can - Removes the language from the project. This way, the removed language wont be available for changing dynamically changing in runtime.
Themes
Third step of creating a project, we need to define the default theme for the project and the other themes thatll be available.
All Themes - List of all the present themes from ScriptCase.
Project Themes - List of available themes in the project.

3
Databases
On this step, youll create the database connection, only the allowed connections from your license will be listed. Select the desired connection and inform the data correctly so
that ScriptCase can connect to your database. Also, remember to verify if the database extension is enabled in your environment, to do that access Help > Diagnosis .
The information required to connect is different for each database. In this example well be using MySQL, for more information access Connections
List of Databases available in your ScriptCase.
This may vary depending on your license.
Database connection details.
Connection Name : Define the name of the connection.
DBMS Driver : Defined as MySQL PDO.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the IP or name of the server where the Database is located
Port : Define the port of the connection thatll be used. By default, the port is 3306.
User : Inform the username that youll use to connect to your Database.
Password : Inform the password that youll use to connect to your Database.
Database Name : Click on the List Database and select the desired Database.
Test Connection : Displays the connection status if it succeeded or not.

4
End
The project has been created successfully, and now you can create your first application clicking on the button Create first application.
1
Open Project
HOME PROJECT OPEN PROJECT
This option redirects to the Project List page, without closing your current project. To return to the application list, just click on the home icon. If you access another project, your
current project is closed
Access File > Open Project or click on the Open Project icon on the toolbar.
Next, youll view the project list. Its possible to identify the project thats located on the top right, as shown in the image below.
1
Close Project
HOME PROJECT CLOSE PROJECT
Closes the current project, redirecting to the the Project List.
Access File > Close Project or click on the Close Project Icon on the toolbar.
1
Properties
HOME PROJECT PROPERTIES
This option is only available when in a project
Edit Project
We can edit some of the project information, like the description and the use of the index.
Project Name - The name of the project informed on its creation. The project name doesnt allow special characters, and cant be altered after its creation.
Project Description - Description informed on the project creation.
Use Index Page - Allows the use of friendly URLs in the applications. By default, this option is enabled.
Project Information - Detailed description of the project.
Locales
Define the languages thatll be used in the project. The languages are selected the moment you create your project, but can be added more or removed.
2
Language - List of languages that are used in the projects.
Regional Settings - Contains the standard regional settings for the selected language. Regional Settings allows you to define some parameters of monetary units, dates and numbers
according to the country or region where your application will be used.
Charset - Defines the encoding used by the selected language.
Default - Defines the default language for the project, all the applications created will be executed with the default selected language.
Trash Can - Removes the language from the project. This way, the removed language wont be available for changing dynamically changing in runtime.
Themes
Define the available themes in the project and the default theme thatll be used by the applications. To define a default theme for your project, select the name of the desired
theme and click on Set a default Theme, the default notation will appear beside the theme name. In this image the default theme is Sc8_BlueWood.
All Themes - List of all the present themes from ScriptCase.
Project Themes - List of available themes in the project.

1
Default Values
HOME PROJECT DEFAULT VALUES
With this configuration, its possible to standardize the creation of the applications of the current project, increasing the productivity in development of the applications.
Common Settings
Logo - The favicon thats going to use with the project. Customize the project using the same favicon in all the application.
Records per page - Amount of records per page.
Display Line Number - Defines the display of the line number existing in each application.
Display Titles - Displays the title of the application in execution.
Show Summary - Displays the number of records in the page and the total of the records in the application. This option will execute only if the line option in the Grid toolbar is disabled.
Use the old quick search - Defines the use of the old quicksearch, where we can specify which field do we want it to search for.
Use old Chart theme palettes - Defines the use of the old scheme of colors on the charts
Initial sort fields - Defines the initial sorting of the fields types.
Grid
Table Width - Defines the length for the application table. this option is available to select Pixel or Percent in the table width unit.
Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the width of the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the size of the fields); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should
be informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)
Format Row Counter - Configuration of visualization of the display summary option of the Grid. The Display summary option will be displayed and executed only if the line option in the
toolbar isnt enabled
Tab a Group By - Defines the left margin of the Group By.
Separates the Group - Defines the margin between two Group Bys.
Records per page - Available values in the Record button, on the toolbar
Templates - Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer. Its possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
beside the field of the template selection.
Grid fields alignment - Its possible to define the default alignment specifically for the fields that contain numbers and dates and the other types of fields.
Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons thatll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications. We can setup the toolbar for the Grid, detail and summary.
2
Form
Format Row Counter - Configuration of visualization of the display summary option of the Form on a horizontal orientation. The Display summary option will be displayed and executed only
if the line option in the toolbar isnt enabled
Automatic tab - Enables the automatic tab when finishing to inform a field.
Highlight Text on Focus - Allows the content of the fields to be Highlighted when the field is focused.
Highlight Field with Error - When occurring an error on a field, being also required for example, the focus will be applied to this field.
Error Position on the field - Position of the field error.
Show the Error Title in the Application - Defines the display of the title of the application error.
Show the Error Title in the Field - Defines the display of the error Title for the field.
Error Title - Defines the error Title.
Display message - Defines the display for the message if the field is required.
Toolbar Buttons - Define the buttons thatll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.
Control
Highlight Text on Focus - Allows the content of the fields to be Highlighted when the field is focused.
Highlight Field with Error - When occurring an error on a field, being also required for example, the focus will be applied to this field.
Templates - Defines the templates used be default on the Header and Footer. Its possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
3
Search
Empty Search - Defines hoe the search will treat the informed conditions. AND (Should satisfy all the conditions so that the search can return some results) OR (Should satisfy any
condition informed so that the search can return some results)
Horizontal Alignment - Horizontal Alignment of the search.
Display Condition - Displays the condition of the search, so that the user can do their choice. (AND or OR)
Keep Values - Keep the values of the previous searches done when accessing the search again.
Keep Columns and Order Selection - Preserve the position of the fields and the sorting of the previous search.
Use Iframe - Allows the use and the display of the application searched in the same page within an iframe.
Initial State - Defines how the application will be displayed at first when using the search with an iframe, if the application will be displayed at first or only the search will be displayed.
Iframe Height - Defines the height of the iframe in pixels.
Templates - Defines the templates used be default on the Header and Footer. Its possible to inform the values to the variables of the selected templates, clicking on the editing icon right
Calendar
4
New Chart
Old Chart
5
Tab
Tab Alignment - Display alignment of the tabs in the application.
Menu
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu - Menu alignment.
Horizontal Alignment of the Items - Menu item alignment
Dashboard
HTML Editor
The HTML Editor has to options of configurations, depending on the option selected on Use template in the HTML Editor .
6
Use template in the HTML Editor - Selecting Yes (Image Below), you will be using the new templated of the HTML Editor field, these themes should be setup in Layout > HTML Editor
Templates .
HTML Editor template - Defines the template for editing of the field HTML Editor.
Field Preview - Default Text of the HTML Editor Fields.
Use template in the HTML Editor - Selecting No (Image Below), you wont be using the new templated of the HTML Editor field, in this case the options should be setup in the field its self.
Properties - Defines the display properties.
Location - Defines the position of the items in the field. Top or Bottom
Buttons Alignment - Defines the alignment of the items in the field. Left, Center, Right.
Status bar - Position of the Status Bar.
Toolbar Count - Amount of the bars to organize the items.
Buttons Organization - Set the available items in the bars.
Internal Libraries
Define the libraries thatll be use in the project.
Level - Access level of the library.
List of Libraries - List of all the libraries available for use in the project.
1
Version History
HOME PROJECT VERSION HISTORY
Lists all the versions of the current project. The Version History page manages the versions of the project, created in the option of version incrementation, here we can return to
earlier versions, open a previous version or deletes created versions.
Version - Project Versions.
Description - Project version description.
Creation - Date of the version creation.
Delete - Delete the selected version of the project and all its applications. Applications from the other versions are not affected.
Status - Defines if the version of the project is opened or closed.
Edit - Allows to edit the selected version of the project. This option is available for the version that have the status Open.
1
Version Incrementation
HOME PROJECT VERSION INCREMENTATION
Allows the control over the project in development, separating it in versions. The versioning of the project allows you to protect the functionalities existing in the system, before
doing any important modifications, by creating a new version of the current project.
The version increment allows only the latest version of the project is increased.
Current Version - Informs the current version of the project.
New Version - Defines the number of the new version of the project.
Description - New project description.

1
Generate Source Code
HOME PROJECT GENERATE SOURCE CODE
Allows you to generate the source code for all the applications in the project, select the desired application or generate the source code for the outdated ones.
All - Generates the source code for all the applications in the current project, when selecting this option, youll be redirected to the page where the code will be generated, where you can also
see the log.
Outdated Applications - Generates the source code only for the outdated applications (recently modified applications that werent generated yet), when selecting this option, youll be
redirected to the page where the code will be generated, where you can salon see the log.
Select Applications - This option allows you to select the applications that you want to generate the source code, when selection this option youll be redirected to the application selection
page.
Selecting Applications
All the applications from the project are listed here, you should select the applications that you want to generate the source code. The application can be listed in two ways, using
the filter to list by Application types or by folders, as shown below.
After selecting the application that will be generated, youll be redirected to the page where the code will be generated, where you can also see the log.
2
We can see in the highlighted folder of the image some filter options.
Open Folder Icon - Allows the display of possible errors when generating the code.
Closed Folder Icon - Allows to hide the possible errors when generating the code.
Document ok - Displays only the applications that havent had any problems generating the code.
Document error - Displays only the applications that had any problems generating the code.
1
Export Project
HOME PROJECT EXPORT PROJECT
This option allows you to create a .zip file with all the applications from the current project and all the necessary files so the project can work.
Access File > Export Project .
Next, select the project that you want to export.
When finishing the process, the file will be available for download.
1
Import Project
HOME PROJECT IMPORT PROJECT
Allows you to import a project exported by ScriptCase, will all the files necessary to function.
Access File > Import Project.
Next, we need to select the project file that we want to import.
After finishing the process, we should inform the name of the project thats being imported.
In case the is a project with the same name in your ScriptCase, the project thats being imported will overwrite the existing project.
1
Delete Project
HOME PROJECT DELETE PROJECT
To delete a project, you need to have one opened. In the project, access Project > Delete Project . All the information relating to the project and the applications will be deleted.
The exclusion of the project cant be undone.

1
Reports
HOME PROJECT REPORTS
We offer two typed of reports for projects, where we can visualize a list of all the created applications, with various information about each one of them and also a production
report about each developer of this project.
To generate the reports, access Project > Reports
Application List
Displays a list with all the applications existing in the current project and the inserts of the tables. TO generate the report, firstly you need to define the which information to you
want to be available.
Select Columns - Defines the columns that will be part of the report.
Sorting - Defines the fields and the sorting thatll be available.
Order By - Defines the initial sorting for the report, itll use Ascendant by default if not informed.
Group By - Defines the grouping of the report, by type(application) or by folder (Directory of project files).
After finishing the configurations, click on Report .

2
Developers Summary
Generates a summary with every that the developer did, showing the total applications and their types and the total lines of the code that the user did in the application.
This same report is available in charts, with three types of visualization.
Applications - Total of applications in the project grouped by their type.
Developers - Total of application created by developer in the project.
Applications x Developers - A junction of the other two charts.

1
Show Diagram
HOME PROJECT SHOW DIAGRAM
Generates a diagram of relationships between applications in the project. On this diagram, you can see in a clear way which applications are related and which is the method
used to do the relation.
This example were showing the relationship of all the applications in the sc_album project.
There are some options that can help viewing the diagram.
We can display a minimap of all the diagrams, to help with the display. To view it, click on the icon on the lower left side of the diagram.
There are other options of views, instead of the minimap, as shown below.
2
Diagram Format - Build the Diagram according to the ties positioning.
Reading Mode - Defines the perspective of reading for the diagram when its created.
Space - Defines the space between the columns(Horizontal) and the layers(Vertical).
1
Application Search
HOME PROJECT APPLICATION SEARCH
It does a search in the project with all the content informed by the search.
The location on which the search will look for defined by a checkbox.
At least one of the options need to be selected.
All - Does a search in all the options listed below.
SQL - Searches only in the SQL areas of the applications.
Field Name and label - Does a search for the name and label of the field.
Links - Does a search only for the name of the applications.
Lookup - Searches inky in the lookup area of the fields.
Themes - Searches only for theme names.
Template Name - Searches only for HTML templates names.
Libraries - Searches for internal libraries that contain this specific name.
Header and Footer - Searches only for the Application Titles.
Block Name and Label - Searches only for the name or label of the block informed.
THe results will be disaplyed as shown below.
Application - Name of the applications found that satisfies the search
Item - Location on which the was located the informed criteria.
Values - Part of the area where was found the informed data.
1
General View
HOME CONNECTIONS GENERAL VIEW
ScriptCase Connections
Access
IBM DB2
Firebird
Informix
Interbase
MySQL
Oracle
PostgreSQL
SQL Server
SQLite
Generic ODBC
1
General View
HOME CONNECTIONS
ScriptCase Connections
Access
IBM DB2
Firebird
Informix
Interbase
MySQL
Oracle
PostgreSQL
SQL Server
SQLite
Generic ODBC
1
Access
HOME CONNECTIONS ACCESS
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS ACCESS WINDOWS
Before proceeding with this tutorial check the architecture of your PHP within the phpinfo (). Accessing the phpinfo of your scriptcase, for example
http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase/info.php, you will find the PHP architecture.
Architecture x86 = 32 bits
Architecture x64 = 64 bits
If you are using Scriptcases automatic installer the PHP architecture will be the same as the installer you downloaded.
MS Access ODBC
Setting up Access connection via ODBC on Windows
Requirements
The Access Database (.mdb or .accdb files) needs to be stored on the same server as ScriptCase.
Have one or more tables created.
Microsoft Microsoft 2010 Access Database Engine Driver installed.
Enabling the extension

First we must download the 2010 Access Database Engine according to the architecture of your PHP.
To download the 64-bit engine click here
At the end of the download, follow the Access Database Engine installation wizard.
Installing the Access Database Engine.

2
Creating a Data Source (ODBC)

Go to Control Panel> Systems and Security> Administrative Tools> ODBC Data Sources (32 or 64 bits), according to your PHP architecture.
If you have a data source configured, proceed to Creating a Connection in ScriptCase .
Accessing and Configuring the ODBC Data Source.
Select the System DNS tab and click Add.
Accessing and Configuring the ODBC Data Source.

3
Choose one of the available drivers, you can choose from the following drivers:
Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)
Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb, *.accdb)

Select the driver according to the file extension created by your Access database.
ODBC driver available.
After selecting the driver, the following screen will be displayed:

Two fields are required for data source configuration:
Data Source Name : Name of the data source that will be used when creating the connection in Scriptcase;
Database: Path pointing where the database is stored;
Creating the Data Source.
After entering the Data Source Name, click Select to select the database that will be used.
Select Database.
Drivers: List of computer drives (HD Partition) that will have your folders listed in Directories;
Directories: Computer Drives folder list (HD Partition) selected under Drivers;
Database Name : List of files in the folder selected in Directories (Files listed according to their extensions);
List Files of Type : Extension of the files listed in Database Name;
After selecting the database, click OK to complete the configuration.
Returning to the ODBC Data Source Administrator screen you can view the already configured connections.
4
MS Access ADO
Setting up ADO Access in Windows
Requirements
The Access Database (.mdb or .accdb files) needs to be stored on the same server as ScriptCase.
Have one or more tables created.
Microsoft Microsoft 2010 Access Database Driver installed.
Installing the 2010 Access Database Engine

At the end of the download, follow the Access Database Engine installation wizard.

5
Creating a Connection with ScriptCase

Access ScriptCase using the URL http://127.0.0.1:8090/scriptcase
After accessing ScriptCase, access or create a new project, click on the new connection icon or access Database > New Connection
Creating a new connection
After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a MS Access connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
New connection : Youll place the information of the connection to your database here:
6
Connecting with Windows
database
Connection Name : Defines the name of your new connection.
DBMS Driver : Defines the driver with ODBC.
ODBC Name : On the option ODBC Name, inform the data source (ODBC) name that was created in the Windows Control Panel.
Username : Inform the username for Windows database (Just in case you are in fact using one).
Password : Inform the password for Windows database (Just in case you are in fact using one).
Test Connection : Displays the connection status (Success or Failed).
Finalize: Save connection.
For more options on connecting, click on the Advanced tab:
Advanced setup for
the Windows database
Decimal Separator - Select the separator type, between a dot or a comma.
Persistent Connection - Persistent Connection are connections that dont close when finishing a script.
Use the schema before table name - Allows the use of schemas before the name of the tables.
Filter : Accessing this tab, we can setup which tables will be listed on this connection:
Filtering the Windows
database
Show - Allows the display of the the filters on the tables, views, System Tables and procedures.
Tables - Allows to setup the display of Tables from your database.
Views - Allows to setup the display of Views from your database.
System Tables - Allows to setup the display of System Tables from your database.
Procedures - Allows to setup the display of Procedures from your database.
Searches - Allows to define which tables and Owner will be displayed.

7
Tables - Allows to define a prefix (prefix%) or name of the tables for display.
Owner - Allows to define the owner of the tables for listing.
Show - Allows to define what will be displayed or not from the table an owners setup.
1
IBM DB2
HOME CONNECTIONS IBM DB2
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS IBM DB2 WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the IBM DB2 preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the IBM DB2 extension in PHP.
DB2
Setting up DB2 on Windows
Pre-Requirements
Have the database installed and setup on a server or locally.
Have at least one table created.
Have the Instant Client installed on the same machine as ScriptCase.
If all the requirements are met, the DB2 extension will be enabled, in this case you can proceed to Creating a Connection with Scriptcase.
In case its not enabled, follow the steps below to enable the DB2 extension:
Enabling the Extension

Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits, x64 ou x86 bits
DsDriver Windows ( x86 )
After downloading, follow the wizard of the installation and click to advance to maintain the default values of the installer.
Setting up DB2 DsDriver.
Accept the terms and advance with the installation.

2
Click on Advance, to maintain the default values of the installer
Click on Install, to start the installation procedure
Click on Finish, to Finish the installation.
DB2 Native ODBC

Setting up DB2 Native ODBC on Windows
Pre-Requirements
3


4
DB2 Generic ODBC

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC on Windows
Pre-Requirements
5


6
DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower on Windows
Pre-Requirements
7


8

9
After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a DB2 connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: DB2 Generic ODBC, DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or lower, DB2, DB2 Native ODBC.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located.
Database Name : Inform name of the database.
Schema : You can inform the Schema (Optional), in case you want to use the tables that are part of a Schema.
Username : Inform the user to access the Windows database.
Password : Inform the password to access the Windows database.
Test Connection : Displays a message of the status of the connection if successful or not.
Advanced setup for the Windows database

10
autocommit - Activates or deactivates the functionality of the auto commit.
i5_lib - A value of characters that indicates the default library thatll be used to resolve the un qualified file references. This isnt valid if the the connection using the system nomination.
i5_naming - Activate or deactivate the system nomination mode of the DB2 UDB CLI iSeries. The files are qualified when using dash (/) delimiter. Unqualified files are resolved using the list of
libraries to work.
i5_commit - Select the desired option treating the date of the IBM DB2.
database

1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS IBM DB2 LINUX
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the IBM DB2 extension in PHP.
DB2
Setting up DB2 on Linux
Install the dependencies below:
UBUNTU\DEBIAN CENTOS\RHEL
- sudo apt-get update - sudo yum update
- sudo apt-get install libaio1 - sudo yum install libaio-devel
- sudo apt-get install libncurses5 - sudo yum install libaio
- sudo apt-get install alien - sudo yum install glibc
- sudo apt-get install gcc-multilib g++-multilib - sudo yum install compat-libstdc++-33
- sudo apt-get install libpam0g - sudo yum install glibc-devel
- sudo apt-get install ksh - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install libstdc++
- sudo yum install pam
- sudo yum install ncurses-devel
- sudo yum install unixODBC
- sudo wget ftp://195.220.108.108/linux/centos/6.7/os/i386/Packages/ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
- sudo yum install nano
Download the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or x86 bits
DsDriver Linux ( x86 )
Installing DsDriver IBM DB2

Architecture x86 Architecture x64
sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo mkdir -p /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo cp sudo cp x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/Db2 sudo cp x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz /opt/IBM/x64/db2
sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/Db2/x86_v10.5fp8_linuxia32_dsdriver.tar.gz sudo tar -zxf /opt/IBM/x64/db2/x64_v10.5fp8_linuxx64_dsdriver.tar.gz
sudo ksh /opt/IBM/Db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver sudo ksh /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/installDSDriver
sudo source /opt/IBM/x64/db2/dsdriver/db2profile
Restart the Apache Server:
sudo /etc/init.d/apachesc9 restart
DB2 Native ODBC

Setting up DB2 Native ODBC on Linux
2
UBUNTU\DEBIAN - sudo wget ftp://195.220.108.108/linux/centos/6.7/os/i386/Packages/ksh-20120801-28.el6.i686.rpm
CENTOS\RHEL

DB2 Generic ODBC

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC on Linux

DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower

Setting up DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower on Linux

3


After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a DB2 connection
Selecting a Linux
database connection
4
Connecting with Linux
database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: DB2 Generic ODBC, DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or lower, DB2, DB2 Native ODBC.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located.
Schema : You can inform the Schema (Optional), in case you want to use the tables that are part of a Schema.
Username : Inform the user to access the Linux database.
Password : Inform the password to access the Linux database.
Advanced setup for the Linux database
autocommit - Activates or deactivates the functionality of the auto commit.
i5_lib - A value of characters that indicates the default library thatll be used to resolve the un qualified file references. This isnt valid if the the connection using the system nomination.
i5_naming - Activate or deactivate the system nomination mode of the DB2 UDB CLI iSeries. The files are qualified when using dash (/) delimiter. Unqualified files are resolved using the list of
libraries to work.
i5_commit - Select the desired option treating the date of the IBM DB2.
Filtering the Linux
database
5

1
Firebird
HOME CONNECTIONS FIREBIRD
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS FIREBIRD WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the FireBird extension in PHP.
Firebird
Setting up FireBird on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a FireBird connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: FireBird.

2
Advanced setup for
database

1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS FIREBIRD LINUX
Firebird
Setting up FireBird on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Selecting a Linux
database connection
database

2
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME CONNECTIONS FIREBIRD MAC OS X
Firebird
Setting up FireBird on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the FireBird preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
Pre-Requirements
Download the installation: Client FireBird
Install the client.
Restart the Apache Server.

Selecting a Mac OS X
database connection
Connecting with Mac OS X

2
database
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Mac OS X database is located.
Username : Inform the user to access the Mac OS X database.
Password : Inform the password to access the Mac OS X database.
Advanced setup for
the Mac OS X database
Filtering the Mac OS X
database

1
Informix
HOME CONNECTIONS INFORMIX
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS INFORMIX WINDOWS
Currently ScriptCase offers the connection to the Informix through the SDK. The Informix extension comes disabled in the installer.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the Informix extension in PHP.
Informix PDO
Setting up Informix on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO Informix preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
ClienteSDK Windows ( x86 )
ClienteSDK Windows ( x64 )
Installing ClienteSDK Informix

Unzip the file into any folder. e.g.: client informix
Unzipping the file.
Access the CMD from your windows by searching for a command prompt in Windows Search or by pricing ctrl + r and typing cmd in the search.
Accessing Windows Command Prompt.
When starting the CMD , access the folder where the file was saved after the download using the cd command and informing the path. Example:
2
Accessing the client folder.
Then run the .exe file with the -i and GUI parameters. Example: installclientsdk.exe -i GUI__
Running the installer.
Follow the client installation wizard, clicking next, to maintain the default installation values. Pay attention to the Security Features step.
Installation Wizard.
At this point you can choose whether or not to use a password to access the Informix Administration Application (OTA)
OTA Definition.
Set your login and password, if you have checked the OAT password protection
OTA password Definition.
Select NO and proceed with the installation normally.

3
Installation Wizard.
Proceed with the installation by clicking Done and wait for the process to end.
Finish the Installation.

After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a Informix connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
4
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Informix PDO.
Advanced setup for
database

5
1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS INFORMIX LINUX
Informix PDO
Setting up Informix on Linux
ClienteSDK Linux ( x86 )
ClienteSDK Linux ( x64 )
Installing ClienteSDK Informix

sudo tar -xf x86_clientsdk.3.70.UC8DE.LINUX.tar sudo tar -xf x64_clientsdk.4.10.FC6DE.LINUX.tar
Nota: O diretrio de instalao do client Informix deve ser: /opt/IBM/ifx Nota: O diretrio de instalao do client Informix deve ser: /opt/IBM/x64/informix
sudo ./installclientsdk sudo ./installclientsdk
Selecione 1 para aceitar os termos. Selecione 1 para aceitar os termos.
Selecione as opes: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17 Selecione as opes: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17
Prossiga com a instalao. Prossiga com a instalao.

2
Selecting a Linux
database connection
database
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
3
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME CONNECTIONS INFORMIX MAC OS X
Informix PDO
Setting up Informix on MAC
Download the instant client
ClienteSDK Mac OS X
Extract the .tar file
Do the installation through the terminal, accessing the extracted folder and executing the command below:
sudo ./installclientsdk
Install in the default directory ( /Applications/IBM/informix )
Choose options from 1 to 17
Restart the web server.

database connection
2
Connecting with Mac OS
X database
Advanced setup for
database

3
1
Interbase
HOME CONNECTIONS INTERBASE
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS INTERBASE WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the InterBase extension in PHP.
InterBase 6.5 or Higher

Setting up InterBase 6 or Higher on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the InterBase driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
InterBase
Setting up InterBase on Windows

After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a InterBase connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
2
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Interbase 6.5 or Higher.
IP:PATH : Inform the IP and path of the server to the location of the Windows database
PATH :path of the Windows database
Advanced setup for
database

3
1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS INTERBASE LINUX

Setting up InterBase 6 or Higher on Linux
InterBase
Setting up InterBase on Linux

Selecting a Linux
database connection
2
database
IP:PATH : Inform the IP and path of the server to the location of the Linux database
PATH :path of the Linux database
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

3
1
Mac OS X
HOME CONNECTIONS INTERBASE MAC OS X

Setting up InterBase 6 or Higher on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the Interbase preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
Pre-Requirements
Download the installation: Client InterBase
/Applications/NetMake/v9/components/xamppfiles/xampp restart
InterBase
Setting up InterBase on MAC
Pre-Requirements
Download the installation: Client InterBase
/Applications/NetMake/v9/components/xamppfiles/xampp restart

database connection
2
X database
IP:PATH : Inform the IP and path of the server to the location of the Mac OS X database
PATH :path of the Mac OS X database
Advanced setup for
database

3
1
MySQL
HOME CONNECTIONS MYSQL
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS MYSQL WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the MySQL extension in PHP.
MySQL PDO
Setting up MySQL PDO on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the MySQL driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
MySQLi
Setting up MySQLi on Windows

After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a MySQL connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
2
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: MySQL PDO.
Port : Define the port used for the connection. By default its 3306.
Database Name : Select the database.
Setting up security with
Windows
Use SSL : Activates or deactivates the use of secure connections with Windows.
Client Key : Path to the clients private identification key in the format PEM.
Client Certificate : Path to the clients public certificate key.
AC Path : Path to the directory that contains the Authority Certification (AC) in the format PEM, if used, it should specify the same certificate used by the server.
AC Certificate : Path to the Authority Certificate (AC) in the format PEM. This option, if used, should specify the same certificate as the server.
Specific Chipper : A list of permitted numbers to use with the cryptography of the connection. If one of the numbers isnt supported, the SSL connection wont work.
For more details, consult: Setting up MySQL to use secure connections

3
Advanced setup for the
Windows database
client_encoding : Database Encoding.
database

1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS MYSQL LINUX
MySQL PDO
Setting up MySQL PDO on Linux
MySQLi
Setting up MySQLi on Linux

Selecting a Linux
database connection
2
database
Linux
Use SSL : Activates or deactivates the use of secure connections with Linux.

3
Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS WINDOWS
MySQL PDO
Setting up MySQL PDO on Windows
MySQLi
Setting up MySQLi on Windows

Selecting a Windows
database connection
2
Connecting with
Windows database
Windows
Use SSL : Activates or deactivates the use of secure connections with Windows.

3
Windows database
database

1
Oracle
HOME CONNECTIONS ORACLE
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS ORACLE WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the Oracle deve ser habilitada no PHP.
Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher

Setting up Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the Oracle preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
*Enter Oracles website (www.oracle.com) and download Instant Client Basic according to the architecture of your operating system (x64 or x86)
Note: PHP 7.0 is only compatible with instant client 11 or higher
Download Instant Client 12.
Extract the instant client basic package from your computer (e.g.: C:\instantclient_12_1).
We should put in the folder PHP(NetMake/v9/components/php/) the following DLLs:

Copy the dll oraociei12.dll (it is inside the folder of the instant client (e.g.: C: \ instantclient_12_1)).
Add to the system PATH the path of this folder:

Go to Control Panel> System> Advanced System Settings.
On the Advanced tab> Click Environment Variables. Advanced Settings.

2
Add the path as shown below: Adding client path.
Restart the web server
Oracle ODBC
Setting up Oracle ODBC on Windows
Extract the instant client odbc package inside the instant client basic folder ( e.g.: C:\instantclient_12_1).


3
Oracle 8
Setting up Oracle 8 on Windows

4


Oracle 7 or Lower
Setting up Oracle 7 or Lower on Windows

5



6
After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a Oracle connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher.
TSNAME : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Windows database is located with the Service Name created in the Windows installation.

7
Windows database
database

1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS ORACLE LINUX

Setting up Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher on Linux
- sudo yum install libstdc++
Client basic Linux ( x86 )
Client devel Linux ( x86 )
Installing Oracle Client

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-basic_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-devel_12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
CENTOS\RHEL
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-devel-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-basic-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
Oracle ODBC
Setting up Oracle ODBC on Linux
2
UBUNTU\DEBIAN - sudo yum install pam
CENTOS\RHEL

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo alien oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-2_i386.deb sudo dpkg -i oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-2_amd64.deb
CENTOS\RHEL
sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.i386.rpm sudo yum install oracle-instantclient12.1-odbc-12.1.0.2.0-1.x86_64.rpm
Oracle 8
Setting up Oracle 8 on Linux

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
CENTOS\RHEL
3
Architecture x86
CENTOS\RHEL Architecture x64
Oracle 7 or Lower
Setting up Oracle 7 or Lower on Linux

UBUNTU\DEBIAN
CENTOS\RHEL

4
Selecting a Linux
database connection
database
TSNAME : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Linux database is located with the Service Name created in the Linux installation.
Linux database

5
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME CONNECTIONS ORACLE MAC OS X

Setting up Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher on MAC
Download the Oracle Instant Client
Client Oracle 12 Mac OS X
Create the folder /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/
Extract all content from the downloaded file into /usr/local/instantclient/12.1.0.2/
Oracle ODBC
Setting up Oracle ODBC on MAC
Oracle 8
Setting up Oracle 8 on MAC
Oracle 7 or Lower
Setting up Oracle 7 or Lower on MAC

2
database connection
Connecting with Mac OS X
database
TSNAME : Insert the name or IP of the server where the Mac OS X database is located with the Service Name created in the Mac OS X installation.

3
Mac OS X database
database

1
PostgreSQL
HOME CONNECTIONS POSTGRESQL
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS POSTGRESQL WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the PostgreSQL only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the PostgreSQL extension in PHP.
PostgreSQL 7 or Higher
Setting up PostgreSQL 7 or Higher on Windows
PostgreSQL PDO
Setting up PostgreSQL PDO on Windows
PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher on Windows
PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower on Windows

After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a PostgreSQL connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
2
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: PostgreSQL PDO.
Windows database
3
database

1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS POSTGRESQL LINUX
Setting up PostgreSQL 7 or Higher on Linux
PostgreSQL PDO
Setting up PostgreSQL PDO on Linux

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher on Linux

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower on Linux

Selecting a Linux
database connection
2
database
Linux database
3
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME CONNECTIONS POSTGRESQL MAC OS X
Setting up PostgreSQL 7 or Higher on MAC
PostgreSQL PDO
Setting up PostgreSQL PDO on MAC

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher on MAC

Setting up PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower on MAC

database connection
2
X database
Mac OS X database
3
database

1
MSSQL Server
HOME CONNECTIONS MSSQL SERVER
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS SQL SERVER WINDOWS
If you are using a Microsoft Azure server, see more configuration details click here.
MSSQL Server Native SRV

Setting up MSSQL Server Native SRV on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server preconfigured, only needing to install the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server so that you can do the
connection.
Supported Operating Systems: Windows Server (from the 2008 SP2 version) and Windows (from the 7 SP1 version).
Installing Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server
Download the Microsoft ODBC Driver 11 for SQL Server according to the operating system architecture:
ODBC Driver 11 64 bits
After downloading the file, run the installer and follow the steps below:
Installation wizard.
Accept the terms of the license agreement and click next.
In this option leave the option Client components checked.
Check the ODBC Driver for SQL Server SDK option, because the components we are going to need are also in this option.
2
Click Install to begin the client installation.
The features of the program you selected are being installed.
Click Finish to exit.
3
MSSQL Server Native SRV PDO
Setting up MSSQL Server Native SRV on Windows
connection.
4
MSSQL Server ODBC

Setting up MSSQL Server ODBC on Windows
connection.

5
6
Configurando fonte de dados

To connect to MS SQL Server ODBC you will need to create a system data source on the same Scriptcase server.
To do so, go to: Control Panel > System and Security > Administrative Tools> ODBC Data Sources
After creating the system data source, you just need to create an MS SQL Server ODBC connection in the Scriptcase.
MSSQL Server ADO

Setting up MSSQL Server ADO on Windows
Important: This connection causes problems in nchar and nvarchar data recovery with SQL Server databases from the 2008 release. Therefore, we do not recommend using
this connection for the most up-to-date SQL Server databases.
The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server ADO driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a MSSQL Server connection
7
Selecting a Windows
database connection
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: Native SRV PDO, Native SRV or ODBC.
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP\INSTANCE of the server where the Windows database is located.
Advanced setup for

8
Unicode Converter - Select if theres going to be conversion of characters to Unicode.
database

1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS SQL SERVER LINUX
The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the MSSQL Server extension in PHP.
If you are using a Microsoft Azure server, see more configuration details at: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/sql-database/sql-database-get-started-portal
PDO DBLIB
Configurando DBLIB Server no Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO BDLIB preconfigured, only needing to install the FreeTDS and unixODBC so that you can do the connection.
Access the shell(terminal) with root and install the packages below:
Distribution: Debian\Ubuntu
sudo apt-get install unixODBC unixODBC-dev gcc nano wget
Distribution: RHEL\CentOS
sudo yum install unixODBC unixODBC-devel gcc nano wget
Distribution: Suse\OpenSuse
sudo zypper install unixODBC unixODBC-devel gcc nano wget
Download FreeTDS:
wget http://cdn1.netmake.com.br/download/freetds-0.95.95.tar.gz
Descompact the FreeTDS:
tar -zxf freetds-0.95.95.tar.gz
Enter in the FreeTDS folder:
cd freetds-0.95.95
Run the command below to compile and install the FreeTDS :
sudo ./configure --with-tdsver=7.4 --with-unixodbc=/usr --disable-libiconv --disable-static --disable-threadsafe --enable-msdblib --disable-sspi --with-gnu-ld && make && make install
Edit the FreeTDS configuration file:
sudo nano /usr/local/freetds/freetds.conf
Sample settings:
[MSSQLServer] host = 192.168.254.171 instance = SQLEXPRESS port = 1433 tds version = 7.0
You need to use the name MSSQLServer ( its the DNS from FreeTDS ) in the option Server/Host (Name or IP) to do the connection with your SQLServer database.

2
Selecting a Linux
database connection
database
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP\INSTANCE of the server where the Linux database is located.
Advanced setup for
the Linux database

3
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME CONNECTIONS SQL SERVER MAC OS X
The automatic installation already comes with the MSSQL Server preconfigured, only needing to install the client so that you can do the connection.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the MSSQL Server extension in PHP.
If you are using a Microsoft Azure server, see more configuration details at: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/sql-database/sql-database-get-started-portal
PDO DBLIB
Setting up PDO DBLIB on Mac OS X
The automatic installation already comes with the PDO DBLIB driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

database connection
X database
2
Server/Host (Name or IP) : Insert the name or IP\INSTANCE of the server where the Mac OS X database is located.
Advanced setup for
database

1
SQLite
HOME CONNECTIONS SQLITE
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS SQLITE WINDOWS
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the SQLite extension in PHP.
SQLite PDO
Setting up SQLite on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite driver only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a SQLite connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Allows you to select the drivers: SQLite PDO.
PATH : Inform the complete path to the SQLite file.
2
Advanced setup for
database

1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS SQLITE LINUX
SQLite PDO
Setting up SQLite on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

Selecting a Linux
database connection
database
2
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

1
Mac OS X
HOME CONNECTIONS SQLITE MAC OS X
SQLite PDO
Setting up SQLite on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the SQLite driver, only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

database connection
Connecting with Mac
OS X database
2
Advanced setup for
database

1
ODBC
HOME CONNECTIONS ODBC
1
Windows
HOME CONNECTIONS GENERIC ODBC WINDOWS
The ODBC Generic connection e normally used to create connections with the databases: dBase (.dbf), Progress, Dataflex, Paradox, Visual FoxPro, etc.
You only need to have the ODBC driver corresponding with the database installed.
If youre using your own environment, preconfigured, youll need to enable the ODBC extension in PHP.
Generic ODBC
Setting up ODBC on Windows
The automatic installation already comes with the ODBC only needing to connect with the database with ScriptCase.

After that, youll see a page with all the database connections that you can create. Select a ODBC connection
Selecting a Windows
database connection
Connecting with
Windows database
DBMS Driver : Select the Generic ODBC.

2
Specific driver : Defined as Generic ODBC, allows you to connect to specific Data Sources: DBF, FileMaker, Progress or Visual FoxPro.
ODBC Name : On this option, youll inform the name of the Data Source that youve created.
Username : Inform the username of the Windows database, only if there are any.
Password : Inform the password of the Windows database, only if there are any.
Advanced setup for
database

1
Linux
HOME CONNECTIONS GENERIC ODBC LINUX
You only need to have the ODBC driver corresponding with the database installed.
Generic ODBC
Setting up ODBC on Linux
The automatic installation already comes with the ODBC only needing to install the UnixODBC driver so that you can do the connection.
UBUNTU\DEBIAN x86_64 CENTOS\RHEL x86_64

- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install unixODBC
UBUNTU\DEBIAN i386 ( x86 ) CENTOS\RHEL i686 ( x86 )

- sudo apt-get install unixodbc-dev unixodbc - sudo yum install unixODBC

Selecting a Linux
database connection
2
database
Username : Inform the username of the Linux database, only if there are any.
Password : Inform the password of the Linux database, only if there are any.
Advanced setup for
the Linux database
Filtering the Linux
database

3
1
Mac OS X
HOME CONNECTIONS GENERIC ODBC MAC OS X
Generic ODBC
Settin gup ODBC on MAC
The automatic installation already comes with the ODBC driver, only needing to create the data source to connect with the database with ScriptCase.
The path of odbc.ini is: /Applications/Scriptcase/components/apache/bin/unixODBC/etc/

database connection
X database

2
Username : Inform the username of the Mac OS X database, only if there are any.
Password : Inform the password of the Mac OS X database, only if there are any.
Advanced setup for
database

1
General View
HOME APPLICATIONS
ScriptCase offers various applications that allows the developer to create a complete system, still offers the integration of the applications with the external libraries giving more
potential for the tool on developing the systems.
Se below the types of applications available.
Grid An application that displayed data, this application has the behavior of a report where you can export to PDF, XLS, XML and other formats.
Procedure Similar to the Grid, this application is only available for a few databases (MSSQL Server, Oracle and Db2) when selecting a connection, in case theres a procedure that returns an
information, this application will be displayed.
Form - An application that allows to insert and update data, there are 4 types of orientations.
Single Record Manipulate only 1 record per page
Multiple Records Manipulate various records per page where the interaction can be done on various lines at the same time.
Editable Grid Various records per page, where each interaction with the records needs to be done individually and all the lines are enabled for modifications.
Editable Grid View - Various records per page, where each interaction with the records needs to be done individually and the lines are disabled for modifications, to edit the records you
need to click on the edit icon next to the record line you want to edit.
Tabs This application allows you to create tabs where you can place other applications in them, like the Grid and Form applications.
Control This application is used to make custom controls in a system, its not tied to a table, and requires the creation of at least one field for it to work. An example is the creation of a login
screen.
Menu - Allows you to create a hierarchical navigation structure of the system applications. There are two types of menus available, Horizontal Menu and Tree Menu, that the difference is
only the display.
Search - This application is used exclusively with the form application.
PDF Report This application is responsible for generating the reports using some predefined formats, where you can position the data in the report.
Dashboard Allows you to display various applications placed in the widgets.
Blank This application allows you to insert PHP / HTML code to display some processing results. The advantage of using this application is the possibility of using the macro and native
integration with the other applications.
Calendar An application where you can maintain an agenda of events, also being linked to the google calendar.
New Application ## {id-1}

The process of creating an application is simple and intuitive. First select the application desired.
Application Data
On this tab you need to select a connection (only in the case it needs it) thatll be used by the application. Selecting the connection, the tables will be loaded and listed in the
Tables Field.
Its possible to select more tables when creating the applications, with the exceptions the Form and Calendar.
After selecting the tables and the fields thats going to be part of the application, you need to inform the name and language.
2
Connection - Define a connection thats going to be used while creating the application. Itll list the existing connections of the project.
Table - Defines the tables thatll be used in the application. (Forms and Calendars only use one table).
Fields - Defines the fields that are part of the applications.
SQL Select Statement - Displays the the Select statement created after selecting the tables and the field. This field allows to insert a SQL previously created, although it needs to contain the
tables that exist in the selected database connection.
Name - Name of the applications thats being created, it cant contain special characters.
Localization - Language of the application created. The default project language is selected automatically.
Relationship
When selecting two or more tables, the Relationship tab will be displayed. On this tab, youll view the relationship created between the tables, where you can edit the field
relationship.
Below is the form to edit the field relationship.
Edit Fields
List of fields thatll be created in the application, like their names and display types. Here you can do some configurations on the fields, like the modifications for the label or its
data type.
In case of a SQL error when creating an application, this screen will display blank.
3
Fields - Name of the fields in the database.
Label - Name of the fields thatll be displayed in the generated application.
Datatype - Data Type of Field.
Grid - Defines the fields available in the Grid.
Search - Defines the fields available in the Search.
Schema
Definition of the application schema, the default theme of the project (that can be viewed in Project > Properties) will be selected automatically.
Schemas - List of schemas available in the project.
After creating the application, youll be redirected to the configuration of the application created.
Batch Application Creation ## {id-2}

With this tool, its possible to create multiple applications (Form and Grid).
When creating grids and forms using the same table, the applications are created with an application link between them, allowing to edit the record from the Grid application.
To start the process of creating the application, you need to select a connection so that the tables can be listed.
Next, you need to select the tables that are going to be used to create the applications. When selecting the tables, you can define which applications (Forms and Grids) are going
to be created.
4
For last, you need to define the name, description and type, in case for the Forms.
Name - Name of the application thats going to be created.
Description - Application Description.
Type - This option is only available for Forms, defines the type of form thats going to be created (Single Record, Multiple Rows, Editable Grid and Editable Grid View).
Generate Source - Selecting this option all the applications to be created will have their source code generated.
To edit - Selecting this option all the applications created will be open for modifications right after creation.
Restore Applications ## {id-3}

This feature allows to restore the applications of the project that has been modified recently. When saving the application, ScriptCase stores automatically a limited number
(defined in Settings > System Settings on the option Number of automatic application copies) of copies of the application, so that they can be restored. First, we need to select the
application that you want to restore.
Previously, you need to select the restore point that you desire and also define a name for the restored application.
Save Applications ## {id-4}

This option saves the application thats open in edit mode. This option can be found in the Applications menu or on the toolbar.
Generate Source Code ## {id-5}

5
Different from generating the source code found in the project menu, this option saves and generates the source code only for the application thats open in edit mode. This
option can be found in the Applications menu or in the standard toolbar.
Run ## {id-6}
Save and run the application thats open at the moment in edit mode. This option can be found in the Applications Menu or on the default toolbar.
Advanced Deploy ## {id-7}

This option works the same way as any deployment, the only difference is that this option option is only available for the application open at the moment to edit.
For more information about deployment, access Deployment.
Export Applications ## {id-8}

Allows to export all the applications of a project or you can select the desired applications. In this export, the necessary files that are used in the applications are also added to
the export.
This option can be found in the Project Menu.
First, you need to select if you want to export all the applications from the project or some applications applications from the project.
Selecting all the applications, youll view the export log with the download link for the file.
In this example, the option Select Applications was used, in this case the applications were list according to the type or folder.
To continue, select the desired applications and click on export. After that youll view a log of the exported files with a link to download the generated export file.
6
Import Applications ## {id-9}

Allows you to import the applications exported by ScriptCase, although the exported applications need to be exported in the same version of ScriptCase that they are being
imported to.
This option can be found in the Project Menu.
First, you need to select the file that you want to import.
Next, in case of conflict with the selected file and the existing projects, youll have a couple of options for you to decide.
The options are:
Overwrite - Overwrites the files of the project with the ones being imported.
Dont Overwrite Maintain the local project files and ignore the files being imported.
Rename Maintain the local project files and import the selected files with different names.
On the next step, youll view a summary of the import.

1
Grid Modules
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID GRID MODULES
Initial Module
Allows you to set in which mode the application will start when executed.
Grid Application Modules
Filter : Application will be started by the filter view, so you can filter the records before the next application, that can be a Grid, PDF, Summary you can configure that options within the
Filters settings.
Grid : Application will be started by the Grid itself, this is the default option.
Summary : Application will be started by the Summary. To use the Summary as initial application its mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.
Chart : Application will be started by the Chart. To use the Chart as initial application its mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.
Print : Application will be started by the print mode, according to the select command.
PDF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a PDF file.
Word : Application will be started with the option to view or download a Word file( .doc or .docx ).
Excel : Application will be started with the option to view or download an Excel file ( .xls or .xls ).
RTF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a RTF file ( .tft ).
XML : Application will be started with the option to view or download a XML file.
CSV : Application will be started with the option to view or download a CSV file.
Filter
Grid Filter Settings

2
Filter Module : This option configures which application will be called after the Filter.
Use Iframe : This option configures the filter to be displayed within an Iframe (displaying the Filter itself and the search results on the same page). This option is available only when the initial
module is set to be the Filter.
Show Results : Display the search results on the same page when loading the application for the first time when the Use Iframe option is set as Yes, otherwise, the results will be displayed
only after the search.
Iframe Height : Iframe height, in pixels, used to display the search results.
Search Modal : This option configures the Filter Application to open in a modal window.
Search Modal Height : Search Modal box height (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled.
Search Modal Width : Search Modal box Width (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled
Table Width : Filter application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the Table Width Unit
Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option Table Width.
Grid
Grid Settings
Orientation : This option configures the Grid records orientation (Horizontal, Vertical, Slide or User Defined). When using the User Defined option you can design the HTML manually inside
the option Layout HTML templates and select within the Layout settings.
Fixed Label : This option will fix the columns label at the top of the page (it is only available when the Grud records orientation is set as Horizontal).
Pagination : This option sets the Grid paging type: Partial (pagination according to the amount of records set per page), Total (displays all records) or Infinite Scroll (automatic srolling acording
to the increment)
Lines Per Page : This option sets the amount of records per page for the Grid
Infinite Scroll Increment : This option sets the number of rows displayed on each increment of new records. It is available only when paging is configured with Infinite Scroll.
Open windows using modal : For Grids apps with the Infinite Scroll paging enabled, this option will set the links between applications and details of the Grid, that are configured to open in
iframe, to open using a modal instead.
Maintain records : It configures if the amount of records displayed will be preserved when the application navigates to another window and go back.
Grid height : Defines a altura da consulta em pixels. Caso esteja vazio
Table Width : Grid application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the Table Width Unit
Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the Grid table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option Table Width.
Detail
3
Grid Detail settings
Display Detail : Allows you to set where the detail will open within the Grid Application * Beside the Grid : Displays the Grid Details to the right of the record, in the same
window where Grid is being displayed. * Below the Grid : Displays the Grid Details below the Grid records, in the same window where Grid is being displayed. * In another
page : Displays the Grid Details in another page, replacing the Grid view. * In another window : Displays the Grid Details in a separated browser window. * Modal : Opens a
pop-up window to the display of the Grid Detail.
Alignment : Using this option you can set an alignment (center, right or left) for the Grid Detail when its using the Display Detail setting as Beside the Grid or Below the Grid.
Detail Width : This option sets the Grid Detail width when its using the Display Detail setting as Beside the Grid, Below the Grid, In another page or In another window.
Width of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail width when its using the Display Detail option as Modal.
Height of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail height when its using the Display Detail option as Modal.
Detail Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the Detail Width (percent, pixel or automatic).
Summary
Grid Summary
Settings
Summary Display : Sets the Grid Summary display option ( On another page, On the last page, On every page). The Summary Application Module is only available when a group is created in
the Group By settings.
Chart
4
Grid Chart settings
Charts display mode : Sets the Chart Summary display option ( New window, Same page, Other page ).The Chart Application Module is only available when a group is created in the Group By
settings.
Display before summary : Sets whether the Chart is displayed above or below the Summary. Available when the Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
Number of columns : Sets the Chart number of columns per line (one in each column). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
Margin : Sets the Charts horizontal margin. Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.
Horizontal alignment : Sets the Charts horizontal position (Left, Right, Center). Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.
Vertical alignment : Sets the Charts vertical position (Top, Center, Bottom). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
View settings in the chart window : Sets the chart settings display on the same page. Available when the Char display mode is configured on Other page or new window.
1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID SETTINGS
Grid application advanced settings
Friendly URL : This field allows you to change the URL that will be called by the application. Allowed characters are the same available on URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_. This option can also be
changed on the home screen, on the Friendly URL column at the applications list.
Display Line Number : This option sets whether to display or not the sequence number of each Grid row.
Display Titles : This option sets if the column title (column label) will be displayed or not.
Line break in title : This option sets if the column line title will break or not.
Margins : Sets the application margins in pixels (up, down, right and left).
Alignment : Allows you to set the fields alignment for when the Grid orientation is set as Vertical or Slide.
Table Columns : Sets the column widths type: Provides (It will assume the informed width values at field level in the configuration of the visualization), Calculated (Calculate size according to
type and the field size) and Automatic (The alignment will be according to the browser criteria).
Refresh Interval : Allows you to set a reload interval for the page, in seconds. When is set as zero, there will be no page reload.
1
Edit Fields
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID EDIT FIELDS
Edit Fields
Fields :Allows to access the configuration of the field (icon on the left) and dragging the fields can change the field position and choose weather or not the field will be displayed.
Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, itll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the name
would be Client Name.
SQL Type : Informs the datatype of field in the database.

1
Fields Positioning
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID FIELDS POSITIONING
Allows to set the order that the fields will be displayed.
Field Positioning
The box to the left represents the fields that arent displayed int he application.
The box to the right represents the fields that are displayed int he application.
1
Toolbar
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID TOOLBAR
The applications toolbar is divided into two parts: Top Toolbar and Bottom Toolbar, so that it is possible to define which buttons will be displayed in one or both positions. The
buttons selection for the top and bottom toolbars are independent, for example, a button can be positioned in the two bars at the same time.
You can also organize the toolbar according to the device and separate which buttons will be displayed when the application is accessed on a mobile device or desktop, and its
respective positions on the toolbar.
Desktop : Within this option the toolbar can be organized for exhibition type Classic Web Version, i.e, these configurations will be used when the application is accessed by a Desktop .
Mobile : Within this option the toolbar can be organized for exhibition type Mobile Version, i.e, these configurations will be used when the application is accessed by a Mobile.
Toolbar
Grid Buttons positioning
Attributes :
Navigation : Within this attribute you can find the options to set the Grid navigation buttons.
Next Moves forward to the next page of the Grid.

Left Returns to previous page of the Grid.
First Sends to the first record of the Grid.
Last Sends to the last record of the Grid.
Exit Ends the application.
Navigation by page Displays the link to pages. ie. 1 2 3 4 5
Export : Sets the format available for generating exports. ScripCase can generate exports in the following file formats:
PDF Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a PDF file type.
WORD Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a WORD doc.
XLS Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a XLS (Excel).
XML Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a XML file.
CSV Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a CSV file.
RTF Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a RTF file.
Print Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a HTML printable page.
Others : Some more options available for the application, according to its settings.
Jump to Creates a button that allows the user to skip and position to a specific grid record.
Rows Limit Creates a check box with the maximum number of lines per page. This value can be set within the option Records per page. eg. 10,20,30, all
Search Creates a link button to access the Advanced Search form (Filter module). Settings for this button can be configured within the option Search Settings Advanced Search.
Dynamic
Creates a link button to access the fields for the Dynamic Search. Settings for this button can be configured within the option Search Settings Dynamic Search.
Search
Columns Creates a button to manage the columns display dynamically within the application, you can configure the columns that will be available within the option Grid Columns .
Sorting
Creates a button to manage the fields sorting dynamically, you can configure the sorting options within the option Grid Sorting
options
Group By Creates a button that allow the user to select the Group by. This button will be automatically activated once you create a Dynamic or Static Group By to the Grid.
Creates a button to save the current Grid (For example when the user applies a search condition or a Group By inside the application, it can be saved for a future view). You can
Save Grid
create criteria for this button within the option Grid Save Grid
2
QuickSearch Creates a link to access the QuickSearch options within the Grid. Settings for this button can be configured within the option Search Settings QuickSearch.
Gantt Chart Creates a link to a Gantt Chart. This button will be automatically activated once you create a Gantt Chart within the option Grid Gantt Chart
Creates a link button to access the Summary Module. This button will be automatically activated once you create a Dynamic or Static Group By to the Grid, so you the user can
Summary see the records summary and its options according to the data group. You can configure the Summary options within the option Grid Grid Modules and also within the
Summary area in the left menu.
Form Displays the Form application buttons configured when a link between the Grid and the Form is created. You can configure the application links within the Links area in the left
Buttons menu.
Creates a combo box with the languages added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove languages to your project or application accessing the main
Languages
menu Project Properties Locales.
Creates a combo box with the themes added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove css themes to your project or application accessing the main
Themes
menu Project Properties Themes.
Rows
This option if activated will display a record counter within the application toolbar
Counter
HelpCase Creates a link to the application documentation (WebHelp). You can configure the documentation settings within the main menu option .
Separator
- Creates a separation line between the buttons for better display, specially for grouped buttons
Button Group : The Group allows to create group buttons.
Add Button Groups
Button Group Configuration
Name : Allows to define a name for the button group.
Label : Allows to define a name for the button group thats going to be displayed for the user.
Hint\Title : Allows to define a hint for the group of buttons thats going to be displayed to the user.
Button Type : Allows to define a display format for the button group ( Button, Image, Link).
Image : Allows to define an image for the button if its display format is and Image.
Display : Defines if the button will display only the Text, only the image or both.
Display Position : Defines the position of the Text or Image ( Text to the right, Image to the right ).
After creating a button group, its necessary to position the buttons below the Button Group and to the right. Like the image below:
3
Positioning the buttons of the button group
Button Settings
Grid Buttons Settings
Button Displays the buttons available in the application.

Allows you to customize the buttons name from current application. You can also use the option Application Language (placed within the main menu Locales) to change the button
Label
labels for the whole project.
Hint Allows you to set a hint for the buttons. The hint will help the user to understand the buttons action.
Shortcut Allows you to set a shortcut key to run the button action. Important note: Each browser has its own shortcut combinations and reserved words, you need to check it before
key implementing this option.
Options
Grid Options
Attributes
Display Summary : Allows you to define if the Summary button is going to be displayed for each page.
Format Row Counter : Allows you to set the format that will displayed for the rows counter. Ex: [1 to 10 of 200]. You can define it manually or using the lang variable accessing the main
menu Project Properties Locales
The number of links displayed : Allows you to set the amount of links per pages, when the page navigation option is enabled.
Jump to : Allows you to define the jump to option, if the page redirect is going to per page or record.
Records per page : Allows you to define which options of rows quantity will be displayed in the combo box. To enable the option to show all records use the option all. eg. 10,20,30, all
Toolbar buttons : Allows you to define the toolbar buttons display type, how the toolbar buttons will open. If it will open in modal (default) or in a DIV below the toolbar.
Toolbar Mobile
4
Positioning the mobile buttons
Contains the same options as the Desktop version, adding only the item Copy from Desktop, on which, when clicked it copies the items from the Desktop toolbar to the
Mobile toolbar.
1
Export Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID EXPORT SETTINGS
PDF Settings
PDF export configuration
Attributes
PDF Orientation Allows to define the orientation in Portrait or Landscape if the print.
PDF Format Allows to define the format that the PDF will be printed in (Letter, A4, etc).
Print Type Defines the print color (Black/White or Color).
Records per Page Applies to the Grids with the horizontal alignment, also defines the amount of records thatll be printed per page.
Rows per Page in Summary Define the amount of records printed in the summary PDF.
Complete Lines Until Footer Complete with the empty line until the footer.
Open PDF Directly Open the PDF file without using a page in between to display a link to the file.
Create Charts Create the summary charts in the PDF.
Configurable PDF Allows the user to configure the parameters to create the PDF during runtime.
Generate Bookmarks Generate the bookmarks automatically, the bookmarks are generated relating to the group by.
Page Numbers Format Number format of the page, if simple (1,2,3,4,5,), Complete(1/n, 2/n, 3/n,) or not use the Numbers.
Page numbering height Allows to align the numbers vertically, top or bottom.
Horizontal position of the page numbering Allows to align the numbers horizontally (Left, Center, Right).
Margin The value informed needs to be in millimeters so that it can be applied to the PDF margins (Top, Bottom, Right, Left).
Print Background Allows to print the background in the PDF file.
JS execution time Time(milliseconds) for the server to wait for the JS to run in the HTML file.
Timeout for charts image creation Time to generate each chart individually in the PDF.
Word Settings
Grid - Word export settings
Print Type Allows you to set the print mode for the word file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Rows per Page in Grid Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the query will be displayed in the file.
Rows per Page in Summary Allows you to set the number of lines per page in the Summary that be displayed in the file.
Open Word Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
2
CSV Settings
Grid - CSV export settings
Lines Separator Allows you to set the separator for character.

Columns Separator Allows you to set the column separator for character and records.
Text Delimiter Allows you to define the character used to delimit the text columns.
Open CSV Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Add Label Allows you to define if the columns label will be added to the file.
XLS Settings
Grid - XLS export settings
Open XLS Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Format Allows you to define the format of the generated document (xls or xls).
Print Settings
Grid - Print export settings
Print Mode Allows you to define the contents of the file printing (Both, Current Page or Full Report).
Print Type Allows you to set the print mode for the file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Rows per Page Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the query will be displayed in the file.
Print Background Allows you to define whether the background will appear for printing.
Other Formats
Grid - XML and RTF export settings
Generate XML directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Generate RTF directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
1
SQL
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
SQL Select Statement Allows you to define the main SQL of the application. You can edit this SQL to add or delete fields.
Limit Lets you limit the amount of records that will be retrieved by SQL for the view in the query.
SQL Preparation You can enter SQL commands or procedure names that should be executed before the main select of the application.
Connection Displays the name of the connection used. This connection can be changed to another connection that has the same table.
Use Customized Message Lets you define whether the no records message is displayed.
No Records Message Allows you to set the message to be displayed if the query does not return any records.
Font Lets you set the font for the message, click the icon next to it field and choose the font. Available when Use Customized Message is enabled.
Font Size Allows you to set the font size. Available when Use Customized Message is enabled.
Font Color Allows you to set the font color. Available when Use Customized Message is enabled.
Variable for Table These fields informed with value, allows part of the table name defined in the select to be changed before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
The first field must be filled with the name of the variable. The second field must be filled with the part of the name of the table to be replaced.
Fields Variables Lets you exchange the name of a select field with the contents of a variable. This switch occurs before the command is executed.
The first field must contain the name of the variable, in the second field should be selected the name of the field to be replaced.
Case sensitive Allows you to configure whether the connection will be case sensitive or not. (Differentiating case).
1
Columns
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID COLUMNS
You can display or hide fields dynamically inside the Grid application using the button Columns. This option is used to select the fields/columns that will be part of this dynamic
fields selection.
Grid columns settings
The box in the left represents the fields that are NOT being displayed within the dynamic fields selection.
The box in the right represents the fields that are being displayed within the dynamic fields selection.
1
Sorting Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID SORTING SETTINGS
Field Settings
Field Sorting Configuration.
This property has the objective to define the fields that allow sorting. The sorting of a field of the application is done in runtime, just by clicking on the column (field) that you
want to sort by. By default, the Group Bys are respected while sorting the fields. Also by default, the first six fields are already marked (presenting an asterisk beside the field), so
that they can be sorted without the user worrying about this detail.
Sorting Fields Selection Configuration.
Sort Fields
Define the configuration of the sorting for each field of the application, being Ascendant or Descendant.
Sort Fields Configuration.
Advanced Sorting
Define the fields that are available when clicking on the Sorting of the Grid.
2
Advanced Sort Fields Configuration.
Use displayed fields : Defines that all the fields are available when clicking on Sorting button of the application.
Use columns : Defines that all the fields, configured in the Columns option of ScriptCase, will be available when clicking on the Sorting button of the Grid.
Define Columns : Allows to select the fields freely:

1
Group Label
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID GROUP LABEL
With this option, you can insert the one or more titles for the columns in the applications, allowing to modify its size, color, font and position.
If you have fields with a dynamic display, the Group Label wont work.
Editing Group Label cell properties
Attributes
Title Allows to define a title thatll be displayed in your Group Label.

Font Allows to define the group label titles font.
Font Size Defines the font size for the group label title.
Horizontal Alignment Allows to define the horizontal alignment of the group label title. Being Left, Center or Right.
Vertical Alignment Allows to define the vertical alignment of the group label title. Being Middle, Bottom or Top.
Font Color Allows to define the font color for the group label title.
Background Color Allows to define to color of the background for the group label title.
1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID SECURITY
Application Security Configuration
When enabled, the application will only be accessible when using the macro sc_apl_status or using the security module. Applications with this option on, display a message
Use Security
informing User not Authorized when accessed directly.
Url output of the
Defines the application to which the user will be redirected to when the warning User not Authorized is displayed.
security
Use Password When this option is enabled, the application will require you to define a password to access the application.
Request password
Request the password once per session, not needing to inform the password every time you access the application.
just once
Enable direct call by
Allows to call the application directly from the URL in the browsers.
URL
In the development environment you can suppress the effects above for testing, evading that every time you run the application it blocking you and requiring to login into the
system. To disable the security and the requirement of the password in development mode access Options > My ScriptCase and uncheck the options: Enable Use of Security,
Enable Use of Password.
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID LOG
Application Log configuration
Schema Allows to select which log schema will be used in the application.
All fields Allows to define if itll be used for all the fields.
Events Allows to define which events will be saved in the log.
1
Gantt Chart
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID GANTT CHART
Gantt Chart settings
A Gantt chart is a type of bar chart that illustrates a project schedule. Gantt charts illustrate the start and end dates of the terminal elements and summary elements of a project.
Terminal elements and summary elements comprise the work breakdown structure of the project.
Output Format Output format, you can choose of HTML or HTML5 (the default option is HTML5)
Field label Field containing the record label of the Gantt chart. You can choose which field will appear within the left column to describe the tasks.
Width Gantt chart width. The default unit for this width is pixels, however you can also apply it in percent by adding the % sign after the number (i.e: 100%).
Height Gantt chart height. The default unit for this width is pixels, however you can also apply it in percent by adding the % sign after the number (i.e: 100%).
Months Allows you to set the number of months that will be displayed in the Gantt chart.
Start Date Using this combo box you can choose the field that stores the start date, you need to have this record within the connected table.
End Date Using this combo box you can choose field that stores the end date, you need to have this record within the connected table.
Display format Allows you to set the display format of the fields date type.
Percent Using this combo box you can choose the field that stores the information regarding the task completion (percentage), you need to have this record within the connected
Completed table.
Resource Field containing the name of the resource allocated to the task.
1
Save Grid
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID SAVE GRID
Grid Save button settings
Enable Public Displays the Save button within the Grid application
Use Rules Using this option you can enable more rules for the save button
1
Fields
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID FIELDS
In the application menu: Fields, only the fields that were selected within the option select fields will be available for advanced settings.
Application fields list
According to the selected field different attributes can be changed depending on the data type selected, that is only for appliation level, not for the database.
Text
General Settings
Text field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a text, it accepts letters, numbers and special characteres.
Case Settings : Convert the letter from the field when losing focus. The options are:
Upper case : All in Upper Case
Lower case : All in Lower case
Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the first word
Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the the words
Show HTML content : Determines if the html contained in the field will be displayed or not. If enabled, the html will be displayed, otherwise the html will be intepreted by the browser.
Grid Mask : Defines the mask for the field display.There are two typed of masks described below:
Character Description
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is
X
required).
Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples
Mask Field Value Formatted Value

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value : Dont repeat the value of the field in case its the same as the previous record.
2
Run content in Javascript : If enabled, the javascript will be intepreted by the browser, otherwise the javascript will be displayed.
Lookup Settings
A method used to offer the user a list of values that can be selected in the form applications. For example, the gender field in the Database with the values M or W can be
presented like Man or Women or in a dynamic way, having these values recovered from the database.
Lookup Settings Display for the field.
Lookup Methods
Youll have available two types of lookup methods: Manual (informing manually the conditions of the select) or Automatic (using a database query).
Selecting the lookup type.
Lookup Method - Automatic
Automatic Lookup Interface.
SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command thatll recover the values thatll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT
display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field} .
The Grid field needs to be refrenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by its value in the table.
3
Multiple Values : When enabled, allows to select more than one item from the list, separated by a delimitator.
Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Grid : Applies the lookup to all the Grid formats (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV and RTF).
Summary : Applies the lookup only for the summary (HTML and PDF).
Both : Applies to both the Grid and Summary.
Default value : Defines the default value, used in the cases where the select command doesnt return any values.
Display original and lookup value : When selected No , its displayed onlt the value from the select command. Otherwise, itll be displayed the original value of the field and the value
returned from the select command separated by the character in the Separated by field.
Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. Its only necessary to inform this value of the
option Display original and lookup value is enabled.
Choose connection : Allows you to select another specific connection existing in the project. The select command will be done on the second connection.
Lookup Method - Manual
This method is used so that the developer can create manually the list of values thatll be saved to the generated application. This method is mostly used when the
database doesnt have a table that contains this information.
Manual Lookup Interface.
Lookup Type : Define the functionality of the lookup, being: Single Value, Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple Values (binary).
Single Value :
Itll be displayed only one value for the field. And itll replace the stored value from the table with the one defined on the item label.
Setting up Single Value Lookup
Label : Text thatll be displayed in the item list of the select field.
Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value thats stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list Man .
Mltiplos Valores (Delimitador) It can be displayed various values for the selected field. The values should be separated by a delimitador thatll be informed. Its
done a replacment on the parts of the field, separated by the delimitador, with the values contained in the list.
4
Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter).
Delimiter Characters used to separate Multiple Values in the table field. If not informed, the default delimiter is a semi coma (;).
Multiple Values (position)
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial position and the number of bytes that each i
For this example, Gender, Marital status and Hobby were used. Gender uses one byte as does the Martial Status, the Hobby will use two bytes.
The example below:
| Label | Value | Start | Size |

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Divorced | D |2 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
Example: Of you choose __Man__, __Single__ and __Read__, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor __MSRD__.
Setting up Multiple Values (position).
Label : Text thatll be displayed in the Grid.
Start : Starting position of the string thats going to be stored. The first position is always 1.
Size : Amount of bytes thats going to occupy in the string.
Multiple Values (binary)

5
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one value.
In this example uses the following list (although it's not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to the order):
| Attribute Value | Lookup Description |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |
To store the data, it's done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.
Example 1: If the options __Sports__ and __Culture__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __3__.

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = __3__
Example 2: If the options __Sports__, __Pleasure__ and __Reading__ were selected, the number stored in the table would be __13__.

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = __13__
Setting up Multiple Values (Binary).
Insert Button : Adds to the list the values informed on the fields Label and Value.
Update Button : Modifies the attributes of the selected item.
Remove Button : Remove the selected item from the list.
Clear Button : Clear the Fields.
Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on Load lookup definition.
Load lookup definitions : Allows to refresh the list of values predefined when using the lookup. Itll be listed the existing definitions in ScriptCase and the ones saved by the user.
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to define the CSS values individually for each field. For each Display schema of scriptcase, there are the same attributes available in Interface.
6
Display Settings configuration Interface.
Field Settings
Font Style : Allows to select the font family, thatll be applied to the application field.
Font Size : Allows to choose the font size, thatll be applied to the application field.
Italic Text : Formatting the Text to be Italic.
Bold Text : Formatting the Text to be Bold.
Dont truncate : Dont truncate by the amount of bytes or by the Grid columns.
Number of characters : Amount of characters in bytes to display.
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (left right, center and justify).
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the filter in the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Background Image : Background Image of the field.
Line Break : Allows the Line Break.
Font Color : Allows to apply a color to the font by choosing a color from the color palette.
Background Color : Allows to apply a color to the field background by choosing a color from the color palette.
Width : Allows to define a width to the field.
Height : Allows to define a height to the field.
Title Horizontal Alignment : Define the Title Horizontal Alignment of the field.
Title Vertical Alignment : Define the Title Vertical Alignment of the field.
Bold : Applies the bold type font to the field.
Bar Chart
By using this option, youll see an icon on the Field Title, this icon displays a chart relating to the field.
On this type option you need to choose two columns to build the chart. The first one is the field its self that youre working with, and the second one is the you chose and is called
Column for Label.
7
Bar Chart Interface.
Group by Label : Groups the values of the column by the label. Similar to the effect of the group by of the a Selec.
Summary Function : Function that summerizes the data applied to the column. The functions that can be used on the field are the following: Count, Sum, Max, Min and Avg.
Configurable Chart : Allows the user to setup the parameters of the chart creation when the application is running.
Display Values : Displays the values of the generated chart.
Column for Label : Selecting the column thatll be the label for the field.
Chart Width : Width of the chart, in pixels.
Chart Height : Height of the chart, in pixels.
Layout de Grfico
Interface de configurao de layout do grfico.
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
8
Multiple Lines Text field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Multiple Lines Text, it accepts letters, numbers and special characteres in multiple lines.
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Lookup Settings
9
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
10
Single Value :

11
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

12
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

13
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
Layout de Grfico
14
Number
General Settings
Integer field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Integer, its allowed to define the format of a number.
Accumulated : When enables, define that the field will be accumulated with the values of another field. This option is only available on virtual fields.
Accumulator field : Only available when the option Accumulated is enabled. This configuration defines which field will be used to accumulate the values. The chosen fields needs to be
Integer, Currency or Decimal.
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
EMask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
15
(zz) xxxx - xxxx Field
Mask 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Value Formatted Value
Values format
Interface of Values Format
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the fields. When not enabled, youll view attributes grouped, Negative Symbol and negative number format.
Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character thatll be used to separate the thousand.
Negative sign : Defines the chatacter thatll be used to display negative numbers.
Negative number format : Defines the position of the Negative sign em relation to the value.
Color of Negative : Defines a color for the field when the value is nagative.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
16
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
17
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
18

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

19
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

20
Line Chart
Using this guide, you can define ac chart for each line.
Line Chart Interface.
Line Chart Type : There are two types of charts that can be used. Below you can see their description:
Bar Chart : This option allows to display a bar chart relating to the column that youre working with. The size of the bars is done by math relating to the Grand Total of the
column. The value informed in the width of the chart defines the size of the images thatll be displayed.
In the example shown above, the width of the Chart is 200px.
Line Chart : This option allows to display a Line Chart relating to the column that youre working with . The amount of lines are done by dividing the value of a column by the
value informed to the number of icons.
21
In the example above, the field Number of Icons, it was informed the value 1000, so the number of stars besides, it determined by dividing the displayed value by 1000.
Display Value : Itll display the value and the chart at the same time, the value being on the left or right side of the bar or lines.
Number of Icons : Determines the amount of icons (figures) thatll appear for each value on this field. This value will be presented by the dividing the value of the column by the Number of
Icons.
Chart width : Width of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart. In case it isnt informed, the value used is 200px.
Chart height : Height of the chart in pixels. This field is used by the option Bar Chart.
Margin : Charts margin. This option is only used by the bar chart.
Image / Positive Color : The way that its informed will variate depending on the options below:
Bar Chart : Inform a color for the field thatll be used to form the chart image. Click the icon beside to choose the color.
Line Chart : Inform an image name for the field thatll be used like an icon. Click the icon beside to choose the image Icon.
Image / Negative Color : The information passed to this field follows the same criteria as the Image / Positive Color field. This parameter will be used in the case the value is negative.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
22
Layout de Grfico
Decimal
General Settings
Decimal field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Decimal, its allowed to define the format of a decimal number.
X
required).
23
Z
Character Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at
Description
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Decimal Separator : Defines the character thatll be used to separate the decimal.
Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places. This value is part of the field size.
Complete with Zeros : Defines the decimal places that will or not be completed zeros to the right. Example: The value is 125,50, but the decimal precision is 3. If the option is enabled, then
the value will 125,500.
Lookup Settings
24
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
25
Single Value :

26
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

27
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

28
Line Chart
29
Icons.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
30
Layout de Grfico
Percent
General Settings
Percentage field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Percentage, its allowed to define the format of a percentage.
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples
31
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Lookup Settings
32
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
33
Single Value :

34
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

35
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

36
Line Chart
37
Icons.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
38
Layout de Grfico
Currency
General Settings
Currency field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Currency, its allowed to define the format of a currency.
X
required).
39
Z
Description
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Interface of Values Format.
Currency Format : Defines the content of the field that if itll be presented with the currency format.
Currency Symbol : Defines the character that represents the Currency Symbol.
Exibir valor por extenso : O valor ser exibido por extenso. Exemplo: 2.100 (Dois mil e cem).
Lookup Settings
40
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
41
Single Value :

42
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

43
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

44
Line Chart
45
Icons.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
46
Layout de Grfico
Percent (Calculated)
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples
47
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Lookup Settings
48
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
49
Single Value :

50
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

51
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

52
Line Chart
53
Icons.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
54
Layout de Grfico
HTML Image
General Settings
HTML Image field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as HTML Image, it allows to place an image to the field.
Image : Defines an image thatll be displayed. The icon Select Image, lists all the standard images from scriptcase and also the image that youve uploaded to scriptcase. The icon Upload an
image allows the developer to send an image to the server which is from another machine.
Border : Border size for the image in Pixels.
Width : Define the width of the image in Pixels.
Height : Define the height of the image in Pixels.
Display Settings
55
Field Settings
Credit Card Number

General Settings
Credit Card Number Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Credit Card Number, its allowed to define some rules for the display format of the Credit Card.
56
Display Settings
Field Settings

57
E-mail
General Settings
Email field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as an Email, when you click on the field you be offered a choice for your email client and send an email to that
specific email.
Display Settings
Field Settings
58
URL
General Settings
URL field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a URL, it sets the value as a clickable link (Only if it contains a valid path).
Display Settings
59
Field Settings
YouTube
General Settings
YouTube field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a YouTube, it allows to display a video from youtube on the field.
60
Display Mode : Defines how the you video will display in the application.
Width : Width of the video in pixels.
Height : Height of the video in pixels.
Link Type : The display settings of the link, if its going to be a Text or a Button.
Link text : A text thatll link to the video.
Display Settings
Field Settings
Google Maps
General Settings
61
Google Maps field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as Google Maps, itll use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Grid Applications
Home : Defines what type of parameters will be used in the API.
Home Configuration Interface.
Display Mode : Indicates the display of the map. It can be opened in a Modal or in a new Window.
Width : Defines the width of the map thats going to be displayed.
Height : Defines the height of the map thats going to be displayed.
Zoom : Defines the initial Zoom (available from the Google API) of the Map location.
API Key : API Key for authorization to use Google Maps in the Application. (Required only for the versions 2 or earlier of the Google API.)
The API Key is a unique key, composed by a string(text) alphanumeric, which is the license to use the service. When you subscribe to use the service, the key is tied to the
domain and the directory of the server. All the pages that use the API needs to be in the same directory that was used for the subscription. In case you have a web server on
your local machine, you just need to possess a key for testing, and to do this you only need to place http://localhost in the domain of the subscription.
To get your API Key access the site by clicking here
Link Type : Defines how the link will be displayed.
Text Link : Text to call the Map.
Marker Description : Displays the description for each marker displayed on the map.
Display Settings
62
Field Settings
Date
General Settings
Date field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Date and Time, its allowed to define the format of the date.
63
Values format
Format of Values without Regional Settings.
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, itll be displayed the date separater attribute (Check the Regional Settings).
Display : Offers a series of formats predefined for displaying dates.
Detail Mask : Define the format of the field in the Grid, following the standards the PHP function Date.
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday, 25 of January of 2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (accumulating the hours)
Format Table
64
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters Y , M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.
Example 1 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(8) where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year, the positions 5 and 6 is the month and the position 7 and 8 is the day, define
the internal format like: YYYYMMDD
Example 2 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(6) where the positions 1 and 2 represents the month and the positions 3 to 6 is the year, define the internal format like: MMYYYY
Display Settings
Field Settings
65
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
Layout de Grfico
66
Time
General Settings
Time field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as Time, its possible to define a Time Format.
Values format
67
Format of Values with Regional Settings..
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
h:i:s 11:33:20
Format Table
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from Date. You need to use the characters A, M and D that correspond to Year, Month and Day.
the internal format like: AAAAMMDD
Example 2 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(6) where the positions 1 and 2 represents the month and the positions 3 to 6 is the year, define the internal format like:
MMAAAA
Display Settings
68
Field Settings
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
69
Layout de Grfico
Date and time

General Settings
70
Date and Time field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Time, its allowed to define the format of the time.
Values format
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
h:i:s 11:33:20
Format Table
71
Display Settings
Field Settings
72
Image ( Database )
General Settings
Upload field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as an Image ( Database), all the Images files are stored and loaded directly from the Database.
Image Border : Width of the Image border. Value in Pixels.
Image Height : Image height size. Value in Pixels.
Image Width : Image width size. Value in Pixels.
Maintain Aspect : Maintains the original aspect ratio of the image when resizing it.
Open in Another Window : Allows to open the image in another window.
Display Settings
73
Field Settings
Image ( File Name )

General Settings
74
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as an Image (File Name), all the images files are stored and loaded in a directory of the server (Only the image name
is stored in the database).
Display Settings
Field Settings
75
Document ( Database )
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Document ( Database), all the document files are stored and loaded directly from the Database.
Icon : Displays an icon beside the field to identify the type of document.
File Name : Defines the field that contains the name of the document stored in the database ( the field that contains this information also needs to be stored in the database).
Display Settings
Field Settings
76
Document ( File Name )

General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Document (File Name), all the document files are stored and loaded in a directory of the server (Only the
document name is stored in the database).
Subfolder : Subfolders name that the files are stored.
File Name : Defines the field that contains the name of the document stored in the server ( the field that contains this information also needs to be stored in the database).
Display Settings
77
Field Settings
Bar code
General Settings
Configuration Interface of the Barcode Field.
Data Type : DataType of the field for the application.
SQL Type : Database field type.
Barcode
78
Type : Type of Barcode.
Text : Barcode Text for illustration purposes.
There are 18 types of barcodes , that are listed below:
Barcode configuratio interface.
Display Settings
Field Settings
79
QRCode
General Settings
QRCODE field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a QRCODE, allows you to set values into a QRCODE.
Values format
Level of error correction : Codewords are 8 bits long and use the ReedSolomon error correction algorithm with four error correction levels. The higher the error correction level, the less
storage capacity.
Image Size : Size of the QRCODE.
Margin : Margin of the QRCODE.
Display Settings
80
Field Settings

1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID LAYOUT
Blocks
Conceptually a block is a container where you can position the fields of the Applications: Form, Control or Grid with Slide orientation.
By default, the applications created in ScriptCase are built with a only one block, with the same name as the application. You can add the amount of blocks that you want to
organize in a more convenient way. The page below, observe that theirs a column Organization, and that is where youll define if the next block will be set beside or below the
current one.
Application Block configuration
On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second is to delete the block.
Organizing the position of the Blocks

See below how to modify the display order of the Blocks in one Page.
Click and drag the block that you desire to modify to its new position.
Application Block Display configuration
See how to remove a block from display
Click on the block desired and drag it to the item Blocks not Shown. This way, you can also drag the block to another page if desired. See the images below.
Attributes
Block
Name : Name of the Block.
Label : Title of the block thatll be displayed in the application.
Title
Display : Flag that controls the title display of the block.
Label
Display : Flag that controls id the label of the fields will be displayed in the block.
Position : Options to display label :

Above : The label will be displayed above the field.
Beside : The label will be displayed beside the field.
Below : The label will be displayed below the field.
Fields
2
Columns : Amount of columns that are displayed side by side in the block.
Position : The way that the fields are displayed in the block :
Below : The fields are displayed one below the other respecting the amount of columns.
Beside : The fields are displayed one beside the other respecting the amount of columns.
Line : The fields are displayed one beside the other without the tabulation.
Organization
Next : The way that the blocks are displayed in the page:
Below : Indicates that the next block will be placed below the current one.
Beside : Indicates that the next block will be placed beside the current one.
Tabs : Indicates that the next block will be placed in a different tab then the current one.
Width : Specifies the width that block will occupy in pixels or percentage, in case the value is in percentage, inform the (%).
Collapse : Enables the option to close the block.
Create New Block
To include new blocks in an Application, click on the button . Next, youll see the following interface to define the name and label of the block. At the end
click on Create.
Creating application blocks configuration
Attributes
Edit Blocks
To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, youll see the following interface to define the parameters of the blocks. At the end click on
save.
Application Block editing interface
Attributes
Name : Name of the block.
Title : Block title for display.
Display Title : This option, when active, allows to display the block title.
Title Font : Font applied to the block title.
Font Size : Size of the font applied to the block title.

3
Font Color : Font color for the block title.
Background Color : Background Color of the block title.
Background image : Background image for the block title.
Title Height : Height in pixels of the block title line.
Horizontal Alignment : Horizontal Alignment of the block title (Left, Center and Right).
Vertical Alignment : Vertical Alignment the block title (Top, Middle and Bottom).
Display Label : Display the labels of the fields in the block.
Columns : Amount of field columns in a block.
Columns Width : How the width of the block is defined.
Label Color : Color of the field labels.
Fields Organization : How the fields are organized in the block.
Label Position : Position of the field labels relating to the data.
Next Block : Position of the next block relating to the current block.
Border Color : Border color for the block.
Border Width : Border Width for the block.
Block Width : Width for the block.
Block Height : Height for the block.
Cell Spacing : Cell Spacing in the block.
On this module are available the features of editing, attributes and display of the application, in a way that you can apply display themes, organize blocks, define values and the
format of the Header/Footer and etc.
Layout Settings
On this interface, you can define the theme for display of a specific application, this being because ScriptCase uses a Standard Definition of Values per project, that besides the
Display Theme, allows to define values for other attributes on a Project level.
Application Display Theme
Configuration
Display Configuration
Header Template : Allows to choose the template thats going to be used as the Header of the application.
Footer Template : Allows to choose the template thats going to be used as the Footer of the application.
Button : Allows to choose the button theme for the application.

4
Themes : Choose one of the existing themes, itll load the display mode (colors ,fonts, etc.) thatll be part of the application.
Header & Footer

Header
In this block, its the definition of the variables content thatll be part of the header.
Application Header Configuration
This page may change depending on the header format chosen in the Layout Settings.
Display Header : This option determines if the header will display.
Title : Allows to inform the title displayed in the application.
Header Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, itll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
there are the types of content:
Field : When you choose the option Field, itll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, itll associate the value of the field with the header.
Title : This option when selected itll display in the header the value informed in the Application Title .
Date : When selected the Date type, itll display the systems date in the header. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
the text field that appears beside the field. To access the existing formats, click on the icon and youll view a page display the formats.
Image : When selecting the image type, it displays a field to inform the name of the existing image in the server. To locate the images existing and selecting one, click the icon Choose
Image and to upload new images click on the button Upload .
Value : When selecting the type Value , the content informed in the text field that appears beside, itll be displayed in the header, you can inform texts and Global Variables . e.g.
Employee Name: [v_name].
Depending on the Application, you may have more than one title option.
Footer
Application Footer Configuration
This page may change depending on the footer format chosen in the Layout Settings.
Display Footer : This option determines if the footer will display.
Footer Variables : The field variables can be informed with anyone of displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, itll be necessary to associate the content with the field. Below
Field : When you choose the option Field, itll open a Combo box beside to choose the field you want. Selecting the desired field, itll associate the value of the field with the footer.
Date : When selected the Date type, itll display the systems date in the footer. There are a diversity of formats using the date and time of the server. The format can be informed in
Value : When selecting the type Value , the content informed in the text field that appears beside, itll be displayed in the footer, you can inform texts and Global Variables . e.g.
Menu structure
Using this option you can change the entire menu structure.
5
Drag the selected option to the Menu Items area to create a new Layer where you can add the contents. You can increase or decrease the layer width and also change its
positioning within the Menu items area.
After adding the layer and customize its size you can click on the pencil icon to edit the layer options or click on the trash icon to delete it .
Layer editing
Name : Use this option to set a name for the layer.
Width : Using this option you can manually change the layer size, using percentage. You can also set this value in pixels, however to do that you will need to change the Menu Width option
within the Menu Settings, this value comes in percentage as default from Scriptcase.
Display : This option will set whether to display the layer or not.
Alignment : Using this option you can change the alignment of all layer contents in the Left, Right or Center.
Type : Using this option you select the data type that is going to be displayed in each row of the layer.
Title : If you use the option title it will be displayed the application title, according to the value set on Application Title within the menu Header & Footer.
Date : Using this option you can display a date within the layer, using different dates format. Example: d-m-Y
Image : Using this option you will be able to add an image to your Menu, once selected there will be a link for you to access the Image Manager from Scriptcase to choose a customized
image from your project or upload from your computer.
Value : Here you can inform any text or you to user a global variable from Scriptcase to add dynamic values to the layer such as the logged user, for example: [usr_login].
Library : Using this option you select an External Library from Scriptcase. You can import or create libraries using the option Tools External Libraries from the main menu.
Method : Using this option you can select an application method to apply to the layer. A new method can be created within the menu application using the option PHP Programming
within the menu Programming
Font : Using this option you select a font family from the available in the list. Change the font size and set the text as bold and/or italic.
Background color : Here you change the background color of each row of the layer content.
Font color : In this option you can change the font color that appears in the layer.
Delete : Using this option you can delete the layer line.
Add : Using this option you add another line to the layer.
Close : You close the edit screen of the layer.
Save : You save all changes made to the layer.

1
Events
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID EVENTS
Scriptcase uses the events to enable the developer to customize the application code. Using the events you can program custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a
record is inserted, when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, ) and for a specific application type. In the event areas you can use global and local variables, JavaScript, CSS,
HTML, PHP codes and also Scriptcase macros.
onApplicationInit
This event runs only once, when initializing the application.
onNavigate
This event runs when navigating between pages in the application.
OnScriptInit
This event runs the moment that the scripts of the application is initialized. This is executed before the event OnLoad ( when present ), although, its always executed when
running, reloading or navigating in the application.
onRecord
This event runs the moment that the record line is loading. The evemt OnRecord runs in a loop for each record to be loaded.
onHeader
This event runs in the header of the application.
onFooter
This event runs in the footer of the application.
1
Ajax Events
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
The ajax event OnClick is executed when the field that its based on is clicked.
Creating a new ajax event
Selecting a field
Selecting a field of the ajax event
Choose a field to create an event To define in which field the event will be add to.
Choose an event that run the ajax Defines which event will be added to the field.
1
Buttons
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID BUTTONS
In addition to the buttons that comes automatically with the applications, you can also create your own buttons. All the buttons are displayed within the application toolbar.
New buttons creation settings
Creating a new button

To create a new button, click on the New Button option and enter a name and a button type.
The button Types are: JavaScript, PHP, Link and Run.
Grid buttons type
Deleting a button
To delete a button click on Delete icon (represented by a recycle bin image) in the right of the button name, at the application menu under the Buttons option.
Deleting a button
JavaScript
D I S P L AY M O D E
You can configure the display mode of the javascript button in Image, Button or Link.
Button
Setting up Javascript Button.
Display Mode You can select the display mode for the javascript button in this option.
Label Text of the button thatll be display in the application while executing.
Hint Hint message for the button. (Displayed when the mouse hovers the button).
Confirmation Message Displays a confirmation message when the button is clicked. If not informed this isnt informed, no message will appear.
Type Description of the created button.
2
Image
Icon Allows you to inform the icon thatll be displayed on the button while the execution of the application.
Link
Display Mode You can select the display mode for the ajax button in this option.
CSS Style Name of the CSS class, style created in the layout editor.
Code Block
Javascript button coding block.
In this block, only JavaScript is accepted.
PHP
You can configure the display mode of the PHP button in Image, Button or Link.
Button
Setting up PHP Button.
Display Mode You can select the display mode for the link button in this option.
Reload quantity of records This option is used to update the amount of records in the application.
Target Defines the window destination where the code will run (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal).
3
Image
Link
Code Block
*Ajax button coding block. *
In this block, you can use macros, PHP code and JavaScript.
Link Button
You can configure the display mode of the link button in Image, Button or Link.
Button
Setting up Link Button.
Image

4
Link
Setting up link Button.
Setting up the Link

Selecting the applications
Choosing the application for the button link.
You should select an application to be called from the button link.
Link Parameters
Choosing the parameters for the button link.
Field Allows you to use an existing field from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Variable Allows you to use a global variable from the current application as a parameter for the link.
Fixed Allows you to inform a fixed value as a parameter for the link.
Empty No value will be passed as a parameter for the link.
Link Properties ( Grid )
Configuring the properties for the link button when the destined application is a Grid.
Link Operation Mode How the link will open (Open in the same Window, Open in another Window, Modal ).
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Grid application.
Initial Mode Allows you to define the initial mode of the grid application ( Search or Grid ).
Number of Lines Allows you to define the amount of lines displayed in the Grid.
Number of Columns Allows you to define the amount of columns displayed in the Grid.
Paging Enable the paging in the Grid.
Display Header Enable the Grid Header.
Active Navigation Buttons Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Grid.
Link Properties ( Form )
Configuring the properties for the link button when the destined application is a Form.
Exit URL for the target application URL or an application that be redirect to when exiting the Form application.
Enable insert button on target application Enable the New button in the Form Application.
Enable update button on target application Enable the Update button in the Form Application.
Enable delete button on target application Enable the Delete button in the Form Application.
Enable navigation button on target application Enable the navigation button (First, Back, Next and Last) in the Form.
Enable button to edit a grid record Enable the buttons that allow you to edit the records of a Grid
RUN
D I S P L AY O P T I O N S
We can configure Run Button display as Link, Image or Button:
Button
5
Grids Run Button settings - Button type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose button, image or link.
Label Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
Hint Using this option you can set a message for the button hint
Confirmation
Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you dont need to display a message.
Message
CSS for the the button, if you do not change this option Scriptcase will apply the default application/project CSS. You can customize the buttons CSS using the option within
CSS Style
the main menu Layout CSS Buttons
Reload quantity of
Option used to update the amount of application records.
records
Type Button type description.
Target This option allows you to set the target window where you will run the button code (the same window, other window, modal)
Image
Grids Run Button settings - Image type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose image, button or link.
Icon Button display icon. You can use this option to select an image (from Scriptcase images or from you computer) to represents the button within the application toolbar.
Confirmation Message Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you dont need to display a message.
Reload quantity of records Option used to update the amount of application records.
Tipo Button type description.
Link
Grids Run Button settings - Link type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose link, button or image.
Label Text that will be displayed on the button (on running application).
Hint Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
CSS Style CSS class name, style created in the theme buttons editor .
Coding Area
Grids Run Button settings - Coding area

6
There are two types of events in the Run button
OnRecord : Runs after processing on each record selected.
OnFinish : Runs after processing all records selected.
In this coding area you can use Scriptcase macros, PHP and JavaScript.
1
Detail Module
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID DETAIL MODULE
The Grid Detail Module allows you to organize the information displayed according to its importance. Its a complementary application it displays the data in detailed form. In
order to see the Grid Detail within the Grid the final user needs to click on that is displayed for each record.
To enable the Grid Detail Module, access the Grid Modules and enable the check box, it uses to come enabled by default:
Detail Settings
In this function, the user can define how the detail of a particular record should be displayed when it is selected and which registry information should be displayed in this detail.
Choosing the fields for the detail
Attributes
Fields selection for the detail page. : Allows you to select the desired fields. Just click the field and then click the On/Off button to enable/disable the fields.
Detail Keys
Through this interface you can chose the fields that will be part of the WHERE clause, it will return the corrected information according to the selected record. ScriptCase uses to
identifies the table primary keys, that is being used within the application SQL, automatically. However, Sometimes it is necessary to set the primary key manually, especially in
cases where the application has a SQL JOIN, involving more than one table.
Detail key fields settings
Selecr here the fields that are keys to the Detail. The application will execute another select command, and you can configure which fields will be passed for this WHERE clause:
On/Off : Select the field to be displayed in detail. The selected field (On) gets an asterisk.
All : Check On to all fields.
None : Check Off to all fields.
Desktop Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts
simultaneously.
2
Detail buttons settings
Attributes
Navigation : Navigation Buttons
Exit : Ends or return to the previous application depending on how the Display Detail is configured. You can change the label within the Button Settings.
Exports : Sets the formats for printing generation:

Print : Creates a complete report with all Grid Detail data within a HTML printable page.
PDF : Creates a complete report with all Grid Detail data within a PDF file type.
Othes
Separator : Creates a separation line between the buttons for better display, specially for grouped buttons.
Mobile Toolbar
Detail buttons settings for mobile views
It has the same options of Desktop version, by adding only the item copy of the desktop, in which, when clicked, performs a copy of toolbar items from Desktop to Mobile.
Button Settings
Grid Detail button label settings

3
Label
Header
In this block is where the content variables that will be part of the header is set.
Grid Detail header settings
This screen will change depending on the format chosen header within.
Display Header : This flag determines whether the header is displayed.
Detail Title : Using this option you can set a title for the application, it uses bring a value from the Grid application as default. However it can be customized.
Header Variables : Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, you must associate a content. Below we describe the existing types:
Field : Quando se escolhe a opo do tipo Campo, abrir um Combobox ao lado com os campos que fazem parte do Select. Escolhendo um desses campos, estar associando o
valor do campo para exibio no cabealho.
Title : This option when selected will display in the header the value filled in Detail Title .
Date : When you select the Date type, the system date in the format dd/mm/yyyy will be displayed in the header. There are several display formats using server date and time. The
format can be reported in the text field that appears next. Click in the question mark to check out the available formats.
Image : Quando selecionado o campo tipo imagem, aparece um campo para o preenchimento do nome da imagem existente no servidor. Para localizar as imagens existentes e
selecionar uma, clique no cone Escolher imagem e para disponibilizar novas imagens no servidor clique em Fazer upload de uma imagem .
Value : Quando selecionado o tipo Valor, o contedo preenchido no campo texto que aparece ao lado ser exibido no cabealho, pode ser informado textos e Variveis globais . Ex:
Nome do Funcionrio: [v_nome].
1
Nested Grid
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID NESTED GRID
Subqueries/Nested grids are used when you need to display hierarchical data, such as customers and their respective applications. The main Grid encapsulates other Grids,
showing in each of its subqueries additional data records. Note the image below in which for each customer is displayed a subquery with its applications.
Customer Grud with an order nested grid.
Settings
In the application menu, by clicking on the item folder Configuration Subqueries, can be changed the General attributes of the subqueries.
Nested grid menu.
Nested grid general settings.
Atributos
Title in the same line : This attribute enables you to configure the Nested Grid title display. If it is displayed on the same line, Nested Grid table will be incorporated into the main Grid.
Example using Nested Grid title on the same line.
PDF : This option allows you to enable/disable the nested grid display in PDF reports.
Enable TreeView : This option enables an option to hide/display the Nested Grid within the main Grid records. By choosing Yes, the option Title in the same line will be automatically
disabled.
Using tree view in the Nested Grid.

2
Position : This option allows you to configure the Nested Grid placement in the main Grid. This option is not available if you enable Title in the same line. You will be able to position
the Nested Grid within the records. The options are:
In one column
Displaying the Nested Grid in the same row of the
main Grid record.
Below the record
Displaying the Nested Grid in a separate row of
the main Grid record.
Alignment : Allows you to set the Nested Grid alignment in the main Grid interface when Position is set set as Below the record. The options are: left, right and Center.
Set individually
Any of the attributes that use the value Set individually requires the property to be configured on each created link settings.
Links
To create a Nested Grid link click on the New link within the Link folder.
Creating a new Nested Grid
Adding a new Nested Grid : Enter the name and the label for the link that will be created.
Adding a new Nested Grid
Application list : All Grid applications from current project, that contain global variables, will be listed.
Grid application selection.
For an application to be used as a Nested Grid, it must have within its SQL command (Grid > SQL) a WHERE clause with a global variable to receive the parameters from the main Grid.
SQL query configuration to the Grid be used as Nested Grid.

3
Parameters setting : Setting the value that will be passed to the variable(s) of the Nested Grid SQL statement.
Informing the parameter to the variable
In the screen above, on the left side, it is displayed the Nested Grid input parameters (global variables created within the Nested Grid WHERE clause), on the right side, you must
select the parameter option. The options are:
Attributes
Field : Used to assign a Grid field value as a parameter.
Fix : Used to assign a fixed value as a parameter.
Empty : Choosing this option will not be assigned any value as a parameter.
Save button : By clicking this button the Nested Grid creation will be completed and saved.
Editing an existing Nested Grid link

All Nested Grid links created will placed within its menu options, inside the folder Links. By clicking on the Nested Grid name there will be an interface for settings edition.
Editing a Nested Grid
General settings
Nested Grid general settings
This interface can be used to edit the following Nested Grid attributes:
Label : Nested Grid title for the application
Link : In this attribute are displayed the current Nested Grid connection data, showing the application and parameters used. To change any link attribute just click to edit Link.
Display : This attribute allows you to set which Nested Grid items, if it uses any of these resources, will be displayed in the main Grid.
Display settings
* __1__ : Display Title.

* __2__ : Sequential display (number line).
* __3__ : Display Totals.
Inherit view : When marked it sets that the Nested Grid view will be equal to that of the main Grid.
Set individually
If the value of one of the attributes in the Nested Grid settings has been selected as Set Individually, these values must be configured in the Nested Grid editing screen for each
called link.
4
Nested Grid settings.
Display settings
These options will only appear if all of the following conditions are true:
Attribute Value
Title in the same line No
Enable Tree view No
Position In one column
Nested Grid display settings
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid horizontal alignment. It can be aligned left, right or Center.
Vertical Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.
Background color : Here you can set the background color. If it is not filled it will get the Grid default background color.
Title horizontal alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label horizontal alignment. It can be aligned Left, Right or Center.
Title vertical alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.
Bold : This option sets the Nested Grid title (label) in bold.
1
Sorting Rules
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID SORTING RULES
Sorting rules settings
Attributes
Sorting rules sorting : Allows you to change the sort display of the sorting rules. To configure this option, an icon is displayed (set up ordering) that when clicked allows the choice of the
field and your display order ascending (ASC) or descending (DESC) .
Integrate sorting rules : This option allows you to set whether to use the sorting rules together with the regular sorting options or not. You can choose the display options between:
Sorting Fields/Rules(default) : This option allows you to apply the rules that have been created together with the regular fields sorting (descending or ascending)
Sorting Fields : This option allows you to apply the fields sorting only, discarding the sorting rules (descending or ascending)
Sorting Rules : This option allows you to apply the sorting only according to the rules that have been created, discarding the fields sorting.
Creating a Sorting Rule
Adding sorting Rule interface
Attribute
Name : Field to inform the new rule name.
Label : Field to inform the name that will be displayed in the application.
Setting up a sorting Rule
Sorting rule configuration interface..
Attributes
Label : This option allows you to enter a name that will be displayed when the application is executed.
Select the fields for a sorting rule : Allows you to select through the selection bar which fields will be displayed (fields that are in the frame at the right side) and the fields will not be
displayed (fields that are in the left side frame). To sort the fields the way you want, use the sort bar located on the right side of the frame. To apply the sorting type to the field, simply
select the straight side frame field and select the Ascending mode, where displays a + or a - by the field side to indicate if the sort order is Descending.
1
Refined Search
HOME APPLICATIONS REFINED SEARCH
The refined search is a feature where you can integrate a search interface, next to the Grid, limiting values according to a universe that exists in the connected database.
Grid application running with refined search activated
Settings
Refined search settings
Attributes
Move searched above : When you filter by a field, this field will be moved to the top of the refined search stack.
Show quantity : Alongside the values of the fields, you will see the existing amount. Ex.: Brazil (1547)
Start mode : This option sets whether the fields select options will start open or closed.
Minimum width : This option sets the minimum width for the refined search fields, value in pixels.
Maximum width : This option sets the maximum width for the refined search fields, value in pixels.
Minimum height : This option sets the minimum height for the refined search fields results, value in pixels.
Maximum height : This option sets the maximum height for the refined search fields results, value in pixels.
Select fields
Refined Search fields
The refined search is automatically added to the Grid application when one or more Grid fields are selected in the tab select fields.
2
Selecting fields of refined search
Edit fields
In the tab Edit fields, you can configure each field according to what you need to display within the application.
Refined Search fields edition
Attributes
Fields : Listing of selected fields in the tab select fields.
Range : This option activate a slider with intervals between the smallest and largest value.
Increment : When using the range this option will set an integer value to increase the range.
Show value : When checked, displays the range values in the slider.
Multi select : Enables multiple selection values to perform the filter.
Start opened : This option sets the initial mode for fields selection display in refined search.
See more : When checked, enables the option to see more for the filter records. This is recommended when the selected field has a big amount of records. You will be able to click to
see more or see less
Quantity : This option sets the initial amount of records to be displayed for each field selected.
Date : This option sets the date format that is displayed in the date fields inside the filter.
Sorting : This option sets the records sorting for each selected field
Message for empty fields : This option sets a message to be displayed when the field has empty values. You can also use a variable from Scriptcase language system.
1
Refined Search
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID REFINED SEARCH
Settings
Attributes
Select fields
2
Edit fields
Attributes
1
Group By
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID GROUP BY
Group By Settings
These are the general settings of the Grid Group By, independently of its type, static or dynamic. Here we can define some group by viewing options, such as the use of treeview,
for example.
The option Enable TreeView isnt available in the Infinite Scroll.
Enable TreeView : Defines the use of TreeView in breaks, which in turn allows you to expand or collapse the records displayed in Group by.
Group By Line : Sets the positioning of group by in relation to group records. The options are Before the records or After the records.
Group By Header : Lets you display the break header on all pages.
Group By sorting : It allows to order the fields respecting the group by.
Display Titles : Allows the label display of the fields within the groups.
Record count title : Sets a title for the records quantity column.
Value Separator : Define the separator between the title and the field value in the GROUP BY.
Tab a Group By : Sets the left margin of Group By. The value must be informed in pixel.
Separates the Group By : Sets the spacing between two Group By. The value must be informed in pixel.
Dynamic Group By
In this screen we define the fields available in Dynamic Group By and will be summarized in Grid and Summary when the Dynamic Group By is used.
Select Fields
In this screen we define the fields available in the Dynamic Group By and will be summed in the query and summary when the dynamic break is used.
This Group By works independently of any other Group By configuration or totals already performed, that is, the fields defined to be summarized in the Grid or summary in the
Dynamic Group will be visible only when the Dynamic Group is used.
We will be able to see all available fields for the Group By configuration and totals in the Grid Fields.
The Use Dynamic Group By option enables the Group By in the run-time application.
Fields used when using the Grid must be configured to be displayed on the Grid.
2
Grid Fields : List of all the fields of the application.
Group By Fields : Defines the fields that are part of the Group By.
Grid Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Grid Totals.
Summary Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Summary Totals.
Group By Fields
We must drag and drop the fields that will be part of the group by in Group By Fields .
Each field can only be added once to the Group By Fields , except for the date and datetime fields .
D AT E A N D D AT E T I M E F I E L D S
For date and datetime fields, some display intervals have been added, so these fields can be added two or more times to the group by.
3
All Grid fields can be added to the totalizer, the only difference being the functions available. Numeric fields can use all the available summarization functions, since the non-
numeric fields can use only the count and the different count.
The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Grid > Totals > Fields > Dynamic Group By
Summary Totals
The fields added to the Summary totals will only be visible in Summary at the time Dynamic Group By is used.
4
The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Summary > Fields > Dynamic Group By
Fields
The fields added to the Grid Fields will be listed within the Fields folder so that they can be edited individually.
General Settings
C AT E G O R I E S : T E X T A N D B A R C O D E
Data Type: Defines the datatype of the field in the HTML.
Group by label : Defines a label of the fields displayed in the Group By.
Case Settings: Converts the text according to the selected option.

Upper Case: Transforms the text in upper case.
Lower Case : Transforms the text in lower case.
Capitalize first word : It transforms the first word in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this
option will make upper case only the first word.
Capitalize all words : Transforms all words in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this option will
transform upper case into all words.
Field Mask : On this field youll setup the display mask according to the table informed in Applications > Grid > Fields > Text.
SQL Type: Informs the data type of the field in the database.
C AT E G O R I E S : N U M B E R A N D C A L C U L AT E D
C AT E G O R I E S : S P E C I A L A N D D AT E / T I M E

5
Lookup Settings
This option is available in the fields of the categories: Text, Number, Calculated, Special and Barcode.
On this option, its possible to setup the display lookup for the fields cited above. For more information about using the Grid Lookup, access Application > Grid > Fields > Text.
Values Format
NUMBER TYPE
Regional Settings : When active, you can apply the Regional Settings to this field. To modify the setting, access Locales > Regional Settings in the Scriptcase Menu.
Color of Negative : In this field youll inform the color value in hexadecimal. (Example: #000000)
CURRENCY TYPE
Currency Symbol: When activating this option, the application will display the currency symbol according to the Regional Settings.
Decimal Precision : Amount of decimal that your field will be displaying.
Complete with Zeros : Activating this option will allow the application to complete the value after the coma with zeros.
D AT E T Y P E
Display: In this field youll select how will the field will display its self.
Group By Settings
Attributes
Field Position : Defines how the information contained in the group by line will displayed and organized.
Columns : Defines the amount of columns information contained in the group by line will displayed and organized.
Display Label : Defines if the field label will be displayed.
Line break : Displays or not the the Group By line with the value divied in another line.
Records amount : Defines whether the group by row will display the number of group records.
Break PDF Page (Grid) : Defines if the PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages.
Break PDF Page (Summary) : Defines if the Summary PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages. .
Break HTML Page (Grid) : Displays each Grid Group By in a different HTML page.
Break HTML Page (Summary) : Displays each Summary Group By in a different HTML page.
Start TreeView : Defines the inital state of the TreeView.
Sorting : If this option is set to Yes, the selected fields will sorted without needing to be clicked on, the sorting will be done respecting the criterias of the Group By.
Fields : Defines which fields are going to displayed in the Group By row. Its also possible to define if its going to be displayed in the Totals or in the Summary of this field by selecting
Value or Sum, before clicking on the button On/Off.
6
Group By Line Layout (Label)
Layout configuration of the Group By Label.
Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font thats going to be used in the Label.
Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Label.
Font Color : Font color for the Group By Label.
Background Color : Group By background Color.
Bold Text : Defines if the label will have a Bold Text.
Group By Line Layout (Value)

Layout configuration of the Group By Value.
Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font thats going to be used in the Value.
Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Value.
Font Color : Font color for the Group By Value.
Bold Text : Defines if the value will have a Bold Text.
Static Group By
This type of Group By is configured by the developer, where the end user can select one of the predefined group by available in the application.
Settings
These configuration affect the Static Group By.
Static Group By Settings
Use empty Group By : Configuration used when you want the Grid to be initialized without any Group By.
Title of the empty Group By : Defines a title for the empty Group By option. (Available only when the previous option is enabled)
Initial Group By : Defines the group by used when initializing the generated application.
Sorting Groups Settings
Defines the order that the group bys will be displayed in the Grid.
New Group By
Interface to create the static group by.
7
Name: Defines the internal name of the group by, used by ScriptCase.
Label: Defines the displayed name of the group by, thatll be displayed in the application.
Grid Fields : List of all the fields of the application.
Group By Fields : Defines the fields that are part of the Group By.
Grid Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Grid Totals.
Summary Totals : Defines the fields that are part of the Summary Totals.
Group By Fields
You need to drag and drop the fields thatll be part of the Group By in the Group By Fields .
Each field can only be added once to the Group By Fields , except for the date and datetime fields .
D AT E A N D D AT E T I M E F I E L D S
For date and datetime fields, some display intervals have been added, so these fields can be added two or more times to the group by.
8
Grid Totals
The fields added in this total will be visible only in the Grid (if the total field is visible in the Grid) at the time that the group by is used.
The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Grid > Totals > Fields > Dynamic Group By
Summary Totals
The fields added to the Summary totals will only be visible in Summary at the time Dynamic Group By is used.
9
The fields configured in this totals can be edited in Summary > Fields > Dynamic Group By
Edit Group By
After the creation, the group by are listed in the Static Group By folder, below the Settings item.
Expanding the Group By Folder, youll see the settings icon, where you can edit the entire group by.
You can also view the fields used in the group by, that can be edited independently from the Grid Layout, see the following:
Fields
The fields added to the Grid Fields will be listed within the Fields folder so that they can be edited individually.
General Settings
C AT E G O R I E S : T E X T A N D B A R C O D E
Case Settings: Converts the text according to the selected option.

Upper Case: Transforms the text in upper case.
10
Lower Case : Transforms the text in lower case.
Capitalize first word : It transforms the first word in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this
option will make upper case only the first word.
Capitalize all words : Transforms all words in the upper case or lower case, according to the text retrieved, that is, if the text retrieved by the application is in lower case, this option will
transform upper case into all words.
C AT E G O R I E S : N U M B E R A N D C A L C U L AT E D
C AT E G O R I E S : S P E C I A L A N D D AT E / T I M E
Lookup Settings
This option is available in the fields of the categories: Text, Number, Calculated, Special and Barcode.
On this option, its possible to setup the display lookup for the fields cited above. For more information about using the Grid Lookup, access Application > Grid > Fields > Text.
Values Format
NUMBER TYPE
CURRENCY TYPE
Currency Symbol: When activating this option, the application will display the currency symbol according to the Regional Settings.
11
Decimal Precision : Amount of decimal that your field will be displaying.
Complete with Zeros : Activating this option will allow the application to complete the value after the coma with zeros.
D AT E T Y P E
Display: In this field youll select how will the field will display its self.
Group By Settings
Attributes
Field Position : Defines how the information contained in the group by line will displayed and organized.
Columns : Defines the amount of columns information contained in the group by line will displayed and organized.
Display Label : Defines if the field label will be displayed.
Line break : Displays or not the the Group By line with the value divied in another line.
Records amount : Defines whether the group by row will display the number of group records.
Break PDF Page (Grid) : Defines if the PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages.
Break PDF Page (Summary) : Defines if the Summary PDF file, generated by the GRID, will contain each group by printed in a new page.
Ex. In a report you can have some orders where they can be displayed on different pages. .
Break HTML Page (Grid) : Displays each Grid Group By in a different HTML page.
Break HTML Page (Summary) : Displays each Summary Group By in a different HTML page.
Start TreeView : Defines the inital state of the TreeView.
Sorting : If this option is set to Yes, the selected fields will sorted without needing to be clicked on, the sorting will be done respecting the criterias of the Group By.
Fields : Defines which fields are going to displayed in the Group By row. Its also possible to define if its going to be displayed in the Totals or in the Summary of this field by selecting
Value or Sum, before clicking on the button On/Off.
Group By Line Layout (Label)
Layout configuration of the Group By Label.
Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font thats going to be used in the Label.
Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Label.
Font Color : Font color for the Group By Label.
Background Color : Group By background Color.
Bold Text : Defines if the label will have a Bold Text.
Group By Line Layout (Value)
Layout configuration of the Group By Value.
Attributes
Font Style : Defines the font thats going to be used in the Value.
Font Size : Defines the size of the font used in the Group By Value.
Font Color : Font color for the Group By Value.
Bold Text : Defines if the value will have a Bold Text.
Events
These events are only available for static group by.
The OnGroupByAll event occurs after running the group by, that allows you to manipulate the totals variables.
Total variables are created based on the fields selected for group by and totals.
The following is an example of the available variables:

12
Assuming that an application has a group by state and city and two summarization per parcel and balance, the following summarization variables are available:
{count_ger} Contains the total number of records.

{sum_parcel} Contains the general sum of the parcel field.
{sum_balance} Contains the overall sum of the balance field.
{count_state} Contains the total amount of records, from the state group by being processed.
{sum_parcel_state} Contains the general sum of the state field and the parcel field that are being processed.
{sum_balance_state} Contains the general sum of the balance field and the parcel field that are being processed.
{count_city} Contains the total number of records, of the city group by being processed.
{sum_parcel_city} Contains the general sum of the parcel and city field that are being processed.
{sum_balance_city} Contains the general sum of the balance and city fields that are being processed.
To access the summarization variables by group, simply replace the group by name with Group By . Example: {sum_balance_city} for {sum_quebra_balance}
{count_quebra} The total number of records by the group by being processed.

{sum_quebra_parcel} Contains the general sum of the parcel field, of the group by being processed.
{sum_quebra_balance} Contains the sum total of the balance field, of group by being processed.
Example:
In an application that has group by by state and city and totals a balance field in group by totals, we want to display the average in place of the balance. A method is created in the
OnGroupByAll event, with the following content:
{sum_quebra_balance} = {sum_quebra_balance} / {count_quebra};

1
Grid totals
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID GRID TOTALS
The total fields will be displayed only when the Grid application is using at least one Group By.
Settings
The settings below can be applied for the Grid totals only.
Results in a single line. : This option sets the Grand total label and its results to be displayed in just one line.
Example for this option Enabled :
Example for this option Disabled:
Display Total : This option indicates in which pages the Grand total will be displayed. The options are: On every page , On the last page or Do not display . * Group Subtotal : If this option is
enabled, there will be subtotal after each Group By selected.
Record Count : This option allows you to view the amount of records by the Grand Total title.
Example for this option Enabled : :
Example for this option Disabled:
Select fields
Using the select fields area you can set the total fields ant the total options for each field. The same field can be used more than once in the Grid totals area, just if they are using
different summaries types.
To define the fields that will be used for totals, drag them to the area, Grid Totals .
2
Note: The total fields will only be displayed if they are also selected to be displayed within the Grid application module.
When positioning the fields, you must define what summarization will be used, to select that you must click in the combo box and select one of the available options, that will be
according to the data type (integer, date, text).
The summarization options available are:
Sum : Sets a sum of the values for the selected field.
Maximum : Displays the highest value identified in the selected field.
Minimum : Displays the lowest value identified in the selected field.
Average (Avg) : Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values for the selected field.
Variance : Calculates the dispersion of the values related to the average.
Standard Deviation : Measures the variability of values around the average, the minimum value of the standard deviation is 0 indicating that there is variability, i.e. that all values are equal to
the mean.
Weighted mean (WAvg) : Calculates the weighted average for the selected field. To set the weight used in the calculation of the average access field settings selected in Totals > Fields (select
the field where you are using the Weighted mean) > Weighted average weight.
Weighted average weight : Field that will be used as weighted average weight. In calculating the weighted average, each set value is multiplied by its weight, that is its relative
importance.
Count : Displays the total number of records for the selected field.
Distinct Count : Displays the total number of records for the selected field, distinguishing the values.
Important note: The fields in the Grid totals are displayed only on Grids with no Group by or with empty Group by.
Positioning
Defines the positioning and the label used by Grid totals. There are three display formats,, Default, Grouped or By field
Default
To add the same field two or more times in the Totals or use different types of summaries in selected fields, this option will not be displayed.
The option Default returns the result below the column being summarized. When you use the total for more than one column of the Grid, using the same type of summarization,
the results are displayed on the same line.
The line with Grand total displaying the order value .
ALIGNMENT
This option is available for display formats Default and Grouped .
Defines the placement of the label selected within the Setting > Display total option. The alignment can be in the Center, Left e Right:
Left :
3
Right :
Center :
LABEL SETTINGS (DEFAULT)
This option allow you to customize the total labels.
As default we are going to display Grant total
Grouped
The option Grouped returns the total result, separating each type per line.
It is possible to position the total lines by dragging to the desired position.
In this example, we are displaying the sum, average, and maximum of column Order value.
ALIGNMENT
This option is available for display formats Default and Grouped .
Defines the placement of the label selected within the Setting > Display total option. The alignment can be in the Center, Left e Right:
Left :
Right :
Center :
LABEL SETTINGS (GROUPED)

4
By field
This option displays the values in the left corner by positioning the results next to each other.
LINE BREAK PER FIELD
This option sets the total fields display. If selected it shows the fields in the same row or divided by line.
Separated by line:
Displayed on the same line:
LABEL SETTINGS (BY FIELD)
Fields
This option allows you to configure the display of values and labels of the selected fields in the Grid totals.
General Settings
Allows you to change the label displayed in the totals
Visual configuration for the Grid totals
Sets the formatting of the fields displayed in the subtotal for the group.
5
Font family : Sets the font used.
Font size : Sets the font size.
Text color : Sets the text color
Background color : Sets the background color.
Bold : Format text in bold.
Example of formatting the subtotal for the Group:
Grand total Visual setting
Sets the formatting of the fields displayed in the Grid Grand total.
Font family : Sets the font used.
Font size : Sets the font size.
Text color : Sets the text color
Background color : Sets the background color.
Bold : Format text in bold.
Example of formatting the Grid Grand total

1
Summary
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID SUMMARY
Settings
Summary General Settings.
SUMMARY SETTINGS
Title : Defines a title for the summary, if not informed the default title will be Summary. For no title to be displayed, enter the HTML tag .
Quantity Title : Title Amount of Record.
Record Count :
Do not display : Dont display the totals by group by.
Display only in the summary : Displays in the summary, total records by group by.
Display only in the summary and charts : Shows in summary, the total records by group by and provides the chart.
Horizontal Total: Show horizontal total for summaries of matrix type.
Vertical Total: Display vertical total for summaries of matrix type.
The chart icon positioning : Chart icon positioning (left or right).
Positioning of the Total icon : Total icon position (left or right).
Page Width : Width value for the summary page.
Width unit : Unit of measure used for width. Auto (width value is ignored), pixels and percentage.
Display SubTotal label : Displays the Total label or the Value itself.
Display line number : Display the sequence number of the record in the summary.
Display the hover on the Summary lines : Apply the hover attribute by hovering the mouse cursor over the summary lines.
L AY O U T S E T T I N G S
You can define the layout of the summary for each type of group by.
Group By Field : Group by fields selected in the Grid.
Position : Defines whether to use the x-axis or y-axis position.
Sorting: Sets the sorting by the database value or by the display value.
Fill Empty Labels : Defines whether the empty labels will be filled.
Link Grid : Creates a link in the selected field.
Alignment : Sets the layout alignment type to center, left, or right.
Tabular format: Sets the summary to the tabular format.
Toolbar
2
The toolbar is divided into two parts, top and bottom, so you can define which buttons will be displayed in both places. Button selection works independently.
you can also define which buttons will be displayed when the application is accessed by a mobile device, just access the Mobile tab.
For more information about the toolbar, access Application > Grid > Toolbar.
Group Label
Click on Add Row, so that the group label can be added.
With this option, you can enter one or more titles for the columns of your applications.
If you have dynamic display fields, Group Label will not work.
To merge two or more cells, click the icon positioned between them.
To add a title, click the pencil icon to add a title.
Title Lets you set the title that will be displayed in your Group Label.
Font Allows you to set the font type of the title of your group label.
Font Size Lets you set the font size of the title of your group label.
Horizontal alignment Lets you set the horizontal alignment of the title of your group label. Being left, center or right.
Vertical alignment Lets you set the horizontal alignment of the title of your group label. Being middle, low or top.
Font Color Lets you set the color of the title text of your group label.
Background Color Lets you set the background color of the space where the title of your group label will be displayed.
Sorting
you can define the fields in which you wish to allow the sorting, when executing the application.
This configuration must be performed in each of the application group by.

3
Fields : Select the fields that you want to allow sorting.
Default sorting column : Select a field for initial sorting in the summary.
Sorting Order : Choose whether the sort will be ascending or descending.
Sorting from the Group By : Select one of the group by for initial sorting.
Limit
Lets you limit the amount of records to be retrieved from SQL and displayed in the summary.
This option is only available for static group by.
Field: Defines the field that will be used to perform the limit.
Summarization: Defines the summarization function in which the limit will be performed.
Limit type: Sets the sorting that the limit will be applied, DESC or ASC.
Quantity: Sets the amount of records that will be returned.
Charts
One of the modules of the Grid application is the charts, which in turn are generated based on Grid summary information.
Scriptcase charts are generated in HTML5.
Chart Settings
In the settings screen, you can edit the settings of all available charts.
To edit the specific settings for each chart, select the chart you want to edit.
To define the available charts when running the application, check the box next to the name of the charts.
4
Below you will detail the specific settings of each of the charts.
Barras
Font Size : Sets the font size in the chart. Enter only the font size, for example: 15.
Abbreviated value : Defines whether or not the values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.
Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart.
Bar - Orientation: Orientao das barras vertical ou horizontal no chart.
Bar - width (between 20 and 70) : You can set the width from 20 to 70.
Bar - Value orientation : The orientation of the chart is defined and can be placed vertically.
Bar - Value position : You can choose where the value will position itself.
Bar - Dimension: Bar Dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart.
Bar - Stacking : Stack the Bars in a single Bar (In series).
Bar - Series group : Group the Bar chart in series.
Pie
Pie - Format : Pie or Donut format.
Pie - Dimension: Dimension of the Pie chart.
Pie - Sorting: Ordering the Pie chart.
Pie - Values format : Formatting the displayed data.
Line
Line - Shape : Line Format
Line - Series group : Line grouping type.
Area
Area - Shape : Format of the area displayed on the chart.
Area - Stacking : Stack the areas on the chart.
Area - Series group : Group the chart in series.
Gauge
Gauge - Shape : Display format of the chart.
Radar
Funnel
Funnel - Dimension : Funnel dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart.
Pyramid
Subtitled : Sets the subtitled position of the chart. Pyramid - Dimension : Dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart. Pyramid - Values format : Formatting the displayed data. Pyramid - Sliced : Display
format of the chart.
5
Below are the settings common to all chart types.
Summary chart type : Defines how the charts will be generated: analytical, synthetic, or both.
Synthetic They should restrict themselves to the first group by the condition and allow the user to use the links to see details of the next set of criteria, increasing the level of detail.
Analytical They appear with the whole group by criteria, creating a complete detailed chart that does not allow the linking of other detailed charts.
Create link on the chart : Allows the charts to have a link in their elements for detailed grid applications or charts. The data shown will be relative to the value clicked on the chart.
Axis of Chart General Total : Option to display the chart of the grand total as column or row.
Display Y-Axis With Zero. : Force display of the zero value on the Y axis.
Label orientation on the x-axis : Sets the orientation of the labels on the X axis to vertical or horizontal. If the horizontal option is chosen and there are many values to be displayed so that
they do not fit in the scale, the orientation will be automatically changed to vertical. This option is only available for charts of type: Column, line and area.
Chart Width : Width in pixels of the generated charts.
Chart Height : Height in pixels of the charts generated.
Values sorting : Sort the values of the charts.
Column Charts
you can define the display of the column charts as well as the label for the chart and the axes. These settings are set individually for each group by.
If the user sets up more than one field, the analytical chart will only generate with the first two.
Line charts (totals)
The use of line chart (totalization) configuration is only available when you have group by with at least two fields.
To configure this option, go to the group by menu and create a static group by some fields or add fields to dynamic group by.
Layout
The chart theme tool enables you to fully edit chart themes.
These themes can be set only for the current application, when changed in the application itself or for all charts when these settings are performed in the charts editor.
For more information, access Layout > Chart Themes.
Fields
6
All fields added in the summary totals, in the dynamic group by or in the static group by, will be listed here separated by the group by name.
General Settings
General settings of totalized fields in the summary.
Data Type: Defines the data type for the field.
Label: Defines the label for the displayed field in the summary.
Values Formatting
NUMBER TYPE
Regional Settings : When you activate it you apply the regional settings for this field. To configure them, click on the menu Locales > Regional Settings.
Color of Negative: In this field you can enter a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
DECIMAL TYPE
Color of Negative : In this field you can enter a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places your field will have on display.
Complete with Zeros : Enables the field value to be filled with zeros.
CURRENCY TYPE
Currency Format : When you enable this option the application will display the currency symbol according to the regional setting.
Color of Negative : In this field you can enter a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
Decimal Precision : Number of decimal places your field will have on display.
Complete with Zeros : Enables the field value to be filled with zeros.
V I S U A L S E T T I N G S O F T O TA L I Z AT I O N I N G R O U P B Y
Font : Allows you to define the font used in the group by label.
Font Size : Allows you to set the font size used in the group by label.
Font Color : Label color in group by.
Background Color : Group by background color.
Bold Text : Enables or disables the group by label in bold.
Text Alignment : Sets the horizontal positioning of text.
Vertical text alignment : Sets the vertical positioning of text.
V I S U A L S E T T I N G S O F T H E G E N E R A L T O TA L
Font : Allows you to define the font used in the group by label.
Font Size : Allows you to set the font size used in the group by label.
Font Color : Label color in group by.
Background Color : Group by background color.
Bold Text : Enables or disables the group by label in bold.
Text Alignment : Sets the horizontal positioning of text.
Vertical text alignment : Sets the vertical positioning of text.
Layout
HEADER
In this configuration, you can define the information that will be displayed in the header and footer of the summary.
7
This screen may vary depending on the header format you choose within the Display folder.
Display Header : This flag determines whether the header will be displayed.
Summary Title: Lets you enter a title to be displayed in the application.
Variables : Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox, depending on the type you need to associate a content with the required one. Below you describe the
existing types:
Field: When the Field option is chosen, it will open a Combobox next to the fields that are part of the Select. By choosing one of these fields, you are associating the value of the field
to display in the Header or Footer.
Date : When Date type is selected, the system date in mm/dd/yyyy format will be displayed in the Application Header or Footer. There are several display formats using the date
and time of the server. The format can be entered in the text field next to it. To access existing formats click on and an explanatory window will appear.
Image : When the image type field is selected, a field for filling in the image name on the server appears. To locate the existing images and select one, click on the Choose Image
icon and to make new images available on the server click on Upload .
Value : When Value type is selected, the content that is filled in the text field next to option, appears in the Header or Footer. You can enter texts and Global variables . Ex:
FOOTER
This screen may vary depending on the Footer format you choose within the Display folder.
Display Footer: This flag determines whether the Footer will be displayed in the application.
Variables: Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox, depending on the type you need to associate a content with the required one. Below
you describe the existing types:
Field: When the Field option is chosen, it will open a Combobox next to the fields that are part of the Select. By choosing one of these fields, you are associating the value of the field
to display in the Header or Footer.
Date : When Date type is selected, the system date in mm/dd/yyyy format will be displayed in the Application Header or Footer. There are several display formats using the date
and time of the server. The format can be entered in the text field next to it. To access existing formats click on and an explanatory window will appear.
Image : When the image type field is selected, a field for filling in the image name on the server appears. To locate the existing images and select one, click on the Choose Image
icon and to make new images available on the server click on Upload .
Value : When Value type is selected, the content that is filled in the text field next to option, appears in the Header or Footer. You can enter texts and Global variables . Ex:
Search
To define the fields that will be used in the summary search, use drag-and-drop to position the fields within Search Fields.
The order of the fields, within Search Fields, will be the display order in the generated application.
This search works only in Grid summary.

8
Editing Fields
The same field can be added more than once to the search, these fields will be visible in the generated application since it uses distinct settings, if they are using the same
configuration only one of the fields will be displayed.
The display settings of the fields are performed individually, and can be accessed by adding the field in the search and clicking edit.
you will separate the explanation of the display settings from the fields according to the types.
Types: Text/Special
Configuration interface for text and special fields.
Choose Component
you must define how the field is used in the search. Each field type, text, number, and date have different configuration options.
Search field label : Defines the label of the field that will be displayed in the search.
Choose component type : It defines the format of use of the fields in the search, for text fields you have the Select Box and the Multiselect box.
Lookup
In this tab, you can configure the display lookup in the search field. For more information on creating a view lookup, access Application > Grid > Fields > Text.
Types: Date/Time
Configuration interface for date and date time fields.
Choose Component
Choose component type : Defines the format of use of the fields in the search, for fields date and datetime, youwill have the following options: Date Range, Actual Period, Relative Period and
Seasonal Period.
C H O O S E V A L U E S - D AT E R A N G E
For datetime fields, you must enable the option Include Time so that the hours can be included in the search.
9
CHOOSE VALUES - ACTUAL PERIOD
You must define the period that will be used in the search. When running the application, you will have a select with the dates displayed according to the selected period.
C H O O S E V A L U E S - R E L AT I V E P E R I O D
You must define which periods are available for use in the search.
CHOOSING VALUES - SEASONAL PERIOD
The available values are separated by tabs:
Quarter: Defines the quarters used in the search.
Month: Defines the usage of the months of the year.
Week : Defines the usage of the weeks of the year.
Week Day : Defines the use of the days of the week.
Day: Defines the usage of the days of the month.
Only Time: Defines the use of the day time (Available only in the datetime field)
Types: Number
Configuration interface for numeric fields.
Choose Component
Choose function to apply : Defines the function that will be used in the search for setting the value. For example, when choosing sum, the range is the range between the lowest and the result
of the sum greater.
Actual Values : This option sets the display of the actual value of the field, saved in the database, without the use of any of the aggregate functions. When using this option, two types of
searches, select box and Multiselect box usage are added, as well as enabling lookup settings for numeric fields.
10
Choose component type : Define the format used for the fields in the search, for numeric fields, you have the Range and selecting Actual Values will be displayed Select Box and Multiselect
box.
Lookup
For numeric fields, this option is available only when you use the Actual Values option and the way the field is used in the search is Select box or Multiselect box .
In this tab, you can create a display lookup in the search field. For more information about creating view lookup, go to Application > Grid > Fields > Integer.
1
Search options
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID SEARCH OPTIONS
Settings
In the area below you can define all the options thatll be part of the of the Search Form.
Search configuration Interface.
Attributes
Search Criteria : Allows to select the SQL command AND or OR to define the criteria of the search used;
Display Condition : Displays the condition of the search for the user to choose. In this case AND or OR will display in the search form, so that the user can choose the desired option.
Use auto-complete in the fields : The field turns into an autocomplete automatically according to the existing values in the database, If the user chooses Yes, the autocomplete will enable
automatically in all the fields that contain a relationship. If the user chooses No no autocompletes will be displayed. In the case the option selected is Defined in the field itll respect the
configuration individually for each field.
Search Criteria
In this interface, you can configure the conditions for each field of the Search form when filtering the SQL, on the left combo is displayed the field. The combo on the right are
listed the options for filtering the selected field, to select the options just click on them (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains and etc.) and the button On/Off. The arrows on the
right allows to alter the order of the fields.
For the Date type fields, you can define special conditions for the search, accessing the field configurations and editing the Special Conditions Settings.
Below the list are the buttons to enable the selected options:
On/Off : Enables or disables the field or the selected option.
All : Marks all fields or options.
None : Un marks all the fields or options.
Advanced Search
Settings
Through the table below we set all the options that will be part of the application Grid Search.
2
Search Configuration Interface.
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to define the horizontal alignment for the Search Form.
Margins : Allows to position the margins of the Search Form.
Keep Values : When enabled, the values from the search is maintained when the user returns to the search form.
Keep Columns and Order Selection : allows you to determine whether, at each filter, the values selected for the query and sort fields must be preserved, that is, at each filter, these
values return to the original condition.
Select fields
*Interface for filter fields selection.
Required
Defines which fields of application will be required for the search.
Required fields interface.
The application generated will be displayed a bullet (*) next to the field and an error message is generated if not assigned no value.
Configuration interface of the marker placement.
Marker position : Markers position relative to the field.
Display message : Displays whether or not the validation error message.
Toobar
Desktop
The toolbar of the application is divided in two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way thats possible to define the buttons thatll be displayed in both bars. The selection of buttons in
the top and bottom toolbar work independently allowing the buttons to display in both bars at the same time.
3
Toolbar Interface.
Toolbar (Top / Bottom) : Allows to select and order buttons thatll be displayed in the Search toolbar, according to what you desire. In this case, you just need to use the arrows beside the list
of buttons.
BUTTON SETTINGS
Button Settings Interface.
Button : References a Button from the toolbar.
Label : Allows to modify the Buttons label.
Hint : Allows to apply a Hint to the button.
Shortcut key : Allows to define shortcuts to the button from the keyboard.
OPTIONS
Options Interface.
Button Position(Top / Bottom) Positioning the buttons of the toolbar Top / Bottom.
Mobile
Save Search
This feature allows to organize search profiles, it creates an option Save Filter in a Search application, this way its possible to save the search done previously. You can add some
rules. With these details you can save a search done by the user login.
Save Filter Interface.

4
Events
In event blocks can be used global variables, local, JavaScript code, CSS codes and Scriptcase macros.
ONSCRIPTINIT
ONREFRESH
This event runs when the refresh option of the application is enabled.
ONSAVE
This event runs when the application saves the record.
O N V A L I D AT E
This event runs when validating the information of the fields, when submitting the form.
Layout
BLOCKS
current one.
On the left side of each block there are two icons, first has the function to edit all the information relative to the block and the second
is to delete the block.

5
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
To edit a block just click on the icon , that is on the left side of the block. Next, youll see the following interface to define the
parameters of the blocks. At the end click on save.
6
Attributes
7
Configuration
HEADER & FOOTER
Header
8
Footer
Dynamic Search
This feature allows the user to search records the application without leaving the current screen, the developer needs to indicate which fields will be available.
Settings
Dynamic Search configuration Interface
Use the ENTER key to : Use the Enter key to tabulate from one field to the other, or to submit the search.
Select Fields
Dynamic Search Field Selection.
QuickSearch
Quick Search is an option that allows to search data in various fields of the application, by using the text box in the toolbar.
9
Application running QuickSearch.
QuickSearch Settings
In the quicksearch settings are the following options:
QuickSearch Configuration Interface.
Button within the search - An option to inform if the search button will be in the text area of the box. Quicksearch show combo box - Displays a combo box if theres only one
option in the quicksearch. Quicksearch Watermark - Displays a Placeholder in the quicksearch. Quicksearch width - Defines the width of the Quicksearch field. Display the Quick
search old format - Displays in the old format with the selection of the fields in the Quick search. Search anywhere - If enabled, QuickSearch will search each part of the String for
the data informed in the field.
Select Fields
In the Quicksearch Settings you need to define the fields that are part of the search.
QuickSearch selecting fields Interface.
And you can select various criteria of the search.

10
QuickSearch search criteria configuration Interface.
You need to add the QuickSearch button in the toolbar in order to use it.
Fields
Text
Text field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text, you can inform a Text value to the field.
Search Label : Defines the title of a field in the application. For example: if the field is defined in the database as cmp_name_client, itll be more clear for the comprehension of the user if the
name would be Client Name.
Use same label used on the Grid : When this option is enabled, it allows to field to use the same title defined in the grid, in this case the Search Label isnt used.
Amount of characters : Define the amount of characters allowed for the field.
Maximum Size : Defines the size of the field.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Text Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration
Use autocomplete : The field behaves as an autocomplete according to the values existing in the database.
Case Settings : Allows to convert the letters of the field when losing the focus. The options are:
Upper Case : All in Upper Case.
Lower Case : All in Lower Case.
Capitalize first word : Capitalizes the first letter of the word.
Capitalize all words : Capitalizes the first letter of all the words.
OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the search when theres modifications to the field.
Show Condition : When enabled, it displays the condition of the search in the Grid, itll only work if theres at least one option selected.
Display Settings
The Display Settings allows to deifne the CSS for the fields individually. For each Display Settings of Scriptcase, exists the same attributes available for this interface.
11
Display Settings Interface.
CSS of the Title

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field title.
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field title.
Font Color :Allows to choose a color for the font from the color pallete.
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the field, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
Bold : Applies the bold style to the font.
Underline : Applies the underline style to the font.
Border Size : Applies the border size to the title of the field.
Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the title.
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the label of the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width : To define a width for the title of the field.
Height : To define a height for the title of the field.
CSS of the Field

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the application field.
Font Size : Allows to choose the the font size, that will be applied to the application field.
Border Size : Applies the border size to the field.
Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the field.
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the field in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width : To define a width for the field.
Height : To define a height for the field.
CSS of the Input Object

Font : Allows to choose the font type, that will be applied to the Input Object. For example: Radio, Select, Text, etc
Background Color : Allows to define the color for the Input Object, the color can be seleted from the color pallete.
Border Size : Applies the border size to the Input Object.
Border Color : Allows to choose a color for the border, using a color pallete to apply to the Input Object.
Horizontal Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (left,rigth,center and justify).
Vertical Alignment : Allows to position the Input Object in the desired position (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width : To define a width for the Input Object.
Height : To define a height for the Input Object.
Help Settings
This feature allows that the instructions are documented to be used for the generated application, this helps the end user to understand better how the system works.
12
Help configuration Interface.
Help Description : Allows to inform a text that will presente to the user when he positions the mouse over the field.
Help Type
Pop-Up : Selecting the popup type, itll display an icon beside the field that when clicked, you ll view a popup with help description.
Help type - Popup configuration Interface.
Hint : Passing the cursor over the field, youll view a hint with the help description.
Help type - Hint configuration Interface.
Text : Itll display the help description beside the field.
Help type - Text configuration Interface.
Integer
13
Integer field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Integer, you can inform number values to the field.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Integer Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
V A L U E S F O R M AT
Integer Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Use Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the
Digit grouping : Defines if the field will display the digits separator.
Accept : Determines if the field, will accept only negative, positive or both numbers.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

14
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
15
Decimal
Decimal field configuration Interface.

16
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Decimal Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Decimal Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative sign and
Negative number format.
Decimal Precision : Defines the amount of decimal places for the field.
Decimal Separator : Defines the decimal separator.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

17

Help Settings
Help Type
18
Percent
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Percentage Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
19
Percentage Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


20
Help Settings
Help Type

21
Currency
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Currency, you can currency values to the field.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Currency Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Currency Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the field. When not enabled, the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator.
Display Settings

22
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
23
Percent ( Calculated )

24
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


25
Help Settings
Help Type

26
Date
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Date, you can inform a date.
Date Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, itll be displayed the date separator attribute.
Date separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the date.
Display : Select the format of the day for display.
Use Combo-box : Allows you to select the date using a combo-box.

Year as Combo : Allows to use the year combo to select the date.
Initial Year : First year displayed in the combo.
Actual Year + : Display the current plus the amount of years informed.
Month in full textual : Displays the Month format in Full.
Display Calendar : Enables the a calendar icon beside the field, this allows to select the date from a calendar with the format already setup.
New Calendar : Defines if the JQuery calendar (New Calendar) is going to be displayed or the old format.
Years Limit : Amount of years displayed in the calendar.
View week number : Displays the number of the week in the application.
Additional months : Displays the additional months of the calendar.
Show Combo year and month : Displays the year and month of the calendar in the combo box.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Date Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.

27
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Date Field Special Conditions.
All Period : Searches for all periods of dates.
Today : Searches in todays date.
Yesterday : Searches in yesterdays date.
Last 7 days : Searches the last 7 days. Ex: ((01/01/2017 01/07/2017).
This month : Searches the dates from the first day of the current month.
Last month : Searches the dates from the first day of lasts month.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

28

Help Settings
Help Type

29
Time
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Time, you can inform a time to this field.
Time Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, itll be displayed the date separator and time separator attributes.
Time separator : Allows you to inform the separator symbol for the time.
Display : Select the format of the time for display.
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from TIME. You need to use the characters HH , II , and SS that correspond to Day, Hour , Minutes and
Seconds.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Time Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Display Settings
30
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
31
Help Type
Datetime
32
Datetime field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Datetime, you can inform a date and time to this field.
Datetime Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Display : Select the format of the day/time for display.
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from DATETIME . You need to use the characters A, M, D , HH , II , and SS that correspond to Year, Month,
Day, Hour , Minutes and Seconds.

FIELD BEHAVIOR
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Datetime Field Special Conditions.
Display Settings
33
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
34
Help Type
Select
35
Select field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combo box (Select Field).
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
Lookup used to list the values thatll be displayed on the Checkbox field. These values will be recovered dynamically using the Select command.
36
key_field , display_field FROM table.
The value of the key_field will be stored in the table field.
Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a
different delimiter then (;).
Height : Defines the height for the select object.
Use title : Allows to display a line of a title on the select object (Title Attribute) associated to a value informed manually (Title internal value).
Title internal value : Value Saved to the field when the line of the title is selected in the object.
Title : Text displayed on the title of the Select object.
Reload form when value has changed : With this option selected, the form will refresh if theres a change to the selected object in the field.
Display original and lookup value : Displays the value of the field and the value returned from the lookup.
37
Link : Allows to create a link to another form allowing to manipulate the list displayed on the select field. After the manipulation, the select object it updated
automatically.
Single Value :
38
Value : Attribute that corresponds to the value thats stored in the table field. For example, the value M will be included into the table when the user will view in the list
Man .
Default : With this option enabled, the selected item will be inserted to the table when committed.
Multiple Values (delimiter)
You can store various values for the select field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
Tourism selected in form will be stored like E;C;T in case the delimiter is ; (semi coma).
Setting up Multiple Values (delimiter)
Man .
Allows to store a diversity of information selected on the field in only one string. For this information to be added, you need to inform the label, initial
position and the number of bytes that each information occupies on a string.
The example below:

39
Label Valor Inicio Tamanho
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Example: Of you choose Man, Single and Read, no banco de dados seria armazenado o seguinte valor MSRD.
Setting up Multiple Values (position)
Man .
Negative : Value to be saved in the table in case there isnt any valued selected on the field.
In this example uses the following list (although its not informed when inserting values to the list, each item has a value applied automatically according to
the order):
Attribute Value Lookup Description

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
To store the data, its done an internal sum of the decimal number. See the examples below.
Example 1: If the options Sports and Culture were selected, the number stored in the table would be 3.

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Culture) = 3
Example 2: If the options Sports, Pleasure and Reading were selected, the number stored in the table would be 13 .

1 Sports
2 Culture
40
4
Attribute PleasureDescription
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Pleasure) + 8 (Reading) = 13
Configurao do lookup de edio Mltiplos Valores (Binrio)
Displaying the original lookup.
Ajax Processing
41
Ajax Processing configuration Interface.
Allows to define the field thatll be reloaded when selecting a value that has the (onChange) trigger.
For example: a field of the type select with a list of states, and another select field with a list of cities. When selecting a state, the cities list is reloaded.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


42
Help Settings
Help Type

43
DOUBLE SELECT
Double Select field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Double Select, your allowed to have multiple options selected.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Double Select Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Lookup Settings
Automatic Lookup Interface..
SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command thatll recover the values thatll be displayed on the form field. The command needs to have the following structure SELECT key_field ,
display_field FROM table.

44
Height : Allows to define the height(lines) of the field interface.
Delimiter : Defines the character used to separate the values selected in the form. Only inform a value to this field if you need to separate the selected options with a different delimiter then
(;).
Separated by : Defines which character will be used to separate the values of the field with the value returned from the lookup. Its only necessary to inform this value of the option Display
original and lookup value is enabled.
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

45

Help Settings
Help Type
46
Checkbox
Checkbox field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Checkbox, your allowed to have multiple options selected.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Checkbox Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Lookup Settings

47
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Option check all : Displays two options on the field to check and uncheck all.
48
Single Value :
Label : Text thatll be displayed in the item list of the checkbox.
Man .
Columns : Allows you to inform the amount of columns, for the list of items.
You can store various values for the checkbox field. The values are separated by the informed delimiter. For example: the combination Sport, Cinema and
49
Man .
The example below:
Label Value Start Size

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .

50
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
Setting up Multiple Values (Binary)
51
Ajax Processing
Display Settings

52
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
53
Radio
Radio field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Radio, your allowed to select one of the options listed.

54
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Radio Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
55
56
Label : Text thatll be displayed in the item list of the radio.
Save Button : Allows the user to save all the items of the list, to use on other fields, just click on load lookup definition.
Ajax Processing
57
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


58
Help Settings
Help Type

59
Grid Fields
Grid fields Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Grid Fields, you can set the fields thatll be part of the Grid table.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

60

Help Settings
Help Type
61
Sorting
Sorting field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Sorting, you can set the sorting of the fields thatll be part of the Grid table.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

62
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
63
Text Auto-Complete
Text Auto-Complete field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Text auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and itll manipulate an
internal Text for the data.

64
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Text Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
OnChange Submit : When enabled, it submits the seach when theres modifications to the field.
Lookup Settings
SQL Select Statement : Define the SQL command thatll recover the values thatll be displayed on the form field.
Rows : Allows to define the amount of records displayed in the field.
Width : Defines the width the size of capture box (Capture Text).
Search options : Allows to define the search settings of the field(Start equal to, Any part and End equals to).
Capture Text : When not enabled, youll only view the field to inform the data. See an example below.
lookup Settings configuration Interface.
65
lookup Settings validation configuration Interface.
Show label with the description : Displays a label with the description.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


66
Help Settings
Help Type

67
Number Auto-Complete
![Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_nmero_auto] Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search
Configuration.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Number auto complete, you can inform a value based on the select statement of the lookup settings and itll manipulate
an internal number for the data.
SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Position between values : This option sets the position that objects will be displayed.
Text between values : Text that will appear between values.
Number Auto-Complete Field Format of Values with Regional Settings.
Lookup Settings
68
Display Settings
69
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
70
Help Type

1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID APPLICATION
Settings
On this configuration, you can set the common attributes of the applications created by ScriptCase, you can view the attributes below.
Application Configuration Interface
Attributes
Application Code : Code of the application thats determined at the moment the creation of the application, this code can be renamed in the main menu.
Description : This field is reserved for a brief description of the objectives of the application.
Documents Path : The absolute path to the documents directory of the application.
Image Directory : Base directory of where the application images are stored.
Application images : Allows to import images into the application and using them in the application routines, disregarding the macro sc_image.
Language : Language of the generated application. All the hints and messages are displayed in the selected language.
Share Location Variable : Shares the Location settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.
Charset : Defines the specific charset used in the application.
Share Theme Variable : Shares the Theme settings with other applications based on the value of the session variable.
Folder : Folder where the applications stored in the work group.
Edit by Project : Allows for the other users of the group to edit the application.
Timeout : Time of the runtime timeout in seconds. If the value is Zero, it assumes the default timeout of the PHP.
HelpCase Link : Associate the files of the HelpCase with the application.
Error Settings
Error Settings Interface.
Attributes
Script Error : Allows to display the information of the Script Line where the error occurred.
SQL Error : Allows to display the SQL where the error occurred.
Debug Mode : Runs the application in Debug mode, displaying the SQL commands the moment that they are executed.
Ajax Error Output : Open a window of debug with the output of the Ajax.
2
Navigation
Defines the attributes of the navigation of one application to another.
Navigation Interface.
Attributes
Exit URL : URL on which the user will be redirected when exiting the application.
Close on Exit : When exiting the application, close the browser window.
Redirect URL : URL to redirect in case there isnt any global variables available.
Redirect Variable : Name of the variable thatll be stored the URL of a real application.
Global Variables
This screen shows the global variables in the application.
The global variable is an external parameter required for running the application. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause, field definitions and names,
event programming, and so on.
Global variables are defined in brackets ([variable]). These variables must be passed to the application being implemented through one of the methods: Session, Post, and Get
Global variables Interface.
Example:
Select CustomerID, CustomerName from Customers WHERE CustomerID = '[v_customerid]'
In this case, the variable v_customerid appears in the global variables configuration.
Global variables configuration Interface.
Shows all global variables used in the application

Attribute : name of the variable in the application.
Value : Defines the behavior of the variables, this content is divided in three blocks, they are:
Scope : Defines how the variable is received by the application. If a variable has been defined that its received by a POST method and has been approved by the GET method, the
content is not accepted. Methods of passing variable values:
Session : In this option, the variable must be created as a PHP session variable by another application.
GET : Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that is, visible by the browser.
POST : Defines that the variable must be passed through the POST method of a HTML form.
Settings : Does not validate (check) the variable at runtime.
Type (In / Out) : Defines whether the variable is input or output.
Description : Indicates where the variable is being used.

1
Links
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID LINKS
New link
Links menu interface.
When you click the New Link item from ScriptCase application menu will, the screen below will be displayed.
Interface for creating links
Application Link
Used to edit records of a Grid Application by using a Form Application. In the generated Grid youll view a link for each record to edit the records. Clicking on the link, the
form selected can be displayed in various ways (in an iframe, in the same window or on another window).
Application Link creation interface.
Application Link list of applications available.
Application: You need to select the form application thats going to be called by the Grid Application.
Parameters Definition
2
Parameters Definition Interface.
On the screen above, on the left side, are displayed the parameters that are expected for the form application (Primary Key, Global Variables), on the right side, you need to
select the option thats going to be set to the parameter. The options are:
Field : Used to pass a field value of a Grid as a parameter.
Value : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.
Variable : Used to pass a global variable value used in the Grid as a parameter.
Empty : Choosing this option, no value will be passed as a parameter.
Fiels Link
Used to create a link of a navigation in a column to any application of the project. When selecting the field link type, its displayed a select field with all the field displayed in the
Grid application.
Field Link creation interface.
Its possible to create a field link to all the applications of the project (Menus, Searches, Reports PDF, Grid, Tabs, Form (Update Mode) and Control). You need to select an
application to proceed.
Field Link list of applications available.
3
Capture Link
The capture is used specially in the Form and in the Grid Search. This type of link imports the data of another Grid to a Form or Search Field. When selecting a capture link type,
itll display a list of fields of the Search Form. You need to choose a files to receive the data through the link.
Capture Link creation interface.
Its possible to create a capture link to the Grid Application. You need to select an application to proceed.
Capture Link list of applications available.
Fetch field value : You need to select the field thatll call the Grid Application. This field will have the values informed when returned from the Grid Search.
Select values to pass as parameters : This option is displayed when the Grid Application has a parameter; like a Where clause for example that receives a global variable. The options for the
values that can be passed as a parameter are:
Fixed : Used to pass a static value as a parameter.

4
Button Link
Used to link a Grid application to any other type applications. In this type of link, a button is used like a link between the Grid and other applications.
Button Link creation interface.
Links Edit
In the Link Folder of the Application Menu (Image Below) are displayed the links existing in the application and also the item New Link. When clicking on the existing link its
displayed the screen below that allows to manage the links.
Editing Links.
Actions
Properties Change the behavior of the link, position, and how the link opens.
Link Change the application thats being called in the link their parameters.
Delete Remove the existing link.
Link Propeties
On the screen below, you can see the attributes relevant to the link behavior of that need to be informed.
Link properties Interface.
Link Operation Mode :

Open in the same Window : Displays the Form in the same browser window.
Open in another Window : Displays the Form in another window of the browser.
Open in Iframe : The Form will be displayed in the same window, allowing to position below, above, to the left or right of the Grid.
Open in Parent : If the Grid is in a iframe, it displays the Form in the parent viewport of the page.
Modal : Opens the Form in modal, allowing to configure the size of the modal.
Display button (new row) on the grid toolbar : This option, when enabled, adds a button to the toolbar that allows to add a New Record to the Form.
Label for the button New : You can apply a Label for the button, if not informed the label will be New.
Hint for the button New : You can apply a Hint for the button, if not informed the hint will be New.
Hotkey for the button New : Indicates which key will be the shortcut for the New Record.
Exit URL for the target application : The URL thats going to call after exiting the Form. In case no value is informed, the back button will redirect to the Grid.
Form Property
Allows to select the buttons that are going to be displayed in the Form through the link. Form properties configurations Interface.
Enable insert button on target application : Enables the Insert Button in the Form.
Enable update button on target application : Enables the Update Button in the Form.
Enable delete button on target application : Enables the Delete Button in the Form.
Enable navigation button on target application : Enables the navigation buttons (first, previous, next and last) in the Form.
Enable button to edit a grid record : Enables the edit button for each record.
Iframe properties
5
These options are displayed when the property Link Operation Mode is set to Open in Iframe. Iframe properties
configurations Interface.
Display the header of the called application : Displays the header of the Form.
Iframe position relative to the main application : It can be: below, above, right or left.
Action After Insert view the list below :

Reload Grid : Does a refresh on the current page.
Move to the end of the grid : Navigate to the last page of the Grid.
Iframe height : Iframe Height in pixels.
Iframe width : Iframe Width in pixels.

1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS GRID PROGRAMMING
In this version of ScriptCase is incorporated the concept of programming, with the use of attributes, methods, resources and libraries. In the previous version it was already
possible to create business rules in applications using this concept the big difference now is that this can be done in a more organized, facilitating both the development as the
understanding of the rule by another developer.
Attributes
The attributes are variables that has the global scope declared in the application. An attribute that can be referenced in all the methods and events of the application.
Attributes configuration Interface.
Attributes
Attribute Name : This field, allows to inform the name of the attribute, after typing the name just click on include. In case you want to update click on the name of the attribute (located
on the tight side of the buttons), do the necessary modifications and click on update. In case its necessary to delete an attribute, its necessary to do same process as the update, but
when selecting the attribute, its necessary to click on the delete button. The clear button, as the name suggests, it clears the list of all the attributes listed on the right.
Internal Libraries
To use the internal libraries just select the correspondent ( Project Libraries for example). This process allows the methods existing in the library, to be visible in all the Events and
Methods of the application. See how to manage the libraries by clicking here.
Internal Libraries managment Interface
PHP Methods
Methods are function or procedures declared by the developer, that helps when appling the routines. Using methods in the applications allows to reuse of the your code
throughout the application, optimizing the development experience.
Creating a new method
PHP method creation Interface
Define a name for the method and click on Create. Like the image below.
Include Method.
Methods can receive parameters.

2
Add the amount of variables: PHP method parameter definition
Defining the variables: Defining the variables
Name : Type in the name of the variable.
Type : Selecting the type of variables: For Value or For Refference.
Value Standard : The value of the parameter used to initialize when calling the method.
Refferences allows to create a second name for a variable that you can use to read and modify the original information of the variable.
Editing a parameter:
: Checking all the parameters in the parameter list.
: Unchecking all the parameters in the parameter list.
: Edit the selected parameter of the list.
: Deletes the selected variable of the list.

1
Charts
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART CHARTS
This application is designed for creating dynamic charts based on SQL or Procedures.
Inside the Scriptcase Charts can be created also within the Grid application, however the application Chart has more settings options to the end user within the application
generated. The idea is to apply the concept of Business Intelligence so the final system users can apply their own settings within the generated charts.
Settings within the development area use Drag and Drop for the charts creation. You can apply dimensions and metrics dynamically using different date periods and totals.
Dimensions
Dimensions are used to group the data into categories. You can choose more than one field as a dimension, each new field as a subcategory of the previous field.
To select a field, click on its name in the Chart Fields area and drag it to the Dimensions column.
Once selected the fields, you can sort them using the drag and drop to arrange the dimensions final display. You can choose different periods to date fields and use the same
date field more than once, with different periods. All the dimensions listed in Dimensions can be used by the system final user within the Chart application. You can also define
whether dimensions will be displayed or not when you start the application by selecting the checkbox.
Chart
dimensions. Field settings
Metrics
The metric is used to quantitatively view the data grouped by dimensions. Choose the fields for the charts metrics.
To select a field, click on its name in the Chart Fields area and drag it to the Metrics column. Once selected the fields, you can sort them using the drag and drop to arrange the
metrics final display, you can also chose the total function according to the field data type.
All the dimensions listed in Metrics can be used by the system final user within the Chart application. You can also define whether metrics will be displayed or not when you
start the application by selecting the checkbox.
The checked field value is used to set the default field just when you are not using a combination or stacked chart types, that use more than one field. If you choose more then
one field Scriptcase automatically sets a value multiple chart type (Combination). You can change the initial chart inside the option Charts type within the Settings. When you
check a single value (bar, line, Spline, step, Area, pie, pyramid, funnel, Radar and Gauge) you have to click and choose only one field to appear as initial value during the first
generation.
2
Chart
Metrics.
Sorting
You can select which chart value will be ordered to start the application, and if the sort will be ascending or descending.
Chart sorting.
Initial sorting : Using this option you can set the default sorting (ascending or descending). The system final user will also be able to customize it within the generated application.
Dimension : Application starts with dimension fields sorting (ascending or descending according to the Initial sorting).
Metric : Application starts with metric fields sorting (ascending or descending according to the Initial sorting).
Search
In the Search option you can choose the fields that will be used as static search on the chart, the application data will be initially filtered according to the settings you apply. The
search values are chosen for each selected field during development, the final user will not be able to change that.
You are also able to apply other search options such as the Dynamic Search using the option Search > Dynamic Search (located on the left menu) and the refined search using
the option Chart > Search. These two types are dynamic, it means that the end user will be able to manipulate them within the generated application.
3
Static search.
Chart options
In the tab Chart the developer sets other default options for the chart that will be generated such as chart type, color, theme and others. Find more details below.
Chart options.
Attributes
Charts type : Allows you to define the type of chart that is going to be displayed by Default.
Font size : Font size of the values, if leave the field blank, the size 12 is assumed.
Abbreviated value : Values displayed in the chart should be abbreviated.
Display Values : Starts already displaying the values of the generated chart.
Exception for display : Types of chart that will not display the chart values, even when marked for display. These type did not recommend that the values are displayed, for aesthetic
issues, it is, however, at the discretion of the developer.
Label orientation on the x-axis : Default width in pixels of the generated charts.
4
Chart Height : Standard height in pixels of the generated charts.
Values sorting : Sorts charts values.
Analytic or Synthetic : Sets whether the dimensions of the chart will be raises the analytical (single series) or synthetic (multiple series) mode, i.e. If it is grouped or use the drill down.
Grand Total : Check the Grand Total option to group all the values in one. This option is typically used in charts of the Gauge. *Range of data Groups all the values in one. This option is
typically used in the Gauge type. This option will only be displayed if you set the Gauge charts to be used. You will be able to set the base value (with intervals in percentage) and the
intervals (add the intervals according to your need).
1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART SETTINGS
Chart settings
In the chart Setup screen the user can change some application viewing options, which charts will be displayed, the labels, margins and alignments. Below detailing each of the
available attributes
Chart settings interface
Attributes
Responsive Desktop : By checking this option the Chart will automatically adapt itself to the users screen according to the size of the browser.
Chart title : This option allows you to set a title for the chart.
Available chart types : List of available chart types for users choice within the final application via the button Chart Types. The graphics checked will be available, if the developer does
not want to display a chart type must do not check them in this interface.
Label for quantity : Label the y-axis for generic values of the record count.
Label for summarization : Label the y-axis for generic values of the summary functions - sum, average, weighted average, maximum and minimum.
Horizontal Alignment : This option allows you to set the horizontal alignment of the application on page-centered, left or right
1
Toolbar
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART TOOLBAR
Toolbar
Find below the description for the toolbar options.
Chart
toolbar settings
Navigation : Within this attribute you can find the options to set the Chart navigation buttons.
Exit: Ends the application.
PDF : Creates a complete report with all Chart data within a PDF file type.
Print : Creates a complete report with all Chart data within a HTML printable page
Chart
Summary : Creates a link button to access the Summary Module.
Sorting options : Creates a button to manage the fields sorting dynamically, you can configure the sorting options within the option Charts Sorting
Chart types : Buttons to define the types of charts that will be displayed within the application generated.
Others : Some more options available for the application, according to its settings. * Search : Creates a link button to access the Advanced Search form (Filter module). Settings for this button
can be configured within the option Search Settings Advanced Search.
Dynamic Search : Creates a link button to access the fields for the Dynamic Search. Settings for this button can be configured within the option Search Settings Dynamic Search.
Languages: Creates a combo box with the languages added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove languages to your project or application accessing the
main menu Project Properties Locales.
*Themes: Creates a combo box with the themes added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove application CSS themes to your project or application
accessing the main menu Project Properties Themes.
Separator
-: Creates a separation line between the buttons for better display, specially for grouped buttons
Button Settings
2
Add Button Groups
Mobile toolbar
3
Mobile toolbar.
1
Export
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART EXPORT
PDF Settings
Attributes
Print options
Chart print options
Print type Allows you to set the print mode for the file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Print background Allows you to define whether the background will appear for printing.
1
SQL
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART LOG
1
Campos
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART CAMPOS
No menu da aplicao Campos, so exibidos para configurao apenas os campos foram selecionados no menu Selecionar Campos.
Lista de campos da aplicao
Para cada campo selecionado uma srie de atributos podem ser alterados em funo do tipo de dado selecionado.
Texto
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

2
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
3
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
4

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

5
Use lookup in :
Texto Multiplas Linhas

General Settings
Multiple Lines Text field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Multiple Lines Text , you can inform a Text value to the field in multiple lines.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

6
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
7
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
8

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

9
Use lookup in :
Nmero
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Ineger, its allowed to define the format of a number.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

10
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
11
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
12

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

13
Use lookup in :
Decimal
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

14
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
15
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
16

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

17
Use lookup in :
Por cento
General Settings
Percentage field configuration Interface.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

18
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
19
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
20

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

21
Use lookup in :
Moeda
General Settings
Currency field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Decimal, its allowed to define the format of a currency number.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

22
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
23
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
24

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

25
Use lookup in :
Por cento ( Calculado )

General Settings
Percentage field configuration Interface.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

26
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
27
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
28

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

29
Use lookup in :
Data
General Settings
Date format : Format the dates used for the Group By.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

30
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
31
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
32

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

33
Use lookup in :
Hora
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

34
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
35
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
36

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

37
Use lookup in :
Data e Hora
General Settings
Date format : Format the dates used for the Group By.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

38
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
39
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
40

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

41
Use lookup in :
Carto
General Settings
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

42
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
43
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
44

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

45
Use lookup in :
E-mail
General Settings
specific email.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

46
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
47
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
48

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

49
Use lookup in :
URL
General Settings
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo definido como URL, permitido definir regras de formatao de URL.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

50
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
51
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
52

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

53
Use lookup in :
Youtube
General Settings
Interface de configurao do campo youtube.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

54
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
55
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
56

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

57
Use lookup in :
Google Maps
General Settings
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as Google Maps, itll use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Chart Applications
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

58
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
59
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
60

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

61
Use lookup in :
Cdigo de barras
General Settings
Data Type : Datatype of the field for the application.
SQL Type : Inform the database field type.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

62
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
63
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
64

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

65
Use lookup in :
QRCode
Configurao Geral
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

66
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
67
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
68

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

69
Use lookup in :
1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
Menu structure
3
Layer editing

1
Events
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART EVENTS
onApplicationInit
OnScriptInit
onHeader
onFooter
1
Search
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART SEARCH
Settings
Attributes
Condies do Filtro
Advanced Search
Settings
Through these attributes you can define some general search settings such as alignment, width, search conditions, etc.
2
Search settings interface.
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the application horizontal alignment;
Margins : Allows you to set the Search form positioning (margins).
Keep Values : When this option is activated the last searched values are going to be maintained and displayed when the system user returns to the search form screen.
Keep columns and sorting : This option determines if each search should preserve the selected values to the Grid fields columns and sorting, i.e. to each search, these values return to
original condition.
Select fields
Select fields interface.
Required
This interface has the options for you to select and set the Search form required fields.
Within the generated application will be displayed a marker(*) next to the field and an error message will also pops up if theres no value assigned to the mandatory fields. You
will be able to set some options for the market using the options below.
Marker placement configuration interface.
Marker position : Markers position relative to the field (options are right, left or Do not display).

3
Toolbar
Desktop
Toolbar Interface.
of buttons.
BUTTON SETTINGS
OPTIONS
Options Interface.
Mobile
Save Search
4
Events
ONSCRIPTINIT
ONREFRESH
ONSAVE
O N V A L I D AT E
Layout
BLOCKS
current one.

5
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes

6
Edit Blocks
Attributes
7
Configuration
HEADER & FOOTER
Header
8
Footer
Dynamic Search
Settings
Select Fields
Fields
Text
9
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

10
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
11
Integer
FIELD BEHAVIOR
12
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


13
Help Settings
Help Type

14
Decimal
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
15
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
16
Help Type
Percent
17
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
18
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
19
Help Type
Currency
20
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title


21
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
22
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
23
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
24
Help Type
Date
25

FIELD BEHAVIOR
SPECIAL CONDITIONS

26
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


27
Help Settings
Help Type
Time
28
Seconds.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title


29
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
30
Datetime

31

FIELD BEHAVIOR
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

32
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
33
Select

34
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
35
automatically.
36
Single Value :
37
Man .
Man .
The example below:

38
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
39
4
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
Ajax Processing
40
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


41
Help Settings
Help Type

42
DOUBLE SELECT
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings

43
(;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

44

Help Settings
Help Type
45
Checkbox
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings

46
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
47
Single Value :
Man .
48
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .

49
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
50
Ajax Processing
Display Settings

51
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
52
Radio

53
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
54
55
Ajax Processing
56
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


57
Help Settings
Help Type

58
Grid Fields
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

59

Help Settings
Help Type
60
Sorting
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

61
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
62
Text Auto-Complete

63
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
64
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


65
Help Settings
Help Type

66
Configuration.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
67
Display Settings
68
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
69
Help Type

1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Global Variables
Example:


1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS CHART PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal Libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
Theme
HOME APPLICATIONS THEME
Preview
In this area you can customize the chart themes, you will be able to preview how it will look like according to each chart type.
If you customize the theme using this area, it will available only for the current application only. If you need to customize the theme and apply to other application, project and
users, then you will need to use the Chart themes option within the main menu Layout > Chart themes. There you will find the same interface with the option to save the
changes as user level, project level or Scriptcase level
Themes preview
Border
Activate this function to add a border around the chart area.
Border.
Border use : Not informed, use or do not use.

Not informed: This option will use the default option of the theme.
Use : Select the border as active, you will need to set the width.
Do not use : to remove or do not use the border.

2
Color : Select the border color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Width : Sets the border width in pixels.
Opacity: Sets the border transparency.
Background
Options to configure the background color of the chart.
Background
Color : Select the background color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
New color : Adds a new color for the background.
Opacity : Select background transparency.
Canvas
Options to configure the chart canvas.
Canvas
Background color : Selects the color of the canvas, and may report a value hexadecimal or choose picker.
New color : Adds a new color option.
Background alpha : Selects the background transparency.
Border use : Not informed, use or do not use.

Not informed: This option will use the default option of the theme.
3
Use : Selects the border as active, you will need to set the width.
Do not use : to remove or do not use the border.
Color : Selects the canvas color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Width : Sets the border width in pixels.
Opacity: Sets the canvas transparency.
Title
Options to configure the formatting of the title.
Title
Title font : Selects the font, size, color, and formatting of the title.
Subtitle font : Selects the font, size, color and format of the subtitle to left, center or right.
Alignment : Selects the position of the title and subtitle.
Show on top : If this option is selected the title and the subtitle will be positioned above the chart, otherwise will be positioned below.
Axes
This option configures the formatting of the texts of the x and y axis
Axes
Font : Selects the font, size, color, and formatting of the axis.
Background color : Selects the background color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
4
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the background color of the axis.
Border Color : Selects the color, and may report a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Border width : Sets the width in pixels.
Border alpha: Sets the transparency.
Border dashed: If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option Display is checked.
Data
Options to set the charts data (bank records).
Data
Use gradient : Enables the data gradient.
Gradient color : Selects the gradient color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Gradient angle : Selects the angle of the gradient.
Gradient alpha : Selects the gradient transparency.
Show border : If this option is selected is activated the border in the data.
Border dashed : If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option Display is checked.
Use rounded border : This option leaves the rounded border.
Palette
Options to choose the colors of each chart palette.
5
palette
Colors palette : Select the color of each chart palette.
Data title
Options to configure title formatting of data.
Data title
Display mode : Selects the display mode to automatic, rotated, line break, in levels and None, if the Automatic option is selected, select the default option.
Slant labels : Selects the number of levels to the data.
Font : Selects the font, and your formatting such as bold, italic, size and color of data.
Font alpha : Selects the transparency of data title font.
Background color : Select the background color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the background color of the title of data.
Border width : Sets the width in pixels.
Border alpha: Sets the transparency.
Border dashed: If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option Display is checked.
6
Data values
Options to configure the formatting of data values.
Data values
Font : Selects the font, and your formatting such as bold, italic, size and color of the data values.
Font alpha : Select the transparency of the source of the data values.
Background color : Select the background color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the background color of the title of data.
Border Color : Selects the border color for the data values.
Border width : Selects the border width for the data values.
Border alpha : Selects the transparency of the color of the border of the data values.
Border dashed : If this option is selected, the border is dashed, this option is only valid if the option Display is checked.
Div Lines and Grids

Options to configure the Division of horizontal and vertical lines on the graph.
Div Lines and Grids
Amount of horizontal lines : Selects the amount of horizontal lines that will be shown in the chart.
Horizontal line color : Selects the horizontal line color.
Horizontal line thickness : Selects the thicker horizontal line.
Horizontal line alpha : Selects transparency horizontal line

7
Horizontal line dashed : If this option is selected will horizontal line plot.
Color horizontal stripes : If this option is selected you can choose the horizontal line color.
Horizontal stripes color : Selects the color you wish to case Coloring horizontal Ribbon is checked.
Horizontal stripes alpha : Selects transparency horizontal ribbon.
Amount of vertical lines : Amount of vertical lines
Vertical line color : Selects the color of the vertical line.
Vertical line thickness : Selects the vertical line thicker.
Vertical line alpha : Select the transparency of the vertical track.
Vertical line dashed : If this option is selected will draw the vertical line.
Color vertical stripes : If this option is selected the developer can choose the color of the vertical line.
Vertical stripes color : Selects the color you wish to case Color vertical stripes is checked.
Vertical stripes alpha : Select the transparency of the vertical stripes.
Anchors
Options to configure anchors on the chart.
Anchors
Show anchors : Enables the anchors in the chart.
Anchor sides : Select the width of the anchor.
Anchor radius : Selects the size of anchor beam.
Background color : Select the color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the anchor.
Border Color : Select the anchors border color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Border width : Select the border width of the anchor.
Tooltip
Options to configure the tooltips in the chart.
8
Tooltip
Background color : Select the tooltip color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker.
Background alpha : Select the transparency of the background of the tooltip.
Border Color : Select the tooltip border color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker..
Shadow : Enable the shadow in the tooltip.
Tick marks
Option to the configure chart marks, this option is only possible for the Gauge charts.
Tick marks
Show tick marks : Enables the tick marks on the chart.
Place ticks inside : If this option is checked the marks of the chart will tile chart poker.
Show tick values : Show tick values
Show limits : If this option is selected will show the chart limits.
9
Place values inside : If this option is selected will show the values in the chart
Major tick color : Major tick color.
Major tick alpha : Major tick transparency
Major tick thickness : Major tick thickness.
Major tick height : Select a height for the major tick.
Minor tick color : Select a color for the minor tick
Minor tick alpha : Select the transparency for the minor tick
Minor tick thickness : Minor tick thickness.
Minor tick height : Select a height for the minor tick.
Legend
Options to configure the chart legend.
Legend
Position : Selects the position of the legend, beside or Below..

Beside : Positions the legend beside the chart.
Below : Positions the legend below the chart.
Allow drag : If this option is selected it will be possible to drag the chart legend to the desired position.
Scroll background color : Selects the color of the scroll bar.
Title font : Select the font, and your formatting such as bold, italic, size and color of the legend.
Background color : Selects the background color of the legend.
Background alpha : Selects the transparency of the legend.
Border Color : Select the legend border color, and may add a hexadecimal value or select using the color picker..
Border width : Selects the Border width of the legend.
Border alpha : Selects the border transparency of the legend.

1
Form Orientation
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM FORM ORIENTATION
Orientation models for the Form application, it can be: Single record, Multiple records, Editable grid and Editable grid view.
Single record
This form orientation allows you to edit only one table record at a time. You will be able to page the form to navigate record by record.
Single record form..
Multiple records
Form orientation with various editable records per page. Update or delete processes will run on selected records via check box. You can set as many records per page as needed
to update, to delete or to add new records.
Multiple records form.
Pagination : Paging type for the multiple records form, you can choose if it is going to be partial or total.
Lines Per Page : Quantity of rows of records per page, this option is available only when the pagination is set as Partial.
Records for insert : You can set here the quantity of rows of records per page in the insert mode in order to add multiple records at a time.
Editable grid
Form orientation with various editable records per page. Each record has the update and delete controls available in its own line.
2
Editable grid form.
Editable grid view

Form orientation with various editable records per page. All records come with its data displayed in a read-only format. These data are only available for update by selecting the
Edit option in the record itself.
Editable grid view form.
Use modal form to edit : Use a modal form to edit the records when you click to edit the record.
1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM SETTINGS
Interface de configurao.
Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL thats going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_). The Friendly URL can be informed on the
initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the Friendly URL column.
Line break in title : Allows to break a link on the field titles.
Horizontal Alignment : Permite definir o alinhamento da aplicao na pgina.
Margins : Allows to organize the display of the application according to the values of the margins (Right , Left, Up and Down) in pixels.
Table Width : Value of the application table. The applications generated by ScriptCase are generated in Plain HTML, and are organized in tablesm lines and cells.
Table Width Unit : Measurment unit for the table width defined in the previous option, being: percentage, pixel or automatic.
Table Columns : This parameter defines the column (fields) width of the table (application).
Labels width : When the previous option is set to Provided, this one appears and here you can inform the width of the labels.
Layout and Behavior
Layout and Behavior configuration Interface.
Automatic tab : Changes the focus to next field when the amount of chacteres reaches its defined limit.
Highlight Text on Focus : Highlights the field when selected.
Use Enter to : Allows to use the Enter key to pass the focus to the next field.
Field with Initial Focus : Determines which field will contain the initial focus when accessing the application. This option doesnt work with fields that contain watermark.
Highlight Field with Error : Focus the field with error when submitting the form.
Use a template from the HTML Editor : Allows to use the TinyMCE editor. You can edit and create your own HTML Templates.
1
Edit fields
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM EDIT FIELDS
This configuration allows the user to organize and edit the fields.
Edit Fields Configuration.
Fields
This column is used to display the field name.
Label
Column to edit the display name of the field in an application.
Datatype
Allows to change the field type.
New
Defines if the field will be available when inserting new records.
Update
Defines if the field will be available when updating new records.
Read-Only
Defines the field will be a label.
Required
Defines if the field has to contain a value.
PK
Defines which fields are the Primary Keys.
DB value (Insert)
Defines if the filed will receive internal values when inserting a new record, like an auto increment, date, datetime and IP.
DB value (Update)
Defines if the filed will receive internal values when updating a record, like the date, datetime and IP.
Page
Indicate the Pages in the application.
Blocks
Indicates the Blocks in the application.
Page Fields Not Shown
Contains all the fields that arent going to be displayed in the application.
2
Observe that all the lines can be dragged to the desired position, blocks and page. NOTE: Fields are grouped in Blocks and the Blocks are grouped in Pages.
Display Interface.
Attributes
Markers positioning : Indicates the position of the maker thatll displayed next to the field thats required.
Display message : Allows to display a custom message when validating the custom fields.
1
Fields Positioning
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM FIELDS POSITIONING
Field Positioning
1
Unique key
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM UNIQUE KEY
With this module you can inform the fields that are unique, these fields are the one that contain a primary key in its table. To inform the rest of the fields that contain are a
unique key, select the fields by holding the CTRL of your keyboard and then click on the add button, the fields informed will receiv an identification for example: UK1.
Unique key configuration Interface.

1
Toolbar
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM TOOLBAR
The toolbar of the applciation is divided in two parts: Top and Bottom, in a way thats possible to define which buttons will be displayed for both locations. Selecting the buttons
for the Top and Bottom toolbars work independently, allowing buttons being in both toolbars at once for example.
Its also possible to separate which buttons will be displayed in an application thats opened in a mobile deveice, and their respective positions in the toolbar. Like the image
below, theres the following layout:
Desktop : Location where you should inform the configurations for the toolbar in Classic Web Version display, so that the configuration can be used in the application when be accessed
from a Desktop .
Mobile : Location where you should inform the configurations for the toolbar in Mobile Version display, so that the configuration can be used in the application when be accessed from a
Mobile.
Toolbar
Grid buttons positioning
Attribute :
Navigation : Presents the options relative to the navigation buttons that can be displayed in the application.
Next Proceeds to the next page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Previous Returns to the previous page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
First Redirects to the First page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Last Redirects to the Last page (Record or list of Records) of the application.
Exit Exits the applications.
Navigation by page Displays a linl for the pages. e.g. 1 2 3 4 5
Export : Defines the formats of the generated exports. Scriptcase generates the following export formats:
PDF Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a PDF format.
WORD Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a WORD format.
XLS Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a EXCEL format.
XML Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a XML format.
CSV Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a CSV format.
RTF Offers a complete Report, containing all the data of the application in a RTF format.
Print Creates a HTML format of the application for printing.
Others : Presents a diversity of options relative to the application.
Jump to Defines the record page by the informed number.

Rows Limit Its a combox that defines the amount of rows displayed per page.
Search When clicked, it redirects to the search form to filter the records.
Dynamic Search When clicked, it displays the search fields to filter the records.
Columns Allows to define the columns thatll be displayed.
Sorting Options Allows to select the order of the records based on the field.
Group By Allows to select a Group By rule. ( Created previously in the application ).
Save Grid Allows to save the current state of the application.
QuickSearch Allows to do a rapid search in the records of the application.
2
Gantt When clicked, displays a gantt chart.
Summary When clicked, displays a summary with the set of data from the records.
Form Buttons Displays the Form Buttons, when theres an Application Link created previously.
Languages Displays a combobox with the names available, defined in the project properties.
Themes Displays a combobox with the themes available, defined in the project properties.
Rows Counter Allows to define the amount of lines displayed in the application.
HelpCase Displays a button to redirect to the help page.
Separator
- | Dispayes a line separating the buttons, when used the Group Buttons.
Add Button Groups
Button Settings
3
Application Button Settings
Button Buttons available in the application.

Label Allows to define the name of the button thats going to display in the application.
Hint Allows to define the hint of the button thats going to display in the application.
_Shortcut key Allows to define a shortcut on the keyboard for the button. ( Each browser has its own combination of reserved shortcuts ).
Options
Opes da consulta
Attribute
Display Summary : Defines if the summary button will be displayed for each page.
Format Row Counter : Allows to define the format thatll be used to create the Row Counter. e.g. [1 to 10 of 200].
The number of links displayed : Defines the amount of links per page , when the navigation option is disabled.
Jump to : Defines wether the itll redirect to the page or the record informed.
Records per page : Defines which amount of records to be listed per page, the options will display in a combobox.
Toolbar buttons : Defines the type of display for the Toolbar buttons ( A DIV below the toolbar , Modal ).
Mobile Toolbar
4
Mobile toolbar.
1
Export Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM EXPORT SETTINGS
PDF Settings
Attributes
Print Settings
Form - Print export settings
1
SQL
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM SQL
In this module the attributes related to the connection to the table in which the Form was created are defined. We can define the Primary Key, Filters, Sorts for the created form.
SQL configuration Interface.
Select primary key fields : On this function its displayed an Combo box with a * beside, that indicates which fields are the Compound keys or Primary Key of the SQL
table. In most cases, ScriptCase already identifies the Keys, in case that doesnt happen the user can manually inform the key using the button beside the list to select the
keys. See how the buttons work:
On/Off : Adds or Removes the attribute that defines the primary key for the field. The field defined as the primary key will have an asterisk beside its name.
All : Defines that all the fields are Primary Keys. The field defined as the primary key will have an asterisk beside its name.
None : Unchecks all the fields. It removes the definition of the primary key for all fields.
Sorting Button : These are the arrows on the right side of the Combo box. It allows to order the fields of the Primary Key, placing it in the desired order. To order click on the field and
use the arrows to make the move.
Where clause : An optional space that allows the user to place a Where clause with the objective to filter the SQL records.
Order By : Optional space for the user to write the ORDER BY clause that will determine the order in which the records will be displayed, when the navigation bar is used by default, the order
is determined by the Primary Key.
Connection : Displays the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this connection can be changed by another one that contains the same
tables (SQL).
Table Name : Name of the table thats being used in the Form.
Variable for Table : These fields informed with value, allows part of the table name defined in the select to be changed before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
Variable for Table Configuration.
Case Sensitive : Allows you to configure whether the connection will be case sensitive or not. (Differentiating case).
1
Sorting
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM SORTING
Field Settings
Sort Fields
Advanced Sorting
2

1
Group Label
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM GROUP LABEL
Attributes

1
Procedures
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM PROCEDURES
In this module, you can configure a Form application so that it can use Stored Procedures (defined in the Database) in the Insert, Update and Delete operations. Its not necessary
to use the three options simultaneously, in a way that the options that arent configured to use Procedures continue to work as ScriptCases default that are the commands
INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
See below, the step-by-step to implement a Stored Procedure to insert into the Database.
Form Stored Procedures Interface.
Let check the first option: Enable INSERT Procedure. Next inform the Name of the Procedure the number of parameters.
Defining parameters for the Procedure.
Now define the fields thatll reference each parameter of the Stored Procedure, as the type of parameter (Input or Output). Next click on the button save to finish the process.
Passing value to the Stored Procedure Parameters.

1
JavaScript
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM JAVASCRIPT
The concept of editing JavaScript in Scriptcase is associated with the fields of the form and JavaScript events, so for each field edited in the JavaScript option, they will be
associated to a specific event.
Edit JavaScript Interface.
Attributes
Select the object : In this Combo box will be displayed the fields that are part of the form application, also the Form its self as an object.
Select the event : In this Combo box you need to associate the event with the selected field, that you are going to apply the JS code. View the events available:
onclick : Runs when the field is clicked.
onblur : Runs when the object loses focus.
onChange : Runs when the object loses focus and its value is modified.
onFocus : Runs when the object receives focus.
onMouseOver : Runs when the mouse pointer hovers the object.
onMouseOut : Runs when the mouse pointer is removed from above the object.
Events related to the Form : The events below are associated directly with the form.
OnLoad : This events runs when the page is loaded, also when navigating between records and clicking on the buttons (Next, Previous, etc.).
onSubmit: This event runs when clicking on the buttons New, Save and Delete.
Edit JavaScript
After selecting the object and the event and clicking on the button (Edit), itll open the page to edit the JavaScript routine, thatll run the moment that the selected event is triggered.
On this page you can inform custom JavaScript routines or use the standard ScriptCase events, e.g. nm_recarga_form(); that refreshes the form.
Edit JavaScript Interface
After saving the JavaScript Routines by clicking on (save), itll conclude the work.
The JavaScript language wont always have the same behavior in all Browsers available in the market. Always when necessary to write a block more elaborated or complex in this
language, its important to do the necessary tests in the browsers that the application will run.
OnClick Example
When clicking on a field of type radio, you can enable or disable a series of fields of the form according to the value selected.
if(document.F1.gender[0].checked){
document.F1.maternity.disabled = false;
document.F1.maternity.style.background='FFFFFF'
}
document.F1.maternity.disabled = true;
document.F1.maternity.style.background='FCEEBC'
}
To access a radio type field, you need to use the index.
OnBlur Example
You can define a warning around the field weekly_work_time when it loses the focus.
2
if (document.F1.tp_point[0].checked && document.F1.weekly_work_time.value > '20')
{
alert("The work time exceeds the limit allowed");
document.F1.weekly_work_time.value = "";
document.F1.weekly_work_time.focus();
}
OnChange Example
By modifying the Salary of and employee and exiting the field, at this moment well check if the position is gardener.
if (document.F1.salary.value > 2000.00 && document.F1.position.value == 'gardener'){
alert('When I grow up, I want to be a gardener);

}
OnFocus
After informing the purchase value and selecting the payment method in a Select type object Select: pay_method, the JavaScript code below calculates the value of
the purchase.
if (document.F1.pay_method[document.F1.pay_method.selectedIndex].text == 'Money')
{
document.F1.total.value = document.F1.pauchase_value.value;
}
OnMouseOver Example
You can change the style (background color, font etc.) when the mouse hovers the field.
document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "0FFCCA"
onMouseOut Example
Sets the background color when the mouse exists the hover of the field.
document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF"
1
Dependencies
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM DEPENDENCIES
This feature allows to link the tables that contain relationships, being the tables that contain dependencies, like the tables orders and order_details. This way its possible to
delete a record in the table orders, all the details for that order will be deleted as well. Below youll see a practical example on this feature.
Firstly, youll define a new dependency. In this example, well create a dependency between the orders (Dependent Table) with the order_details (Current Application). Click on the button
New Dependency to start.
Creating a new Dependency.
Selecting a the dependent table youll inform the amount of fields that are related between the both tables. In this example, only one field will be related to the orders id.
Dependency Table configuration.
Next, select the fields that link the Keys: order_details->Orderid - orders->Orderid.
Dependency Key Fields Configurations.
Creating a Dependency relationship, you only need to set the rules that the application will use. To do this, just click on the button Generate Scripts to define the Dependency Rule.
Configurando as regras da dependncia.

1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
Use Captcha : Defines if the application will have Captcha support.
Number of Characters : Amount of characters in the Captcha image.
Character List : List of characters used in the Captcha.
Label : Message displayed for the Captcha.
Error message : Captcha error message.
Height : Height of the image generated by the Captcha ( in pixels ).
Width : Width of the image generated by the Captcha ( in pixels ).
Font Size : Size of the font used in the image generated by the Captcha (in pixels).
Reload: Display the refresh button in the Captcha.
Select one layout : Offers various layouts (of positioning) for the Captcha display.
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM LOG
1
Fields
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM FIELDS
In the menu Fields, only the fields that were selected in the menu Select fields will available for settings.
List of application fields
Depending on the selected field type a number of specific attributes will be displayed
Text
General Settings
Watermark : Create a placeholder for the selected field.
Initial Value (type) : Allows you to define the initial value for the field when in insert mode. The options are:
Defined Value : The field will receive the value from the text field of the defined value option.
System Date : The field will receive the current server date.
If you select the System Date, then its not necessary to inform the Initial Value attribute.
Initial Value : Youll inform the Defined Value here.
Initial Value Configuration Interface.
Validation Image : Allows to display an image next to the field when its being validated.
Password Field : Formats the input of the field to have a password mask (*).
2
Password configuration Interface.
Save Variable : Allows to save a variable in the session with the value of the field, that can be used in other applications. For example, in the login form the user name can be saved in the
session so that it can be displayed on the header of other applications.
Variable Name : Allows to define the name for the session variable thatll receive the field value.
Field Mask : Defines the mask for field display. There are three types of masks that can be merged.
9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9)
A Replaced by any alpha character entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z)
* Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.
Its possible to merge two or more masks simultaneously, separated by a semi coma with the smallest mas at start. The replacement occurs when the user is typing in the
number of characters form the smallest mask.
Examples
Field Mask Value Entered Value Formatted

Telephone number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only letters) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters and Numbers) **---** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
Car Plate AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
Scriptcases serial key A999A999A999- ** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Multiple Masks (Telephone) 9999-9999;(99)9999-9999;9999 999 9999 +99 99 9999-9999
Validate with mask : Displays an error if the user doesnt complete the value based on the mask.
Complete to the Left : Allows to define the character thatll be used to complete the value to the left that the user typed in to the max size of the field defined in the Field size in database
option.
Field size in database : Determines the field size in bytes. Its used to determine the max size of characters thats allowed to type in.
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through JavaScript or PHP.
Label Field : This options make the field behave as a Read Only field, not allowing modifications to its value while in Insert or Update Mode.
Label Configuration Interface.
Save HTML tags : This option allows to save the HTML content of the field to the database.
Text input in Javascript : Allows to save javascript code informed in the field to the database.
Disabled Field : Defines if the field will be disabled in Insert Mode, Update Mode or in Insert and Update Mode.
HTML Type : HTML Object thatll be used to display the field in the form.
Values Format
Format of Values Interface
Minimum Size : Allows to define the minimum amount of characters accepted for the field.
Maximum Size : Allows to define the maximum amount of characters accepted for the field.
3
Allowed Characters : Allows to select a set of characters that can be typed into the field. The options are:
All : Allows any type of character to be typed into the field
Selected : Defines a set of characters allowed. Using the configuration below, will be allowed to type letters, numbers and other characters (defined in the attribute More). The letters a, b and
c (defined in the Less Attribute) arent allowed.
Database Value
Allows to define a value to be saved to the database.
Database Values configuration Interface.
Defined Value : Allows to specify the fixed value associated to global variables.
Defined Value configuration Interface.
Auto Increment (automatic) : Allows to use the increment generated by the database. Used only when the field of the database is the type AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For the databases
that use sequence like Oracle, PostGres and Firebird, its necessary to inform the name of the sequence.
Auto Increment configuration Interface.
Auto Increment (manual) : The application generated simulates an auto increment on the field. To include a value to the field itll automatically calculate the next id.
Date of Insertion : When inserting a record, the field will contain the server date as a value.
Data of Update : When updating a record, the value of the field will be the date of the server.
User IP : The field will receive the IP of the machine that the application is be accessed by.
Calculated by the database : The value of the field will be applied by the database. The field wont be used in update processes. For example: itll be updated by a Trigger.
Null : The field will be informed the value null.
Lookup Settings
Method used to place a description next to the field.
Use lookup to display the field description. : When enabled, the lookup settings is enabled and opens more settings.
SQL Command : Defines the SQL command thats going to recover the vales from the database. To build a SQL command, its possible to use the SQL Builder tool. The SQL format needs to
have the following format:
SELECT Field_displayed FROM table WHERE Key_Field = '{Form_Field}'
The Form field needs to be referenced buy the curly brackets {}. While running the application, the field within the curly brackets is replaced by its value in the table.
Font : Defines the font used to display the lookup.
Font Color : Defines the color in HEX for the lookup display.
Font Size : Define o tamanho da fonte na exibio do lookup.
EOF Message : Defines a message thatll be displayed if there isnt any results for the record.
Use in validation : When enabled, itll generate an automatic validation based on the lookup, in case there isnt any records found, the message will display as a warning (when Updating or
Including a record).
Lookup Settings validation Interface.

4
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


5
Help Settings
Help Type

6
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
Lines : Allows to define the amount of lines that the field will have at start.
7
Values Format
Database Value

8
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

9

Help Settings
Help Type
10
Integer
General Settings

11
Examples

option.
Values format
Maximum Size : Determines the max size of the field.
Minimum Value : Determines the min value of the field.
Maximum Value : Determines the max value of the field.
Digit Grouping Separator : Defines the character thats used to seperate the thousand.
12
Show a calculator : Displays an icon next to the field, which alles the user to calculate a value for the field.
Use Spin : Atives an option to incrmente and decrement values from the field.
Smaller increment of Spin : Defines the min range of the Spin.
Increase higher Spin : Defines the max range of the Spin.
Database Value
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
13
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
14
Help Type
Decimal
General Settings
15
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Decimal, you can inform decimal values to the field.
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through Javascript or PHP.
Values format
16
Auto-complete with zeros : If enabled, it automatically informs the decimal places when not specified. If disabled, the user needs to always inform the decimal value.
Database Value
Lookup Settings
17
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field



18
Help Settings
Help Type
Currency
General Settings
19
Values format
20
Currency symbol usage : Defines if the field will display the Currency Symbol of the Regional Settings.*
Database Value
Lookup Settings

21
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

22

Help Settings
Help Type
23
Date
General Settings
Date field configuration Interface.

24
Values format
First Day : Define the first day of the week.
Minimum Date :
Fixed Date : Inform the minimum date allowed presented in the selected date format.
Current Date : Clicking on the icon next to the text field, ScriptCase offers the following options:
Actual date : Itll place the current date as the max allowed date.
Actual date with increment : The minimum date will be the current date (+) the days or months or years that you want to increment.
Actual date with decrement : The minimum date will be the current date (-) the days or months or years that you want to decrement.
Maximum Date :
Display Format : Enables the Date format beside the field when informing the date.
Database Value
25
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


26
Help Settings
Help Type

27
Hour
General Settings
Time field configuration Interface.

28
Values format
Seconds.
Display Format : Enables the Time format beside the field when informing the time.
Use Timepicker : Use the JQuery plugin to choose the time.
Database Value
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

29
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
30
Date and Hour

General Settings
31
Date and Time field configuration Interface.
Values format
32
Internal Format : Allows to define the format the field when the SQL type is different from DATETIME . You need to use the characters Y , M, D , HH , II , and SS that correspond to Year, Month,
Display Format : Enables the Date and Time format beside the field when informing the date.
Group Date and Time : Groups the date and time in the same field.
New Calendar : Show the new jquery calendar, or the old calendar.
Years Limit : The amount of years thatll display in the calendar.
View week number : Display the week number in the calendar.
Additional months : Display additional months in the calendar.
Show Combo year and month : Allows you to select the year and month using a combo-box.
Decimal of seconds : Defines the amount of decimals for the seconds.
Database Value
Display Settings
33
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
34
Help Type
HTML Image
General Settings
35
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

36

Help Settings
Help Type

37
Label
General Settings
Label field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as label, the field only display the output of the value .
Text : You can inform the text thatll display beside the field.
Reload : When enabled, make the text informed for the field to become a link to reload the form when clicked.
Position : Allows to position the field in the chosen block.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

38
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
39
Card
General Setting
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a Credit Card Number, the field verifies if the value is valid.
Watermark : Its created a placeholder on the field with the text informed.

40
Field size in database : Determines the size in bytes of the fields. Its used to determine the max amount of characters to be typed in.
Field Mask : Defines the display mask for the field. There are three types of masks that can be merged.
9 Represents a numeric character (0-9)
A Represents an alfa numeric character (A-Z,a-z)
* Represents any alfa numeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) typed by the user.
Its possible to merge two or more masks simultaneously, separated by a semi coma with the smallest mask at start. The replacement occurs when the user is typing when the
lowest amount of character exceeds.
Examples of Masks
Field Mask Informed Value Formatted Value

Telephone Number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only Numbers) AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA QWERTYUIASDFGHJK QWER-TYUI-ASDF-GHJK
Software Key (Letters an Numbers) **---** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-U7I8
License Plates AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
ScriptCase License A999A999A999- ** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-DG2P
Database Value
Lookup Settings
41
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

42

Help Settings
Help Type
43
Card type
General Settings
Credit Card field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Credit Card , itll setup a combo-box for you to select a creditcard type.
Values Format
44
Format of Values Interface.
Credit Card : Allows to define which cards will be listed and their internal value.
Use Title/Deny : Allows to inform a new value if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasnt chosen. The label and the value of this option are
defined as the Negative Value and the Title.
Negative value : Value of the new option if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasnt chosen.
Title : Label of the new option if the one of the previous options (American Express, Diners, MasterCard and Visa) wasnt chosen.
Related Field : Youll inform which of the fields contains the values of a Credit Card Number so that the validations can be done correctly.
Reload Form : Reloads the form when the fields value is modified.
Database Value
Lookup Settings
45
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field



46
Help Settings
Help Type

47
E-mail
General Settings
Email field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Email, the field applies validations for an email format.
Display Icon : Displays the Email icon next to the field.
Database Value
48
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

49
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
50
URL
General Settings
51
URL field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to URL, you can inform a Link value to the field.
Display Icon : Displays an icon beside the field.
Show the URL as a clickable link : Sets the content of the field to clickable link.
Target handling where the link will open : Target where the the lick will direct to after being clicked
Database Value
52
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

53
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
54
HTML Color
General Settings
55
HTML Color field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to HTML Color, you can select a color to be used in the form.
Database Value
56
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

57
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
58
HTML Editor
Settings
HTML Editor field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the applciation. When set to HTML Editor, you can inform any type of character and theyll be saved in HTML form.
Height : Inform the Height in pixels for the HTML Editor.
Toolbar
HTML Editor toolbar settings Interface.

59
Properties
Position : Location of the HTML Editor toolbar
Alignment : Toolbar button alignment
Status : Status Bar Display ( Dont Display, Top and Bottom).
Amount : The Amount of lines of the HTML Editor toolbar.
Button Organization : Allows to position the toolbar buttons.
Preview : You can visualize the toolbar according to the previous settings.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


60
Help Settings
Help Type

61
Localization
General Settings
Location field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as Location, youll se a combobox with the Languages that are part of the Project Properties.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


62
Help Settings
Help Type

63
Theme
General Settings
Theme field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Theme, you view a combo box with the list of themes that are set to your project.
Reload : Reload the form after modifying the value.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

64

Help Settings
Help Type
65
Youtube
General Settings
Display Settings
66
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
67
Help Type
Google Maps
General Settings
68
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as Google Maps, itll use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Form Applications
Display Settings
69
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
70
Help Type
Image ( Database )
General Settings
71
Image (Database) field Configuration Interface.
Progress bar : Displays a progress bar when sending the files to the server.
Upload area : Displays a dragn drop area to upload the file.
Display link only : WHen enabled, youll be presented with a link to open the image in another image with the original size of the image ( without using the redimensioning ).
Extensions to allow : Extensions allowed to upload, separated by a semi coma (;). If left in blank, all the extensions are allowed. e.g. docx;jpg;png;xls
Multi-Upload
This option allows to upload multiple files and store them on a table referencing a record from another table.
Multi-Upload Configuration.
Amount of columns : Amount of columns to displays the files in the Field.
Position of the delete : Checkbox option to delete files position.
Position on the upload : Position of the records when uploading.
Show status : Display the upload status.
Table : Select the table thatll store the information of the files when uploading.
After selecting the table, youll see a list of all the fields of the chosen table, where youll associate the parameters for each field when inserting a new record or updating an
existing record.
72
Multi-Upload fields of the table Configuration.
File Name : Obtains the name og the file thats being loaded.
Upload : Obtains the binary value of the file.
Auto Increment : Used only when field in the database in an auto increment or similar.
Manual Increment : The form will be responsible for managing the auto-increment, calculating the value of the field before inserting the record.
Foreign Key : Associates the file with a value of a field in the current form.
Defined : You can specify a constant value or use a global variable. [global_var]
Date of Insertion : Obtains the data of the server when inserting the record.
Datetime de Insertion : Obtains the data and time of the server when inserting the record.
User IP : The field will contain the IP of the computer thats accessing the application.
Calculated by the Database : The value of the field is applied in the database.
Calculated by the Database if empty : The value of the field is applied in the database if not informed by the application.
Null : The field will the null value.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

73
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
74
Imagem ( File Name )

General Settings
Image (File Name) field Configuration Interface.

75
Increment file : Increments the file name if the theirs an existing one with the same name in the upload folder.
Subfolder : Subfolders name that the files are stored. The is sub folder is relative to the directory defined for the Document upload (see the Settings). Its possible to use global variables or
local variables to format the name of the subfolder.
Create Subfolder : When enabled, it creates the subfolder if not already created.
Image Caching : Time in minutes that the image cache will be stored.
Hide image name : When enalbed, only the image will be displayed without its name.
Files Deletion : Deletes the files from the directory when the record is deleted from the database.
Multi-Upload
existing record.
76
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

77
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
78
General Settings
Document (Database) field Configuration Interface.
File Size : Defines the field that conatins the file size.
Multi-Upload
79
existing record.
Display Settings
80
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
81
Help Type

Multi-Upload
82
existing record.
Display Settings
83
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
84
Help Type
Barcode
General Settings
85
Disabled Field : Defines if the field will e disabled in the Insert Mode , Update Mode or in Insert and Update Mode.
Barcode
Display Settings

86
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
87
Select
General Settings
Select field configuration Interface.

88
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Select, you can select multiple option from a combobox (Select Field).
Database Value
Lookup Settings
89
Lookup Methods
90
automatically.
91
Single Value :
Man .
92
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
93
Man .
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

94
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

95
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
96
Double Select
General Settings
Double Select field configuration Interface.

97
Hidden Field : This option makes the field hidden, but still allows its value to be processed through Javascript or PHP. .
Database Value
Lookup Settings

98
(;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings

99
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
100
CheckBox
General Settings
Checkbox field configuration Interface.

101
Database Value
Lookup Settings
102
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
103
Single Value :
Man .

104
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
105
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
106
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
107
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
108
Help Type
Radio
General Settings
109
Radio field configuration Interface.
Database Value
Lookup Settings
110
Lookup Methods
111
112
Ajax Processing
113
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


114
Help Settings
Help Type

115
Text Auto-Complete
General Settings
Text auto complete field configuration Interface.
option.
Validate on submit : Validate the field only when the form is submitted.
116
Values Format
Database Value
Lookup Settings
117
Display Settings
118
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
119
Help Type
General Settings
120
Number auto complete field configuration Interface.
option.
Database Value

121
Lookup Settings
122
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
123
Help Type

1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM LAYOUT
Pages
Using the definition of blocks, a page is a container of blocks. Where each application is created with a least one page that has the default name pag1. In applications of the
type Form, Control and Search is possible to create many pages for an application. The pages are Tabs where each tab contains blocks defined in the block settings.
Pages (available only in the Form, Control and
Search applications) configuration Interface.
See the example below of the Form application using two Pages: General Data and Documents.
Form Application using Pages feature.
Pages Settings
The form application already comes with a default page, identified as Pag1, that can be renamed, with the creation of new pages. The use of pages is indicated when you have an
application that contains various fields of a table (more than 20 for example). A form with more than 20 fields vertically placed would be difficult to use. An application can
contain various pages, and in each one of them you can add various blocks.
2
Pages Configuration Interface.
Attributes
Including A new page, just inform the two fields above the button Include, on the first field youll inform the name of the page and on the second field youll select the image thatll
represent the icon of the folder, a then click on Include.
Deleting A page, just click on the Garbage Can icon corresponding to the line of the page.
The definition of pages is only considered in the Single Record Forms
Tab Folder configurations

Font : Allows to define which font-family will be displayed in the field. Clicking on the icon existing on the right side, it opens a page to select the font. Just select the font from the
list, and itll be applied to field, leaving to you just to confirm the font.
Font Size : Informs the desired size for the font.
Selected Font Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color palette.
When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Selected Background Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color
palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Non Selected Font Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a color
Non Selected Background Color : Field to set the color for the text that will be in the Selected Tab. Clicking on the existing icon to the right of the field opens a screen containing a
color palette. When the selected color is selected, the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Blocks
current one.

3
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
4
Attributes
Layout Settings
5
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
6
Footer
Menu structure
Layer editing

7

1
Events
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM EVENTS
Within the events you can include Scriptcase global, local variables, libraries and macros, PHP, JavaScript, HTML and CSS codes.
onApplicationInit
onNavigate
OnScriptInit
onLoadRecord
onLoad
This event runs when the application is finished loading
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
This event runs when the form validation gives an error.
onValidateSuccess
This event runs when the form validation doesnt give an error.
onBeforeInsert
This event is executed before inserting a record from the application.
onAfterInsert
This event is executed after inserting a record from the application.
onBeforeInsertAll
2
This event runs before inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterInsertAll
This event runs after inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onBeforeUpdate
This event is executed before updating a record from the application.
onAfterUpdate
This event is executed after updating a record from the application.
onBeforeUpdateAll
This event runs before updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterUpdateAll
This event runs after updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onBeforeDelete
This event runs before deleting the records from the Form.
onAfterDelete
This event runs after deleting the records from the Form.
onBeforeDeleteAll
This event runs before deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterDeleteAll
This event runs after deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
1
Ajax Events
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
Selecting a field
OnChange
The ajax event OnChange is executed when the value of the field that its based on is modified.
Selecting a field
OnBlur
The ajax event OnBlur is executed when the focus is removed from the field that event is based on.
Selecting a field
2
OnFocus
The ajax event OnFocus is executed when the field that its based on is applied with a focus.
Selecting a field
1
Buttons
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM BUTTONS
In addition to the applications buttons, you can also create new manual buttons. These buttons will be placed on the application toolbar.
Creating new buttons
Creating a button
To create a new button, click the new button and type a name and the button type.
Form button types: (JavaScript, PHP, and Ajax).
Form button types
Deleting a button
To delete a button click on the icon next to the name of the button in the application menu (recycle bin).
Deleting a button
JavaScript
Button
2
Image
Link
Code Block
PHP
Button
3
Image
Link
Code Block
Link
Button
4
Image
Link
Setting up the Link

Link Parameters
Ajax
You can configure the display mode of the ajax button in Image, Button or Link.
Button
5
Setting up Ajax Button.
Image
Link
Code Block
Ajax button coding block.
In this block, you can use macros, Ajax code and JavaScript.
1
Master/detail form
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM MASTER/DETAIL FORM
This option allows you to create forms to update, on a single screen, tables with 1:N relationship.
New detail
In the application menu, you can create a new connection by clicking on the New detail option from Master/detail folder.
Criating a new detail.
Setting name and label

Interface to set link name and label. It is going to be displayed within the master application as a field. Name can not contain spaces nether special characters.
Interface to set link name and label.
Application list
Only the form types: Editable Grid or Editable Grid View can be used as an application detail. You must create the form detail application before you create the Master/Detail link,
because you will need to select the application during the link creation.
Interface to configure the detail application.
Parameters definition
In the left side column will be displayed all master form fields, and on the right side column are listed the detail form fields. You will need to associate the master form primary
keys with the detail form foreign keys. The 1:N relationship between the tables must to exist also within the database.
2
Interface to configure the link parameters.
Link properties
After the link creation, you can change the properties by clicking on the link and selecting the properties option.
Link properties.
Attributes
Form properties : Within this option you can select the buttons that are going to be displayed in the detail form.
Iframe properties : This option allows you to configure the iframe height and width (in pixels) where the detail form is going to be displayed.
Other properties
Editable Grid View : Allows you to select if the detail form will be an Editable Grid view or not.
Paging : Allows you to select your form detail paging. The options are:
Partial : This option will set page layout as partial, with a limited records per page, according to the quantity informed within the option below Lines per page
Total : This option will set the page to display all records in one page.
Lines per page : Here you can set the amount of records that are displayed in the detail form, you will need to set that just if paging is partial.
When deleting : This option allows you to choose how the form detail dependencies will be treated in a deletion. The options are:
Warn when there are dependencies : Displays an error message if there is dependency on the detail form record that is being deleted from the master form.
Delete dependencies without warning : Deletes all existing dependencies in the detail form without warning the user.
Edit link : This button will allow you to remake the link for application details.
1
Many-to-many relationship
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM MANY-TO-MANY RELATIONSHIP
Allows you to configure automatic update link tables in N:N relationships
Identification
This link will be handled as a field within the form application. We have to set the field name, data type, label and define if we will use a specific connection for this link. If decide
to you use a specific connection there will be a combo box with for you to seleact according to the connections available in the project.
Creating field to update link table.
Grid Information
In this step you need to inform the data source, this connection will be available for the user to select (lookup). It allows you to choose if the select command is manually
informed or if it will be based on a table.
Informing the select command.
If you check the option Choose table there will be 3 combo boxes for you to select according to the connections tables available in the project: table, key field and description.
Informing the select command based in a table..
Key : Value that will be stored in the table.
Description : Value that will be displayed in the update field.
SQL Select Statement

Select command informed by user or created based on a table, it is responsible for displaying the selection field contents.
Select command.
Lookup display
This option sets the display for the update field
Field object type.

2
Display key and description : If you want to display the code and the description informed in the select command.
Display Title : Displays attribute title (see attribute).
Separator : When the option Display key and description is checked as yes you must define a separator between the code and the description.
Object : Object field type that will be displayed in the update form. The types are: Select, Radio, Check box and Double Select.
Check and Uncheck All : Option to Check and Uncheck all records (available only for when Check box object is selected).
Columns : This option sets the number of columns (available only when the objects Check box or Radio is selected)
Height : This option sets the object height (available only when the objects Select or Double Select is selected).
Link Table
Link table.
This option sets the relationship table that will be updated.
Update table selection.
Relationship Keys
link key
This option sets the application fields that are related with the link table fields.
Setting values for the fields in the update table.
Lookup Field
Lookup field.
This option sets the field from the lookup table that is related to the link table.
Defining the foreign key relationship table..
Link Attributes
This option sets the values that are recorded in the fields of the link table that are not foreign key.
Setting the assignment field.
Attributes : It is written a value without the need for user data entry, it is an application field itself.
Data entry : It is written a value reported by the user, it is necessary to create a field and relate it by the select.
3
Search
Available only for Double Select object
Search in the double select field.
This option sets a filter for the link field.
![Search settings for the link field.][relacao_n_n_info_filtro_config] Search settings for the link field.
Limit of Records : Maximum number of records returned by the search.
Initial State : this option sets whether the form field load come Filled or empty.
Search Fields : This option sets whether the search will be displayed the code and/or Description.
General Display Settings

This option allows you to configure all general display settings from from field title and object.
Display settings.
Help Configuration
This feature allows it to be documented instructions for use of the application generated, that is, help end users to better understand the business rules of the system and the
best way to operate it.
Help Configuration
Attributes
Help Description : This option allows the inclusion of a text that will be displayed when the user to position the mouse over the field.
Help Type :
Popup : When choosing the type popup, help icon is displayed next to the field; that when clicked, will display what was reported in the attribute Describes Help.
Hint : When you pass the mouse cursor over the field, will help described in the field Describe Help.
Text : Next to the field will appear a text containing the help that was described in the field Describe Help.
1
Search
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM SEARCH
Settings
Attributes
Dynamic Search
Settings
Select Fields
QuickSearch
2
Select Fields

3
Fields
Text
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
4
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
5
Help Type
Integer
6
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

7
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
8
Decimal

9
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

10

Help Settings
Help Type
11
Percent
FIELD BEHAVIOR
12
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


13
Help Settings
Help Type

14
Currency
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings

15
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
16

17
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


18
Help Settings
Help Type

19
Date

FIELD BEHAVIOR

20
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

21

Help Settings
Help Type

22
Time
Seconds.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
23
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
24
Help Type
Datetime
25

FIELD BEHAVIOR
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Display Settings
26
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
27
Help Type
Select
28
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
29
30
automatically.
Single Value :
31
Man .
Man .
The example below:

32
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
33
4
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
Ajax Processing
34
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


35
Help Settings
Help Type

36
DOUBLE SELECT
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings

37
(;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

38

Help Settings
Help Type
39
Checkbox
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings

40
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
41
Single Value :
Man .
42
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .

43
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
44
Ajax Processing
Display Settings

45
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
46
Radio

47
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
48
49
Ajax Processing
50
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


51
Help Settings
Help Type

52
Grid Fields
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

53

Help Settings
Help Type
54
Sorting
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

55
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
56
Text Auto-Complete

57
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
58
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


59
Help Settings
Help Type

60
Configuration.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
61
Display Settings
62
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
63
Help Type

1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Messages
Global Variables
Example:


3
Synchronize table
This process performs a comparison between the definitions of application fields and fields of the connected database table. If there is any change within the connected table,
such as adding a new field, exclusion, or a change in the data type, the changes will appear visible as in the image below:
Table synchronization interface.
After accessing the function from the link Synchronize table you will see a comparison table between the application fields (left table) and the database table fields (right table),
above image, the fields highlighted in red will be deleted of the application, the fields highlighted in Green will be inserted in the form, and the fields highlighted in orange
will be updated, so data type will be updated.
To rename a field in the database table, the table synchronization effect, by comparison, will be the same as deleting a field that existed in the application and the inclusion of a
new field.
1
Links
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM LINKS
New link
When you click the New Link ScriptCase application menu will display the screen below.
Application link
2
Field link
Grid application.
3
Capture link

4
Button link
Link edit
Editing Links.
Actions
Link Properties

Form Property
Iframe properties
5


1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS FORM PROGRAMMING
ScriptCase has incorporated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources, methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in
applications, and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2
JavaScript Methods
JavaScript method creation Interface
Include Method.

3
Add the amount of variables: JavaScript method parameter definition

1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS TAB SETTINGS
Tab settings interface.
Within the Tab settings you can configure the following attributes:
Title : Application title that will be displayed in the toolbar.
Friendly URL : This field allows you to customize the URL that will be called by the application, the allowed characters are the same available on regular URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_. This option can
also be changed within Scriptcase Home interface, on the Friendly URL column from the applications grid.
Organization : Allows the applications to run inside folders via iframe or embedded on the tabs application.
Type : This option sets how the folders will be organized, it can be:
Folder on the Top : Displays the folders above the application.
Folder on the Bottom : Displays the folders below the application, next to the footer.
Folder on the Left : This option allows the folders to be aligned in the left, like a vertical menu.
Folder on the Right : This option allows the folders to be aligned in the right, like a vertical menu.
Menu on the Top : This option is similar to Folder on the Top, but its visual schema has the menu style.
Menu on the Bottom : This option is similar to Folder on the Bottom, but its visual schema has the menu style. .
Menu on the Left : This option is similar to Folder on the Left, but its visual schema has the menu style.
Menu on the Right : This option is similar to Folder on the Right, but its visual schema has the menu style.
Side by Side : Display all applications in folders, one next to the other.
Table Width : Main table size.
Measure Unit : The unit used by table size. It can be: Pixel or percentage..
Tab Alignment : This option sets the tab alignment position. It can be: center, left or right.
Application alignment : This option sets the application alignment position, It can be: center, left, or right.
Exit : This option allows you to define how the exit will be presented in the application, the options:
Button on the bottom of the page;
Folder;
Button in the toolbar
In view.
Exit Icon : This option allow you to select an icon for the Exit option in the tab. Use the image manage to select or import a customized image.
1
Folder settings
HOME APPLICATIONS TAB FOLDER SETTINGS
You will use the folder settings options to manage each folder link to an existing application.
Folder Settings Interface.
Add a folder : To create a tab, click in Add and fill these fields: * Label : Application name that will be displayed in the tab or menu (examples: Personal Data, Finance Data,
etc.); * Image : Choose the image that will be used for this tab;
Update : Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then update the data. Finally, click on the update button.
Clean : Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then delete the item.
Remove : This button when clicked, clears all existing folders in the box (the box located in the left).
1
Application settings
HOME APPLICATIONS TAB APPLICATION SETTINGS
In this folder you can set which applications will be part of the tabs implemented, as follows:
Application Settings Interface
Initially you must click on the tab that you need to update. You have the options:
Add : Click Add button, and then the following screen will be displayed for selection of applications.
Edit : Select the application for the link and then click the Edit button. The following steps are the application selection and setting the size of the iframe, as requested in the process to add
applications.
Remove : To remove just select the application you want to delete in the folder, and then click Remove.
Adding and editing applications
Select the application to be placed in the folder, and click the continue button, you must see the screen below:
Application Link Interface.
Then the following screen will be displayed to complement with the link parameters to the selected application:
Parameters set Interface..
Iframe width : Width set to be used inside the folder to display the application window, leaving 100% the application will be adjusted more easily.
Iframe height : Height set to be used in the iframe to display the application window, if the its too small, the application will create a scroll bar to the window.
Reload Iframe : When a folder is selected the applications contained in the same run and the result is displayed, with this option turned on Yes when you click on the folder that contains
the application cache is created with the page loaded, this cache will be used if the user browse for other folders and return to the folder that has the application with this option enabled.
Parameters / Value : For each parameter of the application we are putting in the folder, there are three options to choose:
Variable : Global variable name where the content will be retrieved.
Value : Content to be loaded into the parameter at run time.
Empty : For this parameter the content will not be the responsibility of the Tab application
1
PDF settings
HOME APPLICATIONS TAB PDF SETTINGS
PDF Settings Interface.
Create PDF : This option allows to define if the application will have output in PDF format.
PDF Orientation : This option sets the direction of the reports generated in PDF, it can be: portrait or landscape.
PDF Format : Pages format of the reports generated in PDF, such as Letter, A4, A5, etc.
Open PDF Directly : This option indicates whether the application will allow us to generate the PDF directly via button or through a link to the PDF.
1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS TAB SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS TAB LOG
1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS TAB LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
Menu structure
3
Layer editing

1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS TAB APPLICATION
General data
Settings interface.
In this folder you can set the application configuration attributes, such as:
Application Code : Code for internal use of ScriptCase. Should start by a letter.
Connection : Connection name of the used by ScriptCase to access the tables. The user can select it.
Default Profile : Default profile to be loaded into the production environment.
Language : Data formatting based on the regional settings.
Charset : Share location with other applications based on the values in the session.
Share Theme Variable : Shares themes with other applications based on the values in the session.
Exit URL :URL to which the user will be redirected to exit the application.
Folder : Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. The user can select it.
Description : Application description.
HelpCase Link : Using this option you can associate HelpCase files to your application.
Global variables
Example:
2


1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS DASHBOARD SETTINGS
Dashboard settings
Add link widget
Allows you to create a link widget.
Title:
Here you will set a title for the widget.

2
Link:
Here you can link a Scriptcase application or an external URL to display its content within the widget. To select an application, click the link and select the application you want to
connect. To use a URL link you just need to enter the complete URL. E.g.: http://www.scriptcase.com.br/
When selecting an application, if it links to other applications, you can set the location where these links will be opened.
Called application : Application that is part of the link.
Link type: Link type between the applications.
Field: If its a field type link, it will display the field that is part of the link.
Target: Where the linked application will be opened.
Properties:
Using this option you can set the widget execution properties.
Compact mode : This option enable/disable the compact mode. When enabled it will hide the linked application header and footer.
Display widget header : Enables/disables the display of the widget header.
Removable: This option allows the Widget to be removed at run time.
Move : This option allows the Widget can be moved at run time.
Maximize: This option enables/disables the option to maximize the widget.
Collapsible : This option allows the Widget is expanded at runtime.
Reload time : Linked application or selected URL reload time into the Widget, it must be set in seconds.
Add Index widget

Using this type of widgets you can display key performance indicators within the dashboard.
3
Title:
Here you will set a title for the index widget.
Index:
Using the options below you can set the index options.
Connection: Connection that will be used for recovery of the values for the index;
Table name : Table that will be used for recovery of the values of the index;
Metric field: Table field that will be used for recovery of the values of the index;
Metric function : Metric function that will be used. Metric functions available for each field type are:
Integer: Sum, Average, Max, Min, Count, Distinct Count.
Text: Count, Distinct Count.
Date: Count, Distinct Count.
Binary: Count, Distinct Count.
Display as : This option sets the display form of value, which can be of types:
Percentage difference: Displays the difference in percentage form between the largest and the smallest value of the index;
Difference: Displays the difference between the largest and smallest value of the index;
Value: displays the value of the index.
Period field: Field of type DATE used for retrieving the value of the index;
Period function : Check function used for retrieving the value of the index.
Properties:
Using this option you can set the widget execution properties.
4
Compact mode : This option enable/disable the compact mode. When enabled it will hide the linked application header and footer.
Display widget header : Enables/disables the display of the widget header.
Removable: This option allows the Widget to be removed at run time.
Move : This option allows the Widget can be moved at run time.
Maximize: This option enables/disables the option to maximize the widget.
Collapsible : This option allows the Widget is expanded at runtime.
Reload time : Linked application or selected URL reload time into the Widget, it must be set in seconds.
Widgets organization
You can change the size and arrangement of widgets on the screen. To resize a Widget, click the lower right edge of the Widget and drag. To move, click on the Widget and drag
to the desired position.
Save
5
Saves the changes made.

1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS DASHBOARD SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS DASHBOARD LOG
1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS DASHBOARD LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
Menu structure
3
Layer editing

1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS DASHBOARD APPLICATION
General data
Settings interface.
In this folder you can set the application configuration attributes, such as:
Application Code : Code for internal use of ScriptCase. Should start by a letter.
Connection : Connection name of the used by ScriptCase to access the tables. The user can select it.
Default Profile : Default profile to be loaded into the production environment.
Language : Data formatting based on the regional settings.
Charset : Share location with other applications based on the values in the session.
Share Theme Variable : Shares themes with other applications based on the values in the session.
Exit URL :URL to which the user will be redirected to exit the application.
Folder : Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. The user can select it.
Description : Application description.
HelpCase Link : Using this option you can associate HelpCase files to your application.
Global variables
1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL SETTINGS
Layout and Behavior
1
Edit fields
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL EDIT FIELDS
Fields
Label
Datatype
New
Update
Read-Only
Required
PK
DB value (Insert)
DB value (Update)
Page
Blocks
2
Display Interface.
Attributes
1
Fields positioning
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL FIELDS POSITIONING
Field Positioning
1
Toolbar
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL TOOLBAR
from a Desktop .
Mobile.
Toolbar
Attribute :

2
Separator
Add Button Groups
Button Settings
3

Options
Opes da consulta
Attribute
Mobile Toolbar
4
Mobile toolbar.
1
SQL
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL SQL
tables (SQL).
1
JavaScript
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL JAVASCRIPT
Attributes
Edit JavaScript
OnClick Example
}
}
OnBlur Example
2
{
}
OnChange Example

}
OnFocus
the purchase.
{
}
OnMouseOver Example
onMouseOut Example
1
Segurana
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL SEGURANA
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL LOG
1
Authentications
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL AUTHENTICATIONS
Scriptcase can link its applications using OAuth methods. These methods allow you to integrate a Scriptcase project with the following data sources:
Facebook
Facebook fields authentication interface.
When you create a button Facebook authentication, you must fill in the fields:
App ID : Facebook application ID. This ID will be provided by Facebook Developers page.
Secret : Secret key provided by Facebook, so the application can be executed.
Method return : Method that will be performed when Facebook service returns the requested data. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
Programming > PHP Methods
For building applications, visit: Facebook app development
Twitter
Twitter fields authentication interface.
When you create a button Twitter authentication, you must fill in the fields:
Key : Twitter application ID. This ID will be provided by Twitter Developers page .
Secret : Secret key provided by Twitter, so the application can be executed.
Method return : Method that will be performed when Twitter service returns the requested data. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
For building applications, visit: Twitter app development
Google
Google fields authentication interface.
Application name : Name of the application created on Google+.
Client ID : Google+ application ID. This ID will be provides by Google Developers page.
Secret : Secret key provided by Google+, so the application can be executed.
Method return : Method that will be performed when Google+ service returns the requested data. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
For building applications, visit: Google+ app development
PayPal
2
PayPal fields authentication interface.
To create the integration with PayPal, you must fill in these fields:
PayPal URL : This URL can be to the PayPal SandBox or to the real PayPal API. The SandBox is used to perform tests with the application before applying the integration in a real environment.
Id : PayPal ID to receive the sales money. Usually the registered email as business.
Order number : Order Number to be stored in PayPal. Also used to treat the receipt of the IPN in order to identify and process the order as paid.
Customized field :Custom field to be stored in PayPal. Also used to treat the receipt of the IPN in order to identify and process the order as paid, if you want to do some additional checking.
Variable with the description : Using this field you can place the Global variable that will contain the description to be sent to PayPal.
Variable with the Total amount. : Method to be ran when PayPal service return the data requested.
Variable with the currency type : Use to specify the payment currency. If the currency variable is not included, the currency defaults to USD.
PayPal Method : Method that will be called after the User complete the PayPal transaction. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option
Method Cancel : Method to be executed if the user cancels the PayPal transaction. You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option Programming > PHP
Methods
Method IPN : Method that will be called by web service from PayPal to confirm the payment of a transaction. This method is called by web service and it has no HTML output to the end-user.
You will have to create that method according to our validation rules, using the option Programming > PHP Methods
For PayPal configuration, please visit: Configuring PayPal credentials
The variables list returned by the PayPal API can be found below:
[mc_gross]
[invoice]
[protection_eligibility]
[address_status]
[payer_id]
[tax]
[address_street]
[payment_date]
[payment_status]
[charset]
[address_zip]
[first_name]
[mc_fee]
[address_country_code]
[address_name]
[notify_version]
[custom]
[payer_status]
[business]
[address_country]
[address_city]
[quantity]
[verify_sign]
[payer_email]
[txn_id]
[payment_type]
[last_name]
[address_state]
[receiver_email]
[payment_fee]
[receiver_id]
3
[txn_type]
[item_name]
[mc_currency]
[item_number]
[residence_country]
[test_ipn]
[handling_amount]
[transaction_subject]
[payment_gross]
[shipping]
[ipn_track_id]
1
Fields
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL FIELDS
Text
General Settings
2
Examples

option.
Values Format
3
Lookup Settings
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
4
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
5
Help Type
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
6
Values Format
7
Lookup Settings
Display Settings

8
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
9
Integer
General Settings
10
Examples

option.
11
Values format
Lookup Settings
12
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field



13
Help Settings
Help Type
Decimal
14
General Settings
Values format

15
Lookup Settings
Display Settings

16
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
17
Currency
General Settings
18
Values format
19
Lookup Settings
20
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
21
Help Type
HTML Image
General Settings
22
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

23

Help Settings
Help Type

24
Label
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

25
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
26
Card
General Setting

27
Examples of Masks

Lookup Settings

28
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
29
Help Type
Card type
General Settings
30
Values Format
Lookup Settings
31
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

32

Help Settings
Help Type
33
E-mail
General Settings

34
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
35
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
36
Help Type
URL
General Settings
37
Lookup Settings
38
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

39

Help Settings
Help Type
40
HTML Color
General Settings
41
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

42
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
43
HTML Editor
Settings

44
Toolbar
Properties
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

45

Help Settings
Help Type
46
Localization
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

47
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
48
Theme
General Settings
Display Settings
49
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
50
Help Type
Date
General Settings
51
Values format

52
Minimum Date :
Maximum Date :
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

53

Help Settings
Help Type

54
Time
General Settings

55
Values format
Seconds.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


56
Help Settings
Help Type

57
Date and time

General Settings

58
Values format
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

59
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type

60
Image ( File Name )

General Settings

61
Multi-Upload
existing record.

62
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field



63
Help Settings
Help Type

64

General Settings
Document (File Name) field Configuration Interface.
Multi-Upload
65
existing record.
Display Settings
66
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
67
Help Type
Select
General Settings
68
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

69
70
automatically.
71
Single Value :
Man .
72
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
73
Man .
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

74
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

75
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
76
Double Select
General Settings

77
Lookup Settings
(;).
78
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


79
Help Settings
Help Type

80
Check Box
General Settings
Lookup Settings
81
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
82
Single Value :
Man .

83
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
84
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
85
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
86
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
87
Help Type
Radio
General Settings
88
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
89
90
91
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title


92
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
93
Profile
General Settings
Profile field configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Profile, itll display a combo with the profiles setup in the project properties.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

94
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
95
Menu Links
General Settings
Menu Links field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as Menu Links, you can define links to be listed in the application.
96
Values Format
Values Format Interface.
Menu Items : Control the Insert, Update and Delete the items of the menu.
Label : Defines the label for the menu item.
Link : Defines the external link thatll be called when clicking the item.
Icon : Defines the icons thatll be displayed beside the link.
Default : Defines the item that be selected o item do menu que vir selecionado nos modos de exibio (Select e Radio).
Insert : Insert a new item to the menu novo item no menu.
Update : Update the selected item.
Delete : Delete the selected item.
Clear : Clears the data of the selected item.
Clear All : Removes all items form the menu.
Display Mode : Defines how the menu items will display, having the types: Select , Radio and Link:
Select
Radio
Link
Hide Label : When using the display mode, you can enable or disable the label display.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

97
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type

98
Text Auto-Complete
General Settings

99
option.
Values Format
Lookup Settings
100
Display Settings
101
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
102
Help Type
General Settings
103
option.
Lookup Settings
104
Display Settings
105
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
106
Help Type

1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL LAYOUT
Pages
Pages Settings
2
Attributes

Blocks
current one.

3
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
4
Attributes
Layout Settings
5
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
6
Footer
Menu structure
Layer editing

7

1
Events
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL EVENTS
onApplicationInit
OnScriptInit
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
1
Ajax Events
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
Selecting a field
OnChange
Selecting a field
OnBlur
Selecting a field
2
OnFocus
Selecting a field
1
Buttons
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL BUTTONS
Creating a button
Form button types
Deleting a button
Deleting a button
JavaScript
Button
2
Image
Link
Code Block
PHP
Button
3
Image
Link
Code Block
Link
Button
4
Image
Link
Setting up the Link

Link Parameters
Ajax
Button
5
Image
Link
Code Block
1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Messages
Global variables
Example:


1
Links
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL LINKS
New link
Application link
2
Field link
Grid application.
3
Capture link

4
Button link
Link edit
Editing Links.
Actions
Link Properties

Form Property
Iframe properties
5


1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2
JavaScript Methods
Include Method.

3

1
User HTML
HOME APPLICATIONS CONTROL USER HTML
This option is available in the Control application if the item Set the template HTML manually template is selected when creating the application.
To use the custom HTML in Control, depends on specific Markups so that the Scriptcase can include its control and validation routines.
Check
2
Clicking the Check button, it verifies the structure to confirm which Markups were used in the content of the HTML.
When clicking on the Markups of the Check item, a modal window is displayed with tips for using the same Markup.
The Markups are divided in 3 different categories:
TIPS
These Markups are not required, however, they are used to import files from libraries, images and other features.
REQUIRED
These Markups are of obligatory use in the item HTML. If they are not used, certain internal Scriptcase routines will not be executed.
Optional
Like the category name, these Markups are optional, not influencing the correct execution of the application.
HTML
3
In this item, we can insert the desired HTML, remembering to use the required Markups.
The control.js and control.css files refer to the contents of the JavaScript and CSS items respectively. By default, they are automatically created by the application, by default:
appName.js and appName.css.
CSS
In this item, we can use our custom CSS to take effect in the HTML code used in the previous item.
JavaScript
In this item, we can use our custom JavaScript to take effect in the code HTML used in the previous item.
4
External Libraries
In this option, we can define if we will use the files . HTML , . CSS and . JS from an external library or if we will use the code HTML, CSS and JavaScript of the items of the
application itself.
Do not use external library
This option defines that the HTML,
CSS, and JavaScript code to be used, come from the current applications HTML, CSS, and JavaScript items.
Use external library
When selecting this option, we define the use of external libraries that contain the HTMl, CSS and JavaScript to be used by the application. The HTML, CSS and JavaScript
items will be disabled.
Preview
Youll see how the application will appear after its generation.
Create Fields
5
If you use field Markup before the field is created in the menu item Fields > New Field, and the item ( Create Fields) is pressed, a modal window is displayed to synchronize the
fields, after confirmation, the fields will be displayed in the Fields menu item.
When adding fields from the menu item Campos> New Field, Scriptcase will automatically insert new mandatory Markups related to the newly created field to be used in the
HTML item.
1
OnExecute
HOME APPLICATIONS BLANK ONEXECUTE
In this menu is entered the PHP code that will executed by the application.
OnExecute.
OnExecute : This event allows to entry PHP commands, JavaScript, CSS, HTML, ScriptCase macros and libraries.
1
SQL
HOME APPLICATIONS BLANK SQL
In blank applications you can use one connection to access the database by default but as in other application types (forms, inquiries and control ) you can run SQL commands
using other connections different from the native application connection.
SQL Settings.
Connection : This option allows you to choose one of your project databases connections.
1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS BLANK SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS BLANK LOG
1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS BLANK APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Global Variables
Example:


1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS BLANK PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS MENU SETTINGS
Desktop
The menu settings allow to define the attributes of the application display, according to the following:
Menu configuration Interface.
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu (Left, Center, Right).
Vertical Alignment of the items : Defines the vertical alignment of the menu items (Top, Center, Bottom).
Horizontal Alignment of the Items : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu items (Left, Center, Right).
Toolbar Horizontal Alignment : Defines the horizontal alignment of the toolbar items (Left, Center, Right).
Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL thats going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_). The Friendly URL can be informed
on the initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the Friendly URL column.
Menu Width : Defines the width of the menu in pixels or percentage.
Menu Height : Defines the height of the menu in pixels or percentage.
Iframe Width : Defines the width of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.
Iframe Height : Defines the height of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.
Hide menu items : When enabled and used with the security module, itll hide the items that the user doesnt have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.
Hide the menus toolbar : When enabled and used with the security module, itll hide the toolbar that the user doesnt have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.
Use theme background : If defined as Yes, itll use the background theme of the menu, in case its defined as No, itll use the background defined in the project.
Scroll bar : Enables the scroll bar in the Iframe.
Select Language : Allows to select the language in the menu bar.
Select Theme : Allows to select the theme in the menu bar.
Alignment of Theme and Language : Defines the horizontal alignment of the language and theme combo boxes.
Always show the items : Displays the application items, even though they dont exist, or havent been generated yet.
Hide menu : Enables the option to hide the menu.
Navigation
The menu navigation settings allow to define the attributes of the tabs and the navigation path, according to the following:
2
Menu Navigation configurations Interface.
Attributes
Open items in a tab : When enabled, the items will always open as tabs in a horizontal bar beneath the menu.
Navigating through Applications with tabs.
Tab context menu : Allows you to manage the open tabs. Application with a tab context.
Minimum tab width : Allows to inform the min width of all the tabs.
Maximum tab width : Allows to inform the max width of all the tabs.
Show navigation breadcrumb : Displays the path containing the application in the tab. Navigation path Display in the
Application.
Use default icons in the item : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each item.
Use default icons in the tab : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each tab.
Default Application : Select a default application thats going to be initiated when the menu opens.
Show initial app as tab : Allows to open the default application in a tab.
Mobile
Mobile menu configuration Interface.
Hide menu : Enables the option to hide menu when view from a mobile device.
Menus initial mode : Inform the initial mode of the menu, otherwise itll always be visible.
Hide menu by clicking an item : When enabled, defines that when an item is clicked itll hide the menu.
Float menu : Hides the icon to open the menu or always displays it.
1
Menu items
HOME APPLICATIONS MENU MENU ITEMS
Menu items settings

In this screen the user menu structure, indicating which applications will be called. Presents the following attributes, which should be completed by the user:
On mobile devices, if the menu item has sub-items and link, the link will be scorned to display the sub-items.
Menu settings interface.
Label : Title for the application within the menu. You type a fixed title or use the Scriptcase language system to create lang variable for these names, according to the languages used in the
project.
Link : Here you have to enter the application name that will be linked to the menu item. You can also click search button and select from the application list. This link can also be an external
URL.
Hint : Descriptive text that helps the user to identify the application. It is an optional field.
Icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an optional field.
Active tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when active. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
optional field. If you leave it blank Scriptcase adds a default image.
Inactive tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when inactive. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
Target : This option sets how the application will be displayed, it can be target as: Same window, Another window or leave (it will log the user out from the system).
Resources for menu items creation

Insert item : This option add items to the menu
Insert Sub-Item : This option add sub-items to the menu, you might select the main item before to add the sub-items within the selected main item. You can also manage the sub-item
position using the arrows.
Remove : This option deletes the item/sub-item, you might select the items before and then remove.
Import applications : You can use this option to call an application to attach to the item. It will open the project application list.
Move up : This option allows you to move up a menu item or sub-item.
Move down : This option allows you to move down a menu item or sub-item.
Move left : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the left. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.
Move right : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the right. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.
Importing the Applications

Importing the applications is easy and fast. Allows the user to select from a list of application, the application the desired to import. After selecting the application, you just need
to organize the levels of the menu, using the positioning buttons.
Application Import Interface.
After selecting the application, the link property will receive the application name. View the image below.
2

1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS MENU SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS MENU LOG
1
Events
HOME APPLICATIONS MENU EVENTS
onApplicationInit
onExecute
This event runs when the item of the menu is clicked or an application is selected.
onLoad
1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS MENU LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
Menu structure
3
Layer editing

1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS MENU APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Convert menu type
Menu conversion Interface.
Convert the Menu to a Tree Menu or vice versa.
*It doesnt change any of the applications original configuration, with the exception of the format.
1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS MENU PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS TREE MENU SETTINGS
Desktop
The menu settings allow to define the attributes of the application display, according to the following:
Menu configuration Interface.
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu (Left, Center, Right).
Vertical Alignment of the items : Defines the vertical alignment of the menu items (Top, Center, Bottom).
Horizontal Alignment of the Items : Defines the horizontal alignment of the menu items (Left, Center, Right).
Toolbar Horizontal Alignment : Defines the horizontal alignment of the toolbar items (Left, Center, Right).
Friendly URL : Allows to define a name for the URL thats going to be called by the application. The characters allowed in the URL are(a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_). The Friendly URL can be informed
on the initial screen of the project, where the applications are listed, on the Friendly URL column.
Menu Width : Defines the width of the menu in pixels or percentage.
Menu Height : Defines the height of the menu in pixels or percentage.
Iframe Width : Defines the width of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.
Iframe Height : Defines the height of the Iframe (Where the applications will open in) in pixels or percentage.
Hide menu items : When enabled and used with the security module, itll hide the items that the user doesnt have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.
Hide the menus toolbar : When enabled and used with the security module, itll hide the toolbar that the user doesnt have permission to access, instead of only disabling them.
Use theme background : If defined as Yes, itll use the background theme of the menu, in case its defined as No, itll use the background defined in the project.
Scroll bar : Enables the scroll bar in the Iframe.
Select Language : Allows to select the language in the menu bar.
Select Theme : Allows to select the theme in the menu bar.
Alignment of Theme and Language : Defines the horizontal alignment of the language and theme combo boxes.
Always show the items : Displays the application items, even though they dont exist, or havent been generated yet.
Hide menu : Enables the option to hide the menu.
Navigation
The menu navigation settings allow to define the attributes of the tabs and the navigation path, according to the following:
2
Menu Navigation configurations Interface.
Attributes
Open items in a tab : When enabled, the items will always open as tabs in a horizontal bar beneath the menu.
Navigating through Applications with tabs.
Tab context menu : Allows you to manage the open tabs. Application with a tab context.
Minimum tab width : Allows to inform the min width of all the tabs.
Maximum tab width : Allows to inform the max width of all the tabs.
Show navigation breadcrumb : Displays the path containing the application in the tab. Navigation path Display in the
Application.
Use default icons in the item : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each item.
Use default icons in the tab : When enabled, this option displays the standard icons for each tab.
Default Application : Select a default application thats going to be initiated when the menu opens.
Show initial app as tab : Allows to open the default application in a tab.
Mobile
Mobile menu configuration Interface.
Hide menu : Enables the option to hide menu when view from a mobile device.
Menus initial mode : Inform the initial mode of the menu, otherwise itll always be visible.
Hide menu by clicking an item : When enabled, defines that when an item is clicked itll hide the menu.
Float menu : Hides the icon to open the menu or always displays it.
1
Itens do Menu
HOME APPLICATIONS TREE MENU ITENS DO MENU
Menu items settings

In this screen the user menu structure, indicating which applications will be called. Presents the following attributes, which should be completed by the user:
Tree menu settings interface.
Label : Title for the application within the menu. You type a fixed title or use the Scriptcase language system to create lang variable for these names, according to the languages used in the
project.
Link : Here you have to enter the application name that will be linked to the menu item. You can also click search button and select from the application list. This link can also be an external
URL.
Hint : Descriptive text that helps the user to identify the application. It is an optional field.
Icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an optional field.
Active tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when active. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
Inactive tab icon : Image that will be displayed as an icon in the menu item when inactive. The user can click the search button to select the image from the Scriptcase Image Manage. It is an
Target : This option sets how the application will be displayed, it can be target as: Same window, Another window or leave (it will log the user out from the system).
Resources for menu items creation

Insert item : This option add items to the menu
Insert Sub-Item : This option add sub-items to the menu, you might select the main item before to add the sub-items within the selected main item. You can also manage the sub-item
position using the arrows.
Remove : This option deletes the item/sub-item, you might select the items before and then remove.
Import applications : You can use this option to call an application to attach to the item. It will open the project application list.
Move up : This option allows you to move up a menu item or sub-item.
Move down : This option allows you to move down a menu item or sub-item.
Move left : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the left. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.
Move right : This option allows you to move a menu item or sub-item to the right. You can use it to organize the menu hierarchy.
Importing the Applications

Importing the applications is easy and fast. Allows the user to select from a list of application, the application the desired to import. After selecting the application, you just need
to organize the levels of the menu, using the positioning buttons.
After selecting the application, the link property will receive the application name. View the image below.
2

1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS TREE MENU SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS TREE MENU LOG
1
Eventos
HOME APPLICATIONS TREE MENU EVENTOS
onApplicationInit
onExecute
This event runs when the item of the menu is clicked or an application is selected.
onLoad
1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS TREE MENU LAYOUT
Layout Settings
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
2
Footer
Menu structure
3
Layer editing

1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS TREE MENU APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Convert menu type
Menu conversion Interface.
Convert the Menu to a Tree Menu or vice versa.
*It doesnt change any of the applications original configuration, with the exception of the format.
1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS TREE MENU PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH SETTINGS
Through these attributes you can define some general search settings such as alignment, width, search conditions, etc.
Search settings interface.
Attributes
Search Criteria : Using this option you can select the SQL command as AND or OR to set the search criteria to be used;
Display Condition : If you choose Yes, it will be displayed all records when the search fields are blank. If the option set is Not, no record will be displayed;
Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the application horizontal alignment;
changed on the home screen, on the Friendly URL column at the applications list;
Margins : Allows you to set the Search form positioning (margins).
Keep Values : When this option is activated the last searched values are going to be maintained and displayed when the system user returns to the search form screen.
Keep columns and sorting : This option determines if each search should preserve the selected values to the Grid fields columns and sorting, i.e. to each search, these values return to
original condition.
Table Width : This option sets the search form HTML width value, it can be in pixels or percent. You need to set the unit within the option Table Width Unit.
Table Width Unit : Using this option you can set set the Search form width unit;
Use Iframe : When this option is enabled the Search Form and the search results are going to be displayed in the same browser window, using two FRAMES, one above the other. The
Search form and the grid with the results are going to be part of the same page.
Show Results : This option is associated with the Use Iframe. When enabled it will initially displays the Search form along with the Grid inside the iframe positioned below the search
screen, when disabled initially displays only the Search screen.
Iframe Height : This option is also associated with the Use Iframe. It sets the height, in pixels, of the iframe where the recovered data will be displayed by the search.
Case Sensitive : This option enables the Case Sensitive option.
Use auto-complete in the fields : Using this option you can enable the auto-complete option automatically based on the existing values in the database tables. You can also define this
option one by one using the defined in the field
1
Advanced search
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH ADVANCED SEARCH
Select fields
Select fields interface.
Required
This interface has the options for you to select and set the Search form required fields.
Within the generated application will be displayed a marker(*) next to the field and an error message will also pops up if theres no value assigned to the mandatory fields. You
will be able to set some options for the market using the options below.
Marker placement configuration interface.
Marker position : Markers position relative to the field (options are right, left or Do not display).
Search Criteria

2
Toolbar
Desktop
Toolbar Interface.
of buttons.
BUTTON SETTINGS
OPTIONS
Options Interface.
Mobile
3
Save Search
Layout
Blocks
current one.

4
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
5
Attributes
Layout Settings
6
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
7
Footer
Menu structure
Layer editing

8

1
SQL
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH LOG
1
Campos
HOME APPLICATIONS CAMPOS
Texto
Interface de configurao do campo texto.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo definido como texto, o mesmo aceita letras, nmeros, caracteres.
Label Filtro : Define o ttulo do campo na aplicao. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como nm_nome fica mais claro o entendimento se o mesmo for
simplificado para Nome. Ou seja, o label o apelido do campo na camada de aplicao.
Usar Label da Grid : Esta opo quando ativada, permite utilizar o ttulo do campo que est configurado na grid, neste caso a opo label filtro no pode ser utilizada. * Quantidade de
caracteres : Quantidade de caracteres por linha dentro da coluna.
Tamanho Mximo : Tamanho mximo do campo
Tipo SQL : Tipo do campo no banco de dados.
Configurao do Filtro
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo texto.
Use autocomplete : O campo se transforma em autocomplete automaticamente de acordo com os valores existentes na base de dados.
Converte Letra : Permite converter as letras do campo ao perder o foco. As opes so:
Caixa Alta : Todas em maiscula
Caixa Baixa : Todas em minscula
Capitula Primeira Palavra : A primeira letra da primeira palavra em maiscula
Capitula Todas as Palavras : A primeira letra de todas as palavras em maiscula
Submeter no Onchange : Permite quando ativada, submeter o filtro quando houver alteraes no campo.
Exibir Condio : Permite quando ativada exibir ou no a condio do filtro, a mesma s funcionar se o filtro tiver ao menos uma opo.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
3
Nmero
Interface de configurao do campo nmero.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo definido como nmero, s permitido informar nmeros.

4
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo nmero.
Posio entre valores : Define a posio que os objetos serao exibidos.
Texto entre valores : Texto que aparecer entre os valores.
Formatao dos valores
Interface de configurao de formatao do campo nmero.
Usar configuraes regionais : Aplica as configuraes regionais no campo.
Agrupamento : Separador de agrupamento.
Aceitar : Tipo de valor aceito.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

5

Help Settings
Help Type
6
Decimal
Interface de configurao do campo decimal.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo definido valor, o mesmo aceita valores decimais.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo decimal.

7
Interface de configurao de formatao do campo decimal.
Qtd. Decimais : Quantidade de casas decimais do campo.
Separador Decimal : Separador decimal do campo.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


8
Help Settings
Help Type

9
Por cento
Interface de configurao do campo por cento.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Campos Porcentagem so como um campo de nmero, mas exibindo o smbolo percentual aps o valor.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo por cento.
Interface de configurao de formatao do campo por cento.

10
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
11
Help Type
Moeda
12
Interface de configurao do campo moeda.
Tipo do dado : Definir o tipo de aplicao no campo. Campos de moeda so formatados de acordo com as regras de formatao de moeda.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo moeda.
Interface de configurao de formatao do campo moeda.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

13
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type

14
Por cento ( Calculado )
Interface de configurao do campo por cento.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Campos Porcentagem so como um campo de nmero, mas exibindo o smbolo percentual aps o valor.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo por cento.
15
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
16
Help Type
Data
17
Interface de configurao do campo data.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo do tipo Data, permitido definir regras de formatao de datas.
Formatao dos Valores
Interface de formatao dos valores do campo data.
Separador de data : Smbolo separador de data.
Mostrar : Tipo de exibio do campo.
Formato Interno : Formato de armazenamento do campo no banco de dados.
Usar ComboBox : Usar combobox para exibio do campo.

Ano como Combo : Usar ano como combo.
Ano Inicial : Primeiro ano que ser exibido no combo.
Ano atual + : Exibe o ano atual mais a quantidade de anos informados.
Exibir Formato : Exibe formato do ms por extenso.
Exibir Calendrio : Exibe um calendrio para a escolha da data.

Novo Calendrio : Exibie um novo calendrio com jquery ou o calendrio em seu formato antigo.
Limite de Anos : Quantidade de anos que sero exibidos no calendrio.
Exibir nmero da semana : Exibe o nmero da semana na aplicao.
Meses adicionais : Exibe os meses adicionais no calendrio.
Mostar Combo ano e ms : Exibe combo ano e ms no calendrio.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo data.
Texto entre valores :Texto que aparecer entre os valores.
Condies Especiais
18
Interface de condies especiais do campo data.
Todo o perodo : Busca perodo.
Hoje : Pesquisa na data de hoje.
__Ontem __ : Pesquisa na data de ontem.
ltimos 7 dias : Pesquisa ltimos 7 dias. Ex: ((21/12/2017 27/12/2017).
Este ms : Pesquisa do comeo ms corrente at o dia atual.
No ms passado : Pesquisa no ms passado.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


19
Help Settings
Help Type

20
Hora
Interface de configurao do campo hora.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo do tipo Hora ele permite a exibio do formato de hora.
Interface de formatao dos valores do campo hora.
Separador de hora : Smbolo separador de hora.
Exibio : Tipo de exibio do campo.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo hora.
Display Settings
21
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
22
Help Type
Data e Hora
23
Interface de configurao do campo data e hora.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo do tipo Data e Hora ele permite a exibio do formato de data e hora.
Interface de formatao dos valores do campo data.
Separador de data : Smbolo separador de data.
Separador de hora : Smbolo separador de hora.
Mostrar : Tipo de exibio do campo.
Usar ComboBox : Usar combobox para exibio do campo.

Ano como Combo : Usar ano como combo.
Ano Inicial : Primeiro ano que ser exibido no combo.
Ano atual + : Exibe o ano atual mais a quantidade de anos informados.
Exibir Formato : Exibe formato do ms por extenso.
Exibir Calendrio : Exibe um calendrio para a escolha da data.

Novo Calendrio : Exibie um novo calendrio com jquery ou o calendrio em seu formato antigo.
Limite de Anos : Quantidade de anos que sero exibidos no calendrio.
Exibir nmero da semana : Exibe o nmero da semana na aplicao.
Meses adicionais : Exibe os meses adicionais no calendrio.
Mostar Combo ano e ms : Exibe combo ano e ms no calendrio.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo data.
Texto entre valores :Texto que aparecer entre os valores.
Condies Especiais
Interface de condies especiais do campo data.
Todo o perodo : Busca perodo.
Hoje : Pesquisa na data de hoje.
__Ontem __ : Pesquisa na data de ontem.
ltimos 7 dias : Pesquisa ltimos 7 dias. Ex: ((21/12/2017 27/12/2017).
Este ms : Pesquisa do comeo ms corrente at o dia atual.

24
No ms passado : Pesquisa no ms passado.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
25
Help Type
CPF
Interface de configurao do campo cpf.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo definido como CPF o campo formatado ao perder o foco. O scriptcase se encarrega de verificar se o valor que foi
fornecido vlido, caso seja uma informao errada , ser exibida uma mensagem de erro.
26
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo cpf.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field



27
Help Settings
Help Type

28
CNPJ
Interface de configurao do campo cnpj.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo definido como CNPJ o campo formatado ao perder o foco. O ScriptCase se encarrega de verificar se o valor que foi
fornecido vlido, caso seja uma informao errada, ser exibida uma mensagem de erro.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo cnpj.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title


29
CSS of the Field

Help Settings
Help Type
30
CPF e CNPj
Interface de configurao do campo cpf e cnpj.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo definido como CPF e CNPJ o campo formatado ao perder o foco. O scriptcase se encarrega de verificar se o valor
que foi fornecido vlido, caso seja uma informao errada, ser exibida uma mensagem de erro.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo cpf e cnpj.
Display Settings

31
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
32
Select
Interface de configurao do campo select.
Tipo do dado : O Tipo de dados Select um objeto drop-down que permite a seleo de informao atravs de uma janela deslizante.

33
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo select.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
34
automatically.
35
Single Value :
36
Man .
Man .
The example below:

37
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
38
4
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
Ajax Processing
39
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


40
Help Settings
Help Type

41
Duplo Select
Interface de configurao do campo duplo select.
Tipo do dado : O Tipo de dados Duplo Select um objeto drop-down que permite a seleo mltipla atravs de duas janelas de seleo e um navegador entre elas.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo duplo select.
Lookup Settings
42
(;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

43
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
44
Checkbox
Interface de configurao do campo checkbox.
Tipo do dado : Checkbox um objeto que permite a seleo de uma ou mais informao atravs de uma objetos de marcao.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo checkbox.
Lookup Settings
45
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
46
Single Value :
Man .

47
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
48
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
49
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
50
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
51
Help Type
Radio
52
Interface de configurao do campo radio.
Tipo do dado : Rdio um objeto que permite a seleo de apenas uma informao de todas as que so exibidas por ele.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo radio.
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
53
54
55
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title


56
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
57
Texto Auto-Complete
Interface de configurao do campo texto auto complete.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo definido como texto, o mesmo aceita letras, nmeros, caracteres.
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo texto auto complete.
Converte Letra : Permite converter as letras do campo ao perder o foco. As opes so:
Caixa Alta : Todas em maiscula
Caixa Baixa : Todas em minscula
Capitula Primeira Palavra : A primeira letra da primeira palavra em maiscula
Capitula Todas as Palavras : A primeira letra de todas as palavras em maiscula
58
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
59
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
60
Help Type
Nmero Auto-Complete
![Interface de configurao do campo nmero auto complete.][filtro_cons_nmero_auto] Interface de configurao do campo nmero auto complete.
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Quando o campo definido como nmero auto-complete.
61
Interface de configurao do filtro do campo nmero auto complete.
Interface de configurao de formatao do campo nmero auto complete.
Lookup Settings
62
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

63

Help Settings
Help Type
64

1
Fields
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH FIELDS
Text
SQL Type : Informs the data type of field in the database
Field Behavior
Text Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

2
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
3
Integer

4
Field Behavior
Values format
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

5

Help Settings
Help Type
6
Decimal
Field Behavior
7
Values format
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


8
Help Settings
Help Type

9
Percent
Field Behavior
Values format
10
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
11
Help Type
Currency
12
Field Behavior
Values format
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

13
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type

14
Field Behavior
15
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
16
Help Type
Date
17
Values format

Field Behavior
Special Conditions
18
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


19
Help Settings
Help Type

20
Time
Seconds.
Field Behavior
Display Settings
21
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
22
Help Type
Datetime
23
Values format

Field Behavior
Special Conditions

24
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
25
Help Type
Select
26
Field Behavior
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
27
28
automatically.
Single Value :
29
Man .
Man .
The example below:

30
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
31
4
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
Ajax Processing
32
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


33
Help Settings
Help Type

34
Double Select
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
35
(;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title


36
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
37
Check box
Check box field Configuration Interface.
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When set to Check box, your allowed to have multiple options selected.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Check box Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.
Lookup Settings
38
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
39
Single Value :
Man .

40
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
41
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
42
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
43
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
44
Help Type
Radio
45
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
46
47
48
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title


49
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
50
Text Auto-Complete
FIELD BEHAVIOR
51
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
52
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
53
Help Type
! ![Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search Configuration.][filtro_cons_nmero_auto] Number Auto-Complete Field Behavior Interface of the Search
Configuration.
54
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
55
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

56

Help Settings
Help Type
57

1
Events
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH EVENTS
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onSave
onValidate
1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Global Variables
Example:

Fields
1
Links
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH LINKS
New link
Application Link
2
Fiels Link
Grid application.
3
Capture Link

1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS SEARCH PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF SETTINGS
PDF Report Settings
PDF Report Settings Interface.
Attributes
PDF Orientation : Using this option you can set whether to print the PDF in portrait or landscape orientation.
Type : PDF type

Records per Page : Only applicable to grids aligned horizontally, which allows you to set the number of records that will be printed per page.
Records per Line : Allows you to set the records that will be printed per page in the pdf.
PDF measure unit : Using this option you can define the unit of measurement of the position of objects in the PDF. Used in printing format, it can be: points, millimeters, centimeters
and counts.
PDF Format : Using this option you can select the form type in which the PDF will be printed (letter, A4, etc).
PDF Destination : Using this option you can set where the PDF will be sent to the Browser, Download or server.
Browser : If you use this option the PDF will open within the browser.
Download : The PDF will open for download. you must inform the name of the file to be generated. E.g.: file.pdf
Server : The PDF will be sent to the server. It is necessary to inform the path of the file to be generated. E.g.: c:\folder\file.pdf
Automatic page break : Use automatic page break on pages
Margins : Allows you to view the application on the page according to the values reported in the margins (right, left, top and bottom) in millimeters.
Search Creation : Using this option you can set the PDF startup mode by the Search. So the initial mode will be a Search application.
Page Amount : Allows you to set the number of pages that will be printed in the pdf.
Amount of Columns : Allows you to set the number of columns that are printed, what allows you to create applications for issuing of labels printing for example.
Columns Width : Allows you to set the width of the columns in the application.
Columns Height : Allows you to set the height of the columns in the application.
Font and Background

Configuring the PDF Preview allows you to set values of text and layout preview.
2
PDF Report visualization interface settings.
Text Font : Here you can choose the font family to be used initially by the Report PDF.
Text Font Size : Here you can choose the font size
Font Color : Here you can choose the font color .
Text Font Style : Allows you to choose the style of the text, if this will be bold, italic, or underlined, or any other combination.
Show Ruler : Sets whether the PDF printing displays ruler at the edges of the pages.
Image : Allows you to insert a background image on the page. This image will be also printed, it can be a watermark for your document for example.
Width :Sets the image width, in pixels, to be inserted into the page.
Height :Sets the image height, in pixels, to be inserted into the page.
X Position : Sets the abscissa of the initial image position.
Y Position : Sets the ordinate of the initial image position.
Print : This option sets whether the image will be printed on the application.
1
SQL
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF LOG
1
PDF Advanced settings
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF PDF ADVANCED SETTINGS
Interface
Using this interface you can define the display layout of cells containing the values of the fields in the body of the report.
PDF interface settings.
Attributes
Seq : Sequential number of cells (ascending order).
Cell : Cell name.
Pos X : Sets the abscissa of the cell.
Pos Y : Sets the ordinate of the cell.
Width : Sets the cell width.
Alignment : Sets the cell alignment.
Field : Here you have to select the field that will be displayed within the cell, according to the application SQL.
Code
Scriptcase creates the codes automatically, so by changing that within the option code you will assume the PDF creation PHP code.
Configuration interface of the PDF Code.
The application Report PDF was developed based on a library called TCPDF, so that you can use the available library methods or a corresponding macro from the table below. In
order to use some method you must use the $pdf object, for example: $pdf->AcceptPageBreak(parameters).
In order to access the TCPDF documentation Click here
PDF Report Macros

TCPDF Method Scriptcase Macro Description
AcceptPageBreak sc_pdf_accept_page_break Accept automatic page break.
AddFont sc_pdf_add_font Add a new font
AddLink sc_pdf_add_link Creates an internal link
AddPage sc_pdf_add_page Add a new page
AliasNbPages sc_pdf_alias_nb_pages Defines an alias for the number of pages
Cell sc_pdf_cell Prints a cell
2
Close Method
TCPDF sc_pdf_close:
Scriptcase Macro Ends the document
Description
Error sc_pdf_error Display error message
Footer sc_pdf_footer Page footer
GetStringWidth sc_pdf_get_string_length Calculates the size of a string
GetX sc_pdf_get_x Returns the current x position
GetY sc_pdf_get_y Returns the current y position
Header sc_pdf_header Page header
Image sc_pdf_image Places an image on the page
Line sc_pdf_line Draws a line
Link sc_pdf_link Enter a link
Ln sc_pdf_ln Configure the line break
MultiCell sc_pdf_multi_cell Prints a text with line breaks
Output sc_pdf_output Save or send the document
AliasNumPage sc_pdf_page Returns the current page number
AliasNbPages sc_pdf_page_tot Returns the total number of pages
Rect sc_pdf_rect Draws a rectangle
SetAuthor sc_pdf_set_author Defines the author of the document
SetAutoPageBreak sc_pdf_set_auto_page_break Enables or disables the automatic page break mode
SetCompression sc_pdf_set_compression Page compression on/off
SetCreator sc_pdf_set_creator Sets the documents creator.
SetDisplayMode sc_pdf_set_display_mode Toggles the display mode
SetDrawColor sc_pdf_set_draw_color Sets the color used for drawing operations
SetFillColor sc_pdf_set_fill_color Sets the color for fill operations
SetFont sc_pdf_set_font Sets the font settings
SetFontSize sc_pdf_set_font_size Sets the font size
SetKeywords sc_pdf_set_keywords Associates a key word to a document
SetLeftMargin sc_pdf_set_left_margin Sets the left margin
SetLineWidth sc_pdf_set_line_width Sets the width of the line
SetLink sc_pdf_set_link Sets the target of an internal link
SetMargins sc_pdf_set_margins Sets the margins
SetRightMargin sc_pdf_set_right_margin Sets the right margin
SetSubject sc_pdf_set_subject Sets the subject
SetTextColor sc_pdf_set_text_color Sets the color of the text
SetTitle sc_pdf_set_title Sets the title of the document
SetTopMargin sc_pdf_set_top_margin Sets the top margin
SetX sc_pdf_set_x Sets the current position of x
SetXY sc_pdf_set_xy Sets the current position of x and y
SetY sc_pdf_set_y Sets the current position of y
Text sc_pdf_text Prints a string
Write sc_pdf_write Prints a string of characters
Positioning
This interface you can define the display order of the fields (selecting through the arrows next to the right frame).
Configuration interface of the PDF fields placement.

1
Fields
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF FIELDS
According to the selected field different attributes can be changed depending on the data type selected, that is only for application level, not for the database.
Text
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
2
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
3
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
4
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

5

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |
Use lookup in :
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
6
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Lookup Settings
7
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
8
Single Value :

9
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

10
Use lookup in :
Integer
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
EMask Examples
11
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
12
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
13
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
14

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

15
Use lookup in :
Decimal
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
16
Values format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
17
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
18
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
19

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

20
Use lookup in :
Percent
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
21
Values format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
22
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
23
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
24

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

25
Use lookup in :
Currency
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
26
Values format
Lookup Settings
27
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
28
Single Value :

29
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

30
Use lookup in :
HTML Image
General Settings
Credit Card
General Settings
31
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

32
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
33
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
34

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

35
Use lookup in :
E-mail
General Settings
specific email.
Lookup Settings
36
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
37
Single Value :

38
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

39
Use lookup in :
URL
General Settings
40
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
41
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
42
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

43

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |
Use lookup in :
Date
General Settings
44
Values format
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
h:i:s 11:33:20
Format Table
45
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods

46
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
47
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
48

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

49
Use lookup in :
Time
General Settings
Values format

50
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
h:i:s 11:33:20
Format Table
Lookup Settings
51
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
52
Single Value :

53
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

54
Use lookup in :
Date and time

General Settings
55
Values format
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
h:i:s 11:33:20
Format Table
Lookup Settings
56
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
57
Single Value :

58
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

59
Use lookup in :
Image ( Database )
General Settings
Image ( File Name )

60
General Settings
General Settings

General Settings
61
QRCode
General Settings
Values format
storage capacity.

62
Display Settings
Field Settings

63
Bar code
General Settings
Barcode
Display Settings
64
Field Settings
SubSelect
General Settings
SubSelect field configuration Interface.
Increment : Defines the space between the record lines of the SubSelect field. Connection : Displays a list of connections created in the current project. Table : Displays the
65
tables related to the database connection selected previously. SubSelect : Displays the SQL of the chosen table in the previous option. Allowed to be modified and use field
variables and global variables. SQLBuilder : Opens the ScriptCase SQLBuilder, to build the SQL commands.
1
Events
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF EVENTS
onApplicationInit
onNavigate
OnScriptInit
onRecord
onHeader
onFooter
1
Search
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF SEARCH
Settings
Attributes
Search Criteria
Advanced Search
Settings
2
Attributes
Select fields
![Interface for filter fields selection.][filtro_avancado_configuracao_selecionar_campos] *Interface for filter fields selection.
Required
![Required fields interface.][filtro_avancado_configuracao_campos_obrigatorios] Required fields interface.
![Configuration interface of the marker placement.][filtro_avancado_configuracao_campos_obrigatorios_posicionamento] Configuration interface of the marker placement.
Toobar
Desktop
Toolbar Interface.
of buttons.
BUTTON SETTINGS
3
OPTIONS
Options Interface.
Mobile
Save Search
Events
ONSCRIPTINIT
ONREFRESH
ONSAVE
O N V A L I D AT E
4
Layout
BLOCKS
current one.

Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
5
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
Attributes

6
Configuration
HEADER & FOOTER
Header
7
Footer
Dynamic Search
Settings
8
Select Fields
QuickSearch
Select Fields
9
Fields
Text
FIELD BEHAVIOR

10
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field



11
Help Settings
Help Type
Integer
12
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

13
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
14
Decimal

15
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

16

Help Settings
Help Type
17
Percent
FIELD BEHAVIOR
18
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


19
Help Settings
Help Type

20
Currency
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings

21
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
22

23
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


24
Help Settings
Help Type

25
Date

FIELD BEHAVIOR

26
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

27

Help Settings
Help Type

28
Time
Seconds.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
29
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
30
Help Type
Datetime
31

FIELD BEHAVIOR
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Display Settings
32
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
33
Help Type
Select
34
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
35
36
automatically.
Single Value :
37
Man .
Man .
The example below:

38
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
39
4
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
Ajax Processing
40
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


41
Help Settings
Help Type

42
DOUBLE SELECT
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings

43
(;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

44

Help Settings
Help Type
45
Checkbox
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings

46
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
47
Single Value :
Man .
48
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .

49
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
50
Ajax Processing
Display Settings

51
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
52
Radio

53
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
54
55
Ajax Processing
56
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


57
Help Settings
Help Type

58
Grid Fields
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

59

Help Settings
Help Type
60
Sorting
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

61
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
62
Text Auto-Complete

63
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
64
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


65
Help Settings
Help Type

66
Configuration.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
67
Display Settings
68
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
69
Help Type

1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Global Variables
Example:


1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal Libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
Layout PDF
HOME APPLICATIONS REPORTPDF LAYOUT PDF
The PDF Report application has a way of positioning the report fields in a simple and practical way, using the drag and drop functionality.
In the PDF Layout, main screen, you can change some application settings. These settings are also present in PDF Report > Settings.
Using Drag and Drop functionality, you configure the placement of fields in this interface. To change them you need to click on the field you prefer to change the position and
drag to their new position.
Clicking on a specific field opens a field configuration screen.
Properties
Name: On this field, its necessary to inform a name to identify the field.
Field: On this option, you need to select the field from the table thatll be used in the cell. In case youve select a field from the Special category youll see the following:
System Date : The current date of the system on which the application runs.
Current Page : Number of the current page that the cell is located.
Total Page :Total number of application pages.
Label: Selecting this option will open an input so you can inform the text that will be displayed.
Pos X : Positioning the X axis. Up and down.
Pos Y : Positioning the Y axis. Left and Right.
Width : Enter the width of the cell. The unit of value is pixel.
Alignment : In this field, you select the alignment of the cell text: Left, Right or Center.
Font: In this field, you select a source according to the list.
Font Size : Here you inform the font size of the text that will be displayed.
Font Color : In this field, youll inform a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
Font Style : In this field, you mark the style of the font: Bold, Italic and / or Underline. (You can select more than one option)
2
Show: In this field, you enable or disable the field display.
General Setting (Category: Text)
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as a text, it accepts letters, numbers and special characters.
Show HTML content : Determines if the html contained in the field will be displayed or not. If enabled, the html will be displayed, otherwise the html will be interpreted by the browser.
Field Mask : In this field, you can configure a display mask according to the table given in Applications> Grid > Fields> Text.
General Setting (Category: Integer)
Field Mask : In this field, you can configure a display mask according to the table given in Applications> Grid > Fields> Integer.
General Setting (Category: Special and Date/Time)
Values Format (Integer Type)
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the number of the fields. When not enabled, youll view attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Negative Symbol and negative
number format.
Color of Negative : In this field, youll inform a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
3
Values Format (Currency Type)
Color of Negative : In this field, youll inform a color in hexadecimal. (Example: # 000000)
Values Format (Date Type)
Regional Settings : Allows to apply the Regional Settings to format the dates of the field. When not enabled, itll be displayed the date separator attribute (Check the Regional Settings).

1
Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR SETTINGS
Layout and Behavior
1
Edit fields
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR EDIT FIELDS
Fields
Label
Datatype
New
Update
Read-Only
Required
PK
DB value (Insert)
DB value (Update)
Page
Blocks
2
Display Interface.
Attributes
1
Fields positioning
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR FIELDS POSITIONING
Field Positioning
1
Unique key
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR UNIQUE KEY
With this module you can inform the fields that are unique, these fields are the one that contain a primary key in its table. To inform the rest of the fields that contain are a
unique key, select the fields by holding the CTRL of your keyboard and then click on the add button, the fields informed will receiv an identification for example: UK1.
Unique key configuration Interface.

1
Toolbar
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR TOOLBAR
from a Desktop .
Mobile.
Toolbar
Attribute :

2
Separator
Add Button Groups
Button Settings
3

Options
Opes da consulta
Attribute
Mobile Toolbar
4
Mobile toolbar.
1
06 Calendar Print Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR 06 CALENDAR PRINT
SETTINGS
title: Print settings
Print export settings.
Display print button : This option enable a button within the application to print the calendar.
Print format : It changes the display data format for printing.
Display title for printing : Displays the calendar title for printing.
Additional fields : Additional fields to be displayed for printing.

1
SQL
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR SQL
tables (SQL).
1
Procedures
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR PROCEDURES
In this module, you can configure a Form application so that it can use Stored Procedures (defined in the Database) in the Insert, Update and Delete operations. Its not necessary
to use the three options simultaneously, in a way that the options that arent configured to use Procedures continue to work as ScriptCases default that are the commands
INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
See below, the step-by-step to implement a Stored Procedure to insert into the Database.
Form Stored Procedures Interface.
Let check the first option: Enable INSERT Procedure. Next inform the Name of the Procedure the number of parameters.
Defining parameters for the Procedure.
Now define the fields thatll reference each parameter of the Stored Procedure, as the type of parameter (Input or Output). Next click on the button save to finish the process.
Passing value to the Stored Procedure Parameters.

1
JavaScript
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR JAVASCRIPT
Attributes
Edit JavaScript
OnClick Example
}
}
OnBlur Example
2
{
}
OnChange Example

}
OnFocus
the purchase.
{
}
OnMouseOver Example
onMouseOut Example
1
Dependencies
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR DEPENDENCIES
This feature allows to link the tables that contain relationships, being the tables that contain dependencies, like the tables orders and order_details. This way its possible to
delete a record in the table orders, all the details for that order will be deleted as well. Below youll see a practical example on this feature.
Firstly, youll define a new dependency. In this example, well create a dependency between the orders (Dependent Table) with the order_details (Current Application). Click on the button
New Dependency to start.
Creating a new Dependency.
Selecting a the dependent table youll inform the amount of fields that are related between the both tables. In this example, only one field will be related to the orders id.
Dependency Table configuration.
Next, select the fields that link the Keys: order_details->Orderid - orders->Orderid.
Dependency Key Fields Configurations.
Creating a Dependency relationship, you only need to set the rules that the application will use. To do this, just click on the button Generate Scripts to define the Dependency Rule.
Configurando as regras da dependncia.

1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR LOG
1
Calendar
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR CALENDAR
Calendar fields
This interface displays the basic calendar field settings.
Calendar fields interface.

1
Fields
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR FIELDS
Text
General Settings
2
Examples

option.
Values Format
3
Database Value
Lookup Settings

4
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


5
Help Settings
Help Type

6
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
7
Values Format
Database Value

8
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

9

Help Settings
Help Type
10
Number
General Settings

11
Examples

option.
Values format
12
Database Value
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
13
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
14
Help Type
Decimal
General Settings
15
Values format
16
Database Value
Lookup Settings
17
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field



18
Help Settings
Help Type
Currency
General Settings
19
Values format
20
Database Value
Lookup Settings

21
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

22

Help Settings
Help Type
23
Date
General Settings

24
Values format
Minimum Date :
Maximum Date :
Database Value
25
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


26
Help Settings
Help Type

27
Hour
General Settings

28
Values format
Seconds.
Database Value
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

29
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
30
Date and Hour

General Settings
31
Values format
32
Database Value
Display Settings
33
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
34
Help Type
HTML Image
General Settings
35
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

36

Help Settings
Help Type

37
Label
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

38
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
39
Card
General Setting

40
Examples of Masks

Database Value
Lookup Settings
41
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

42

Help Settings
Help Type
43
Card type
General Settings
Values Format
44
Database Value
Lookup Settings
45
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field



46
Help Settings
Help Type

47
E-mail
General Settings
Database Value
48
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

49
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
50
URL
General Settings
51
Database Value
52
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

53
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
54
HTML Color
General Settings
55
Database Value
56
Lookup Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

57
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
58
HTML Editor
Settings
Toolbar

59
Properties
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


60
Help Settings
Help Type

61
Localization
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


62
Help Settings
Help Type

63
Theme
General Settings
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

64

Help Settings
Help Type
65
Youtube
General Settings
Display Settings
66
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
67
Help Type
Google Maps
General Settings
68
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as Google Maps, itll use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Form Applications
Display Settings
69
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
70
Help Type
Image ( Database )
General Settings
71
Image (Database) field Configuration Interface.
Multi-Upload
existing record.
72
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

73
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
74
Imagem ( File Name )

General Settings

75
Hide image name : When enalbed, only the image will be displayed without its name.
Files Deletion : Deletes the files from the directory when the record is deleted from the database.
Multi-Upload
existing record.
76
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

77
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
78
General Settings
Document (Database) field Configuration Interface.
File Size : Defines the field that conatins the file size.
Multi-Upload
79
existing record.
Display Settings
80
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
81
Help Type

Multi-Upload
82
existing record.
Display Settings
83
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
84
Help Type
Barcode
General Settings
85
Disabled Field : Defines if the field will e disabled in the Insert Mode , Update Mode or in Insert and Update Mode.
Barcode
Display Settings

86
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
87
Select
General Settings

88
Database Value
Lookup Settings
89
Lookup Methods
90
automatically.
91
Single Value :
Man .
92
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
93
Man .
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

94
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

95
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
96
Double Select
General Settings

97
Database Value
Lookup Settings

98
(;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings

99
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
100
CheckBox
General Settings

101
Database Value
Lookup Settings
102
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
103
Single Value :
Man .

104
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
105
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
106
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
107
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
108
Help Type
Radio
General Settings
109
Database Value
Lookup Settings
110
Lookup Methods
111
112
Ajax Processing
113
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


114
Help Settings
Help Type

115
Text Auto-Complete
General Settings
option.
116
Values Format
Database Value
Lookup Settings
117
Display Settings
118
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
119
Help Type
General Settings
120
option.
Database Value

121
Lookup Settings
122
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
123
Help Type

1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR LAYOUT
Pages
Pages Settings
2
Attributes

Blocks
current one.

3
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
4
Attributes
Layout Settings
5
Configuration
Header & Footer

Header
6
Footer
Menu structure
Layer editing

7

1
Events
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR EVENTS
onApplicationInit
onNavigate
OnScriptInit
onLoadRecord
onLoad
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
onBeforeInsert
This event is executed before inserting a record from the application.
onAfterInsert
This event is executed after inserting a record from the application.
onBeforeInsertAll
2
This event runs before inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterInsertAll
This event runs after inserting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onBeforeUpdate
This event is executed before updating a record from the application.
onAfterUpdate
This event is executed after updating a record from the application.
onBeforeUpdateAll
This event runs before updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterUpdateAll
This event runs after updating all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onBeforeDelete
This event runs before deleting the records from the Form.
onAfterDelete
This event runs after deleting the records from the Form.
onBeforeDeleteAll
This event runs before deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
onAfterDeleteAll
This event runs after deleting all the selected records from the Multiple Records, Editable Grid and Editable Grid (View) Form.
1
Ajax events
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
Selecting a field
OnChange
Selecting a field
OnBlur
Selecting a field
2
OnFocus
Selecting a field
1
Buttons
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR BUTTONS
Creating a button
Form button types
Deleting a button
Deleting a button
JavaScript
Button
2
Image
Link
Code Block
PHP
Button
3
Image
Link
Code Block
Link
Button
4
Image
Link
Setting up the Link

Link Parameters
Ajax
Button
5
Image
Link
Code Block
1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Messages
Global Variables
Example:


3
Synchronize table
This process performs a comparison between the definitions of application fields and fields of the connected database table. If there is any change within the connected table,
such as adding a new field, exclusion, or a change in the data type, the changes will appear visible as in the image below:
Table synchronization interface.
After accessing the function from the link Synchronize table you will see a comparison table between the application fields (left table) and the database table fields (right table),
above image, the fields highlighted in red will be deleted of the application, the fields highlighted in Green will be inserted in the form, and the fields highlighted in orange
will be updated, so data type will be updated.
To rename a field in the database table, the table synchronization effect, by comparison, will be the same as deleting a field that existed in the application and the inclusion of a
new field.
1
Links
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR LINKS
New link
Application link
2
Field link
Grid application.
3
Capture link

4
Button link
Link edit
Editing Links.
Actions
Link Properties

Form Property
Iframe properties
5


1
Programao
HOME APPLICATIONS CALENDAR PROGRAMAO
Nesta verso do ScriptCase est incorporada o conceito de programao, com a utilizao de recursos de atributos, mtodos e bibliotecas. Na verso anterior j era possvel
criar regras de negcio nas aplicaes, utilizando este conceito o grande diferencial que agora isto poder ser realizado de forma mais organizada, facilitando tanto o
desenvolvimento quanto o entendimento da regra por outro desenvolvedor.
Atributos
Attributes
Bibliotecas Internas
Mtodos PHP
Include Method.

2
Mtodos JavaScript
Include Method.

3

1
01 Proc Modules
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES 01 PROC MODULES
title: Grid Modules
Initial Module
Allows you to set in which mode the application will start when executed.
Grid Application Modules
Filter : Application will be started by the filter view, so you can filter the records before the next application, that can be a Grid, PDF, Summary you can configure that options within the
Filters settings.
Grid : Application will be started by the Grid itself, this is the default option.
Summary : Application will be started by the Summary. To use the Summary as initial application its mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.
Chart : Application will be started by the Chart. To use the Chart as initial application its mandatory to create at least one Group, using the Static Group By settings.
Print : Application will be started by the print mode, according to the select command.
PDF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a PDF file.
Word : Application will be started with the option to view or download a Word file( .doc or .docx ).
Excel : Application will be started with the option to view or download an Excel file ( .xls or .xls ).
RTF : Application will be started with the option to view or download a RTF file ( .tft ).
XML : Application will be started with the option to view or download a XML file.
CSV : Application will be started with the option to view or download a CSV file.
Filter
2
Grid Filter Settings
Filter Module : This option configures which application will be called after the Filter.
Use Iframe : This option configures the filter to be displayed within an Iframe (displaying the Filter itself and the search results on the same page). This option is available only when the initial
module is set to be the Filter.
Show Results : Display the search results on the same page when loading the application for the first time when the Use Iframe option is set as Yes, otherwise, the results will be displayed
only after the search.
Iframe Height : Iframe height, in pixels, used to display the search results.
Search Modal : This option configures the Filter Application to open in a modal window.
Search Modal Height : Search Modal box height (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled.
Search Modal Width : Search Modal box Width (in pixels). Option available only when the Search Modal box is enabled
Table Width : Filter application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the Table Width Unit
Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option Table Width.
Grid
Grid Settings
Orientation : This option configures the Grid records orientation (Horizontal, Vertical, Slide or User Defined). When using the User Defined option you can design the HTML manually inside
the option Layout HTML templates and select within the Layout settings.
Fixed Label : This option will fix the columns label at the top of the page (it is only available when the Grud records orientation is set as Horizontal).
3
Pagination : This option sets the Grid paging type: Partial (pagination according to the amount of records set per page), Total (displays all records) or Infinite Scroll (automatic srolling acording
to the increment)
Lines Per Page : This option sets the amount of records per page for the Grid
Infinite Scroll Increment : This option sets the number of rows displayed on each increment of new records. It is available only when paging is configured with Infinite Scroll.
Open windows using modal : For Grids apps with the Infinite Scroll paging enabled, this option will set the links between applications and details of the Grid, that are configured to open in
iframe, to open using a modal instead.
Maintain records : It configures if the amount of records displayed will be preserved when the application navigates to another window and go back.
Grid height : Defines a altura da consulta em pixels. Caso esteja vazio
Table Width : Grid application table width. This value can be in percent, pixel or automatic (set by Scriptcase). If you change the value you will also need to set the Table Width Unit
Table Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the Grid table width (percent, pixel or automatic). The value itself must to be set within the option Table Width.
Detail
Grid Detail settings
Display Detail : Allows you to set where the detail will open within the Grid Application * Beside the Grid : Displays the Grid Details to the right of the record, in the same
window where Grid is being displayed. * Below the Grid : Displays the Grid Details below the Grid records, in the same window where Grid is being displayed. * In another
page : Displays the Grid Details in another page, replacing the Grid view. * In another window : Displays the Grid Details in a separated browser window. * Modal : Opens a
pop-up window to the display of the Grid Detail.
Alignment : Using this option you can set an alignment (center, right or left) for the Grid Detail when its using the Display Detail setting as Beside the Grid or Below the Grid.
Detail Width : This option sets the Grid Detail width when its using the Display Detail setting as Beside the Grid, Below the Grid, In another page or In another window.
Width of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail width when its using the Display Detail option as Modal.
Height of the modal : Allows you to customize the Grid Detail height when its using the Display Detail option as Modal.
Detail Width Unit : This option configures the unit for the Detail Width (percent, pixel or automatic).
Summary
Grid Summary
Settings
4
Summary Display : Sets the Grid Summary display option ( On another page, On the last page, On every page). The Summary Application Module is only available when a group is created in
the Group By settings.
Chart
Grid Chart settings
Charts display mode : Sets the Chart Summary display option ( New window, Same page, Other page ).The Chart Application Module is only available when a group is created in the Group By
settings.
Display before summary : Sets whether the Chart is displayed above or below the Summary. Available when the Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
Number of columns : Sets the Chart number of columns per line (one in each column). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
Margin : Sets the Charts horizontal margin. Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.
Horizontal alignment : Sets the Charts horizontal position (Left, Right, Center). Available when Charts display mode is configures in the Same page.
Vertical alignment : Sets the Charts vertical position (Top, Center, Bottom). Available when Charts display mode is configured in the Same page.
View settings in the chart window : Sets the chart settings display on the same page. Available when the Char display mode is configured on Other page or new window.
1
Configurao
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES CONFIGURAO
Grid application advanced settings
Display Line Number : This option sets whether to display or not the sequence number of each Grid row.
Display Titles : This option sets if the column title (column label) will be displayed or not.
Line break in title : This option sets if the column line title will break or not.
Alignment : Allows you to set the fields alignment for when the Grid orientation is set as Vertical or Slide.
Table Columns : Sets the column widths type: Provides (It will assume the informed width values at field level in the configuration of the visualization), Calculated (Calculate size according to
type and the field size) and Automatic (The alignment will be according to the browser criteria).
1
Edit Fields
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES EDIT FIELDS
Edit Fields
Fields :Allows to access the configuration of the field (icon on the left) and dragging the fields can change the field position and choose weather or not the field will be displayed.

1
Fields positioning
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES FIELDS POSITIONING
Field Positioning
1
Toolbar
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES TOOLBAR
Toolbar
Grid Buttons positioning
Attributes :
Navigation : Within this attribute you can find the options to set the Grid navigation buttons.
Next Moves forward to the next page of the Grid.

Left Returns to previous page of the Grid.
First Sends to the first record of the Grid.
Last Sends to the last record of the Grid.
Exit Ends the application.
Navigation by page Displays the link to pages. ie. 1 2 3 4 5
PDF Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a PDF file type.
WORD Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a WORD doc.
XLS Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a XLS (Excel).
XML Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a XML file.
CSV Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a CSV file.
RTF Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a RTF file.
Print Creates a complete report with all Grid data within a HTML printable page.
Others : Some more options available for the application, according to its settings.
Jump to Creates a button that allows the user to skip and position to a specific grid record.
Rows Limit Creates a check box with the maximum number of lines per page. This value can be set within the option Records per page. eg. 10,20,30, all
Search Creates a link button to access the Advanced Search form (Filter module). Settings for this button can be configured within the option Search Settings Advanced Search.
Dynamic
Creates a link button to access the fields for the Dynamic Search. Settings for this button can be configured within the option Search Settings Dynamic Search.
Search
Columns Creates a button to manage the columns display dynamically within the application, you can configure the columns that will be available within the option Grid Columns .
Sorting
Creates a button to manage the fields sorting dynamically, you can configure the sorting options within the option Grid Sorting
options
Group By Creates a button that allow the user to select the Group by. This button will be automatically activated once you create a Dynamic or Static Group By to the Grid.
Creates a button to save the current Grid (For example when the user applies a search condition or a Group By inside the application, it can be saved for a future view). You can
Save Grid
create criteria for this button within the option Grid Save Grid
2
QuickSearch Creates a link to access the QuickSearch options within the Grid. Settings for this button can be configured within the option Search Settings QuickSearch.
Gantt Chart Creates a link to a Gantt Chart. This button will be automatically activated once you create a Gantt Chart within the option Grid Gantt Chart
Creates a link button to access the Summary Module. This button will be automatically activated once you create a Dynamic or Static Group By to the Grid, so you the user can
Summary see the records summary and its options according to the data group. You can configure the Summary options within the option Grid Grid Modules and also within the
Summary area in the left menu.
Form Displays the Form application buttons configured when a link between the Grid and the Form is created. You can configure the application links within the Links area in the left
Buttons menu.
Creates a combo box with the languages added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove languages to your project or application accessing the main
Languages
menu Project Properties Locales.
Creates a combo box with the themes added to the project during the project creation. You can add or remove css themes to your project or application accessing the main
Themes
menu Project Properties Themes.
Rows
This option if activated will display a record counter within the application toolbar
Counter
HelpCase Creates a link to the application documentation (WebHelp). You can configure the documentation settings within the main menu option .
Separator
- Creates a separation line between the buttons for better display, specially for grouped buttons
Add Button Groups
3
Button Settings
Grid Buttons Settings

Label
Options
Grid Options
Attributes
Display Summary : Allows you to define if the Summary button is going to be displayed for each page.
Format Row Counter : Allows you to set the format that will displayed for the rows counter. Ex: [1 to 10 of 200]. You can define it manually or using the lang variable accessing the main
menu Project Properties Locales
The number of links displayed : Allows you to set the amount of links per pages, when the page navigation option is enabled.
Jump to : Allows you to define the jump to option, if the page redirect is going to per page or record.
Records per page : Allows you to define which options of rows quantity will be displayed in the combo box. To enable the option to show all records use the option all. eg. 10,20,30, all
Toolbar buttons : Allows you to define the toolbar buttons display type, how the toolbar buttons will open. If it will open in modal (default) or in a DIV below the toolbar.
Toolbar Mobile
4
Mobile toolbar.
1
Export Settings
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES EXPORT SETTINGS
PDF Settings
Attributes
Word Settings
Word export settings
Print Type Allows you to set the print mode for the word file (Both, Black & White, Color).
Rows per Page in Grid Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the query will be displayed in the file.
Open Word Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
2
CSV Settings
CSV export settings
Lines Separator Allows you to set the separator for character.

Columns Separator Allows you to set the column separator for character and records.
Text Delimiter Allows you to define the character used to delimit the text columns.
Open CSV Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Add Label Allows you to define if the columns label will be added to the file.
XLS Settings
XLS export settings
Open XLS Directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Format Allows you to define the format of the generated document (xls or xlsx).
Print Settings
Print export settings
Print Mode Allows you to define the contents of the file printing (Both, Current Page or Full Report).
Rows per Page Allows you to set the number of lines per page of the query will be displayed in the file.
Other Formats
XML and RTF export settings
Generate XML directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
Generate RTF directly Allows you to set whether the document will be generated directly or if an intermediate page will be displayed.
1
SQL
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES SQL
SQL Settings
Grid SQL
configuration
1
08 Proc Columns
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES 08 PROC COLUMNS
title: Columns
You can display or hide fields dynamically inside the Grid application using the button Columns. This option is used to select the fields/columns that will be part of this dynamic
fields selection.
Grid columns settings
The box in the left represents the fields that are NOT being displayed within the dynamic fields selection.
The box in the right represents the fields that are being displayed within the dynamic fields selection.
1
Sorting
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES SORTING
Field Settings
Sort Fields
Advanced Sorting
2

1
Group Label
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES GROUP LABEL
Attributes

1
Security
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES SECURITY
Use Security
Url output of the
security
Request password
just once
URL
1
Log
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES LOG
1
Gantt
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES GANTT
Gantt Chart settings
A Gantt chart is a type of bar chart that illustrates a project schedule. Gantt charts illustrate the start and end dates of the terminal elements and summary elements of a project.
Terminal elements and summary elements comprise the work breakdown structure of the project.
Output Format Output format, you can choose of HTML or HTML5 (the default option is HTML5)
Field label Field containing the record label of the Gantt chart. You can choose which field will appear within the left column to describe the tasks.
Width Gantt chart width. The default unit for this width is pixels, however you can also apply it in percent by adding the % sign after the number (i.e: 100%).
Height Gantt chart height. The default unit for this width is pixels, however you can also apply it in percent by adding the % sign after the number (i.e: 100%).
Months Allows you to set the number of months that will be displayed in the Gantt chart.
Start Date Using this combo box you can choose the field that stores the start date, you need to have this record within the connected table.
End Date Using this combo box you can choose field that stores the end date, you need to have this record within the connected table.
Display format Allows you to set the display format of the fields date type.
Percent Using this combo box you can choose the field that stores the information regarding the task completion (percentage), you need to have this record within the connected
Completed table.
Resource Field containing the name of the resource allocated to the task.
1
Save Grid
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES SAVE GRID
Configurao do salvar filtro da consulta
Habilitar Pblico Exibe o boto de Salvar na aplicao.

Usar Regras Permite utilizar regras definidas na aplicao.
1
Fields
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES FIELDS
According to the selected field different attributes can be changed depending on the data type selected, that is only for appliation level, not for the database.
Text
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
2
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
3
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
4
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

5

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
6
Field Settings
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
7
Layout de Grfico
Multiple Lines Text

General Settings
8
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Lookup Settings
9
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
10
Single Value :

11
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

12
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

13
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
Layout de Grfico
14
Number
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
EMask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
15
(zz) xxxx - xxxx Field
Mask 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Value Formatted Value
Values format
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
16
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
Single Value :
17
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |
18

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

19
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

20
Line Chart
21
Icons.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
22
Layout de Grfico
Decimal
General Settings
X
required).
23
Z
Description
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Lookup Settings
24
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
25
Single Value :

26
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

27
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

28
Line Chart
29
Icons.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
30
Layout de Grfico
Percent
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples
31
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Lookup Settings
32
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
33
Single Value :

34
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

35
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

36
Line Chart
37
Icons.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
38
Layout de Grfico
Currency
General Settings
X
required).
39
Z
Description
the mask left.
Mask Examples

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Lookup Settings
40
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
41
Single Value :

42
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

43
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

44
Line Chart
45
Icons.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
46
Layout de Grfico
Percent (Calculated)
General Settings
X
required).
Z
the mask left.
Mask Examples
47
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Values format
Lookup Settings
48
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
Use lookup in :
49
Single Value :

50
The example below:

|-----------|----------|-----------|-----------|
| Man |M |1 |1 |
| Women |W |1 |1 |
| Single | S |2 |1 |
| Study | SD |3 |2 |
| Sports | SP |3 |2 |
| Read | RD |3 |2 |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

|-------------------|-----------------------|
|1 | Sports |
|2 | Culture |
|4 | Pleasure |
|8 | Reading |
| 16 | Music |

51
Use lookup in :
Display Settings
Field Settings

52
Line Chart
53
Icons.
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
54
Layout de Grfico
HTML Image
General Settings
Display Settings
55
Field Settings
Credit Card Number

General Settings
56
Display Settings
Field Settings

57
E-mail
General Settings
specific email.
Display Settings
Field Settings
58
URL
General Settings
Display Settings
59
Field Settings
YouTube
General Settings
60
Link Type : The display settings of the link, if its going to be a Text or a Button.
Link text : A text thatll link to the video.
Display Settings
Field Settings
Google Maps
General Settings
61
Data Type : Define the type of field for the application. When its defined as Google Maps, itll use the Google Maps API to display the map in the Grid Applications
Text Link : Text to call the Map.
Marker Description : Displays the description for each marker displayed on the map.
Display Settings
62
Field Settings
Date
General Settings
63
Values format
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
h:i:s 11:33:20
Format Table
64
Display Settings
Field Settings
65
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
Layout de Grfico
66
Time
General Settings
Values format
67
Format of Values with Regional Settings..
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
h:i:s 11:33:20
Format Table
the internal format like: AAAAMMDD
Example 2 : Date stored in a SQL field of the type char(6) where the positions 1 and 2 represents the month and the positions 3 to 6 is the year, define the internal format like:
MMAAAA
Display Settings
68
Field Settings
Bar Chart
Column for Label.
69
Layout de Grfico
Date and time

General Settings
70
Values format
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 as 14:30:11 PM
h:i:s 11:33:20
Format Table
71
Display Settings
Field Settings
72
Image ( Database )
General Settings
Display Settings
73
Field Settings
Image ( File Name )

General Settings
74
Display Settings
Field Settings
75
General Settings
Display Settings
Field Settings
76

General Settings
Display Settings
77
Field Settings
Bar code
General Settings
Barcode
78
Display Settings
Field Settings
79
QRCode
General Settings
Values format
storage capacity.
Display Settings
80
Field Settings

1
Layout
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES LAYOUT
Blocks
current one.

Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
2
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
save.
Attributes

3
Layout Settings
Configuration

4
Header & Footer

Header
Footer
Menu structure
5
Layer editing

1
Events
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES EVENTS
onApplicationInit
onNavigate
OnScriptInit
onRecord
onHeader
onFooter
1
Ajax Events
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES AJAX
EVENTS
OnClick
Selecting a field
1
Buttons
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES BUTTONS
In addition to the buttons that comes automatically with the applications, you can also create your own buttons. All the buttons are displayed within the application toolbar.
New buttons creation settings
Creating a new button

To create a new button, click on the New Button option and enter a name and a button type.
The button Types are: JavaScript, PHP, Link and Run.
Grid buttons type
Deleting a button
To delete a button click on Delete icon (represented by a recycle bin image) in the right of the button name, at the application menu under the Buttons option.
Deleting a button
JavaScript
Button
2
Image
Link
Code Block
PHP
Button
3
Image
Link
Code Block
Link Button
Button
Image

4
Link
Setting up the Link

Link Parameters
RUN
D I S P L AY O P T I O N S
We can configure Run Button display as Link, Image or Button:
Button
5
Grids Run Button settings - Button type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose button, image or link.
Label Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
Confirmation
Using this option you can set a confirmation message that will be displayed when the button is pressed. Leave it empty if you dont need to display a message.
Message
CSS for the the button, if you do not change this option Scriptcase will apply the default application/project CSS. You can customize the buttons CSS using the option within
CSS Style
the main menu Layout CSS Buttons
Reload quantity of
Option used to update the amount of application records.
records
Image
Grids Run Button settings - Image type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose image, button or link.
Icon Button display icon. You can use this option to select an image (from Scriptcase images or from you computer) to represents the button within the application toolbar.
Tipo Button type description.
Link
Grids Run Button settings - Link type
Display Mode Combo box to select the button display option, you can choose link, button or image.
Label Text that will be displayed on the button (on running application).
Hint Application button title (text that will be displayed for the button within the application)
CSS Style CSS class name, style created in the theme buttons editor .
Coding Area
Grids Run Button settings - Coding area

6
There are two types of events in the Run button
OnRecord : Runs after processing on each record selected.
OnFinish : Runs after processing all records selected.
In this coding area you can use Scriptcase macros, PHP and JavaScript.
1
Detail
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES DETAIL
The Grid Detail Module allows you to organize the information displayed according to its importance. Its a complementary application it displays the data in detailed form. In
order to see the Grid Detail within the Grid the final user needs to click on that is displayed for each record.
To enable the Grid Detail Module, access the Grid Modules and enable the check box, it uses to come enabled by default:
Detail Settings
In this function, the user can define how the detail of a particular record should be displayed when it is selected and which registry information should be displayed in this detail.
Choosing the fields for the detail
Attributes
Fields selection for the detail page. : Allows you to select the desired fields. Just click the field and then click the On/Off button to enable/disable the fields.
Detail Keys
Through this interface you can chose the fields that will be part of the WHERE clause, it will return the corrected information according to the selected record. ScriptCase uses to
identifies the table primary keys, that is being used within the application SQL, automatically. However, Sometimes it is necessary to set the primary key manually, especially in
cases where the application has a SQL JOIN, involving more than one table.
Detail key fields settings
Selecr here the fields that are keys to the Detail. The application will execute another select command, and you can configure which fields will be passed for this WHERE clause:
On/Off : Select the field to be displayed in detail. The selected field (On) gets an asterisk.
All : Check On to all fields.
None : Check Off to all fields.
Desktop Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts
simultaneously.
2
Detail buttons settings
Attributes
Navigation : Navigation Buttons
Exit : Ends or return to the previous application depending on how the Display Detail is configured. You can change the label within the Button Settings.
Exports : Sets the formats for printing generation:

Print : Creates a complete report with all Grid Detail data within a HTML printable page.
PDF : Creates a complete report with all Grid Detail data within a PDF file type.
Others
Separator : Creates a separation line between the buttons for better display, specially for grouped buttons.
Mobile Toolbar
Detail buttons settings for mobile views
It has the same options of Desktop version, by adding only the item copy of the desktop, in which, when clicked, performs a copy of toolbar items from Desktop to Mobile.
Button Settings
Grid Detail button label settings

3
Label
Header
In this block is where the content variables that will be part of the header is set.
Grid Detail header settings
This screen will change depending on the format chosen header within.
Display Header : This flag determines whether the header is displayed.
Detail Title : Using this option you can set a title for the application, it uses bring a value from the Grid application as default. However it can be customized.
Header Variables : Variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combo box. Depending on the type, you must associate a content. Below we describe the existing types:
Field : When choosing the option of type Field , a Combo box will appear with the fields that are part of the Select. Choosing one of these fields, you will be associating the value of
the field to display in the header.
Title : This option when selected will display in the header the value filled in Detail Title .
Date : When you select the Date type, the system date in the format dd/mm/yyyy will be displayed in the header. There are several display formats using server date and time. The
format can be reported in the text field that appears next. Click in the question mark to check out the available formats.
Image : When you selected the field type image, a field will appear for you to fill with name of the existing image on the server. To find the existing images and select one, click the icon
Choose Image you will also be able to upload images by clicking on Upload an image .
Value : When selected the type Value , the contents filled in the text field that appears next will be displayed in the header, it can be informed texts as Global Variables . Example:
Employee name: [v_name].
1
SubConsulta
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES SUBCONSULTA
Sub-queries/Nested grids are used when you need to display hierarchical data, such as customers and their respective applications. The main Grid encapsulates other Grids,
showing in each of its sub-queries additional data records. Note the image below in which for each customer is displayed a sub-query with its applications.
Customer Grid with an order nested grid.
Settings
In the application menu, by clicking on the item folder Configuration Sub-queries, can be changed the General attributes of the sub-queries.
Nested grid menu.
Nested grid general settings.
Attributes
Title in the same line : This attribute enables you to configure the Nested Grid title display. If it is displayed on the same line, Nested Grid table will be incorporated into the main Grid.
Example using Nested Grid title on the same line.
PDF : This option allows you to enable/disable the nested grid display in PDF reports.
Enable TreeView : This option enables an option to hide/display the Nested Grid within the main Grid records. By choosing Yes, the option Title in the same line will be automatically
disabled.
Using tree view in the Nested Grid.

2
Position : This option allows you to configure the Nested Grid placement in the main Grid. This option is not available if you enable Title in the same line. You will be able to position
the Nested Grid within the records. The options are:
In one column
Displaying the Nested Grid in the same row of the
main Grid record.
Below the record
Displaying the Nested Grid in a separate row of
the main Grid record.
Alignment : Allows you to set the Nested Grid alignment in the main Grid interface when Position is set set as Below the record. The options are: left, right and Center.
Set individually
Any of the attributes that use the value Set individually requires the property to be configured on each created link settings.
Links
To create a Nested Grid link click on the New link within the Link folder.
Creating a new Nested Grid
Adding a new Nested Grid : Enter the name and the label for the link that will be created.
Adding a new Nested Grid
Application list : All Grid applications from current project, that contain global variables, will be listed.
Grid application selection.
For an application to be used as a Nested Grid, it must have within its SQL command (Grid > SQL) a WHERE clause with a global variable to receive the parameters from the main Grid.
SQL query configuration to the Grid be used as Nested Grid.

3
Parameters setting : Setting the value that will be passed to the variable(s) of the Nested Grid SQL statement.
Informing the parameter to the variable
In the screen above, on the left side, it is displayed the Nested Grid input parameters (global variables created within the Nested Grid WHERE clause), on the right side, you must
select the parameter option. The options are:
Attributes
Field : Used to assign a Grid field value as a parameter.
Fix : Used to assign a fixed value as a parameter.
Empty : Choosing this option will not be assigned any value as a parameter.
Save button : By clicking this button the Nested Grid creation will be completed and saved.
Editing an existing Nested Grid link

All Nested Grid links created will placed within its menu options, inside the folder Links. By clicking on the Nested Grid name there will be an interface for settings edition.
Editing a Nested Grid
General settings
Nested Grid general settings
This interface can be used to edit the following Nested Grid attributes:
Label : Nested Grid title for the application
Link : In this attribute are displayed the current Nested Grid connection data, showing the application and parameters used. To change any link attribute just click to edit Link.
Display : This attribute allows you to set which Nested Grid items, if it uses any of these resources, will be displayed in the main Grid.
Display settings
* __1__ : Display Title.

* __2__ : Sequential display (number line).
* __3__ : Display Totals.
Inherit view : When marked it sets that the Nested Grid view will be equal to that of the main Grid.
Set individually
If the value of one of the attributes in the Nested Grid settings has been selected as Set Individually, these values must be configured in the Nested Grid editing screen for each
called link.
4
Nested Grid settings.
Display settings
These options will only appear if all of the following conditions are true:
Attribute Value
Title in the same line No
Enable Tree view No
Position In one column
Nested Grid display settings
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid horizontal alignment. It can be aligned left, right or Center.
Vertical Alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.
Background color : Here you can set the background color. If it is not filled it will get the Grid default background color.
Title horizontal alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label horizontal alignment. It can be aligned Left, Right or Center.
Title vertical alignment : This option sets the Nested Grid label vertical alignment. It can be aligned to the top, middle, or End.
Bold : This option sets the Nested Grid title (label) in bold.
1
Sorting rules
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES SORTING RULES
Sorting rules settings
Attributes
Sorting rules sorting : Allows you to change the sort display of the sorting rules. To configure this option, an icon is displayed (set up ordering) that when clicked allows the choice of the
field and your display order ascending (ASC) or descending (DESC) .
Integrate sorting rules : This option allows you to set whether to use the sorting rules together with the regular sorting options or not. You can choose the display options between:
Sorting Fields/Rules(default) : This option allows you to apply the rules that have been created together with the regular fields sorting (descending or ascending)
Sorting Fields : This option allows you to apply the fields sorting only, discarding the sorting rules (descending or ascending)
Sorting Rules : This option allows you to apply the sorting only according to the rules that have been created, discarding the fields sorting.
Creating a Sorting Rule
Adding sorting Rule interface
Attribute
Name : Field to inform the new rule name.
Label : Field to inform the name that will be displayed in the application.
Setting up a sorting Rule
Sorting rule configuration interface..
Attributes
Label : This option allows you to enter a name that will be displayed when the application is executed.
Select the fields for a sorting rule : Allows you to select through the selection bar which fields will be displayed (fields that are in the frame at the right side) and the fields will not be
displayed (fields that are in the left side frame). To sort the fields the way you want, use the sort bar located on the right side of the frame. To apply the sorting type to the field, simply
select the straight side frame field and select the Ascending mode, where displays a + or a - by the field side to indicate if the sort order is Descending.
1
Filtro Refinado
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES FILTRO REFINADO
Settings
Attributes
Select fields
2
Edit fields
Attributes
1
Quebras
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES QUEBRAS
Configurao
Nesta interface o usurio poder estabelecer os critrios de quebra da consulta (Grid), ou seja, quais o(s) campo(s) que sero objetos de quebra e em qual sequncia de campos
a quebra dever ocorrer.
Interface de configurao das Quebras.
Atributos
Habilitar TreeView : Esta opo permite habilitar/desabilitar o treeview da Quebra, que permite exibir/esconder as linhas da quebra. Esta opo no est disponvel para paginao
Scroll Infinito.
Posio da Quebra : Permite selecionar a posio da quebra em relao aos registros do grupo. As opes so: Antes dos registros e Aps os registros.
Antes dos registros : A quebra ocorrer antes de exibir os registros relativos.
Exibio da quebra antes dos registros
Aps os registros : A quebra ocorrer aps exibir os registros relativos.
Exibio da quebra aps os registros
Cabealho da Quebra : Permite exibir o cabealho da quebra em todas as pginas.
Ordenao com Quebra : Permite ordenar os campos respeitando as quebras.
Exibir Label na Quebra : Permite a exibio de label na quebra dos campos dentro da quebra.
Ttulo para Quantidade : Permite definir um ttulo da coluna para quantidade de registros.
Separador do Valor : Permite definir um separador entre o ttulo e o valor de um campo na quebra.
Tabular Quebras : Define a margem esquerda da Quebra.
Dividir Quebras : Define a margem entre duas Quebras.
Quebra Dinmica
Para configurar a Quebra Dinmica devemos selecionar quais campos ficaro disponveis na aplicao para que o usurio final possa selecionar e ento aplicar a quebra
dinamicamente em tempo de execuo.
O Usurio final poder selecionar mais de um campo na hora de aplicar as quebras na aplicao em execuo.
Selecionar Campos
Interface de Regras de Quebra Dinmica.
Atributos
Usar Quebra Dinmica : Opo para habilitar o uso das quebras dinmicas.
Esconder linha de ajuda da quebra dinmica : Opo usada para esconder o ttulo da quebra dinmica na aplicao gerada.
Quebra Esttica
A quebra esttica usada quando o desenvolvedor criar um conjunto de quebras previamente configurada e permitindo que o usurio final selecione qual quebra deseja aplicar
na aplicao em tempo de execuo.
As quebras podem possir um ou mais nveis.
Interface de Regras da Quebra Esttica.
Configurao
C O N F I G U R A O D E A G R U P A M E N T O E S TT I C O
Interface de agrupamento da Quebra Esttica.
Atributos
Nome : Cada regra deve ter um nome para identificao no desenvolvimento.
Label : o nome da regra que ser exibido para o usurio final na aplicao.
Campos : onde podemos marcar / desmarcar um ou mais campos de Quebras e definir o nvel de cada um deles. A quebra que vir primeiro.
C O N F I G U R A O D A S R E G R A S D E O R D E N A O E S TT I C A
Interface das regras de ordenao da Quebra Esttica.

2
Atributos
Usar Quebra vazia : Configurao usada quando desejamos que a consulta seja iniciada sem nenhuma quebra.
Quebra inicial : Quebra que ser usada no carregamento inicial da aplicao gerada.
Usar totalizao dinmica : Permite utilizar a totalizao dinmica nas quebras do resumo.
Ordenao das Quebras : Interface usada para selecionar a ordem que as quebras sero exibidas na consulta.
Eventos
OnGroupByAll : Este evento executado aps ocorrerem todas as quebras, independente do nvel e permitem a manipulao dos campos de totalizao.
O Scriptcase disponibiliza todas as variveis de totalizao no escopo da consulta. Supondo que uma aplicao que tenha dois nveis de quebra (estado e cidade) e que totaliza
dois campos (parcela e saldo), podemos ter acesso aos totais, no escopo de calcular a cada registro, da seguinte forma:
{count_ger} contm a quantidade total dos registros.

{sum_parcela} contm o somatrio geral do campo parcela.
{sum_saldo} contm o somatrio geral do campo saldo.
{count_estado} contm a quantidade total dos registros, da quebra de estado que estiver sendo processada.
{sum_parcela_estado} contm o somatrio geral do campo estado e do campo parcela que estiverem sendo processado.
{sum_saldo_estado} contm o somatrio geral do campo saldo e do campo parcela que estiverem sendo processado.
{count_cidade} contm o a quantidade total dos registros, da quebra de cidade que estiver sendo processada.
{sum_parcela_cidade} contm o somatrio geral do campo parcela e de cidade que estiverem sendo processado.
{sum_saldo_cidade} contm o somatrio geral do campo saldo e de cidade que estiverem sendo processado.
Considerando que as frmulas, definidas para serem processadas no escopo de calcular durante as quebras estaro atuando para os vrios nveis de quebra, as variveis
especiais de totalizao, neste escopo, so referenciadas substituindo-se o nome da quebra pela palavra chave quebra, ou seja:
{count_ger} contm a quantidade total dos registros.

{sum_parcela} contm o somatrio geral do campo parcela.
{sum_saldo} contm o somatrio geral do campo saldo.
{count_quebra} contm a quantidade total dos registros, da quebra que estiver sendo processada.
{sum_quebra_parcela} contm o somatrio geral do campo parcela, da quebra que estiver sendo processada.
{sum_quebra_saldo} contm o somatrio geral do campo saldo, da quebra que estiver sendo processada.
Ex:
Em uma aplicao que tenha quebras por estado e cidade e que totalize um campo saldo nos totais das quebras, desejamos exibir a mdia em substituio ao saldo. Cria-se um
mtodo, no evento OnGroupByAll, com o seguinte contedo:
{sum_quebra_saldo} = {sum_quebra_saldo} / {count_quebra};
Campos
Configurao geral do campo da quebra
Tipo do dado : Define o tipo do campo da aplicao. Selecionando Texto o campo exibir qualquer caracter.
Label : Define o ttulo do campo na aplicao. Por exemplo: se o campo estiver definido no banco de dados como cmp_nome_cliente fica mais claro o __entendimento se o mesmo for
exibido como Nome do Cliente.
Converte Letra :Permite converter as letras do campo na exibio. As opes so:
Caixa Alta Todas em maiscula

Caixa Baixa Todas em minscula
Capitula Primeira Palavra A primeira letra da primeira palavra em maiscula
Capitula Todas as Palavras A primeira letra de todas as palavras em maiscula
Mscara de Consulta : Define a mscara de exibio do campo. So dois os tipos de mscara descritos na tabela abaixo:
Caracter Descrio
substitudo por quaisquer caracteres retornados pelo banco de dados. Seu preenchimento obrigatrio e quando forem retornados menos caracteres do que o tamanho da
X
mscara, o valor ser completado com zeros esquerda.
substitudo por quaisquer caracteres retornados pelo banco de dados. Seu preenchimento opcional e quando forem retornados menos caracteres do que o tamanho da
Z mscara, nada ser feito em relao aos caracteres que esto faltando. Alm disso os zeros esquerda sero suprimidos. Obrigatoriamente o uso deste caracter esquerda da
mscara quando usado em conjunto com o X
Exemplos de mscaras:
Mscara Valor do campo Valor formatado

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
3
(zz) xxxx - xxxx Valor
Mscara 0012345678 ( ) 1234
do campo Valor - 5678
formatado
Tipo SQL : Informa o tipo do campo no banco de dados.
Lookup de Consulta
Forma utilizada para modificar a exibio de um determinado campo na consulta. Por exemplo, um campo sexo no banco de dados com valores M ou F pode ser substitudo por
Masculino ou Feminino (ver Lookup Manual ) ou ainda, de forma dinmica, ter esses valores recuperados de uma tabela do banco de dados (ver Lookup Automatico ).
Interface Lookup de Consuta Automtico.
L O O K U P D E C O N S U L TA - A U T O M T I C O
Lookup usado para modificar a exibio do campo de forma dinmica, recuperando os valores de uma tabela.
Interface Lookup de Consuta Automtico.
Atributos
Comando Select : Define o comando SQL que ir recuperar o valor a ser exibido no campo da consulta. O comando dever ter o seguinte formato SELECT campo_a_ser_exibido FROM
tabela WHERE campo_chave = {campo_da_consulta} .
OBS : O campo da consulta deve ser referenciado sempre entre chaves {} . No momento da execuo, o campo entre chaves ser substituido pelo seu valor na tabela.
Mltiplas Opes : Quando o Comando Select informado retornar vrios valores, a opo Sim deve ser selecionada.
Delimitador : Define o separador dos valores retornados pelo Comando Select, esta opo dever ser preenchida quando estiver marcado Sim no atributo Mltiplas Opes.
Usar o lookup em
Consulta : Aplica o lookup em todas as formas de consulta (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF).
Resumo : Aplica o lookup somente no resumo (HTML e PDF).
Ambos : Equivale marcao das opes Consulta e Resumo.
Valor Default : Define um valor padro, usado nos casos onde o comando select no retorna nenhum valor.
Exibir valor original e lookup : Quando selecionado No, exibido apenas o valor retornado pelo Comando Select. Caso contrrio, sero exibidos o valor original do campo e o valor
retornado pelo Comando Select separados pelo caracter definido em Separados por.
Separados Por : Define o(s) caracter(es) que ser(o) usado(s) para separar o valor orignal do campo e o valor retornado pelo Comando Select. Esta opo dever ser preenchida
quando estiver marcado Sim no atributo Mostrar valor original e lookup.
Usar conexo especfica : Permite selecionar uma outra conexo existente no projeto diferente da conexo atual da consulta.
L O O K U P D E C O N S U L TA - M A N U A L
Lookup usado para modificar a exibio do campo com valores pr-definidos.
Interface Lookup de Consuta Manual.
Atributos
Tipos de Lookup : Define o modo de funcionamento do lookup, podendo ser : Simples Valor , Mltiplos Valores (Delimitador), Mltiplos Valores (Posio) e Mltiplos
Valores (Binrio).
Simples Valor
Ser exibido apenas um valor para o campo. feita uma substituio direta do valor armazenado no banco por um label definido em uma lista.
Configurao do lookup Simples Valor
Label : Texto que ser exibido na consulta.
Valor : Atributo que corresponde ao valor armazenado na tabela. Por exemplo, o valor M ser substitudo por Masculino.
Mltiplos Valores (Delimitador)
Podero ser exibidos vrios valores para o campo selecionado. Os valores devem ser separados por um delimitador a ser informado. feita uma substituio das
partes de uma string armazenada no campo, separadas por um delimitador, por valores contidos em uma lista.
Configurao do lookup Mltiplos Valores (delimitador)
Valor : Atributo que corresponde ao valor armazenado na tabela. Por exemplo, o valor E;C ser substitudo por Esportes Cinema .
Delimitador : Caracter usado para separar os valores dentro de uma mesma string.
Mltiplos Valores (Posio)
Permite recuperar diversas informaes armazenadas em uma nica string do campo selecionado. Para que estas informaes sejam recuperadas so informados,
alm do label, a posio inicial e a quantidade de bytes que cada informao ocupa dentro da string.
Como exemplo usaremos uma string para armazenar Sexo , Estado civil e Hobby respectivamente. Sexo ocupa um byte, estado civil um byte e hobby dois bytes.
Para tanto definimos a lista como:

4
Masculino M 1 1
Feminino F 1 1
Casado C 2 1
Solteiro S 2 1
Estudar ED 3 2
Esportes ES 3 2
Leitura LE 3 2
Exemplo: A string MCED seria apresentada na consulta como: MasculinoCasado Estudar.
Configurao do lookup Mltiplos Valores (Posio)
Valor : Atributo que corresponde ao valor armazenado na tabela. Por exemplo, o valor M ser substitudo por Masculino.
Incio : Posio inicial na string onde a informao est gravada. A primeira posio sempre 1.
Tamanho : Quantidade de bytes que a informao ocupa na string.
Mltiplos Valores (Binrio)
Permite recuperar diversas informaes armazenadas em forma decimal do campo selecionado.
Como exemplos usaremos a seguinte lista (apesar de no ser informado na interface de incluso de valores na lista, cada item possui um valor atribuido
automaticamente de acordo com a ordem):
Valor Atribudo Descrio no Lookup

1 Esportes
2 Cultura
4 Lazer
8 Leitura
16 Msica
Para exibio dos dados realizada uma decomposio do nmero decimal armazenado no banco. Por exemplo: os nmeros 11 e 12 (gravados na base de dados
seriam decompostos da seguinte forma:
11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Esportes - Cultura - Leitura)

1 Esportes
2 Cultura
4 Lazer
8 Leitura
16 Msica
12 = 4 + 8 = ( Lazer - Leitura)

1 Esportes
2 Cultura
4 Lazer
8 Leitura
16 Msica
Configurao do lookup Mltiplos Valores (Binrio).
Boto Incluir : Inclui na lista os valores preenchidos nos atributos Label e Valor.
Boto Alterar : Altera os atributos do item selecionado.
Boto Excluir : Exclui o item selecionado.
Boto Limpar : Limpa os atributos.
Boto Salvar : Salva a lista de valores informados para que possa ser reutilizado.
Carregar Definio de Lookup : Permite carregar uma Lista de valores pr-definida para uso como lookup.
Usar o lookup em
Consulta : Aplica o lookup em todas as formas de consulta (HTML, PDF, XML , CSV e RTF).
Resumo : Aplica o lookup somente no resumo (HTML, PDF).
Ambos : Equivale marcao das opes Consulta e Resumo.
Valor Default : Define um valor padro, usado nos casos onde o valor armazenado no corresponde a nenhum valor da lista.
Exibir valor original e lookup : Quando selecionado No, exibido apenas o valor informado no Label, caso contrrio ser exibido o valor do campo selecionado e o valor
informado no Label separado pelo caracter definido em Separados por.
Separados Por : Define o(s) caracter(es) que ser(o) usado(s) para separar o valor do campo selecionado e o valor retornado pelo Comando Select. Esta opo dever ser
preenchida quando estiver marcado Sim no atributo Mostrar valor original e lookup.
CONFIGURAO DA QUEBRA
5
Interface Configurao Geral do Campo.
Atributos
Organizao dos campos : Define como as informaes contidas na linha de quebra sero dispostas ou organizadas.
Colunas : Define em quantas colunas as informaes contidas na linha de quebra sero dispostas ou organizadas.
Exibe label : Define se o label do campo ser exibido.
Linha de quebra : Exibe ou no a linha de quebra com o valor a ser quebrado.
Linha de sumarizao (Resumo) : Define se na tela de resumo a linha de totalizao desta quebra ser exibida.
Quantidade de registros : Define se na linha de quebra ser exibida a quantidade de registros da mesma.
Quebra Pgina PDF (Consulta) : Define se no arquivo pdf, gerado pela consulta. Se cada vez que esta quebra ocorrer ser gerada uma nova pgina.
Ex. Em um relatrio podemos querer que os pedidos de cada estado sero exibidos em pginas diferentes.
Quebra Pgina PDF (Resumo) : Define se no resumo do arquivo pdf, gerado pela consulta. Se cada vez que esta quebra ocorrer ser gerada uma nova pgina. Ex. Em um relatrio
podemos querer que os pedidos de cada estado sero exibidos em pginas diferentes.
Quebra Pgina HTML (Consulta) : Quebra pgina no HTML da consulta
Quebra Pgina HTML (Resumo) : Quebra pgina no HTML da Resumo
Iniciar TreeView : Define o estado inicial do TreeView.
Ordenao : Se esta opo estiver selecionada com Sim , os campos que estiverem marcados para permitir ordenao ao serem clicados, ser feita a ordenao respeitando os
critrios da quebra.
Campos : Define quais campos sero exibidos nesta linha de quebra. Ainda possvel dizer se ser exibida a totalizao ou sumarizao deste campo chaveando VALOR ou
SUMARIZAO, antes de clicar no boto ligar.
CONFIGURAO DA VISUALIZAO DO LABEL NA QUEBRA
Interface Configurao da Visualizao Label na Quebra.
Atributos
Fonte do Texto : Permite definir a fonte utilizada no label da quebra.
Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte utilizada no label da quebra.
Cor do Texto : Cor do label na quebra.
Cor do Fundo : Cor de fundo da Quebra.
Texto Negrito : Permite habilitar ou desabilitar o label da quebra em negrito.
CONFIGURAO DA VISUALIZAO DO CAMPO NA QUEBRA
Interface Configurao da Visualizao(campo).
Atributos
Fonte do Texto : Permite definir a fonte utilizada no Campo da quebra.
Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte utilizada no Campo da quebra.
Cor do Texto : Cor do label no campo.
Texto Negrito : Permite habilitar ou desabilitar o Campo da quebra em negrito.
C O N F I G U R A O D A V I S U A L I Z A O D A L I N H A D E T O TA L I Z A O
Interface Configurao da Visualizao (linha).
Atributos
Fonte do Texto : Permite definir a fonte utilizada na linha de totalizao da quebra.
Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte utilizada na totalizao da quebra.
Cor do Texto : Cor da totalizao da quebra.
Cor do Fundo : Cor de fundo da Quebra.
Texto Negrito : Permite habilitar ou desabilitar a totalizao da quebra em negrito.

1
Totalizao
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES TOTALIZAO
Configurao
Nesta interface se define quais totais relativos aos campos de quebra serao exibidos e os seus respectivos labels.
Interface Configurao da Totalizao.
Atributos
Total em Linha nica : Permite exibir o ttulo Total Geral e os valores totalizados em uma nica linha.
Sim :
No :
Exibir Total Geral : Indica em quais pginas o total geral ser exibido. As opes so as seguintes: Em todas as pginas, Na ltima pgina ou No exibir.
Sub-Total do Grupo : Diz respeito a como vai ser visualizado os totais da quebra:
Sim : Exibir sub-totais da quebra aps ocorrer a quebra.
No : Exibir sub-totais da quebra no inicio antes de ocorrer a quebra.
Quantidade de Registros : Permite exibir a quantidade de registros junto ao total geral.

Sim :
No :
Configurao do Layout
Na interface abaixo, onde se define como sero exibidos os nomes dos campos da quebra e se eles sero realmente exibidos na aplicao:
Interface Configurao do Layout.
Atributos
Campo de quebra : Campos selecionados na quebra.
Label : Descrio do label exibido.
Exibir : Permite exibir ou nao a linha de totais da quebra.
Selecionar Campos
Esta interface onde se definem os campos que sero totalizados e o tipo de totalizao do campo.
2
Interface Campos da
Totalizao.
Sero listados apenas os campos dos tipos Numeral, Decimal e Moeda . Para atribuir uma operao a ser utilizada numa coluna (campo), basta selecionar o tipo de totalizao
desejada, marcando o Checkbox logo abaixo.
Soma : Define que seja gerado uma soma dos valores referente ao campo selecionado.
Mdia : Calcula a mdia aritmtica dos valores referente ao campo selecionado.
Mnimo : Exibe o menor valor identificado no campo selecionado.
Mximo : Exibe o maior valor identificado no campo selecionado.
Mdia ponderada : Calcula a mdia ponderada referemte ao campo selecionado.
Peso de mdia ponderada : Peso utilizado para calcular a mdia ponderada.
Utilizar a mesma configurao no resumo : Atribui a mesma configurao da totalizao ao resumo.
Os campos selecionados sero exibidos quando ocorrer uma quebra ou no final da consulta.
Posicionamento
A ordenao dos campos da totalizao consiste em exibir a totalizao em formato Padro , Agrupado ou Por campo .
Configurao de posicionamento de campos da totalizao
Padro
A opo Padro retorna o valor exatamente abaixo da coluna que est sendo totalizado.
Interface da Ordenao dos Campos da Totalizao ( Padro ).
A linha com o Total exibe a totalizao da coluna Limite de Crdito . Como mostrado no caso abaixo:
3
Ordenao Padro gerada.
ALINHAMENTO
O alinhamento da totalizao referente a posio que ser exibida a Mensagem linha totalizao, as opes so Centralizado , Esquerda e Direita:
Interface da Ordenao dos campos da totalizao ( Alinhamento )
Esquerda :
Direita :
Centralizado :
LABEL
Nas Configuraes Label ( Padro ), possvel modificar o nome dos tipos de totalizao, como mostrado a seguir:
Configurao do valor do label.
Agrupado
Interface da Ordenao dos
Campos da Totalizao ( Agrupado ).
possvel alterar na Interface a posio que ser exibida os tipos de totalizao (Soma, Mdia, Mximo e Mnimo), clicando e arrastando para cima ou para baixo o mouse na
lacuna.
Alterando o posicionamento das

4
linhas.
Neste exemplo, o Total exibe a soma e a mdia das colunas Limite de Crdito e Pontos :
Ordenao Agrupado gerada.
ALINHAMENTO
O alinhamento da totalizao referente a posio que ser exibida a Mensagem linha totalizao, as opes so Centralizado , Esquerda e Direita:
Interface da Ordenao dos campos da totalizao ( Alinhamento )
Esquerda :
Direita :
Centralizado :
LABEL
Nas Configuraes Label (Agrupado), possvel modificar o nome dos tipos de totalizao, como mostrado a seguir:
Edio dos labels.
Por campo
A opo Por campo, organiza cada campo da totalizao pelos nomes dos campos, sem respeitar a formatao das colunas.
5
Interface da Ordenao dos
Campos da Totalizao ( Por Campo ).
QUEBRA DE LINHA POR CAMPO
Habilitando a opo Quebra linha por Campo ser exibido em cada linha um nico campo com os tipos escolhidos (Soma, Mdia, Mximo e Mnimo).
Ordenao gerada, com a opo Quebra linha por campo habilitada.
Desabilitando a opo Quebra linha por Campo temos os campos um ao lado do outro de forma corrida.
Ordenao gerada, com a opo Quebra linha por campo desabilitada.
LABEL
Nas Configuraes Label (Por Campo), possvel modificar o nome dos tipos de totalizao, como mostrado a seguir:
Edio dos labels.
Campos
Configurao da visualizao do label na totalizao
Interface Configurao da Totalizao
Fonte do Texto : Permite definir uma fonte para o campo texto.
Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte.
Cor do Texto : Permite definir a cor do texto.
Cor do Fundo : Permite definir a cor do fundo.
Texto Negrito : Permite formatar o texto em negrito.
Como exemplo desta configurao, veja como resultar na aplicao gerada:
Visualicao do label em aplicao gerada
Configurao da visualizao na linha de total geral

6
Interface Configurao da linha Total Geral.
Fonte do Texto : Permite definir uma fonte para o campo texto.
Tamanho da Fonte : Permite definir o tamanho da fonte.
Cor do Texto : Permite definir a cor do texto.
Cor do Fundo : Permite definir a cor do fundo.
Texto Negrito : Permite formatar o texto em negrito.
Como exemplo desta configurao, veja como resultar na aplicao gerada:
Visualicao do label em aplicao gerada

1
Resumo
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES RESUMO
Configurao
Interface Configurao Resumo.
Atributos
Ttulo : Permite informar um Ttulo para o resumo, caso no seja informado nenhum nome para este campo o scriptcase admite o ttulo padro para o resumo, assim o ttulo ficar
RESUMO, porm se desejar que nenhum ttulo seja exibido ser necessrio informar na propriedade ttulo a tag HTML .
Campo Ttulo sendo informado com a Tag HTML.
Ttulo Quantidade : Ttulo da quantidade de registros.
Quantidade de Registros :
No mostrar : No mostrar o total de registro por quebra.
Mostra apenas no resumo : Mostra no resumo o total de registros por quebra.
Mostra no resumo e no grfico : Mostra no resumo o total de registros por quebra e disponibiliza grfico.
Total Horizontal : Exibir total horizontal para resumos do tipo matriz.
Posio do cone do grfico : Posicionamento do cone do Grfico (esquerda ou direita).
Posio do cone do total : Posicionamento do cone Total (esquerda ou direita).
Total Vertical : Exibir total vertical para resumos do tipo matriz.
Largura do Resumo : Valor da largura para o resumo.
Unidade da Largura do Resumo : Unidade de medida usado para a largura. Automtico (valor da largura ignorado), pixels e porcentagem.
Configurao do Layout
Interface Configurao Resumo.
Atributos
Campo da quebra : Campos da quebra selecionados na consulta.
Posio : Define entre posio do eixo x ou do eixo y.
Ordenao : Define a ordenao pelo valor de banco ou pelo valor de exibio.
Preencher labels vazios : Define se os labels vazios vo ser preenchidos.
Link Grid : Cria um link no campo selecionado.
Alinhamento : Define o tipo de alinhamento do layout para centralizado, esquerda ou direita.
Formato tabular : Define o resumo com o formato tabular.
Barra de ferramentas
Neste quadro podemos fazer as configuraes referentes ao resumo. O resumo ocorre sempre que a aplicao de consulta contm exibir resumo, tipo de resumo, posio do
resumo, ordenao do resumo, tecla de atalho, quantidade de registros, tipo do grfico, largura do grfico, altura do grfico, margem do grfico, aspecto do grfico, grfico em
outra janela, largura do resumo e unidade da largura do resumo.
2
Interface Configurao do Resumo.
Atributos
Formatos : Permite selecionar os formatos de gerao de resumo.
Botes : Permite selecionar os botes que sero exibidos na barra de ferramentas.
Ordenao dos Botes : Permite ordenar os botes na barra de ferramentas conforme necessrio, utilizando a barra de seleo (lado direito da tabela).
Selecionar Campos
Nesta interface se definem os campos que sero totalizados e seu tipo de totalizao.
Interface Campos do Resumo.
Sero listados apenas os campos dos tipos Numeral, Decimal e Moeda. Para atribuir uma operao a ser utilizada numa coluna (campo), basta selecionar o tipo de totalizao
desejada, marcando o Checkbox logo abaixo.
Soma : Define que seja gerado uma soma dos valores referente ao campo selecionado.
Mdia : Calcula a mdia aritmtica dos valores referente ao campo selecionado.
Mximo : Exibe o maior valor identificado no campo selecionado.
Mnimo : Exibe o menor valor identificado no campo selecionado.
Mdia ponderada : Exibe o clculo realizado pela mdia ponderada no campo selecionado.
Peso de mdia ponderada : Opo para escolha do peso utilizado no clculo da mdia ponderada.
Os campos selecionados sero exibidos quando ocorrer a quebra ou no final da consulta.
Posicionamento
Nesta interface podemos configurar o posicionamento dos campos da totalizao.
Interface posicionamento dos campos do Resumo.
Arraste e solte as opes para a posio desejada.

3
Group Label
Interface do Group Label do Resumo
Com essa opo, voc pode inserir um ou mais ttulos para suas colunas em suas aplicaes, podendo alterar seu tamanho, sua cor, sua fonte e posiciona-los como desejar.
Caso voc tenha campos com exibio dinmica o Group Label no ir funcionar.
Edio de propriedades da clula do group label
Atributos
Ttulo Permite definir o ttulo que ser exibido em seu Group Label.
Fonte de texto Permite definir a fonte do ttulo de seu group label.
Tamanho da fonte Permite definir o tamanho da fonte do ttulo de seu group label.
Alinhamento horizontal Permite definir o alinhamento horizontal do ttulo de seu group label. Sendo esquerda, centro ou direita.
Alinhamento vertical Permite definir o alinhamento horizontal do ttulo de seu group label. Sendo meio, baixo ou topo.
Cor de texto Permite definir a cor do texto do ttulo de seu group label.
Cor de fundo Permite definir a cor de fundo do espao onde o ttulo de seu group label ser exibido.
Ordenao
Interface Ordenao dos campos do Resumo.
Atributos
Campos : Selecione os campos que voc deseja permitir a ordenao.
Ordenao Inicial : Selecione um campo para ordenao inicial no resumo.
Tipo de ordenao : Escolha se a ordenao ser ascendente ou descendente.
Ordenar a partir da Quebra : Selecione uma das quebras para ordenao inicial.
4
Grficos
Neste quadro podemos informar as configuraes dos Graficos. Como por exemplo: tipo do grfico, largura, altura, margens, etc.
Se existir duas ou mais Regras de Quebra, devemos configurar as opes de grficos para cada Regra de Quebra criada.
O grfico do tipo Analtico s funciona quando se utiliza 2 campos configurados nas quebras. Se o usurio configurar mais de um campo, o grfico analtico s ir gerar com
os dois primeiros.
Interface Gerao dos Grficos de Coluna.
Interface Gerao de Grficos de Linhas (Totais).
Estas configuraes esto disponveis somente para Regras de Quebras com mais de 1 campo.
Configurao dos grficos
Interface de Configuraes de Grficos.
Todos os grficos utilizam HTML5
Atributos
Tipo de grfico : Permite definir o tipo de grfico que ser exibido por Default caso a opo Grfico Configurvel esteja ativa, ou o tipo de grfico a ser exibido caso a opo esteja
desativada.
Barra
5
Barra
Tamanho da fonte : Define o tamanho da fonte no grfico.

Subttulo : Define o subttulo exibido no grfico.
Barra - Orientao : Orientao das barras vertical ou horizontal no grfico.
Barra - Dimenso : Dimenso das Barras (2D ou 3D) no grfico.
Barra - Empilhamento : Empilha as Barras em uma nica Barra (Em srie).
Barra - Agrupamento de sries : Agrupa o grfico de Barras em srie.
Barra - Valores ao lado : Exibe os valores ao lado das Barras.
Barra - Largura : Pode-se definir a largura entre 20 e 70.
Barra - Orientao do valor : Define-se a orientao do grfico, podendo coloca-lo na vertical.
Barra - Posicionamento do valor : Pode-se esolher onde o valor ir se posicionar.
Pizza

Pizza - Formato : Formato de Pizza ou Donut.
Pizza - Dimenso : Dimenso do grfico de Pizza.
Pizza - Ordenao : Ordenao do grfico Pizza.
Pizza - Formatao de Valores : Formatao dos dados exibidos.
Linha

Linha - Forma : Formato da Linha.
Linha - Series Group : Linha grouping type.
Area

Area - Forma : Formato da rea exibida no grfico.
Area - Empilhamento : Empilha as areas no grfico.
Area - Agrupamento de sries : Agrupa o grfico em srie.
Gauge
6
Gauge

Gauge - Forma : Formato de exibio do grfico.
Radar

Funil

Funil - Dimenso : Dimenso do Funil (2D ou 3D) no grfico.
Pirmide

Pirmide - Dimenso : Dimenso (2D ou 3D) no grfico.
Pirmide - Formatao de Valores : Formatao dos dados exibidos.
Pirmide - Forma : Formato de exibio do grfico.
Opes em comum
Tipo de grfico : Selecione o tipo de grfico entre analtico ou sinttico.
Grficos analticos e Grficos sintticos so formas diferentes de lidar com mltiplos grupos pelos critrios de criao dos grficos.
Grficos sintticos devem restringir-se ao primeiro grupo pela condio e permitir que o usurio use os links para ver detalhes do prximo grupo de critrios, aumentando o
nvel de detalhe.
Grficos analticos surgem com todo o grupo por critrios, criando um grfico detalhado completo que no permite a vinculao de outros grficos detalhados.
Criar link no grfico : Permite que os grficos tenham um link em seus elementos para aplicaes de grid detalhada ou grficos. Os dados mostrados sero relativos ao valor clicado no
grfico.
Exibir Valores : Exibe os valores do grfico gerado.
Eixo do grfico total geral : Opo para exibir o grfico do total geral como coluna ou linha..
Exibir eixo Y com Zero : Forar exibio do valor zero no eixo Y.
Largura do Grfico : Largura em pixels dos grficos gerados.
Altura do Grfico : Altura em pixels dos grficos gerados.
Ordenao dos valores : Ordena os valores dos grficos.
Altura para legenda : Altura em porcentagem entre o grfico e a margem superior reservado para as legendas.
7
Modo de exibio dos grficos : Define se os grficos sero mostrados em uma nova janela, lado a lado com o aplicativo, ou carregados na mesma janela do navegador.
Layout do Grfico
Interface de configurao do Layout de cores dos grficos.
Atributos
Paleta de cores do background do grfico : Escolha o tema de sua preferncia para aplicar nos grficos.
Paleta de cores para trama de dados : Escolha o tema que voc gostaria de aplicar a sua trama de dados dos grficos.
Temas de Grficos : Temas de grficos personalizados
Layout
Cabealho
Neste bloco feita a definio dos conteudos variveis que faro parte do cabealho.
Configurao do cabealho do resumo
Esta tela pode variar dependendo do formato de cabealho escolhido dentro da pasta Visualizao.
Exibir Cabealho : Esta flag determina se o cabealho ser exibido.
Ttulo da Consulta : Permite informar um ttulo para ser exibido na aplicao.
Variveis de Cabealho : Os campos variveis podem ser preenchidos com qualquer um dos tipos exibidos no Combobox. Dependendo do tipo, ser necessrio associar um contedo ao
mesmo. Abaixo descrevemos os tipos existentes:
Campo : Quando se escolhe a opo do tipo Campo, abrir um Combobox ao lado com os campos que fazem parte do Select. Escolhendo um desses campos, estar associando o
valor do campo para exibio no cabealho.
Ttulo : Esta opo quando selecionada exibir no cabealho o valor preenchido no Ttulo do Filtro .
8
Data : Quando selecionado o tipo Data, ser exibido no cabealho da controle a data do sistema no formato dd/mm/aaaa. Existem diversos formatos de exibio utilizando a data e
a hora do servidor. O formato poder ser informado no campo texto que aparece ao lado. Para ter acesso aos formatos existentes clique em e aparecer uma tela explicativa.
Imagem : Quando selecionado o campo tipo imagem, aparece um campo para o preenchimento do nome da imagem existente no servidor. Para localizar as imagens existentes e
Valor : Quando selecionado o tipo Valor, o contedo preenchido no campo texto que aparece ao lado ser exibido no cabealho, pode ser informado textos e Variveis globais . Ex:
Rodap
Configurao do rodap do resumo
Esta tela pode variar dependendo do formato de Rodap escolhido dentro da pasta Visualizao.
Exibir Rodap : Esta flag determina se o Rodap ser exibido na aplicao.
Variveis de Rodap : Os campos variveis podem ser preenchidos com qualquer um dos tipos exibidos no Combobox, dependendo do tipo ser necessrio associar um contedo ao
mesmo. Abaixo descrevemos os tipos existentes:
Campo : Quando se escolhe a opo do tipo Campo, abrir um Combobox ao lado com os campos que fazem parte do Select. Escolhendo um desses campos, estar associando o
valor do campo para exibio no Rodap.
Data : Quando selecionado o tipo Data, ser exibido no Rodap da aplicao a data do sistema no formato dd/mm/aaaa. Existem diversos formatos de exibio utilizando a data e a
hora do servidor. O formato poder ser informado no campo texto que aparece ao lado. Para ter acesso aos formatos existentes clique em e aparecer uma tela explicativa.
Imagem : Quando selecionado o campo tipo imagem, aparece um campo para o preenchimento do nome da imagem existente no servidor. Para localizar as imagens existentes e
Valor : Quando selecionado o tipo Valor, o contedo preenchido no campo texto que aparece ao lado ser exibido no Rodap. Pode ser informado textos e Variveis globais . Ex:
1
Search
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES SEARCH
Settings
Attributes
Search Criteria
Advanced Search
Settings
2
Attributes
Select fields
*Interface for filter fields selection.
Required
Configuration interface of the marker placement.
Toobar
Desktop
3
Toolbar Interface.
of buttons.
BUTTON SETTINGS
OPTIONS
Options Interface.
Mobile
Save Search

4
Events
ONSCRIPTINIT
ONREFRESH
ONSAVE
O N V A L I D AT E
Layout
BLOCKS
current one.

5
Attributes
Block
Title
Label

Fields
Organization
Create New Block
click on Create.
Attributes
Edit Blocks
6
Attributes
7
Configuration
HEADER & FOOTER
Header
8
Footer
Dynamic Search
Settings
Select Fields
QuickSearch
9
Select Fields

10
Fields
Text
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
11
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
12
Help Type
Integer
13
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

14
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
15
Decimal

16
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

17

Help Settings
Help Type
18
Percent
FIELD BEHAVIOR
19
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


20
Help Settings
Help Type

21
Currency
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings

22
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
23

24
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


25
Help Settings
Help Type

26
Date

FIELD BEHAVIOR

27
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

28

Help Settings
Help Type

29
Time
Seconds.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Display Settings
30
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
31
Help Type
Datetime
32

FIELD BEHAVIOR
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Display Settings
33
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
34
Help Type
Select
35
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
36
37
automatically.
Single Value :
38
Man .
Man .
The example below:

39
Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
40
4
Value Lookup
8 Reading
16 Music
Ajax Processing
41
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


42
Help Settings
Help Type

43
DOUBLE SELECT
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings

44
(;).
Ajax Processing
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

45

Help Settings
Help Type
46
Checkbox
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings

47
Lookup Methods
delimiter then (;).
48
Single Value :
Man .
49
Man .
The example below:

Man M 1 1
Women W 1 1
Divorced D 2 1
Single S 2 1
Study SD 3 2
Sports SP 3 2
Read RD 3 2
Man .

50
the order):

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music

1 Sports
2 Culture
4 Pleasure
8 Reading
16 Music
51
Ajax Processing
Display Settings

52
CSS of the Title
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
53
Radio

54
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
Lookup Methods
55
56
Ajax Processing
57
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


58
Help Settings
Help Type

59
Grid Fields
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field

60

Help Settings
Help Type
61
Sorting
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

62
CSS of the Field


Help Settings
Help Type
63
Text Auto-Complete

64
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
65
Display Settings
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


66
Help Settings
Help Type

67
Configuration.
FIELD BEHAVIOR
Lookup Settings
68
Display Settings
69
CSS of the Title

CSS of the Field


Help Settings
70
Help Type

1
Application
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES APPLICATION
Settings
Attributes
Error Settings
Attributes
2
Navigation
Attributes
Global Variables
Example:


1
Links
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES LINKS
New link
Application Link
2
Fiels Link
Grid application.
3
Capture Link

4
Button Link
Links Edit
Editing Links.
Actions
Link Propeties

Form Property
Iframe properties
5


1
Programming
HOME APPLICATIONS STORED PROCEDURES PROGRAMMING
Attributes
Attributes
Internal Libraries
PHP Methods
Include Method.

2

1
General View
HOME TOOLS
Scriptcase offers tools that helps you out on developing systems, with the goal of optimizing the time of development making it easier to maintain your product.
Data Dictionary - This tool offers the option to create langs for the applications of your current project.
Express Edit - This tool offers the option to edit various applications simultaneously, it contains some options to be edited in the applications.
External Libraries - This tool offers the option to include external libraries to your project like JavaScript, CSS, HTML and other libraries. This allows you to integrate the
libraries to your applications.
Internal Libraries - This tool offers the option to create PHP functions to be used in the applications.
To-Do List - Allows you to create a To-Do List and assign Tasks to your developers.
Messages - Allows the developers to exchange messages between themselves in the same ScriptCase .
Converters - This tool offers the option to convert your projects from previous versions of ScriptCase to the current version.
Database Import - This tool offers the option to import tables in the formats (XLS, CSV and ACCESS) for the following databases: MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server
SQL Builder - This tool is an interface that provides some options to create a SELECT query to be used in your applications.
Database Builder - This tool is an interface to manage your database directly from ScriptCase, without needing to use any other software. It supports the Databases: MySQL,
SqlServer (not ODBC), SQLite, Oracle, Postgres.
1
Data Dictionary
HOME TOOLS DATA
DICTIONARY
The Data Dictionary is used to internationalize your system, by using this feature, you can create a data repository and associate it too one or more tables.
To access this functionality, you need to access it from the main menu Tools > Data Dictionary.
Creating a Data Dictionary

Inform all the necessary date for the creation of the repository. the files with an asterisk ar required.
The option Associate dictionary with connection , define a connection to associate with the repository data, allowing that the new applications, created using the tables
associated with the repository, have indexes in the language files with the field labels from the tables.
Add tables to the Data Repository

Here we need to select the tables thatll be added to this repository. After selecting the desired tables click on next.
After selecting the desired tables, you should choose whether or not to create the indexes (langs) on the field labels of the existing applications of the project.
Generate the indexes in the language files of the table fields - On this option the field labels are replaced with he indexes that can be edited in one place when accessing Locales >
Application Language.
An example of an index created by the Data Dictionary:
Overwriting the indexes in the language files - On this option, the existing indexes will be overwritten with new data based on the database.
Next, we can view a list of tables added to the repository data, where we can view a couple of information about these tables, like the name of the table of the database and the
2
index created for each table, on the label field, and the version of the Data Dictionary of each field.
The tables that werent added can be viewed when accessing the Dictionary tables, the process of including these tables to the repository of data is the same.
When doing a modification to the structure of the database tables, the same should be updated using the option SYNCHRONIZE DICTIONARY .
Table status
Next to the name of the tables theres an icon that indicates the status of the tables.
Green - Indicates that the tables and the repository are updated.
Red - Indicates that the tables dont exist in the database, in this case you should delete it from the repository.
Yellow - Indicates that the tables arent updated because of some modification in its structure. In these cases, you should click o the link edit referring to the table and click on update, so that
the data of the repository could update.
Edit Tables
Can be found on the right side, in the list of tables.
This option allows you to edit the fields from the chosen table, like the data types and the indexes created by the repository for example.
Other properties of the fields can be accessed when clicking the more icon on the right side of the field list.
Syncing Dictionary
This option is activated when selecting one or more tables, on this option well update the data dictionary according to the database.
3
When synchronizing the tables, a yellow icon will be displayed on the side of the updated tables, Se how to remove it . In case of change the structure of the tables, then you
need to resync them again.
Synchronizing Applications
After doing all the desired configurations on the tables and fields, you need to sync the changes to the existing applications, so that the changes can be applied.
First, you need to select the tables thatll be synchronized.
Next, you can define what will be done and which applications will suffer the modifications. A list of applications, that received the changes, are based on the tables that they
used.
When clicking on synchronizing, when finishing the process, youll see a summary of the procedure done.
Clicking to show the log, you can view all the modifications done, where itll display the previous state (blue) and the result of the modification (red)
Clicking on Back youll return to the Page of definition of modifications.

4
To finish the process, click on the Close.
Editing the Data Dictionary Properties

On the top part, we can view the dictionary properties, informed when created.
You have three possible actions, Edit, Reload and Close.
Edit - Allows you to change the properties of the data dictionary, like the modification of the connection used to associated with repository for example.
Reload - Updates all the information of the Data Dictionary, like the status of the table for example.
Close - Closes the current data dictionary and you are redirected to the list of dictionary.
Editing Indexes
To edit the created indexes in the repository, access Locales > Application Language .
On the side panel is possible to view all the lang from ScriptCase. The langs referring to the data dictionary will be in the folder Project Messages .
1
Express Edit
HOME TOOLS EXPRESS EDIT
This tool offers the option to edit multiple applications of your project simultaneously, where you can define value for various common attributes for these applications.
Some configurations are available.
Se below how to use the express edit.
This tool can be accessed from the menu Tools > Edit Express .
Select applications which will be edited
Firstly, we need to inform which applications we want to edit.
All - All the applications existing in the project without exceptions, will be edited.
Select Applications - All the applications existing in the project will be listed, so that you can select the applications that you want to edit.
Apply Modifications
After selecting the applications, you need to define the modifications that you want for those applications. In this page, we can define how can the modifications take place.
Appling to all the applications
This option allows to apply the same configurations, to all the selected applications, automatically.
2
Header Image - Define the image for the header of the applications.
Use Security - Define if the application will the user to be logged in so that it can run.
Enable direct call by URL - Allow the applications to be called directly by the URL.
Enable CSRF - Enables the protection Cross-Site Request Forgery. (This option only applies for the Control and Form applications)
Show HTML content - Defines if the HTML code thats stored in the database will be interpreted by the browser. (This option only applies for the Grid application)
Remove the HTML tags - Defines if the HTML code thats stored in the database will have the HTML tags removed for display.
Run content in JavaScript - Defines if the JavaScript code thats stored in the database will run on the browser.
Save HTML tags - Stores the HTML tags informed within the Application field to the database. (This option only applies for the Form application)
Text input in JavaScript - Stores the JavaScript informed within the Application field to the database. (This option only applies for the Form application)
Language - Applies the selected language for all the selected applications in the project.
Connection - Apply the desired connection (Connections created in the New Connection module) for the applications.
Connection for fields - Apply the desired connection (Connections created in the New Connection module) for the fields in the applications.
Theme - Apply the desired Theme (Only the ones included in the Project properties) to all the applications.
Template - Change the Header and Footer template of the applications.
After selecting the modifications that you want to do for all the select applications, youll be presented a list with all the selected attributes will be listed for modification.
Apply individually
This option allows you to apply the modifications individually for each application selected.
This option contains, not only the previous attributes, but also three exclusive attributes.
Description - Apply a description individually for the selected applications.
Friendly URL - Apply a friendly URL individually for each selected application.
Title - Apply the title individually for each application.
After selecting the modifications individually for all the select applications, youll be presented a list with all the selected attributes will be listed for modification.
When you apply the modifications, youll be presented a list of the applications that were modified.
1
Helpcase
HOME TOOLS HELPCASE
This tool is used to create a documentation for your system, that works integrated with the projects related by ScriptCase.
This tool can be accessed from the menu at Tools > HelpCase.
How to Create a HelpCase

The creation process is simple, needing only to inform the name of the documentation.
After creating the helpcase, you need to generate the content of the documented manual of the functionalities and description of the project.
On the left side, in the block WebHelp, well see the folder structure. Still in this block we can create the folders of the documentation.
Select the root or any other folder on the side panel and click on the folder icon. This way a folder will be created in the select directory.
Inform the directory name (Special characters arent acceptable) and the display name in the documentation menu.
To create .html files, where youll place your content, you need to select the directory where youll place the files in.
Inform the name of the file (Special characters arent acceptable) and the display name in the documentation menu.
Editing the helpcase

Selecting the folder that youll create, youll view some new option with the create button.
2
Icon (Folder with letters) - Allows you to rename the archives and the display name for the menu.
Icon (Recycle Bin) - Deletes the directory with all its content.
Icon (Eye) - View the directory in the documentation menu.
Icon (Slashed Eye) - Disable the view of the directory in the documentation menu.
After created, the files will be displayed on the list, when clicking on the directory that were created. Details about the files can be viewed, like the display title on the menu and
its actual size, also other options like rename and delete.
View - View the content of the file.
Edit - Open the file to place your content in it.
Link - Create a link between the file and the applications selected.
Copy - Creates a copy of the file.
Rename - Rename the file and its display menu.
Delete - Deletes the chosen file.
After the creation or clicking on edit a file, you can insert the content thatll be displayed for the end user.
Upload
You can upload already created content or images to use in the manual. The upload of these files, can be done by clicking on the upload button, on the upload page youll see the
supported formats and size limit of the files.
General Settings
Settings
Allows you to setup some things, like the header display and the search tab.
3
Initial Page
Allows to write content of the initial page of the documentation. The modification can be done also when selecting the _home.htm file on the files panel.
View
Define a template to be used in the header of the manual, its possible to edit or create new templates in the editor.
This editor can be accessed from the menu Layout > HTML Templates
Header
Allows to configure what will be displayed in the header.
CSS
Allows to modify the HelpCase CSS.
4
After creating all the content and the configuration of the layout, you need to associate the create files with the applications, so that the end user can have access to the
information that he needs in a quick way.
Associating Applications
You can start associating all the applications at once by clicking on links, or clicking on link, where you can associate only the chosen file to various applications.
Links
On this option, youll see a list of the applications, where you should select the applications thatll be associated.
Link
Clicking on link, youll be presented a list of all the applications, in this case you need to select the files thatll be associated for each application.
Generating Manual
Generating the manual is the last step of its creation, after doing all the configurations, click on generate.
5
After generating the manual, you can download or access it.
For you to have access to the manual from the applications, you need to click on the button WebHelp on the toolbar of the applications that have a link to the manual.
1
External Libraries
HOME TOOLS EXTERNAL LIBRARIES
This feature allows to import complete libraries and create files of any extension (.JS, .CSS, .PHP) that can be used in your projects, making it easier to reuse some of the source
code.
This feature is available in the menu Tools > External Libraries, where you can manage the libraries of your project.
To use this functionality, you need to use the macro, sc_url_library() and the sc_include_library() (Only for PHP files)to import the library to the applications.
Creating a new library

To create a library, click on Create a new library. Next, inform the library name and the access level of the library.
Public - Available for all the ScriptCase projects.
Project - Available only for the project it was created in.
Managing the Libraries

All the public and project libraries are listed here. This page allows you to select the libraries thatll be part of the project, delete the unnecessary libraries, rename or edit them.
Using a Library
This option defines a library thatll be used in the current project. The enabled libraries, for this project, can be differentiated by the checkmark next to the name of the library.
Selecting a library to be used in the project, the icon changes color when you click on the button Save the library to the project and enabled, you need to click on the button to
save the modifications.
Rename
To rename a library just click on rename, and then inform the new name for the library.
To rename a library, youll need to change all the includes of the library in the events of the applications.
2
Editing a Library
Clicking on Editing, you can create or upload files to the libraries. You can create files in a folder, with the goal to organize your files.
On Footer of the page, you can view the options to create or upload the files.
New Directory
To create a directory, click on New Directory and inform the name of the directory.
New File
To create a file, click on New File and inform the name and extension (its indispensable to inform the file extension).
Upload Files
This tool, allows to upload files and external libraries and used them in the project.
Clicking on upload, select the desired file.
Delete
Delete the libraries and all the files contained in them.
Before deleting the library, be certain that its not being used, you wont be able to recover deleted libraries.
Importing libraries into the applications

3
Like mentioned before, to use the libraries, you need to use the macro sc_url_library() and the sc_include_library() (Only for PHP files).
The macro sc_url_library() returns the path to the file in the library and the sc_include_library() is used to include php files into applications from the external library:
This example changes the background color of a grid application, se the code in the style.css file
1
Internal Libraries
HOME TOOLS INTERNAL LIBRARIES
This tool allows to create or upload php routines that can be reused in various applications of the project or other projects, depending on the level of access that they were
saved.
There are three types of access levels that can be used.
User - Only for the user that created the script will have access.
Project - All the users linked to the project will have access to the script.
Public - All the users from ScriptCase will have access to the script.
You cant create or modify scriptcase that are in the Scriptcase Level, the scripts from this level are available to be used but nor modified.
Creating a Script
The item Internal Libraries are accessed from the tools menu.
Select the level that the script is being saved, in this example the user level was used.
Next, inform a name for the file, place your code and save it.
Using the Script

To use the Scripts, firstly you need to enable them in the applications that you want to use.
All the libraries that you have access will be listed, just select the the ones you desire to enable and use them.
To use the libraries, you need to import them by using the macro sc_include .
Example of using the macro: sc_include("File", "Origin");

1
To-Do List
HOME TOOLS TO-DO LIST
Tool that allows the creation of a list of tasks for the users registered in the same ScriptCase, with a progress control for the task.
A message thatll be displayed for the users that possess a task pending, always when they login.
To access the feature, go to the menu Tools > To-Do List
Accessing it, youll see all the registered tasks with the information about each one of them.
Creating a Task
The tasks can be created in four levels.
Public List - All the ScriptCase users can view the tasks of the this level.
My List - Only the Creator and the user responsible for the task can view.
Project: Public List - All the users of ScriptCase, linked to the project that the task was created, can view them. (This option is available only when a project is opened)
Project: My List - Only the Creator and the Responsible user can view this task, they need to have access to the project where the task was created. (This option is available only when a
project is opened)
Firstly, you need to select where youre going to create the task. Selecting the folder, the New Task button will be enabled.
Next, after clicking on New Task, you need to fill up the required fields.
Task list - Name of da tarefa, que ser exibido na lista das tarefas.
Percentage done - Inform the percentage of the task conclusion.
Deadline - Define the date and time that the task need to be concluded.
Responsible - Define which of the ScriptCase users are responsible for the task.
Who can change - Defines who can modify the current task:
Owner - Only the user that created the task.
Responsible - Only the user responsible for the task.
All - All the ScriptCase users can modify the task.
Application - Inform the application of the project that the responsible user needs to edit. (This option will only be available for task created in a project.)
Description - Task Description.
Task Status
This tool is used to inform the status of the task, using colors to symbolize the progress.
Open tasks - Tasks recently created within the deadline, are represented in yellow.
Completed tasks - Tasks that finished completely, are represented in blue.
Expired tasks - Tasks that passed the deadline, are represented in red.
2
1
Messages
HOME TOOLS MESSAGES
The message system allows the communication between the registered developers on the same ScriptCase.
You can access this feature. Tools > Messages.
New Message
After clicking on the New Message button, you need to select the user thats going to receive the message.
One message can be sent to many users.
After typing the message, click on send.
Inbox
Receiving the message, the users will be notified by an alert.
You can click on the notification bell or access Tools > Message to view the received messages.
Accessing the inbox where all the received messages are stored and ordered by the date.
Outbox
The sent messages are stored in the outbox.
By sending a message to various users, itll be registered a message for each user in the outbox.
Read and Reply

Click on the message that you want to read.
2
When reading a message, you can reply the received message.
Received Response
In the Outbox, a responded message can be identified with a Re: before the subject
The original message, will be highlighted in the received response.
Delete Messages
You can delete the messages individually by clicking on the delete link.
You can also delete various messages. Select all the messages that you want to delete and then click on the delete button.
1
Converters
HOME TOOLS CONVERTERS
The Project Converter, allows to convert the projects developed in previous versions of ScriptCase to the current version of ScriptCase.
Basically, its an import of the projects from different versions of ScriptCase.
The risk of converting is almost zero, when following the tutorial of converting. The process of conversion doesnt modify any of the information of your project.
To prevent eventual problems, its recommend to create a backup of your projects.
The conversion of the projects has the same action for all ScriptCase versions.
Coping Scriptcase
Firstly, you need to copy the ScriptCase folder, of the previous version, and place it next to the current ScriptCase folder, thatll receive the projects.
In this example:
Scriptcase8 folder - Old version of the tool.
Scriptcase9 folder - Version thatll receive all the projects.
Path to Scriptcase
In ScriptCase, select the converter (compatible to the version that you want to convert), you need to inform the complete path to the folder of the old version of ScriptCase.
Next, select the server that ScriptCase was placed. In this case, select Same Server.
In case the converter cant find the ScriptCase Database of the previous version installed, the page below will be displayed, so that you can inform the correct directives to the
ScriptCase database.
Select the projects that you want to convert.

2
Next, youll view a log of everything that has been converted. With this the selected projects are already in the current ScriptCase and ready for use.
1
Import Database
HOME TOOLS IMPORT
DATABASE
This tool allows you to convert the stored tables in .XLS, .CSV, .accdb and .mdb files to the following databases: MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server.
All the options to import databases, you can find them in the menu Database.
Access Import
Allows you to convert one or more data sources to one structured database.
Selecting Files
First, inform the files thatll be converted. You can inform the absolute path to the file, dragn drop the file or select the file in the option Select Files.
Configuring the tables

After selecting the file, you need to access the configuration page.
On this page, youll see the password field, thats used only with ACCESS files that were selected and require a password to list the tables. In these cases, after informing the
password, click on list tables .
Still in the same page, you can view the tabs Tables and Advanced.
Table Tabs
We can view a list of the tables that can be converted. Beside the name of the tables, are two options: Edit and Preview.
On the option Edit , you can modify the table structure thatll be created, like the name, field size, and the data type and other options.
in Preview youll see a preview of how the table will be imported.

2
Advanced Tab
On the Advanced tab are available the configurations import script for the table. You can configure the script thatll be created for the generation of the tables of new database.
Add DROP TABLE - Adds a DROP TABLE IF EXISTS before the CREATE of the tables, so that if the tables exist with the same name in the database, theyll be deleted first.
Recreate the database structure - Where youll define the table structure and the data thatll be imported.
Recreate the structure - Where youll define only the structure the table thatll be imported.
Recreate data - Where youll define only the data of the tables thatll be imported (In case the tables exist in the database with the same structure of the ones being imported)
Connection
On this step, we need to select the connection (Database) to where youll import the tables. You can select a connection existing in the project or create a new one.
Next, youll be presented with a log of the tables that have been imported and the total of records inserted.
XLS Import
Selecting Files
3
On this page, you need to inform first the line that the name of the columns are, this way all the information thats below will be considered a record of the table. If you dont
inform the line, all the file content will be considered a record.
You can view below the list of tables of the files, with the names of the tables and the name of the file. In the case of XLS or CSV files, the table names are obtained through the
name of the tab in the file.
Table Tabs
Advanced Tab
Connection
4
CSV Import
Selecting Files

On this page, you need to inform first the line that the name of the columns are, this way all the information thats below will be considered a record of the table. If you dont
inform the line, all the file content will be considered a record.
You can view below the list of tables of the files, with the names of the tables and the name of the file. In the case of XLS or CSV files, the table names are obtained through the
name of the tab in the file.
Table Tabs
5
Advanced Tab
Connection
1
SQL Builder
HOME TOOLS SQL BUILDER
This tool helps on the construction of Queries in a Wizard form. These queries can be saved and used later.
Database
Any SQL can run directly from the Run tab thatll be available after selecting the database.
First you need to select the connection(Database) that you want to use.
Tables
All the existing tables in the database are listed in the Tables tab.
Select the tables desired to create the query.
You can select various tables, although they need to have a relationship between them.
Fields
Select the fields thatll be part of the query. The fields can be ordered alphabetically (Ascendant) or in the order that they were created (Default)
Its possible to create an alias for the selected tables, this option can be found below the field list were also all the selected tables will be listed.
Joins
Defining the fields, its necessary to configure the join. To do that, you need to select the tables that have a relationship, next youll select the type of join thatll used in the field
Type then click on Add.
2
After clicking on add, click on Confirm , so that you can inform the fields that do the relationship between the tables.
Defining the fields, youll be redirected to the run tab.
To add a Where clause to the SQL, click on the tab Conditions
Conditions
You can add the where clauses where the query was created.
Order By
Define the sorting of the query result display.
Run
This is where you can run the SQL commands. The result of the query configuration wizard will be displayed on this tab. You can run DML (Data Manipulation Language)
commands here and also DDL (Definition Data Language) commands.
3
You can define a total of records per page.
Saved
To save the created commands, just inform the name of the query and click on the save button. The commands that are already, will be listed.
1
General View
HOME LAYOUT
In Layout, you can edit or create visualization standards thatll be placed in the developed project with ScriptCase. In this area, you can alter each part of the application, being
from presentation of the applications to the buttons and menu on which theyll be presented in.
1
CSS Applications (Themes)
HOME LAYOUT CSS APPLICATIONS
(THEMES)
In the CSS Applications, using the editor, its possible to create layouts for the applications. Its possible to create new themes or edit existing ones.
To create new themes, click on Create new Theme. And modifications done to the theme, is already displayed in the preview in real-time.
1
CSS Buttons
HOME LAYOUT CSS
BUTTONS
While editing the buttons, we can create new button schemes and link them to themes. We can create or edit button schemes being text buttons or image buttons.
Creating a new button scheme

Clicking on the New button located on the Button Scheme toolbar.
On the first tab (Buttons) are displayed the buttons used in ScriptCase. Each button can have its own customization, being able to select between an image, text button or link. In
case you use the image type, youll see a field to upload an image to be used for the button. For the text buttons and link types, use the tabs: Button Styles and Link Styles to edit
the appearance of the buttons.
2
Editing the button styles
On this tab, we can define the CSS styles of the text buttons used in your schemes. All the schemes already have their standard style that cant be deleted. If you need to more
than one layout for the text buttons in your scheme, just click on New to configure a new style. And select the tab Button Styles and then select the created style.
Configuring Style of Link Type Buttons

Using the same principals displayed in the styles for the text buttons, can be applied to the link buttons. IN a way that you can define that one or more buttons will be a link type
and their CSS style or a new one that you can create.
1
HTML Templates
HOME LAYOUT HTML TEMPLATES
In the Templates, we can edit and create models for the Headers, Footers or the User HTML (Grid and Control). These models define the interface structure of the applications.
Its possible to create a HTML file and define where the entry data will be, by use curly brackets {} to specify a variable. The user HTML option is used in Grid and Control
applications, where its possible to define all the structure of the report in HTML and associate the fields of the applications with the variables created on the body of the HTML
file. With this its possible to create Control and Grid applications with a different layout, being possible to place the fields anywhere on the page.
Header and Footer

In the editor for the Header and Footer, you need to create or edit existing models.
To create a new model, theres a standard code to use as a base of all the HTML.
The creation of fields in the HTML needs to be done with curly brackets, for example {variable}.
Code example:
<div style="width: 100%">

<div {NM_CSS_FUN_CAB} style="height:11px; display: block; border-width:0px; "></div>
<div style="height:37px; background-color:#FFFFFF; border-width:0px 0px 1px 0px; border-style: dashed; border-color:#ddd; display: block">
<table style="width:100%; border-collapse:collapse; padding:0;">
<tr>
<td id="lin1_col1" {NM_CSS_CAB}><span>{LIN1_COL1}</span></td>
<td id="lin1_col2" {NM_CSS_CAB}><span>{LIN1_COL2}</span></td>
</tr>
</table>
</div>
</div>
These fields are visualized in the application where the template is going to be used.
After saving the template, you need to open the application that youre going to use the template in and go to Layout > Settings, select the model for the Header and Footer that
youll use in Layout > Header & Footer youll associate the create fields in the template with the desired information available by ScriptCase.
User HTML
2
In the User Defined HTML we can specify where the fields of the applications will be presented in the HTML file by using curly brackets {variable}. Like the example below:
<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">

<tr>
<td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center">
<font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px">
<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City} - {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
The preview of the code above will be like the following: {Name} {Address} {City}-{State} {ZIP}
Remember that all the content that has curly brackets are considered a field of the application, this is why when you have {Name}, itll be referencing a field called Name in your
application.
In the template we can define a delimitator by using :

<tr>

<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}- {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>

</tr>
</table>
These parts are defined where the loop is going to start and end. The quantity of delimitators are defined as the Columns per page on the Grid application.
e.g.: If the Grid application the option Lines Per Page is 3, youll see the following result.

<tr>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
The preview of the code above will be the following:
{Name} {Name} {Name}

{Address} {Address} {Address}
{City}-{State} {City}-{State} {City}-{State}
{ZIP} {ZIP} {ZIP}
If you have a HTML File created in the standards above, you can include it in ScriptCase by accessing Layout > HTML Templates > User HTML > New Template. On New
Template youll inform the file that you want to import or create a new template by writing the code in the ScriptCase editor.
3
After having the User HTML, the next step is open the application that supports the Template (Control or Grid) and Position the Fields and associate the fields with the
application fields.
1
CSS Menu
HOME LAYOUT CSS MENU
The option CSS Menu is used to create and/or edit styles layouts of the Menu Applications.
To create a new theme for the menu its necessary to first select a theme to be used as base of the new theme.
After clicking on New, to create a new theme for the menu, youll have various options to change the colors that are part of the menu you chosen. Also, you can change the font
size of the items.
Before saving the theme that you created, you need to select the access level like Public, Project or User.
Public the theme is available for everyone that uses Scriptcase on your machine.
Project the theme is available for the project that it was created in.
User the theme is available only for the user that created the theme.
After selecting the access level, inform the name of the theme and click on Save.
1
Menu Icons
HOME LAYOUT MENU ICONS
While editing the menu icons, you can change the icons of the active and nonactive tabs that are open on the menu. These icons are linked to the opened applications.
On the page below, we can view the icons divided in blocks for each type of application, so each icon corresponds to an application from ScriptCase.
Select the icons that you desire for each state for the menu tabs, being active or nonactive.
1
Images Manager
HOME LAYOUT IMAGES MANAGER
The Images Manager is where youll organize and upload new images thatll be used in your project.
To upload new images, you need to select the scope of which the image will be part, after selecting the folder where the image will be stored at and after that click on File >
Upload.
When the image is uploaded, the images name is modified depending on the scope of which its part of (public, project or user) and the type of image (background, button, icons,
menu or general) following the pattern below:
sys__NM__ (Public)
grp__NM__ (Project)
usr__NM__ (User)
Image Type:
bg__NM__ (background images)
btn__NM__ (button images)
img__NM__ (general images)
ico__NM__ (icons)
menu_img__NM__ (menu images)
This way, the image called 001.jpg that was added to the public and icon scope will receive the name sys__NM__ico__NM__001.jpg
The image will be in the folder app/project_name/_lib/img in the development environment and in the production, will be /project_name/_lib/img.
After uploading the image to the project, you need to insert the image in the applications that you desire, to do that in the applications desired, go to Applications > Settings >
Application images and click on the icon next to the garbage icon to add an image.
1
Chart Themes
HOME LAYOUT CHART THEMES
The chart theme tool offers the option for you to create different themes for the chart applications of your project. The chart theme allows you to modify some options like the
background color, font, margin, data, border and shadow.
To create new themes, you need to select an existing theme so that you can use it as a base and on top of it youll customize it to the way you feel satisfied.
1
HTML Editor Templates
HOME LAYOUT HTML EDITOR TEMPLATES
The html editor tool offers you the option to modify the toolbar of the html editor field present in the applications.
You can create a new template theme and/or edit an existing one.
To create a new theme, just select an existing one and click on Save As, to edit an existing theme just select the theme and click on Save.
1
General View
HOME LOCALES
ScriptCase offers a complete generator, so that you can define the languages and regional settings that your project will support.
1
Application Language
HOME LOCALES APPLICATION LANGUAGE
The language menu for the applications allows you to translate the ScriptCases default messages, and also create custom messages to be used in different parts of the
applications.
Messages
Using the messages menu, its possible to select and edit messages. The messages being divided in in categories, ScriptCase Messages and Project Messages. New categories
can be created using the item New Folder.
Selecting a lang to be modified, a new page will appear with the columns of each language of your project, youll inform the value of the message in each language.
1
Regional Settings
HOME LOCALES REGIONAL SETTINGS
The regional settings allow you to define some parameters of the monetary unit, date and number according to the country or region where your application is going be used.
Clicking on Customizing, you can modify the values thatll be used in your applications.
Customizing Regional Settings

In the Number Group, we have some parameters like the Decimal Symbol, digit grouping and negative format. These parameters are used in the applications that use the
decimal type field.
In the Currency Unit Group, we have some parameter like the monetary symbol, Currency positive format, etc. These parameters are used in the applications that use the
Currency type field.
In the groups of Time and Date are available the parameters of Date and time, that can be used in the fields of the Type Time, Date and Date time.
1
General View
HOME MODULES
Scriptcase offers a complete generator for your system security through the Security and Log modules. Check below how to create these two modules within Scriptcase.
Security Module
It creates an access control with restrictions according to the system users/groups. There are four types of security with different control levels. Scriptcase will create all the
necessary database tables and applications to manage the system security according to the type applied.
Scriptcase has five types of security, they are similar, diverging only in how the permissions are applied: User security, Application security, Group security and LDAP security.
Configure Security Modules is simple and quick. Check the following link to see how to set the module. click here.
Log Module
Using the Log Module, you will be able to track and monitor all actions that the system users will make within the systems developed with the Scriptcase. Together with the
Security Module, you will have a complete and effective security system rapidly developed for your applications.
Check the following link to see how to set the Log Module within very simple steps, click here.
1
Security Module
HOME MODULES SECURITY MODULE
Making use of the security modules, you can implement a complete access rules for systems developed by ScriptCase. The process for the security module creation is quick and
simple.
Scriptcase has five types of security, they are similar, diverging only in how the permissions are applied.
User Security Type
Under this security type all users have access to all applications. It works only for user authentication. Scriptcase will create one table to store the user and password information
and validate the acess using a login screen.
In this security type Scriptcase creates these tables:
User - Login, Password, Name, E-mail, Active, Activation Code and admin privileges
Logged users - Login, login date, Session, IP address
The table Logged users will be created only if the option Protect Logged users is checked during the Security Module creation.
Application Security Type

Under this type Scriptcase will also control login and password as the User Security and also create a restricted access control to the applications or system options according to
the logged user. It is possible to define which applications is accessible to each user.
Application - Code, Description, Application type
User / Application - Login, Application Name, Access privileges, Insert privileges, Delete privileges, Update privileges, Export privileges, Print privileges
Group Security Type
This type of security includes the options of User and Application types, however with the Group Security type you will group the users and define the permissions to access the
applications or system options according to the groups. One user can belong to one or more groups.
Group - Description and ID
User / Group - Login, Group ID
Group / Application - Group ID, Application name, Access privileges, Insert privileges, Delete privileges, Update privileges, Export privileges, Print privileges
LDAP Security Type

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an open, vendor-neutral, industry standard application protocol for accessing and maintaining distributed directory
information services over an Internet Protocol (IP) network. You can use this protocol within Scriptcase Security module to authentication users in two ways: (Authentication only,
performs only a simple user authentication, similar to User Security Type and the Total Control, where we can define the access by groups, similar to the Group Security Type.
User / Application - Login, Application Name, Access privileges, Insert privileges, Delete privileges, Update privileges, Export privileges, Print privileges
See how to create each security type:

2
User security creation
Security Type
First you should select the security type.
Connection
After the security type definition, you must select the connection that will be used to create the tables that make up the security module.
Connection - Sets the connection that will be used for the creation of the security tables.
Use existing tables -Enables you to use pre-existing tables in your database. These tables must have at least the same fields used by Scriptcase security module. We recommend that you use
this option if the tables have already been created by Scriptcase Security Module, to minimize errors.
Create tables - This option creates all necessary security tables inside the selected database.
Tables prefix - You can set a prefix of the tables that will be created by the Security Module. By default Scriptcase uses the prefix: sec_
Delete if tables already exist - This option is available only when you select Create Tables . By selecting this option, if your database has tables with the same names, they will be deleted and
replaced by new tables created by the Security Module.
Protect Logged Users - Protection to prevent users to perform simultaneous logins in different sessions.
Tables link
This step is important if the option Use existing tables is selected. In this case, you must associate the fields from the existing tables to fields of security applications (applications
generated by the Security Module).
In these cases, the existing database tables must contain a minimum number of fields so that they can be associated to the fields of security applications.
The required tables for each type of security are described at the beginning of this article.
If you have selected the option Create tables , in the previous step the fields will be automatically associated, just click continue.
Settings
In this step we will define the security module settings.
General
User password encryption, the folder where the applications are created, the log module used among other things.
Applications Prefix - Prefix for the applications that will be created automatically by the Security Module.
3
Encryption - Encryption used for to store the password in the table of users.
Enable Security - Activate the flag Application Security of all project applications.
Enable Captcha - Activates the captcha for the login application created by the Security Module.
Folder - Folder name that will be created to store the applications generated by Security Module.
Theme - Theme that is used for the applications created by the Security Module.
Log - This option is available if the project has a Log Module previously created. Click here and check out how to create a Log Module
Menu - This option is only available if your project has a Menu Application previously created. You can associate this existing Menu and include all applications generated by the Security
Modulo to it. If you dont select an existing Menu here, Scriptcase Security Module will create a new Menu Application exclusively for the security applications.
Menu Type - Security Module menu type (option only available if you do not select and existing menu in the previous item)
Login
Here you can set the type and amount of characters allowed for the username and password fields.
Minimum size - Minimum amount of characters used by the user.
Maximum size - Maximum size of the characters used by the user.
Characters allowed - Define which characters are allowed when creating a password.
Password recovery settings
Defines how password recovery will work in the system created by the Security Module.
These password recovery options works only when the SMTP server is configured properly, please check the Email settings.
Send the password by e-mail - The system will send the user password directly by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up and the password is not encrypted.
Reset password and send new one by email - The system will reset the password automatically and send it to the user by email just if the SMTP has been correctly set up.
Send a link to e-mail with reset option - The system will send a link by e-mail for the user to access an application and reset the passoword.
New Users
Settings for creating new users in the secutity system.
The options activation by email and send an email to admin work only when the SMTP server is configured properly, access Email settings to set it up.
System allows new users registration - This option sets the availability of users registration directly in the login system. If this option is not checked, only users with administrative access to
the system will be able to insert new users.
System requires activation by email - This option sets whether the new user will have to perform a validation email to activate the account (This option is available only if the email SMTP is
configured)
System requises the user to send an email to admin - This option sets whether the system administrator will receive an e-mail whenever a new user is created (This option is available only if
the email SMTP is configured)
Email settings
This option sets the provider that will be used for sending e-mails from the system.
The information from this example may change according to the SMTP. We are using the Gmail SMTP for this example..
4
SMTP Server - Must enter the SMTP server address.
SMTP Port - Enter the SMTP server port. This information must comply with the secure connection option. Use 465 for SSL, 587 for TLS or 25 for unsafe connection. If you do not inform the
port Scriptcase will apply a defauld one: 25.
Secure Connection - Use SSL or TSL, or leave it blank for unsecure connection.
SMTP User - Enter the SMTP User information.
SMTP Password - Enter the SMTP password information.
SMTP E-mail - Enter the SMTP outgoing email.
Logged Users
Defines the system behavior for login protection.
This option is available if you have checked Protect logged users during the connection step.
Display logges users - If you check this option Scriptcase will also create with the Security Module a Grid Application to display a report with all users current logged on the system
Brute Force Attack Protection - Enables/disables the blocking of users after some unsuccessful access attempts.
Brute Force lockout time (in Minutes) - Time, in minutes, that the user will remain inaccessible after several unsuccessful access attempts. (Available only when rute Force Attack Protection is
enabled)
Numbers of attempts before lock - Number of failed access attempts, until the protection is enabled. (Available only when enable protection for brute force attacks)
Enter the first record
This option insert the first user inside the security tables. This user will have full administrator permissions in order to manage the security system and add new users.
Login - This option sets the system administrator user.
Password - This option sets the system administrator passwrod.
Name - This option sets the system administrator name.
E-mail - This option sets the system administrator user E-mail.
Group - This option sets the group name that will receive the administrator privileges and that the registed user will be part.
The group option, is available only for Group Security , in the remaining modules this option will not be displayed.
Add applications
This option add the applications already created in the project to the Security Module application table.
Save profile
Using this option you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.
5
Save Profile - Allows you to save a profile with all the current security module settings.
Name - Profile name
Target - This option sets who will have access to the saved profile in the future.
Public - Your security profile will be available in all projects from your Scriptcase.
Project - Your security profile will be available only in the project in which it was created.
User - Your security profile will be available only to the logged user.
Using a saved security profile
The saved profiles can be selected at the beginning of a new Security Module creation, before you choose the security type.
Application security creation

Security Type
Connection
Tables link
6
Settings
General
Login
New Users
7
configured)
Email settings
Logged Users
enabled)

8
Add applications
Save profile
Name - Profile name
Group security creation

Security Type
Connection
9
Tables link
Settings
General
Login
10
New Users
configured)
Email settings
Logged Users
11
enabled)

Add applications
Save profile
Name - Profile name
LDAP Creation - Authentication Only

Security type
12
Connection
After the security type, you will have to select the connection where you want to store the security module tables.
Settings
In this step, you will define the general security module settings.
General
Login
LDAP
Under this option, you have to inform correctly your LDAP server settings.
Server - Enter here the LDAP server IP.
DN - Enter the input attributes.
Port - Enter here the port for access to the server. Default port is 389.
Sufix - Enter the user suffix.

13
Password - This option sets the system administrator password.
Save profile
Using this option, you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.
Save Profile
Name - Profile name
LDAP Creation - Total control
Security type
Connection
After the security type, you will have to select the connection where you want to store the security module tables.
14
Tables prefix - You can set a prefix of the tables that will be created by the Security Module. By default, Scriptcase uses the prefix: sec_
Tables link
Settings
General
Login
Email settings
The information from this example may change according to the SMTP. We are using the Gmail SMTP for this example.
15
port Scriptcase will apply a default one: 25.
LDAP
Under this option, you have to inform correctly your LDAP server settings.
Server - Enter here the LDAP server IP.
DN - Enter the input attributes.
Port - Enter here the port for access to the server. Default port is 389.
Sufix - Enter the user suffix.
Logged Users
Display logged users - If you check this option Scriptcase will also create with the Security Module a Grid Application to display a report with all users current logged on the system
Brute Force lockout time (in Minutes) - Time, in minutes, that the user will remain inaccessible after several unsuccessful access attempts. (Available only when brute Force Attack Protection
is enabled)
Registering the admin user
In this step, you must inform a user to connect to the LDAP server. The informed user will have full administrator permissions on the system where you are applying the Security
Module.
Login - This option sets the system LDAP administrator user.
Password - This option sets the system LDAP administrator LDAP password.
Name - This option sets the system LDAP administrator name.

16
E-mail - This option sets the system LDAP administrator E-mail.
Add applications
This option adds the applications already created in the project to the Security Module application table.
Save profile
Using this option, you will save all settings during the Security Module creation. The same profile can be used later for other projects.
Name - Profile name
1
Log Module
HOME MODULES LOG MODULE
Using the log module, you can create multiple log schemas, each project application can be linked to a different log schema, which will be configured individually. Each project
can have one or more log schemes applied to its applications.
Schemas list
Access the menu Modules > Log and chick Create / Edit Log Module .
If you are creating your first log schema project, proceed direct to step three, for the schema Creation/editing.
It lists all log schemes previously created. On this screen, we can manage the schemas created.
Edit Applications - Edits the relation between the applications and the schemes.
New scheme - Creates a new Log scheme in the project.
Create Application Log - Creates a report using the log table, thats also be used by the default scheme of the project.
Edit Scheme Icon - Edits the Log scheme.
Delete Scheme Icon - Deletes the Log scheme.
Schema Creation/editing
Access the menu Modules > Log and check Create / Edit Log Module .
New Schema
Name - Log schema name that will be created. It is a mandatory field.
Description - Short description for the new schema.
Connection - Connection on where the log table will be created. It is a mandatory field.
Table - Table name on where the log information will be stored. It is a mandatory field.
Existing Table - This option deletes the table that has the same name in the database and create a new one. If you want to use the existing table to store the log data just leave this option
unchecked.
Default Schema - It sets the schema that is being created as the default one for project.
Login - Global variable used to store the logged user information into the system. This variable must be the same used in the Security Module. By default, Scriptcase sets this variable on
both modules as [usr_login] .
Default Values
Events - Actions that will be stored in the log table.
Storage mode - User data that will be stored in the log table.
2
A confirmation screen will appear when you save, just click Close to leave and save the schema.
Close to save the schema - Saves the schema you created, and redirects to the applications screen.
See SQL - Display the SQL used by Scriptcase to create the table sc_log that will be used to store the log events.
Download SQL - This option will download the SQL used by Scriptcase to create the table sc_log.
Close Icon - This option cancels the schema creation and redirects to a new schema creation.
After the confirmation, you will be redirected to link the log schemas to the project applications.
Link Applications
In this step, you must define which log schema will be used in each project application. The list of applications can be filtered by type or by log schema used.
At the top, you can apply actions to all rows or you can select only one action for each row individually.
Apply schema - Select the schema that will be used for the applications. (when you select a schema, the other information is filled according to what was previously
configured).
Store for the Log - User data that will be stored in the Log table.
Access - This event stores the information every time the application is accessed.
Insert - This event stores the information when inserting a record.
Update - This event stores the information when updating a record.
Delete - This event stores the information when deleting a record.
Log Report
In this report, you can see all stored information according to the schema selected during the report creation.
3
Schema - Log schema that the application will be based on
Name - Application name
Folder - Folder name where the application will be stored
Theme - Theme used for the generated application
Security - This option attaches a security profile to the log schema.

1
General View
HOME OPTIONS
Gathers the main configurations of ScriptCase. For the users with administrator privileges, its possible to register the ScriptCase, manage the system users, do backups and
restore projects and other configurations.
For the other users, without administrator privileges, can define the default language for ScriptCase, customize Scriptcases toolbar and other options that when done, will be
available for the users that did them, for those who wont change these configurations, theyll use the default configurations from ScriptCase.
1
Settings
HOME OPTIONS SETTINGS
Access restricted to users with administrative privileges. We have access to the main settings of ScriptCase.
Access Options > Settings.
Left side Menu of the Settings page from ScriptCase.
Below we can see some detailed information of each option.
System Settings
Page where you can define various settings thatll be used by all the users of ScriptCase.
2
Language - Defines the default Language for the projects.
Quantity of compilations in parallel - Defines number of compliers used to generate the applications.
Display the compile-time of the applications individually - Allows to compile each application individually.
Number of automatic application copies - Define the amount of copies that application restores module can save.
Send an alert if the last backup is older than(days) - Define the amount of the days for the system to alert the user that the last backup is becoming obsolete.
Show backup alert for - Defines the user group thats going to receive the alert of the back.
Check for ScriptCase update versions after login - Sets ScriptCase to validate on every login, if theres a new update released.
Periodic verification of Scriptcases database - Feature the does a periodic backup of ScriptCases database (Not the projects).
Check version every - Allows you to select the day of the week thatll occur the verification of the new update.
ScriptCase Session Timeout (min) - Time limit for the execution of the PHP scripts, during the application development, example compile the applications, select analysis, save the applications
and etc. (in seconds).
Show Generation Status Message - Allows you to define the messages of the actions of ScriptCase, when its compiling or running your applications, in the options:
Main - Displays a subgroup of the messages;
None - Doesnt display the messages;
All - Enables the display of all the messages.
Use cache for table fields - With this feature enabled, makes the applications faster while consulting the data.
To recover the ScriptCase password, available at the login, its necessary to setup correctly the options below.
SMTP Server - You should inform the address of your SMTP server, thats responsible for your email.
SMTP Port - Inform the port for the SMTP server. This information is according to the option of secure. Use 465 for SSL and 25 for unsecure connections. Not informing the port, scriptcase will
place 25 by default.
SSL - Define if youre going to use SSL or not.
SMTP User - Inform the user for the SMTP server.
SMTP Password - Inform the password for the SMTP server.
SMTP E-Mail - Inform the e-mail for the origin of the messages.
PROXY Server - Inform the IP for the Proxy Server.
PROXY Gateway - Inform the Gateway of your Proxy Server.
PROXY User - Inform the Proxy User.
PROXY Password - Informe a senha do usurio do proxy.

3
Use session in database - Allows to use the session in the database.
Show an option on the deployment wizard to store the PHP session variables in a Database - Allows to display the option to use the session of the deployment in the database.
Pass the PHP Session ID in the URL - Allows to pass the PHP Session id in the URL.
Timezone Sets the Timezone to be used in ScriptCase.
Default Values
With this configuration, its possible to standardize the creation of the applications of the projects, increasing the productivity in development of the applications. To change the
settings only for a project, access from the menu Project > Default Values .
Common Settings
Logo - The favicon thats going to use with the project. Customize the project using the same favicon in all the application.
Records per page - Amount of records per page.
Theme - Default theme for the projects
Show Summary - Displays the number of records in the page and the total of the records in the application. This option will execute only if the line option in the Grid toolbar is disabled.
Use template in the HTML Editor - Selecting Yes, you will be using the new templated of the HTML Editor field, these themes should be setup in Layout > HTML Editor Templates .
HTML Editor template - Defines the template for editing of the field HTML Editor.
Initial sort fields
Text - Set the initial sorting for the text fields.
Date - Set the initial sorting for the date fields.
Number - Set the initial sorting for the number fields.
Currency - Set the initial sorting for the currency fields.
Grid
Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the width of the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the size of the fields); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should be
informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)
Tab a Group By - Defines the left margin of the Group By.
Separates the Group - Defines the margin between two Group Bys.
Lines per page - Defines the option for the user to select and list the amount of records desired by page. If you need an option to list all the records, ads all to the options. Ex.: 10,20,30, all
Form
4
Table Width Unit - The unit used to define the width of the application. Automatic (Width automatically defined according to the size of the fields); Pixel (Width defined by pixels, that should be
informed in the form: 800px); Percent (Width defined in percentage, and should be informed in the form: 80%)
Tab
Tab Alignment - Display alignment of the tabs in the application.
Menu
Horizontal Alignment of the Menu - Menu alignment.
Horizontal Alignment of the Items - Menu item alignment
Template
Defines the templates used by default on the Header and Footer.
Toolbar Buttons
Define the buttons thatll be setup by default in the toolbar for the new applications.
System Directories
Directories where information and models will be stored. All the directories are configured automatically in the automatic installation of ScriptCase and in the manual installation
when using the Typical installation method, making unnecessary any modifications from the user. We recommend not changing any of the fields without contacting the support
first.
5
Root Directory for the Web Server files - Root of the Web Server, where scriptcase is installed. On IIS servers, the default directory would be inetpub/wwwroot.
Application Path - Location where the applications will have stored when created.
Production Path - Path to where the prod directory is located in ScriptCase, in this directory is located all the libraries that the generated applications need to execute.
Documents Directory - Directory on which the documents used by the applications will be stored.
Images Directory - Directory on which the images used in the applications will be stored. The images loaded in the applications, using the upload field (Image File Name) will be stored in this
directory.
Temporary Files Directory - Directory where the images manipulated by the application is stored temporary. This temporary storage is a condition the the HTML code requires, so that the
images can be opened correctly and the specific directory for these images so that they dont get mixed up with the images from the gallery.
Security Type
We need to define the method of the access information storage and the type of security used.
Security Type - Method of data storage. We can select between ScriptCase or LDAP.
Scriptcase - The access data is stored in the ScriptCase Database.
LDAP - The access data is stored in the LDAP Server, that scriptcase will check to validate the access.
Security Level - Type of security thatll be used, this option is the same independently of the storage method.
User - The permissions are defined for each user. On this option, the permissions need to be configured individually.
Group - The permissions are defined for the User Groups. On this option, well tie the users to one or more groups, and define the permissions for each group, users that are part of the
groups will inherited the permissions.
User/Groups - On this option, the permissions are defined by the groups and/or individually by the users. This security level, the permissions for the group and the user is added. This way, we
can have users existing in the same groups but with different permissions.
The security level option is the same independently of the Security Type. (Scriptcase or LDAP)
Users
User management page of the the system, on it youll view a list with all the users registered on the system. We also have other options, like including new users and editing the
existing ones.
This option will be available on the left side menu when select it in the Security Type
6
User - Login of the registered Users.
Insert - Date and time of the users creation.
Applications - Number of applications for each user.
Action
Detail - Gives you a detailed view of the user, like its email, its privileges, projects and groups of users on which its part of.
Edit - You can change the privileges and the projects that it has access.
Change Password - Change the password for the user.
Below, well specify some options listed above.
New User
When clicking on the button, New User well be redirected to the page to inform the data for user like login, password, privileges and other things.
Users - Inform a login for the user.
e-mail - Defining the user e-mail.
New Password - Defining the password for the user.
Confirm Password - Confirming the password thats being registered.
Privileges
Administration - Permission for the user to access the administrative area of ScriptCase.
Projects - Actions that user can do when accessing a project.
Application - Permission to create applications.
Database - Actions that user can do with the database configurations in the projects it has access to.
Project - Projects that the user has access.
Next, well be redirected to a page where you can select which projects will managed by the user. In the example below, Im defining the user sc as the administrator of the project
gradebook.
The project administrator, can change various preferences of the project, existing connections.
7
Editing a User
The editing page is similar to the creation of the users, having the same options of configurations.
Users - Users login.
e-mail - The e-mail registered for the user.
Privileges
Administration - Permission for the user to access the administrative area of ScriptCase.
Projects - Actions that user can do when accessing a project.
Application - Permission to create applications.
Database - Actions that user can do with the database configurations in the projects it has access to.
Project - Projects that the user has access.
Like the procedure for creating a user, well be redirected to a page where you can select which projects will managed by the user. In the example below, Im defining the user sc
as the administrator of the project documents_library.
Changing the Password
On this page, you need to inform the new password for the user.
8
Delete Users
We can delete more than one user at the same time
When deleting a user that has applications linked to its login, you need to inform if you want to delete the applications or if you want to move them to another user.
Delete Application - All the applications created by the user will be deleted.
Move Application - All the applications will be moved to the user informed.
Groups
Managing user groups. Youll see a list of the existing groups and some information about them.
This option will only be available on the left side menu when we select the Groups option in the Security Type
Name - Name of the groups.
Description - Group Description.
Users - Users that are part of this group.
Projects - Projects that the users of this group have access to.
Actions
Users - Defines the users thatll be part of this group.
Edit - Edits the group.
Delete - Delete the group.
Youll see more details below about the existing options.
New Group
Creating the groups, we can define the privileges.
9
Name - Name of the group.
Description - Group Description.
Admin Privilege - Defines if the users that are in the group, will have Administrator Privileges for ScriptCase.
Privileges
Project - Defines if the users from this group will have access to do some actions in the projects.
Application - Defines the permission to create applications (By type).
Connections - Defines the privileges to the options of the database of the project.
Projects - Defines the projects thatll be accessed by the group.
Admin projects - Defines if the group will have Administrator Permission for the project. On this Example, the users from the Group C will be Administrators of the the gradbook project.
Users
After creating the group, we can define which users will be part of the group.
LDAP
Page where you will sync with LDAP. We recommend using the LDAP Administrator user, this way, all the group users of the server will be listed. So, that you can connect with
LDAP in ScriptCase and have the LDAP privileges in ScriptCase.
This option will be available on the left side menu, if you selected the LDAP option in Security Type
10
Server - IP of the LDAP server (Needs to be setup before proceeding).
Suffix - Domain of the server.
DN - Domain Component.
User - Administrator of the Server.
Password - Senho do usurio informado.
Port - Server Port.
After saving the LDAP server connection, the users and groups listed in the Users and Groups tabs according to the server. Initially, only the administrator user (The same used for
the LDAP connection) will have access to ScriptCase. The other users need to be enabled and their permission needs to be setup also with the groups.
Users
This option is displayed when selecting users in the Security Level, lists all the users from the LDAP server. We can manage the privileges of each user with the projects and
options of ScriptCase.
Groups
Option displayed when selecting the group option in the Security Level, lists all the groups from the LDAP server. You need to access this tab to enable the groups and set their
privileges.
11
User / Groups
When selecting a security level of User/Groups, two tabs will be displayed. In this case, the permissions are defined for the group of users and/or individually by user. On this type
of security, the permissions of the group and the user are added. So, that can user exist in a group and have different users.
Projects
List of Scriptcase existing projects. You can view all projects details, such as users who have access, the current version of projects, number of applications, among other
information.
=======
Project - Project name.
Description - Project description.
Creation - Project creation date
Applications - Number of applications from each project version. 1:33(Versions count: number of applications)
Action - Project details.
By clicking on the magnifying glass next to the number of applications, you can see more details of the project. In addition to some information previously views on the list of
projects.
12
Connections - Lists of connections of the project.
User - Users that have access to the project. The users will have the basic permissions, like create applications.
Administrators - User/Groups that are administrators of the project. Its possible to create and edit connections in the properties of the project, with this permission.
The permission of each user needs to be setup individually as the group permission also needs to be.
Backup
ScriptCases backup works in a similar way as the project export, but the backup does an export of all the applications from ScriptCase, with all the files necessary for them to
work. To do a backup, just inform the name of the file to be generated.
Fianlly, download the generated file and save it in a secure location.
Restore
This option is similar to Project Import, however using the restore you can import more than one project at a time. When you access the restore you will see a list of backups
performed recently, you will be able to restore these backups or to import a backup exported from other Scriptcase installation.
Backup - Backup generated files.
Created in - Creation date and time of the listed backups.
Restore - Backup restore.
Detail - Backup details.
Delete - Deletes the backup permanently.
To restore another backup, which is not in the list above, select zip restore and upload a backup file created by Scriptcase.
After choosing the backup that is going to be restored you will be redirected to a confirmation page. At this moment, you must inform you if we want to overwrite duplicate files or
keep the existing files in Scriptcase.
13
Log Settings
ScriptCase maintains in its database a log of the main actions done by the users. By default, all the actions are stored in our database. On this option, we can customize the log
registry, by marking and unmarking the actions that should be stored.
View Log
This option allows you to view the main actions done by the users, being stored separately by day. On the calendar, we can select the desired date to view the information on the
table on the side. The days that have log, have a blueish background color.
Login - Login of the user responsible for the action.
IP - IP of the work station that the user did the actions described.
Time - Time when the action was done.
Type - The type of action done.
Action - What action was done.
Info - Details of the action;
Scriptcase Update
ScriptCase update area. All the update process is done by the internet, using our servers. We recommend using a fast connection.
Firstly, we will verify if the there is a new version of ScriptCase available.
We can later define if the offline documentation and the prod used by ScriptCase are updated.
14
Next, we can visualize the total of updates found.
After started the update, the process cant be interrupted.
After downloading and updating all the files, youll view a screen with the option to view log of modifications done in the process: Click here to view ScriptCase update log .
If youre having problems connecting to our server, check if your firewall is allowing the connections to the links: .scriptcase.com.br__; __.scriptcase.net;
Online registration
For the online registration, you must be connected to the internet. There will be an online communication between your server and Scriptcase servers. We are going to validate
the information that you enter and send you back the confirmation online. Its quick and simple.
In order to register your Scriptcase you essentially need to have the account owner information (user, password and serial key). This information is created during the license
purchase.
Enter your account details (User login, password and serial key).
User - Account user login linked to serial (License owner details, same information used to access My Scriptcase options under the website)
Password - Account password
Serial - Active and available for registration (open) serial key.
To complete the register, you will need to log out of Scriptcase.
Offline Registration
Used for cases where the machine where Scriptcase is installed does not have internet access. The offline registration is done in two steps: Request (request the registration file)
and Register (register the file).
15
In order to register your Scriptcase you essentially need to have the account owner information (user, password and serial key). This information is created during the license
purchase.
Request
You can access the Request option under the menu License > Offline Request
Inside this option you request a encrypted file containing relevant information to Scriptcase registry (.req file).
User - Account user login linked to serial (License owner details, same information used to access My Scriptcase options under the website)
After completing the request, you need to access the website through the link https://www.scriptcase.net/licenserequest/ to upload the file and get the registry file
Enter the serial you want to use for the registry and upload the file .rec delivered by Scriptcase during the file request step. You will receive another file called: .lic , download
this file and go back to Scriptcase registration step.
Registration
Back to Scriptcase, please access: Licenses > Offline Registration .
Reenter the account information and the serial key, upload the .lic downloaded from the website.
User - Same login used to generate the file .rec (License owner details, same information used to access My Scriptcase options under the website)
16
Upload - Upload the file .lic downloaded from the website.
To complete the register you will need to log out of Scriptcase.

1
My ScriptCase
HOME OPTIONS MY SCRIPTCASE
Interface where you can define the configuration of ScriptCase. All the users have access to this interface, and the modifications done are tied to the login you currently using.
This way each user can have their own configuration for ScriptCase as they desire.
Language - ScriptCase interface language. When informing the language in My ScriptCase , the selected language at the login wont be considered.
Security Resources - When unchecking these options, the security configurations wont be considered when running the applications in the development environment. When deploying the
applications, theyll respect the security configurations normally.
Initial Information - Defines the information thatll be displayed on the application listing.
Show Friendly URL - Defines the display of the field to inform the Friendly URL in the application.
Main Menu Interface - Defines the width of the left side menu of the home page, where the applications are listed and the option of incrementation.
Application Settings Interface - Defines the width of the left side menu of the applications settings and the option of incrementation.
Auto Save - Allows the modifications to be saved automatically.
Display INSERT CODE on events - Defines if the examples will be displaying in the events of the applications.
Show folders at home - Allows for the subfolders to be listed with the applications, when selecting a folder on the side menu in the home of the project.
Welcome Tour - Defines the display of the Welcome Tour in case there isnt any projects created.
Project creation Tour - Allows the display of the Project creation tour, in case there isnt any projects created.
1
Change Password
HOME OPTIONS CHANGE PASSWORD
Interface where you can change the password of your user. We always recommend using passwords with a certain level of complexity, to prevent hacks of brute force.
Inform your current password, and the new password twice just to confirm it.
For the option of password recovery to work, the administrator need to setup the SMTP configurations correctly in ScriptCases settings.
Old Password - Inform your current password.
New Password - Inform your new password.
Confirmation - Confirm the new password.

1
My Toolbar
HOME OPTIONS MY TOOLBAR
Allows each user to customize their toolbar, by including and removing unnecessary items for your usage, giving you a better experience while developing the applications. This
options is option is tied to the user that did the modification, this way each user can modify their own toolbar the way they desire.
The icons are divided in categories. To include an it to the toolbar, we need to drag it to the toolbar.
Toolbar - Icons thatll be displayed on the toolbar of ScriptCase.
Buttons
Save - Save the modifications done to the toolbar.
Add Separator - Adds a separator to the toolbar, after the last item of the current setup.
Create item - Creates a new item in the toolbar. Inform the URL, icon and description of the new item.
Return to default - Restores the toolbar to its default configuration.

1
General View
HOME DEPLOY
A deploy is the final thing youll need to do with your project, so that your applications can be accessed by in the production environment. Basically, it the final phase of the
development, where the ScriptCase user will find the help to implant the project on a WEB server, this server being correctly setup to guarantee the perfect functionality of the
applications.
Scriptcase offers two ways to deploy your project, both of them are detailed below:
We recommend that the PHP version of the production environment, needs to be the same as the Development environment, due to capabilities of the functions between the
versions.
Typical Deploy
Is the type which the production environment is automatically setup, with all the common libraries used in the applications. In case you need to customize the deploy directories,
like the image directory or the temporary directory for example, this type of deployment isnt recommended, considering that theses directories are setup by ScriptCase default,
not allowing customizing their locations, to deploy with the liberty to choose the location of the directories youll need to do the Advance deployment.
To proceed with the Typical Deploy Click Here.
Advanced Deploy
Its a deploy that gives the ScriptCase User the possibility to choose the default directories for the project, like these: Image Directory, Document Directory, Prod (Common
Libraries) Directory and etc. This type of deployment is recommended if you need to specify the directories for the WEB Server, to be used be your projects.
To proceed with the Advanced Deploy Click Here.

1
Typical Deploy
HOME DEPLOY TYPICAL DEPLOY
Pre-Requirements:
Web Server (ex: Apache, IIS).
PHP version 5.6 or later.
Access to the project database thats going to be used in the production environment.
This type of deploy is for users that want the Production Environment (Common Libraries) with the default settings from ScriptCase, the basic setup is done already be
ScriptCase. The process will be describing below:
1 - Access your project and choose the option Project -> Deploy Applications , available on the top menu.
ScriptCase Project Menu
2 - After clicking the on Deploy, youll have the option to deploy all the applications from the project or you can select the applications that you want to deploy.
All Applications
Select the applications to be deployed
Select the applications
List of available applications

2
3 - Choose the type of deploy that youll use (Typical).
4 - Choose the initial application.
Select the initial application for the deployment
Its necessary to select the common libraries, which are the files responsible for the Production Environment. Its necessary to select the common files, for the images, css
and custom messages to be sent at the moment of the deploy.
5 - Generating the files to deploy:
Generate the ZIP with the applications (recommended):

The final process thatll be give you a link to download the deploy package.
Select the ZIP method
Note: This option is recommended because it doesnt on other services to be done.
Deploy on a server directory:

Deploys the project in the informed directory. This option should be used, in the case that the deploy is going to be in the same sever where ScriptCase is installed, otherwise this
option isnt valid.
Choose the Directory to deploy
Deploy on a FTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote FTP server.
3
Select the FTP method
FTP server : Server where youll deploy your project. Inform the domain or IP of the server.
User : User for the FTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it wont work.
Password: Password for the FTP user.
FTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.
Note: To use this option its necessary that the server to offer the FTP service the user to have write permission on the server folder.
Deploy on a SFTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote SFTP server.
Select the SFTP method
SFTP server: Server where youll deploy your project. Inform the domain or IP of the server.
User : User for the SFTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it wont work.
Password: Password for the SFTP user.
SFTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.
Note: To use this option its necessary that the server to offer the SFTP service the user to have write permission on the server folder.
6 - On the final process youll a report with all the application deployed with the download link of the project.
Last Page of Deploy

1
Advanced Deploy
HOME DEPLOY ADVANCED DEPLOY
Pre-Requirements:
Web Server (ex: Apache, IIS).
PHP version 5.6 or later.
Access to the project database thats going to be used in the production environment.
Note: Different from the typical deploy, where the setup of the directories is the done from ScriptCase using the default settings, the advanced deployment allows you to
choose the directories is according to the architecture of the server where its going to be deployed to.
1 - Access your project and choose the option Project -> Deploy Applications , available on the top menu.
ScriptCase Project Menu
2 - After clicking the on Deploy, youll have the option to deploy all the applications from the project or you can select the applications that you want to deploy.
All Applications
Select the applications
List of available applications

2
3 - Choose the type of deploy that youll use (Advanced).
4 - Create a template for the deployment so that the settings can save and reused each time you deploy the current application.
Choose the name of the template to deploy
5 - Define the structure of the directories of the production environment defined in the production server. You can see two examples of different setup examples.
Example 1:
Note: Its necessary to create the directories in the production server, so that it can store the Production environment (Common Libraries) of the deployment, remembering
that the documents directory needs to be informed the absolute path until the folder. On this example, were using the production folder.
Example 1: Choose the Example 1: Choose the
structure of the deploy folders
Example 2:
Note: On this example, its necessary to create the image, documents and temporary directories, on your production server, remembering that the documents directory needs
to be informed the absolute path. Relating to the Production Environment (Common Libraries), its necessary to take the prod folder generated at the end of the deploy to the
server. In this case, were using different directories form the previous example.
3
Example 2: Choose the
Example 2: Choose the
Note: On both examples on top, in case you want after the conclusion the deployment process, therell be a link to download and deploy the common files, check the option
Deploy with common files (css, buttons, images, messages).
Common Libraries Folder : Library and service package used by the deployed applications. Inform the relative path to the prod directory, ex: /production/prod or /prod
Images Folder (used for uploading service) : Folder where will be stored all the images, when an application uses a field of the type Image (File Name). Inform the relative path to the image
directory: /production/file/img
Temp Folder : Folder where be stored the generated temporary files during runtime of the applications. The files of this directory will be removed periodically according to the specific
settings, by default its 120 minutes. Inform here the relative path to the tmp directory, ex: /production/tmp or /temporay_files/tmp
Documents Folder (used for uploading serviced) : older where will be stored all the documents, when an application uses a field of the type Image(File Name). Absolute Path (Full Path) to
the doc directory, ex: C:/Apache/htdocs/productions/file/doc or C:/Apache/htdocs/my_documents/doc
Note: The Character /, means the root of the Web Server, its used for relative paths.
6 - Define the connection name thatll be used by the project after deploying.
Choose the name of the connection
7 - Choose the the way method of deploy thats going to be used. ScriptCase offers 4 options:
Generate the ZIP with the applications (recommended):

The final process thatll be give you a link to download the deploy package.
Select the ZIP method
Note: This option is recommended because it doesnt on other services to be done.
Deploy on a server directory:

Deploys the project in the informed directory. This option should be used, in the case that the deploy is going to be in the same sever where ScriptCase is installed, otherwise this
option isnt valid.
4
Choose the Directory to deploy
Deploy on a FTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote FTP server.
Select the FTP method
FTP server : Server where youll deploy your project. Inform the domain or IP of the server.
User : User for the FTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it wont work.
Password: Password for the FTP user.
FTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.
Note: To use this option its necessary that the server to offer the FTP service the user to have write permission on the server folder.
Deploy on a SFTP server:

Deploys the application automatically on a remote SFTP server.
Select the SFTP method *
SFTP server: Server where youll deploy your project. Inform the domain or IP of the server.
User : User for the SFTP server in the production, remembering that the user need to have permission to write in the server folder, otherwise it wont work.
Password: Password for the SFTP user.
SFTP Folder : Server directory where the project will be deployed in.
Note: To use this option its necessary that the server to offer the SFTP service the user to have write permission on the server folder.
8 - On the final process youll a report with all the application deployed with the download link of the project, also with the common libraries, that are the necessary routine to
run the applications on the production environment, thats why they are required to upload with the deployment.
5
Last Page of Deploy
Note: The advanced deploy requires that you download the Production Environment, that is the package that contains the common libraries. If you dont want to download
the Production Environment (Common Libraries) from the link generated by the deploy, you can download it by Clicking Here. If you deploy the project again, you dont need
to download the common libraries, but this information isnt valid if the common libraries were updated in a new ScriptCase release.
1
Production Environment
HOME DEPLOY PRODUCTION ENVIRONMENT
We have two types of deployments:
Typical
Advanced
Production Environment (Typical)

Based on our documentation ( Click Here ), we can configure the production environment below:
1 - On the root of the web server, the folder TypicalDeploy was created and in it was extracted the samples_1.zip.
Root of the web server
2 - Access the folder /TypicalDeploy (where the applications are stored) from the browser. In it we have the menu application, well access it like
this(/TypicalDeploy/menu_scriptcase/menu_scriptcase.php ).
Project access from the
browser
3 - Access the production environment from the browser, by the address your-IP: port/TypicalDeploy/_lib or click the link Click here to create the connection now. Thatll be
displayed once you access the production environment. On the first access the default password is scriptcase.
Production Environment access page
4 - On this page, youll be required to set a new password for the production environment for the next time you access it if necessary.
2
Password setup for the production environment
5 - You should create a new connection.
Page to create the database
connection
6 - You should select the DBMS, that you used in the project.
Page to choose the connection for the production environment
7 - Inform the database server, on this example, the database is installed in the same machine ad the applications, so we can call it using localhost , if the database is on
another server you can call it by the or IP of the machine, also inform the Username and password (if it exists).
Page to setup the connection for the production environment
8 - This step is very important, because we need to inform the same name that was saved at the moment of the deployment (like on step 5). If the name is different than the
informed in the deployment, the application will present an error informing that the connection wasnt successful.
9 - Finally, we should access the project through the browser
Accessing the Project

3
Production Environment (Advanced)
Based on our documentation ( Click Here ) we can configure the production environment below:
1 - Folder structure:
Folder structure of the advanced deploy
2 - On the root of the web server, the folder AdvancedDeploy was created and in it was extracted the samples_1.zip.
Root of the web server
3 - Access the production environment from the browser, by the address your-IP: port/AdvancedDeploy or click the link Click here to create the connection now. Thatll be
displayed once you access the production environment. On the first access the default password is scriptcase.
Production Environment access page
4 - On this page, youll be required to set a new password for the production environment for the next time you access it if necessary.
Password setup for the production environment
5 - You should create a new connection.
Page to create the database
connection
6 - You should select the DBMS, that you used in the project.
Page to choose the connection for the production environment
7 - Inform the database server, on this example, the database is installed in the same machine ad the applications, so we can call it using localhost , if the database is on
another server you can call it by the or IP of the machine, also inform the Username and password (if it exists).
4
Page to setup the connection for the production environment
8 - This step is very important, because we need to inform the same name that was saved at the moment of the deployment (like on step 5). If the name is different than the
informed in the deployment, the application will present an error informing that the connection wasnt successful.
9 - Finally, we should access the project through the browser
Accessing the Project

1
Macros
HOME MACROS
SQL
sc_begin_trans This macro starts a set of transations in the database.
sc_change_connection This macro dynamically change the application connections.
sc_commit_trans This macro effective a set of transations in the database.
sc_concat With this macro you can concat fields on select for every database.
sc_connection_edit This macro edits an existing connection at runtime.
sc_connection_new This macro creates new connections dinamically.
sc_error_continue This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for an event.
sc_error_delete This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the exclusion of a record.
sc_error_insert This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the addition of a record.
sc_error_update This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the update of a record.
sc_exec_sql This macro execute SQL commands passed as parameter or a SQL command in the SQL field action type.
sc_lookup This macro executes a SELECT command stored in the second parameter and returns the data in a variable.
sc_reset_change_connection This macro erases the changes made using sc_change_connection.
sc_reset_connection_edit This macro undoes the connection edits made by macro sc_connection_edit.
sc_reset_connection_new This macro undoes the connections made by the macro sc_connection_new.
sc_rollback_trans This macro discards a set of transations in the data base.
sc_select This macro executes the commands passed in the second parameter and returns the dataset in a variable.
sc_select_field This macro modify dynamically a field that will be recovered in the grid.
sc_select_order This macro modify dynamically the grids ORDER BY clause field.
sc_select_where This macro adds dynamically a condition to the grid WHERE clause.
sc_set_fetchmode This macro allows to change the type of return from the dataset of the select commands
sc_sql_injection This macro it used protect the field/variable against SQL injection.
sc_sql_protect This macro protects the value passed as parameter according with the used database.
sc_where_current This macro its used to make a reference of the where clause currently used.
sc_where_orig This macro saves the where clause content of the original application select.
Variables - Database Global variables containing database access values used by main connection.
Date
sc_date This macro calculates and returns increments and decrements using dates.
sc_date_conv This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another field with an output format.
sc_date_dif This macro calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the result in days.
sc_date_dif_2 This macro calculates the difference between two dates returning the amount of days, months and years.
sc_date_empty This macro checks if a date field its empty retuning a boolean.
sc_time_diff Calculate difference in hours, returning the amount of hours, minutes and seconds.
Control
sc_ajax_javascript This macro allows the execution of JavaScript methods in form/control events
2
sc_alert This macro shows a Javascript alert message screen.
sc_apl_conf This macro modify the application execution property.
sc_calc_dv This macro calculate verify digits.
sc_changed This macro returns true if the field name have been changed.
sc_confirm This macro shows a Javascript confirm screen.
sc_decode This macro returns the encrypted field or variable to its original value.
sc_encode This macro returns the field or variable with the content encrypted.
sc_error_exit This macro Interrupts the application execution if there are error messages generated by the macro sc_error_message.
sc_error_message This macro generate an error message.
sc_exit This macro forces the application exit.
sc_getfield This macro assign the properties of a field to a javascript variable.
sc_get_language This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used.
sc_get_regional This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used.
sc_get_theme This macro returns the application theme name.
sc_groupby_label This macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in groupby lines.
sc_image This macro loads images passed as parameter to use in the application.
sc_include This macro its used to include PHP routines.
sc_include_lib This macro its used to select dynamically the application libraries.
sc_include_library This macro includes a PHP file from a library in the application.
sc_label This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label.
sc_language This macro returns the language and regional settings.
sc_link This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other applications.
sc_log_add This macro will add a register into the log table.
sc_log_split This macro returns what was inserted in the description field of the log table in an array format.
sc_mail_send This macro its used to send e-mails.
sc_make_link This macro is used to create a string with the link data to another application.
sc_master_value This macro update a Master Application object from a Detail Application.
sc_redir This macro its used to redirects to other application or URL.
sc_reset_global This macro delete session variables received as parameter.
sc_seq_register This macro provide the register sequential number.
sc_set_global This macro its used to register session variables.
sc_set_groupby_rule Macro is used to select an specific GROUP BY rule.
sc_set_language This macro allows to dynamically change the application language.
sc_set_regional This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings.
sc_set_theme This macro its used to dinamically define the application themes.
sc_site_ssl This macro verifies if its been used a safe/secure site. (https protocol)
sc_trunc_num This macro its used to set the number of decimals.
sc_url_exit This macro modifies the application exit URL.
sc_url_library This macro returns the path of a file, inside a library, to be used on the applications.
sc_warning This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control.
sc_webservice This macro is used to communicate with a web service.
sc_zip_file This macro its used to generate ZIP files from a file list and/or directories.
3
Variables - Totalling Variables that contains all the totals (general and for grouping).
Variables - Totalling (group by) Breaking totals variables.
Filter
sc_where_filter This macro its used to save the where clause content generated through the filter form.
Security
sc_apl_status This macro Activate/Deactivate the applications at user level.
sc_ldap_login This macro establish the connection with the user credentials.
sc_ldap_logout Macro used to release the connection after using the macro sc_ldap_login
sc_ldap_search Macro to perform searches in the LDAP.
sc_reset_apl_conf This macro deletes all the modifications effected by sc_apl_conf macro.
sc_reset_apl_status This macro deletes all the application security status variables.
sc_reset_menu_delete This macro restores a menu item structure. (removed by the macro sc_menu_delete).
sc_reset_menu_disable This macro its used to enable a menu item structure. (disabled by the macro sc_menu_disable).
sc_user_logout Macro used to log the user out to the system.
Shows
sc_ajax_message This macro allows the application to display customized messages.
sc_ajax_refresh Macro to refresh a Grid
sc_block_display This macro dynamically show/hide the fields of a specific block.
sc_field_color This macro changes the color of a determined field text.
sc_field_disabled This macro its used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it.
sc_field_disabled_record This macro has the objective to block the typing on determined fields in the Forms.
sc_field_display This macro dynamically display or not a specific field.
sc_field_init_off This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load.
sc_field_readonly This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to Read-Only
sc_field_style This macro allolws to modify dinamically the grid field style.
sc_format_num This macro its used to format numerical values.
sc_format_num_region This macro has the objective to format numbers, using the regional settings
sc_form_show This macro dynamically show or not the form.
sc_get_groupby_rule This macro provides the name of the groupby rule running at the time.
sc_hide_groupby_rule Macro used to disable Group By rules.
sc_set_focus This macro its used to set the focus to a form field.
Buttons
sc_btn_copy This macro returns true when the copy button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_delete This macro returns true when the Delete button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_display This macro shows and hides buttons on the toolbar in execution time.
4
sc_btn_insert This macro returns true when the Add button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_new This macro returns true when the Add New button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_update This macro returns true when the Save button is selected in a form.
PDF
sc_set_pdf_name This macro will change the grids exported files name.
Variables - Authentication User/Password for the WEB server.
Menu
sc_appmenu_add_item This Macro adds dinamically an item to the menu.
sc_appmenu_create This macro dynamically creates a menu item.
sc_appmenu_exist_item This macro checks if there is a menu item.
sc_appmenu_remove_item This macro removes dynamically a menu item.
sc_appmenu_reset This macro reset the array used in the dinamically creation of a menu application.
sc_appmenu_update_item This macro updates a menu item.
sc_btn_disable Macro used to disable Menu buttons.
sc_menu_delete This macro remove items of the menu structure.
sc_menu_disable This macro deactivate menu structure items.
sc_menu_force_mobile Macro used to force the creation of menus to mobile devices.
sc_menu_item This macro Identifies the menu item selected.
sc_script_name This macro identifies the application name that was selected in the menu.
sc_begin_trans (Connection)
This macro starts a set of transactions in the database. In form applications, the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database update (onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate,
onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onBeforeUpdate or onBeforeDelete), they are automatically protected through transaction control, since the connection is the same of the
application. In the other cases, if the user wish to make transaction control, must begin with this macro and finish with the sc_commit_trans() macro to confirm the updates or
sc_rollback_trans to cancel the transactions.
Macros Scope
Blank Calendar Chart Grid Search Form Application Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
Onchange onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onExecute onExecute onHeader
OnClick onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
OnFocus onHeader onFilterValidate OnFocus onFocus onRecord
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onAfterDelete onClick
onAfterInsert onNavigate onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit
onAfterUpdate onRecord onAfterInsert onLoadAll
onBeforeDelete onAfterInsertAll onRefresh
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdate onValidate
onBeforeUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onValidateFailure
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidateSuccess
onLoad onBeforeDeleteAll
onRefresh onBeforeInsert
5
onValidate onBeforeInsertAll
onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdate
onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_change_connection (Old_Connection, New_Connection)
This macro dynamically change the application connections. Ex. 1: To change the connections:sc_change_connection ( Old_Connection, New_Connection; Old_Connection02,
New_Connection02);
Macros Scope
Blank Application Calendar Application Chart Application Grid Application Form Application Control Application Report PDF Application
onExecute onScriptInit onHeader onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onHeader
onLoad onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad onLoadAll onScriptInit
onLoadRecord onRecord
sc_commit_trans (Connection)
This macro has the objective to confirm a transaction set in the database. In form applications, the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database update
(onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onBeforeUpdate or onBeforeDelete), they are automatically protected through transaction control, since the
connection is the same of the application. If the user, in any of these events, use an application redirectioning (macro sc_redir) must before the redirect, use this macro to guarantee
the transactions previously effected. The connection parameter is optional, being necessary, only, if the command is executed in a different database specified to the application.
Macros Scope
6
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_concat ()
With this macro you can concat fields on select for every database.
Example(Edition Lookup):
SELECT field1, sc_concat(field2, - , field3) FROM table
SELECT field1, sc_concat(field2, , field3) FROM table

Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form Menu application Tree menu ReportPDF application
Macros Scope
onExecute OnClick onFooter onClick onFilterInit OnClick onBlur onApplicationInit onExecute onFooter
OnFocus onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh OnFocus onChange onExecute onLoad onHeader
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave onAfterDelete onClick onLoad onScriptInit
onAfterInsert onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDeleteAll onFocus onRecord
onAfterUpdate onScriptInit onAfterInsert onClick
onBeforeDelete onNavigate onAfterInsertAll onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onRecord onAfterUpdate onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onRefresh
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidate
onLoad onBeforeDeleteAll onValidateFailure
onRefresh onBeforeInsert onValidateSuccess
onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
7
onValidateSuccess
sc_connection_edit (Connetion_Name, $arr_conn)
1 Parameter: Connection name to be edited.
2 Parameter: Array of items containing the connection information to be edited. Check out the indices of the array:
Indice Description Example
[server] Database server (host) $arr_conn[server] = 127. 0. 0. 1
[user] Database username $arr_conn[user] = root
[password] Database password $arr_conn[password] = secretpass123
[database] Database name used in the connection $arr_conn[database] = sc_samples
[persistent] Defines if the connection is persistent or not $arr_conn[persistent] = Y / N
[encoding] Configure the connection encoding $arr_conn[encoding] = utf8
Note:Is not required to use all the indices in the array, we can pass only the required ones.
Example:
$arr_conn = array(); $arr_conn[user] = admin2; $arr_conn[password] = admin2pass; $arr_conn[database] = sc_samples2; sc_connection_edit(sc_connection, $arr_conn);
Macros Scope
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onExecute onApplicationInit
Onchange onFooter onFilterInit Onchange onChange onExecute onLoad onFooter
OnClick onHeader onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick onLoad onHeader
OnFocus onScriptInit onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus onScriptInit
onAfterDelete onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onRecord
onAfterInsert onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onApplicationInit onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onBeforeDelete onAfterUpdate onRefresh
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdateAll onValidate
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
8
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
sc_connection_new (Connection_Name, $arr_conn)
When used, the macro creates a new connection with the information inserted in its parameters. This connection is available throughout the current session Scriptcase and cease to
exist when the session is closed.
1 Parameter: Connection name.
Note: If there is a connection created within the Scriptcase with the same name, this macro has no effect. Connections created within the Scriptcase prevail. If you want to edit an
existing connection, see the documentation for the macro sc_connection_edit.
2 Parameter: Array of items containing the connection information. Check out the indices of the array:
Indice Description Example
[drive] Driver of the database used for the connection (see table below) $arr_conn[drive] = oci8
[server] Database server (host) $arr_conn[server] = 127. 0. 0. 1
[user] Database username $arr_conn[user] = root
[password] Database password $arr_conn[password] = secretpass123
[database] Database name used in the connection $arr_conn[database] = sc_samples
[persistent] Defines if the connection is persistent or not $arr_conn[persistent] = Y / N
[encoding] Configure the connection encoding $arr_conn[encoding] = utf8
Note: It is required that all items are filled, with the exception of items [persistent] and [encoding].
See below the drivers list:
Driver Descrio
access MS Access
ado_access MS Access ADO
odbc Generic ODBC
db2 DB2
db2_odbc DB2 Native ODBC
odbc_db2 DB2 Generic ODBC
odbc_db2v6 DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower
firebird Firebird
borland_ibase Interbase 6. 5 or Higher
ibase Interbase
pdo_informix Informix PDO
informix Informix
informix72 Informix 7. 2 or Lower
ado_mssql MSSQL Server ADO
pdo_sqlsrv MSSQL Server NATIVE SRV PDO

9
mssqlnative MSSQL Server NATIVE SRV
odbc_mssql MSSQL Server ODBC
mssql MSSQL Server
pdo_mysql MySQL PDO
mysqlt Mysql (Transactional)
mysql MySQL (Non-Transactional)
oci805 Oracle 8. 0. 5 or Higher
odbc_oracle Oracle ODBC
oci8 Oracle 8
oci8po Oracle 8 Portable
oracle Oracle 7 or Lower
postgres7 PostgreSQL 7 or Higher
pdo_pgsql PostgreSQL PDO
postgres64 PostgreSQL 6. 4 or Higher
postgres PostgreSQL 6. 3 or Lower
pdosqlite SQLite PDO
sqlite SQLite
sybase Sybase
Example: $arr_conn = array(); $arr_conn[drive] = mysqlt; $arr_conn[server] = 127. 0. 0. 1; $arr_conn[user] = root; $arr_conn[password] = pass123; $arr_conn[database] =
sc_samples; $arr_conn[persistent] = Y; $arr_conn[encoding] = utf8; sc_connection_new(new_conn_mysql, $arr_conn);
Macros Scope
10
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_continue (Event)
This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for the event passed as parameter allowing it to be substituted by the programmer customized
error treatment. It can be used in along with variable: {sc_erro_delete}, {sc_erro_insert} and/or {sc_erro_update} The events to be passed as parameter are: insert, delete or update.
Ex. 1: Using on the event onDelete for the message returned by mssql, trigger treatment, which cancels the record exclusion, displays a error message in the format [Microsoft]
[ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You cant erase the record. sc_error_continue(delete);if (!empty({sc_error_delete})){ $tmp = strrpos({sc_error_delete}, ]); if ($tmp !== false) {
{sc_error_delete} = substr({sc_error_delete}, $tmp 1); }sc_error_message({sc_error_delete});sc_error_exit;}
calendar application Form application Control Form

Macros Scope
Calendar Application Form Application Control Application
onBeforeDelete onBeforeDelete onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsert
onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdate
sc_error_delete
This variable returns a string with a database error message, which occurs by trying to exclude a record. It is used when there is a need to treat these messages. Like for example, in
case of database validations via triggers or procedures that they return messages.
Ex. 1: Content of the variable {sc_erro_delete}, returning an error message generated by database trigger using MsSQL. [Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You cant
erase this register. Note: To access the database return error, sees the macro sc_error_continue.
calendar application Form application

Macros Scope
Calendar Application Form Application
onAfterDelete onAfterDelete
sc_error_insert
This variable returns a string with the database error, that occurs when adding a record. It is used when is neede to treat these messages. For example, in case of database
validations via triggers or procedures that return message. Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_insert}, returning an error message generated by database trigger the using mssql[Microsoft]
[ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You cant add this register. Note: To access the return of the database error, see the macro sc_error_continue.

Macros Scope
onAfterInsert onAfterInsert
sc_error_update
This variable returns a string with a database error message that occurs when updating a record. It is used when there is a need to treat these messages. For example, in case of
database validations via triggers or procedures that return message. Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_update}, returning an error message generate by a database trigger using mssql.
[Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server] You cant updatethis record. Note: To have access the return of database error see the macro sc_error_continue.

11
Macros Scope
onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdate
sc_exec_sql (SQL Command, Connection)

This macro allows to condition the circumstances thats the SQL commands are executed. The Connection parameter is optional. Required only, if the command is executed in a
data base different from the application.
Macros Scope
Onchange onHeader onGroupBy onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onExecute onExecute onHeader
OnClick onScriptInit onHeader onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
OnFocus onScriptInit onFilterValidate OnFocus onFocus onRecord
onAfterDelete onNavigate onAfterDelete onClick
onAfterInsert onRecord onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onLoadAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_lookup (Dataset, SQL Command, Connection)

This macro allows the user to execute SQL commands and returns the result to the dataset variable. The dataset structure is an array (line/column). The connection parameter is
optional. Use when the command is executed in a database different from that specified for the application.
Macros Scope
12
onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_change_connection
This macro has the objective to erase the changes made using the macro sc_change_connection.
Ex. 1: sc_reset_change_connection();
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form Menu application Tree menu ReportPDF application
Macros Scope
{:.table } Blank Application Calendar Application Chart Application Grid Application Form Application Control Application Menu Application Tree Menu Application Report PDF Application
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onLoad onScriptInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_connection_edit
This macro undoes the connection edits made by macro sc_connection_edit.
Esta macro desfaz as edies de conexo feitas pela macro sc_connection_edit.
Ex. 1: sc_reset_connection_edit();
Macros Scope
13
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_connection_new
This macro undoes the connections made by the macro sc_connection_new.
sc_reset_connection_new();
Macros Scope

14
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onValidateSuccess
sc_rollback_trans (Connection)
This macro its used to cancel a transaction set in the database. The Connection parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a different data base from the
specified to the application.
Macros Scope
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onHeader onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onExecute onHeader
Onchange onScriptInit onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onExecute onLoad onRecord
OnClick onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLoad
OnFocus onHeader onFilterValidate OnFocus onFocus
onAfterInsert onNavigate onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll
onAfterUpdate onRecord onAfterInsert onRefresh
onBeforeDelete onAfterInsertAll onValidate
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdate onValidateFailure
onBeforeUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onValidateSuccess
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete
onClick
15
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_select (dataset, SQL Command, Connection)

This macro executes the SQL commands passed as parameter and access the dataset in the command. Different from sc_lookup macro, this macro doesnt manipulate the dataset
(the user is responsible for all the manipulation). If an error occurs in the sql command execution, the variable attributed to the database returns as false and the error message is
available in the dataset_error variable. The connection parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a data base different from the specified in the application.
Macros Scope
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onExecute onFooter
Onchange onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onExecute onLoad onHeader
OnClick onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLoad onRecord
OnFocus onHeader onFilterValidate OnFocus onFocus
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
16
sc_select_field ({Field})
This macro modify dynamically the SELECT:Is possible to modify dynamically the grid fields through the dynamic modification of the original select. Ex. 1:A table with the columns year
and the months from January to December is used to create a grid using a parameter, displays the years and only a specific month. Passing the parameter as a global variable named
show_month, in the application is found the following structure:Select Clause: select year, pair_month from table
Macros Scope
Chart Application Grid Application
onScriptInit onScriptInit
sc_select_order (Field)
It is possible, during the grid execution time, modify the grid ORDER BY clause. At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the substitution during
the grid execution time. Ex. 1: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price FROM table ORDER BY codeTo change the order from code to name, we will have:sc_select_order(code) =
name; Ex. 2: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price, date FROM table ORDER BY code, name, priceTo change the order from name to date, we will have:sc_select_order(name) =
date; Note: This command must be in the context of process before the select.
chart application Grid application

Macros Scope
onScriptInit onHeader
onScriptInit
sc_select_where (add)
Is possible, during grid execution time to add a field/condition to the search WHERE clause. Ex. 1: It adds the contente between the quotes () in the grids select. if
(empty({sc_where_current})){ sc_select_where(add) = where campoX > [global];}else{ sc_select_where(add) = AND campoX > [global_variable];} Note: This command must be in the
context of process before the select.

Macros Scope
onScriptInit onHeader
onScriptInit
sc_set_fetchmode (parm);
This macro allows to change the type of return from the dataset of the select commands. The macro will processed before running the SQL command. Informing the parameter, the
dataset will return the index or the name of the column.
parm = 0 : Returns an array with the index and the name of columns (Scriptcases Default)
parm = 1 : Returns an array only with indexes of the columns
Example 1: Returning an array with the name of the columns.
sc_set_fetchmode(0);
sc_select(my_data, SELECT customerid, stateid, birthdate, creditlimit FROM customers where customerid = ALFKI);
while (!$my_data->EOF){
$meus_dados->fields[customerid];
$customer = $my_data->fields[stateid]; $customer = $my_data->fields[birthdate];
$my_data->MoveNext(); } $my_data->Close();
Example 2: Returning an array with the index of the columns.
sc_set_fetchmode(1);
17
sc_select(my_data, SELECT customerid, stateid, birthdate, creditlimit FROM customers where customerid = ALFKI);
while (!$my_data->EOF){
$my_data->fields[1]; $customer = $my_data->fields[2]; $customer = $my_data->fields[3];
$my_data->MoveNext(); } $my_data->Close();
Macros Scope
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onExecute onExecute onFooter
Onchange onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onLoad onLoad onHeader
OnClick onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick onScriptInit
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_injection ({My_Field}) or ($My_Variable)

This macro its used to protect the field/variable against sql injection. Macro used for protection against sql injection in commands generated by the developer when using the
macros: sc_lookup, sc_select or sc_exec_sql. Ex. 1: Protecting a local variable:$field_protect = sc_sql_injection({my_field}); Ex. 2: Protecting an user variable:$field_protect =
sc_sql_injection($my_var);
Note: that all database accesses, generated for the Scriptcase, have protection against sql injection.
Macros Scope
18
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onExecute onExecute onFooter
Onchange onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onLoad onLoad onHeader
OnClick onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick onScriptInit
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onAfterDelete onScriptInit
onAfterInsert onNavigate onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll
onAfterUpdate onRecord onAfterInsert onRefresh
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_protect (Value, Type, Connection)
This macro will protect the value passed as paramenter according with the used database, the Connection parameter is opicional, if not informed scriptcase will use the default
connection. The Type parameter so far can only use the Date value.
Ex 01: In this example we will protect the dates passed as parameter so this way it can be correctly interpreted to the ACCESS database. sc_select_where(add) = AND news_noticias.
noticia_data_pub BETWEEN . sc_sql_protect($data_inicial, date). AND . sc_sql_protect($data_final, date). ;
Blank application calendar application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
Macros Scope
Blank Application Calendar Application Grid Application Search Application Form Application Control Application Report PDF Application
onExecute onValidate onClick onFilterValidate onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll onRecord
onFooter onAfterInsertAll onValidate
onGroupBy onAfterUpdateAll
onScriptInit onBeforeDeleteAll
onNavigate onBeforeInsertAll
onRecord onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidate
sc_where_current
Variable to reference the application where clause plus the filter selections(if any). Reflects the where clause currently used.
19
Macros Scope
Chart Application Grid Application Report PDF Application
onFooter onClick onFooter
onHeader onFooter onHeader
onScriptInit onGroupBy onScriptInit
onHeader onRecord
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_where_orig
This macro saves the application original where clause. Can be used inside ScriptCase events, to manipulate the data, or to display it anywhere in the grid.
Macros Scope
onHeader onRecord
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onRecord
Variables - Database Database Variables

Global variables containing database access values used by main connection.
Variables Description
sc_glo_server Server name.
sc_glo_db Database name.
sc_glo_db_type Database type (mssql, oracle, mysql, etc).
sc_glo_user Connected user name.
sc_glo_pass Database password access.
sc_glo_cript_pass Encrypted password (S/N).
sc_glo_decimal_db Used decimal separator (point or comma).
Ex. 1:$my_database = [sc_glo_db]; These variables only reference the values without updating it (it is not possible to attribute/modify the values). To define user and the password to
connect to the database, use the following variables:
sc_db_master_usr User login to be used.
sc_db_master_pass Password to be used.
sc_db_master_cript Encrypted password (S/N) (see sc_encode macro).
Important: These variables only take effect during next application execution remaining valid during all the session (unless modified).
20
Macros Scope
Blank Calendar Chart Grid Search Form Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onFooter onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onExecute onFooter
Onchange onHeader onGroupBy onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onExecute onLoad onHeader
OnClick onScriptInit onHeader onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLoad onScriptInit
OnFocus onScriptInit onFilterValidate OnFocus onLoadAll onRecord
onNavigate onRefresh
onRecord onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date (Date, Format, Operator, D, M, Y)

This macro has the aim to calculate the increment or decrement of dates. For its use are necessary some parameters as follows:
Parameter Description
Date Date field that contains the date to be modified.
Format Formatting thats the date field is.
Operator + for increment and - for decrement.
D Number of days to increment or decrement.
M Number of months to increment or decrement.
Y Number of Years to increment or decrement.
Ex. 1:{birthdate} = sc_date({birthdate}, dd/mm/yyyy, +, 30, 0, 0);
Ex. 2:$new_date = sc_date({birthdate}, yyyy-mm-dd, -, 15, 3, 2);
Ex. 3:{inclusion_dt} = sc_date(date(Ymd), yyyymmdd, -, 0, 1, 1);
OBS: To be certified of the date format, before use the function, try it in any event:echo form_date =. {name of the field date};
Macros Scope
Blank Calendar Chart Search Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
Application Application Application Grid Application Application Form Application Application Application Application Application
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onClick onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
Onchange onFooter onApplicationInit onFilterInit Onchange onChange onExecute onExecute onFooter
OnClick onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick onLoad onLoad onHeader
OnFocus onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus onScriptInit
onAfterDelete onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onRecord
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onAfterUpdate onNavigate onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onApplicationInit onRecord onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onBeforeInsert onValidateSuccess onValidate
onBeforeUpdate onBeforeDelete onValidateFailure

21
onScriptInit onBeforeDeleteAll onValidateSuccess
onLoad onBeforeInsert
onRefresh onBeforeInsertAll
onValidate onBeforeUpdate
onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidateSuccess onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_conv ({Field_Date}, Input_Format, Output_Format)

This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another field with an output format.
A or Y Used to reference years.
M Used to reference Months.
D Used to reference Days.
Db_Format Used to get the Dadabase date format.
Ex. 1: Converts the date from dd/mm/yyyy format to the yyyymmdd format. {field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, dd/mm/aaaa, aaaammdd); Ex. 2: Converts the date from
the database native format to dd/mm/yyyy format. {field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, db_format, dd/mm/aaaa); Ex. 3: Converts the date from the dd/mm/yyyy format to
the Database native format. {field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, dd/mm/aaaa, db_format);
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
Macros Scope
22
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif ({Date1}, Format Date1, {Date2}, Format Date2)

Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) in days.
Date1 Date1 value or variable.
Format Date1
Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date1.
Format Date2 Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date2.
Ex. 1:{amount_days} = sc_date_dif({date1}, aaaa-mm-dd, {date2}, mm/dd/aaaa);
Ex. 2:{amount_days} = sc_date_dif(2000-05-01, aaaa-mm-dd, 04/21/2004, mm/dd/aaaa);{amount_days} would be equal to -1451 (days) Note: Formats can be different but must
be in days, months and years.
Macros Scope
23
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif_2 ({Date1}, Format Date1, {Date2}, Format Date2, Option)
Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the amount of days, months and years. The result is returned in an array structure, where the index 0
have the amount of days, the index 1 have the amount of months and the index 2 have the amount of years.
Format Date1
Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date1.
Format Date2 Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date2.
Option 1 = Doesnt consider the initial day; 2 = Considers the initial day.
Ex. 1:{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ({date1}, yyyy-mm-dd, {date2}, mm/dd/yyyy, 1);{dif_days} = {differences[0]};{dif_months} = {differences[1]};{dif_years} = {differences[2]};
Ex. 2:{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 (2000-05-01, yyyy-mm-dd, 04/21/2004, mm/dd/yyyy, 1);{differences[0]} = 20 (days){differences[1]} = 11 (months){differences[2]} = 3 (years)
Ex. 3: Using the option 2{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 (2000-05-01, yyyy-mm-dd, 04/21/2004, mm/dd/yyyy, 2);{differences[0]} = 21 (days){differences[1]} = 11 (months)
{differences[2]} = 3 (years). Note: Formats between the two dates can be different but it must have days, months and years
Macros Scope

24
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_empty ({Field_Date})
This macro checks if a date field is empty. Ex. 1:if (sc_date_empty({my_date}) ){ sc_error_message(Invalid Date);}
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
Macros Scope
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
25
Blank Calendar Chart Search onRefresh Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_time_diff ({datetime_01}, Date_01 Format, {datetime_02}, Date_02 Format)

sc_time_diff({datetime_01}, Date_01 Format, {datetime_02}, Date_02 Format);
This macro calculates the difference between hour, minutes and seconds for two datetime/time values.
The result will be returned in an array, with the dimensions [0], [1] and [2] containing hours, minutes and seconds, respectively.
Parmeter
Description
datetime_01
Value or variable for datetime_01
Date_01 Format
Value or variable to specify the format of datetime_01
datetime_02
Value or variable for datetime_02
Date_02 Format
Value or variable to specify the format of datetime_02
Ex. 1: General Format {differences} = sc_time_diff({datetime_01}, Date_01 Format, {datetime_02}, Date_02 Format);
{diff_hours} = {differences[0]}; {diff_minutes} = {differences[1]}; {diff_seconds} = {differences[2]};
Ex. 2: Returning positive values {differences} = sc_time_diff(2012-07-25 05:33:45, yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss, 2012-07-21 15:22:57, yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss);
{differences[0]} would be equal to 86 (hours) {differences[1]} would be equal to 10 (minutes) {differences[2]} would be equal to 48 (seconds)
Ex. 3: Returning negative values {differences} = sc_time_diff(2012-07-21 15:22:57, yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss, 2012-07-25 05:33:45, yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss);
{differences[0]} would be equal to -86 (hours) {differences[1]} would be equal to -10 (minutes) {differences[2]} would be equal to -48 (seconds)
Ex. 4: Considering only the hours format - Positive return {differences} = sc_time_diff(18:14:55, hh:ii:ss, 10:55:22, hh:ii:ss);
{differences[0]} would be equal to 7 (hours) {differences[1]} would be equal to 19 (minutes) {differences[2]} would be equal to 33 (seconds).
Ex. 5: Considering only the hours format - Negative return {differences} = sc_time_diff (10:55:22, hh:ii:ss, 18:14:55, hh:ii:ss);
{differences[0]} would be equal to -7 (hours) {differences[1]} would be equal to -19 (minutes) {differences[2]} would be equal to -33 (seconds).
Macros Scope
Blank Calendar Chart Grid Search Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
Application Application Application Application Application Form Application Application Application Application Application
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onFooter onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
Onchange onFooter onScriptInit onFilterInit Onchange onChange onExecute onExecute onHeader
OnClick onHeader onNavigate onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick onLoad onLoad onRecord
OnFocus onScriptInit onRecord onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationInit

26
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdateAll onValidateFailure
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateSuccess
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_ajax_javascript (JavascriptMethodName, matriz (parmetro))
This macro allows the execution of JavaScript methods called from events in form/control applications. This macro receive two parameters: a required one which recive a the JS
method name and an optional that recive an array with the method parameters on it. This macro is only valid in applications with AJAX support. Examples: Ex. 1: Method javascript
without parameters:sc_ajax_javascript(JavascriptMethodName);Ex. 2: Method javascript with a paramenter:sc_ajax_javascript(JavascriptMethodName, array(paramameter));Ex. 3:
Method javascript with two paramenters:sc_ajax_javascript(JavascriptMethodName, array(param1,param2));
Macros Scope
ajaxFieldonBlur ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
Onchange Onchange onChange
OnClick OnClick onClick
OnFocus OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onAfterDelete onValidateFailure
onAfterInsert onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert
onValidate onAfterInsertAll
onValidateFailure onAfterUpdate
onValidateSuccess onAfterUpdateAll
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
27
sc_alert (Message)
This macro shows a Javascript alert message box. Ex. 1:sc_alert(This is an alert message!!);
Control Form
onLoadAll
onValidate
Macros Scope
Control Application
onLoadAll
onValidate
sc_apl_conf (Application, Property, Value)

This macro allows to modify the property of the application. The user can determine if a Form will start in insert mode, or a Grid starts by filter, etc. This macro must be used by one
application to modify the properties of another application.
Macros Scope
Blank Calendar Chart Search Form Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
Application Application Application Grid Application Application Application Application Application Application Application
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onExecute onExecute onScriptInit
onValidate onLoad onLoad
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_calc_dv (Digit, Rest, Value, Module, Weights, Type)
Calculate verifier (checksum) digits.
Parameter
Description
Digit Variable that will recieve the calculated digit.
Rest Variable that will recieve the rest of the division.
Value Value or Variable to calculate the digit.
Module Value or Variable containing the module to be used. Default value is module 11.
Weights Value or Variable containing the weights to be used. Default value is the 98765432 values.
Type Value or Variable containing the parcels calculation to be used: 1 to normal sum of the parcels values and 2 to the sum of each algorithm of the parcels. Default value is 1.
Ex. 1:sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 11, 98765432, 1);Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x3=18 ; 5x4=20 ; 4x5=20 ; 3x6=18 ; 2x7=14 ; 1x8=8 Parcels sum : 14 + 18 + 20 + 20 + 18 +
14 + 8 = 112Rest of the division of 112 / 11 = 2 Digit: 11 - 2 = 9
Ex. 2:sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 10, 12, 2);Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x1=6 ; 5x2=10 ; 4x1=4 ; 3x2=6 ; 2x1=2 ; 1x2=2 Parcels sum: 1 + 4 + 6 + 1 + 0 + 4 + 6 + 2 + 2 = 26
Rest of the division of 26 / 10 = 6 Digit: 10 - 6 = 4
Macros Scope

28
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_changed ({Field_Name})
Macro to check if the field name have been changed. Ex. 1:if (sc_changed({my_field})){ Echo Filed have been changed;}

Macros Scope
onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
onValidate onValidate
onValidateFailure onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess onValidateSuccess
sc_confirm (Message)
Valid only in the PHP programming code that runs when called through a toolbar button.
This macro is used to confirm that the action must be really executed, preventing mistakes.
Ex. 1:sc_confirm (Do you really wish to execute this action??);
Form application Control Form

Macros Scope
Form Application Control Application
onClick onClick
sc_decode ({My_Field})
29
Returns, the encrypted field or variable, to its original value. Ex. 1: Using a local variable:{my_field} = sc_decode($field_cript); Ex. 2: Using an user variable:$my_var =
sc_decode($field_cript); Note: Netmake isnt responsible by the cryptography algorithm integrity (it is an open source algorithm)
Macros Scope
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_encode ({My_Field})
Returns the field or variable with the content encrypted. Ex. 1: Encrypting a local variable:$field_cript = sc_encode({my_field}); Ex. 2: Encrypting an user variable:$field_cript =
sc_encode($my_var);
Note: Netmake isnt responsible by the encrypting algorithm integrity, (The algorithm provided is open source).
Macros Scope

30
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_exit (URL, Target) or (My_Application, Target)
Interrupts the application execution, if there is error message generated through sc_error_message macro, displaying the error messages. If informed an URL or the name of an
Application, an OK button is displayed, bellow the error messages to redirect the processing to the informed URL/Application. The target parameter is opitional. Ex. 1: Displays only
the error messages. sc_error_exit();Ex. 2: Display the error messages and the OK button to redirect to URL. sc_error_exit(http://www. mysite. com);Ex. 3: Display the error messages
and the OK button to redirect to Application, opening in another window. sc_error_exit(my_application, _blank);
Macros Scope
Calendar Application Search Application Form Application Control Application
ajaxFieldonBlur onFilterValidate ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
onAfterDelete onAfterDelete onScriptInit
onAfterInsert onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onRefresh
onValidate onBeforeDelete
onValidateSuccess onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeUpdate onBeforeInsert
onNavigate onBeforeInsertAll
31
onValidateSuccess onNavigate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_message (Text)
This macro generates an error messages. In Form and Control applications, the messages are presented together with other error messages found in the application, except when
using the sc_error_exit macro. In Grid and Menu applications the messages only will be presented through the sc_error_exit macro.
Macros Scope
ajaxFieldonBlur onFilterValidate ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
Onchange Onchange Onchange
OnClick OnClick OnClick
OnFocus OnFocus OnFocus
onValidate onBeforeDelete
onValidateFailure onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onNavigate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_exit (Option)
This macro can be used in the ScriptCase events and created button and may return values/process after the execution.
Option Description
sc_exit() Returns to the previous application without display anything.
Macros Scope
onScriptInit onClick onClick
32
Macros Scope
Form Application Control Application
javaScriptOnLoad javaScriptOnLoad
javaScriptOnSubmit javaScriptOnSubmit
javaScriptOnChange javaScriptOnChange
javaScriptOnBlur javaScriptOnBlur
javaScriptOnFocus javaScriptOnFocus
javaScriptOnClick javaScriptOnClick
sc_get_language
This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used.
Ex. 1: $my_language = sc_get_language();
Macros Scope
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
33
sc_get_regional
This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used.
Ex. 1: $my_regional = sc_get_regional();
Macros Scope
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_get_theme
This macro returns the application theme used.
Macros Scope

34
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_groupby_label (My_Field)
This Macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in group by lines. Ex. 1:sc_groupby_label(state) = state grouping;Ex. 2:sc_groupby_label(balance) = balance total;
Grid application
Macros Scope
Grid Application
onGroupBy
sc_image (Image01.jpg)
This macro its used to copy images in some events or Javascript commands to load images to an application.
Macros Scope
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter onFilterInit OnApplicationInit OnApplicationInit OnApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit OnClick onScriptInit onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onLoad onScriptInit onLoad
onValidate onLoad onValidateFailure
onLoadRecord onValidateSuccess
onValidate
sc_include (File, Source)

35
The Scriptcase allows the user to catalogue his PHP scripts to use in various applications. To catalogue the scripts go to the ScripCase main menu at Tools > Library and use the
upload option existing in the interface.
Macros Scope
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_include_lib (Lib1, Lib2, )
This macro its used to select dynamically the application libraries.
Macros Scope
Blank Application Grid Application
onExecute onScriptInit
sc_include_library (Target, Library Name, File, include_once, Require)

This macro includes a PHP file from a library in the application. You must have a library created in Scriptcase to make use of this macro. To create a library, go to Tools -> Libraries.
Macros Scope
36
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_label ({My_Field})
This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label. Ex. 1: Using the field name. sc_label(Customer) = Cust Name; Ex. 2: Using a variable as paramenter.
sc_label({Customer}) = Cust Name; Ex. 3: Using a global variable. sc_label([global_variable]) = Cust Name;
calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
Macros Scope
Calendar Application Chart Application Grid Application Form Application Control Application Report PDF Application
onScriptInit onScriptInit onClick ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onScriptInit
onLoad onScriptInit Onchange onChange
onRefresh onNavigate OnClick onClick
OnFocus onFocus
onLoad onLoadAll
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
37
Calendar Application Chart Application Grid Application onRefresh
Form Application Control Application Report PDF Application
sc_language
This macro returns the language and regional settings.
Ex. 1: echo Language: . {sc_language};
Macros Scope
Blank Calendar Chart Grid Search Form Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_link (Column, Application, Parameters, Hint, Target, Height, Width)

This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other applications.
Macros Scope
Grid Application Report PDF Application
onRecord onRecord
sc_log_add (action, description)
This macro is intended to add a record to the log table, thereby making the message and / or the name of the action customizable to the developer. The macro parameters can use
PHP variables.
Ex: sc_log_add (access, Application has been accessed by the user trial);
Blank application calendar application Grid application Form application

Macros Scope
Blank Application Calendar Application Grid Application Form Application
onExecute onValidate onScriptInit onValidate
sc_log_split ({description})
This macro is intended to provide access to the information written in the last insertion in the log table, allowing the manipulation of the data before and after the record update
returning it in an array mode. The information is stored in the description field of the log table in the string format with delimiters.
Ex: $arr_description = sc_log_split({description}); Input: -> keys fields Array ( [clientid] => ANTON ) [fields] => Array ( [old] => Array ( [CEP] => 50710500 [Address] => Rua
Desembargador Joao Paes 657 [City] => Farol [State] => RS ) [new] => Array ( [CEP] => 53230630 [Address] => Avenida Presidente Kennedy, 1001 [City] => Peixinhos [State] => PE ) ) )
Blank application calendar application Grid application Form application

Macros Scope
Blank Application Calendar Application Grid Application Form Application
onExecute onLoad onScriptInit onLoad
sc_mail_send (SMTP, Usr, Pw, From, To, Subject, Message, Mens_Type, Copies, Copies_Type, Port, Connection_Type, Attachment, SSL)
This macro its used to send emails.
SMTP SMTP server name or IP address. (String or Variable that contains the server name)
Usr SMTP user name. (String or Variable that contains the user name)
38
Pw SMTP password. (String or Variable that contains the password)
From From email. (String or Variable that contains the email)
To List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ; or one variable that contains one array of emails.
Subject Message subject. (String or Variable that contains the subject)
Message Message body. (String or Variable that contains the message)
Mens_Type Message format: (T)ext or (H)tml.
Copies List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ; or one variable that contains one array of
emails.
Copies_Type Type copies: BCC (Hiden copies) or CCC (Regular copies).
Port The port used by your e-mail server. Use the port 465 for the security type SSL, and the port 587 for the security type TLS or the port 25 for no security. If not informed,
Scriptcase will set the default port: 25
Connection_Type Indicating a secure connection. Use S for SSL, T for TLS or N for non secure connections. If not informed, Scriptcase will set the default value:N.
Attachment Absolute path of the file that will be attached in the email
SSL Optional parameter to add SSL settings. If you need to add more than one setting, use ; for separate them. Ex: $ssl = allow_self_signed=false;verify_peer=false;
Note: To use safe connection its required to have the PHP php_openssl extension enable.
Ex. 1:sc_mail_send(smtp. meuserver. com. br, usr, pw, from@netmake. com. br, to@netmake. com. br, Test Email Subject, Message, H, abc@cop. com. br;zxy@cop. com. br, H,
, , c:/test/arq. txt);
Ex. 2: Usising variables and defining the port. sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], [usuar], [glo_pw], {from}, {to}, {subject}, {message}, T, [glo_copias], CCC, 419, S, {attached});
Ex. 3: No user and password. sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], , , from. netmake. com. br, {to}, {sunject}, {message}, H, , , , , [glo_att]); The amount of emails sent will be stored at the
special variable sc_mail_count. If any error happend when the scriptcase try to send the email, the variable sc_mail_ok will recieve false and the error message will be stored on
the variavle sc_mail_erro.
Ex. 4 :sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], , , from@netmake. com. br, {to}, {subject}, {message}, H); if ({sc_mail_ok}){ echo sent {sc_mail_count} e-mail(s) with sucess!!;}else{
sc_error_message({sc_mail_erro});}
Macros Scope
onExecute onAfterDelete onFooter onClick onFilterInit onAfterDelete onClick onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter
onAfterInsert onHeader onHeader onFilterSave onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit onExecute onExecute onHeader
onAfterUpdate onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterValidate onAfterInsert onLoadAll onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onBeforeDelete onRecord onAfterInsertAll onRefresh onRecord
onClick
onScriptInit
39
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_make_link (Application, Parameters)
This macro creates a string containing a link to other Scriptcase application (when writing html code).
Macros Scope
Blank Application Chart Application Grid Application Control Application
onExecute onFooter onScriptInit onValidate
onHeader onNavigate onValidateSuccess
onScriptInit onRecord
sc_master_value (Object, Value)

Update a data in the master application, in real time, according to changes made in a given field of the detail application.
Macros Scope
onApplicationInit onAfterInsertAll
onBeforeDelete onAfterUpdate
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit
onRefresh onBeforeUpdate
onValidate onScriptInit
onValidateFailure onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
sc_redir (Application, Parameter01; Parameter02; Target, Error, height_modal, width_modal)

This macro its used to redirect the processing to other application or URL. If the redir uses parameters, these must be passed in the following format:1) After the name of the
application, use the comma delimiter (,) then2) = (equal sign) . 3) More than one parameter, must be separated by semicolon (;)4) The target determine which application is opened
(default=_self): _self, _parent, _blank or modal. 5) Optional parameter to set error messages redirection in the application: F redirects if there is error in the application (default value)
and E does not redirect.
40
Macros Scope
onExecute onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFilterInit onAfterDelete onClick onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterValidate onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit onExecute onExecute
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onLoadAll onLoad onLoad
onValidate onBeforeInsert
onValidateSuccess onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_global ([Global_Variable1], [Global_Variable2] )

This macro has the objective to delete global variables, stored in the PHP session.
Ex. 1: sc_reset_global ([Login], [Pass]);
Macros Scope
41
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_seq_register
This macro provide the record (being processed) grid sequential number. It can be used, only in onRecord event.
Ex. 1:if({sc_seq_register} == 10) { // last line of the page {total} = {sum_total}; }
Grid application
Macros Scope
Grid Application
onRecord
sc_set_global ($variable_01) or ({My_Field})

This macro its used to register global variables. Create a session variable with the same name and content of the local variable. NOTE: This macro will be discontinued soon. You
should use the method of creating global variables ??using brackets. Ex: [var_glo_user] = test; Ex. 1: Registering a users variable. $my_var = mary;sc_set_global($my_var);Creates a
session variable with the name my_var with the mary content.
Ex. 2: For register a field value as a session variable. sc_set_global({fieldname}); Note: This macro doesnt attribute values. Only register the session variables from PHP.
Macros Scope
42
Blank Calendar
onValidate Chart Grid Search onBeforeInsertAll Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_groupby_rule
This macro is used to select a GROUPBY rule in execution time in the onApplicationInit event.
Ex: sc_set_groupby_rule = rule id;

Macros Scope
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
sc_set_language (String Language)

This macro allows to define the application language dinamically.
Macros Scope
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onFilterValidate onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_regional (String Regional)
This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings.
Macros Scope
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_theme (String Theme)
This macros allows to define the application theme dinamically.

43
Macros Scope
onValidateSuccess
sc_site_ssl
This macro its used to verifie if a used site is a safe site. (https protocol)Ex. 1: Using an affirmative. if (sc_site_ssl){ echo ok - Safe site;} Ex. 2: Using a negative. if (!sc_site_ssl){ echo
Warning - Unsafe site;} Ex. 3: Redirecting if the site isnt safe. if (!sc_site_ssl){ sc_redir(http://www. erro_page. com/) ;} Note: This macro works only to the web server llS.
Macros Scope
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_trunc_num ({My_Field}, Decimal_Number)
This macro is used to truncate numerical values which exceed the decimals amount specified.
44
Parmetro Descrio
My_Field Variable with value to format (return in the same variable).
Decimal_Number Amount of decimals to display.
Ex. 1:sc_trunc_num({my_value}, 2);Input value = 1250. 235Output value = 1250. 23Input value = 1250. 2Output value = 1250. 20Input value = 1250Output value = 1250. 00
Macros Scope
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_url_exit (URL)
This macro modifies the application exit URL.
Macros Scope
Calendar Application Chart Application Grid Application Search Application Form Application Control Application Report PDF Application
onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onClick onRecord
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onFilterInit onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit

45
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onLoadAll
Calendar Application Chart Application Grid Application Search Application Form Application Control Application Report PDF Application
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_url_library (Target, Library Name, File)
. obs
{
color: #FF0000;
}
This macro will return the file path, inside a library, to be used on the scriptcase applications. It is necessary to have a library created on Scriptcase to use this Macro. To create a
library, go in the Tools > Library Menu.
Macros Scope
onClick
onScriptInit
46
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_vl_extenso (value, line_length, type)

Creates value in words, starting from a numeric value. where: value: Value or variable that contains the value to be converted to long. tam_linha: Size of each line to be generated with
the amount in words (The ScripCase divides the value in full up to three lines). type: type of the input data: V for value or N number. Ex1: {extense} = sc_vl_extenso({meu_valor}, 50,
V); Ex2: {extense} = sc_vl_extenso({meu_valor}, 40, N);
Grid application
Macros Scope
Grid Application
onClick
onFooter
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_warning on or off
This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control. Warning messages are generated when a reference is made to an inexistent variable, an item of an
inexistent array, etc.
Ex. 1: To deactivate the message (do not display). sc_warning = off;
Macros Scope
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onFooter onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
Onchange onFooter onScriptInit onFilterInit Onchange onChange onExecute onExecute onFooter
OnClick onHeader onNavigate onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick onLoad onLoad onHeader
OnFocus onScriptInit onRecord onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus onScriptInit
47
Blank onValidateFailure
Calendar Chart Grid Search onBeforeUpdate Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_webservice (Method, URL, Port, Send Method, Parameters Array, Settings Array, Timeout, Return)
#definition td { vertical-align: middle; }
This macro is used to communicate with a web service.
Method Informs what method will be used to access the web service. Ex: file_get_contents or curl.
URL URL used to access the web service.
Port Port used to access the web service.
Send Method Defines the request method of the web service. Can be GET ou POST.
Parameters Array Parameters array used to access the web service, varying according to the accessed service.
Settingss Array(optional) Parameters array for configuration of access method used.
Timeout(optional) Services access timeout.
Return(optional) Web services return method. When it is set as True, the return from the web service comes as an array, if it is set as False it will return as the original web service
format. Default: True
$parms = array(
'METHOD' => 'GetBalance',
'RETURNALLCURRENCIES' => 1,
'VERSION' => urlencode(51. 0),
'USER' => urlencode({paypal_api_login}),
'PWD' => urlencode({paypal_api_password}),
'SIGNATURE' => urlencode({paypal_api_key})
);
$parms = http_build_query($parms);
Ex1 - Using the macro file_get_contents:
sc_webservice('file_get_contents', $webservice_url, $_SERVER["SERVER_PORT"], "POST", $parms, array(), 30);
Ex2 - Using the macro with CURL:
$response = sc_webservice("curl", {paypal_type}, 80, "POST", $parms, array(CURLOPT_RETURNTRANSFER => true, CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYPEER=>false), 30);
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form Menu application Tree menu
Macros Scope

48
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_zip_file (File, Zip)

This macro is used to generate ZIP files from a list of files and/or directories. The file parameter must be one of the following:- File name- Directory name- A variable containing array,
which contains a files and/or directories list. - A variable a file or a directory name. - A variable containing array, which contains a files and/or directories list. The zip parameter must
contain the name of the zip file generated, or the path to the file. Ex. 1: Single file compressing. sc_zip_file(/test/sample. htm, /tmp/test. zip); Ex. 2: Single directory compressing.
sc_zip_file(/test, /tmp/test. zip); Ex. 3: Multiple files and directories in an array. $prep = array();$prep[] = /test/sample. htm;$prep[] = /test;sc_zip_file($prep, /tmp/test. zip);
Macros Scope

49
Blank onBeforeUpdate
Calendar Chart Grid Search onApplicationInit onValidateSuccess
Control Menu Tree Menu Report PDF
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Variables - Totalling Totalling Variables

During group by and summary processing, Scriptcase generates total variables to each group level. The routines are defined in event onGroupBy determining the break levels and
avalilable to each record. Totals special variables are then referenced substituting the group name for the key word groupby, as in:
{count_ger} Records total amount.
{sum_parcel} Will show the total sum for the field Parcel
{sum_balance} Will show the total sum for the field Balance
{count_groupby} Current Group records total.
{sum_groupby_parcel} Current Group level sum for the field Parcel.
{sum_groupby_balance} Current Group level sum for the field Balance.
Ex. 1: In an application with a group by state and city that totalizes a balance field, in the group totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance as follows.
{sum_groupby_balance} = {sum_groupby_balance} / {count_groupby};
Macros Scope
onFooter onFooter onFooter
onHeader onGroupBy onHeader
onRecord onRecord
Variables - Totalling (group by) Totalling Variables (group by)

During the group by processing, Scriptcase generates total variables to each group level. The routines are defined in event onGroupBy determining the group levels. Totals special
variables are then referenced substituting the group name for the key word quebra, as in:
Variable Description
{count_ger} Records total amount.
{sum_parcel} Field parcels total.

50
{sum_balance} Field Balance total.
{count_quebra} Current group level records total.
{sum_quebra_parcel} Current group level field parcels total.
{sum_quebra_balance} Current group level field Balance total.
Ex. 1: In an application with a group by state and city and that totalizes a balance field, in the group totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance as follows.
{sum_quebra_balance} = {sum_quebra_balance} / {count_quebra};
Macros Scope
Grid Application
onFooter
onGroupBy
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
Blank application calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
Macros Scope
onExecute onBeforeInsert onFooter onClick onBeforeInsert onValidate onFooter
onBeforeUpdate onHeader onFooter onBeforeUpdate onValidateSuccess onHeader
onLoad onScriptInit onHeader onClick onScriptInit
onRefresh onScriptInit onLoad onRecord
onValidateSuccess onNavigate onNavigate
onRecord onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
Macros Scope
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
Macros Scope

51
Blank Application Calendar
onLoad Application Chart Application
onScriptInit Grid Application
onHeader Form Application
onClick Control Application Report PDF Application
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
sc_lin_digitavel_banco
Macros Scope
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
sc_where_filter
This macro is used to retrieve the content generated by the filter, according with its selections. These are the data which will be added to the application original where clause after
filter submition.
Macros Scope
onHeader onRecord
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_apl_status (Application, Status)

Used to control the security access. These macros activate/deactivate the applications that a user has acess to.
Macros Scope
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
52
sc_ldap_login
$ldapConn = sc_ldap_login($server [, $domain, $user, $password, $dn, $group]); This macro initiates the connection and bind it to the user credentials. This macro needs the
following parameters: Server = Domain = User = Password = DN = Group = There are three possible returns:
Macro return Situation
(string)ldap_connect_error Connection error with LDAP host/service.
(string)ldap_bind_error Authentication error after successfull connection.
(resource) Successful connection and bind.

Macros Scope
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onValidate onValidate onValidate
sc_ldap_logout ()
This macro is used to release the connection after using the macro sc_ldap_login. Ex1: sc_ldap_logout();

Macros Scope
sc_ldap_search ( $filter = all, $attributes = array() )

Macro to perform searches in the LDAP.
$filter all or member:all returns all information that the logged user can see. member returns the information aobut that member
$attributes Array of LDAP filter options.
Ex: $result = sc_ldap_search($filter, array(mail, displayname));

Macros Scope
sc_reset_apl_conf (Application, Property)

This macro have the objective to delete all modifications effected by the sc_apl_conf macro. The property parameter its opicional, if its passed it will only erase the modification from
that specific application. Ex. 1: Deleting the modifications of the my_application application, property start. sc_reset_apl_conf(my_application, start);
Macros Scope
onValidate
53
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_apl_status
This macro has the objective to clean all security variables, set through the sc_apl_status macro.
Ex. 1: sc_reset_apl_status();
Macros Scope
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_menu_delete
This macro its used to restore a menu item, deleted by the macro sc_menu_delete.
Ex. 1: sc_reset_menu_delete();
Menu application Tree menu

Macros Scope
Menu Application Tree Menu Application
onLoad onLoad
sc_reset_menu_disable
This macro have the objective to enable a menu item, disabled by the macro sc_menu_disable.
Ex. 1: sc_reset_menu_disable();

Macros Scope
onLoad onLoad
sc_user_logout (variable_name, variable_content, apl_redir.php, target)

This macro is used to log the user out to the system. If the target is not informed, the default value is _top. Ex: sc_user_logout(usr_login, admin, ctrl_login. php, _self);
Macros Scope
onExecute onAfterDelete onHeader onScriptInit onAfterDelete onScriptInit onHeader
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll onScriptInit
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onValidate onRecord
onBeforeDelete onAfterInsertAll onValidateSuccess
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdate
onBeforeUpdate onAfterUpdateAll
54
Blank Application Calendar
onLoad Application Chart Application Grid Application Form Application
onBeforeDeleteAll Control Application Report PDF Application
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_ajax_message (Message, Title, Parameters, Parameters_Redir)

This macro allows the application to show customizable messages. Its use is restricted to AJAX events of Form/Control applications.
Macros Scope
sc_ajax_refresh ()
This macro is used especially in Ajax events of a Grid with the purpose of reload the Grid data (refresh).
Ex: sc_ajax_refresh();
Macros Scope
Grid Application
onClick
sc_block_display (Block_Name, on/off)

Dynamically determines the display fields of a specific block. By default all the blocks are displayed (on condition).
Ex. 1:if ({type_customeri} == personal){ sc_block_display(company, off);}else{ sc_block_display(personal, off);}
Obs: In grids, this macro only works with slide orientation.
calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form
Macros Scope
Calendar Application Chart Application Grid Application Form Application Control Application
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onScriptInit onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onLoad onAfterUpdate onRefresh
onRefresh onAfterUpdateAll
55
onValidateSuccess OnNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_field_color (Field, Color)

This macros its used to change/restore a grid field text color dynamically. Ex. 1: Change the grid text field customer_id color. sc_field_color (customerid, #33FF66);Ex. 2: Change
the value_order field text color, if the value is greater that 1000. Otherwise, use the default color. if ({value_order} > 1000){ sc_field_color (value_order, #33FF66);}else{
sc_field_color (value_order, );} Ex. 3: Using a local variable. sc_field_color (customerid, {fld_color}); Ex. 4: Using a global variable. sc_field_color (customerid, [glo_color]);
Grid application ReportPDF application

Macros Scope
Grid Application Report PDF Application
onRecord onRecord
sc_field_disabled (Field_Name = True/False, Parameter)

This macro its used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it. Fields that its going to be blocked should be followed by the option true (default) or false. The
parameter its optional, I its used only to block de addition of new records, U to block only the update, in case of the parameter has not been informed the scriptcase will use both
options.
Ex. 1: Blocks only one field for addition and update. sc_field_disabled(Field_01); Ex. 2: Unblocking a field for addtion and update. sc_field_disabled(Field_02=false); Ex. 3: Blocks
several fields, only for update. sc_field_disabled(Field_01; Field_02; Field_03, U); Ex. 4: Combination of block and unblock of several fields, for adition and update.
sc_field_disabled(Field_01=true; Field_02=false; Field_03=true);
calendar application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application

Macros Scope
Calendar Application Form Application Control Application Report PDF Application
onLoad onLoad onLoadAll onHeader
onNavigate
sc_field_disabled_record (Field_Name = True/False, Parametre)

This macro has the objective to block the typing on determined fields in the lines of the Multiple Record form, Editable Grid and Editable Grid View.
Fields that are suppose to be blocked should be applied the options, true ( To block) or false ( to unblock). If not informed, the default value is true.
The optional parameter is using the I to block while inserting a new record and U to block while updating a record. If not informed, Scriptcase will block on both occasions by default.
Ex. 1: Blocking the field while including and updating. sc_field_disabled_record(Field_01);
Ex. 2: Unblocking the field while including and updating. sc_field_disabled_record(Field_02=false);
Ex. 3: Blocking the various fields only when updating. sc_field_disabled_record(Field_01; Field_02; Field_03, U);
Ex. 4: Combination of blocking and unblocking various fields while including and updating. sc_field_disabled_record(Field_01=true; Field_02=false; Field_03=true);
The macro can also work within a condition, blocking a specific field on the record line.
Example 1: if ({Filed_01} == 1) { sc_field_disabled_record(Filed_03); }
Example 2: switch(trim([arr_apps][ {app_name} ])) { case form: break; case calendar: sc_field_disabled_record(priv_export; priv_print); break; case cons:
sc_field_disabled_record(priv_insert; priv_delete; priv_update); break; default: sc_field_disabled_record(priv_insert; priv_delete; priv_update; priv_export; priv_print); break; }
Form application
56
Macros Scope
Form Application
onLoadRecord
sc_field_display ({My_Field}, on/off)

This macro dynamically display a specific field. By default all the fields are display (on condition). Ex. 1:if ({tp_customeri} == personal){ sc_field_display({company_name}, off);}else{
sc_field_display({personal_name}, off);}
calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form ReportPDF application
Macros Scope
Calendar Application Chart Application Grid Application Form Application Control Application Report PDF Application
ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onScriptInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onScriptInit
Onchange onHeader Onchange onChange
OnClick onScriptInit OnClick onClick
onScriptInit onAfterInsertAll onValidate
onLoad onAfterUpdate onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_field_init_off (Field1, Field2,)

This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load. Fields inhibited by this macro can be enabled by using the Columns button. Ex 01: sc_field_init_off ({orderID},
{TotalValue});
Grid application
Macros Scope
Chart Application Report PDF Application
sc_field_readonly ({Field}, on/off)

This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to ReadOnly. Use this macro only to do it at runtime. Otherwise set this parameter on / off on the form interface. section Read-
Only. The on/off parameter its opitional, used by an ajax event to define if a field its going to be read-only (On) or read-only (Off).
Ex 1: To set a field as read only even when the form is in Addition mode:if (sc_btn_new){ sc_field_readonly({my_field});} Ex. 2: To set a field as read only dynamically
use:sc_field_readonly({my_field});
57
Macros Scope
onValidateSuccess onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_field_style ({My_Field}, Background-Color, Size, Color, Family, Weight)
This macro allows to modify the grid field style dinamically.
Field Name
Background-Color (optional) Field cell background Color
Size (optional) Field font size
Color (optional) Font Color
Family (optional) Font family
Weight (optional) Font weight
Ex. 1:sc_field_style({my_field}, #33FF99, 15px, #000000, Arial, sans-serif, bold);
Grid application
sc_format_num ({My_Field}, Group_Symb, Dec_Symb, Amount_Dec, Fill_Zeros, Side_Neg, Currency_Symb, Side_Currency_Symb)
This macro its used to format numerical values.
My_Field Variable or field to format (The return is in the next variable).
Group_Symb Integer values grouping symbol.

58
Dec_Symb Decimals separator symbol.
Amount_Dec Number of decimals to be displayed.
Fill_Zeros Complete decimals with zeros (fill in) (S = yes and N = no).
Side_Neg Negative sign position. (1 = left and 2 = right)
Currency_Symb Monetary symbol to be displayed.
Side_Currency_Symb Currency symbol position. (1 = left and 2 = right).
Ex. 1: Formatting an integer. sc_format_num({my_value}, . , , 0, N, 1, );Input value = 001234567890Output value = 1. 234. 567. 890Ex. 2: Formatting a negative value and truncating
decimals. sc_format_num({my_value}, . , , 0, N, 1, );Input value = 0012345678. 90-Output value = -12. 345. 678Ex. 3: Formatting a value with 4 decimals and filling with zeros.
sc_format_num({my_value}, . , ,, 4, S, 1, );Input value = 0012345678. 9Output value = 12. 345. 678,9000Ex. 4: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with zeros and using
monetary symbol. sc_format_num({my_value}, . , ,, 2, S, 1, US$);Input value = 0012345678. 9Output value = US$ 12. 345. 678,90Ex. 5: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with
zeros. sc_format_num({my_value}, . , ,, 2, S, 1, );Input value = . 9Output value = 0,90
Macros Scope
Blank Application Grid Application Search Application Form Application Control Application Menu Application Tree Menu Application
onExecute onClick onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onFilterInit Onchange onChange onExecute onExecute
onFooter onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick onLoad onLoad
onGroupBy onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onNavigate onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onRecord onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onAfterUpdate onRefresh
onAfterUpdateAll onValidate
onApplicationInit onValidateFailure
onBeforeDelete onValidateSuccess
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_format_num_region ({My_Field}, Qtde_Dec, Insert_Zeros, Monetary_Sym)

59
This macro has the objective to format numbers, using the regional settings
My_Field Variable or field that has a value to be formated (if the value is 0 the result will be the same as the variable).
Qtde_Dec Amount of decimals thatll be displayed.
Insert_Zeros Complete with the non exisiting decimals (Y = yes and N = no).
Monetary_Sym Display monetary symbol (Y = yes and N = no).
Ex. 1: Formating a value with 2 decimal spaces, inserting the zeros and the monetary value. sc_format_num_region({my_value}, 2, Y, Y);Input value = 9Output value = R$0,90
Blank application Grid application Search application Form application Control Form Menu application Tree menu
Macros Scope
Blank Application Grid Application Search Application Form Application Control Application Menu Application Tree Menu Application
onExecute onClick onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onApplicationInit onFilterInit Onchange onChange onExecute onExecute
onFooter onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick onLoad onLoad
onGroupBy onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onNavigate onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onRecord onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onAfterUpdate onRefresh
onAfterUpdateAll onValidate
onApplicationInit onValidateFailure
onBeforeDelete onValidateSuccess
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_form_show on or off
This macro dynamically display or not a form. By default, the form is displayed (on condition). Ex. 1: Doesnt display the form. sc_form_show = off;

Macros Scope
60
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit
onLoad onLoad onLoadAll
sc_get_groupby_rule ()
This macro is used to retrieve the name of the groupby rule that is being used at this moment. The return value is a String containing the name of the rule.
Ex: if (sc_get_groupby_rule() == rule1) { [title] = Sales X Region; }

Macros Scope
onFooter onScriptInit
onHeader onNavigate
onScriptInit onRecord
sc_hide_groupby_rule (group1, grop2, group3)
This macro is used to disable Group By rules in execution time. The Group By rules ID should be informed as parameters in the macro.
Ex: if( [usr_login_group] == seller ){ sc_hide_groupby_rule(rule_1, rule_2); }

Macros Scope
onApplicationInit onScriptInit
sc_set_focus (Field)
This macro its used to set the focus to a form field.
Ex. 1: sc_set_focus(name);

Macros Scope
OnClick OnClick onApplicationInit
onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onRefresh onRefresh onLoadAll
onValidateSuccess onValidateSuccess onRefresh
sc_btn_copy
Available when the Copy button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1: if (sc_btn_copy) { sc_message(Record copied successfully!); }

Macros Scope
onLoad onLoad
61
sc_btn_delete
Available when the Delete button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time. Ex. 1:if (sc_btn_delete){
sc_error_message(Unable to delete this record);}

Macros Scope
sc_btn_display (Button_Name,on/off)
Activate toolbars buttons on the application in execution time.
Macros Scope
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onScriptInit onAfterDelete onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess OnNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_insert
Available when the Add button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1:if (sc_btn_insert){ sc_message(Record inserted successfully); }

Macros Scope
sc_btn_new
Available when the Add New button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1:if (sc_btn_new){ {My_Date} = date(Y/m/d);}

62
Macros Scope
onLoad onLoad
sc_btn_update
Available when the Save button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1:if (sc_btn_update){ sc_error_message(Record updated successfully);}

Macros Scope
sc_set_pdf_name sc_my_file_name.pdf
The resulting files of the exported data (PDF, XLS, XML, CSV, WORD and RTF) are stored in temporary directory specified in the Scriptcases configuration in development and in
production, with the prefix sc_ followed by a unique identification so the file of a user does not overwrite to one another. The prefix sc_ makes Scriptcase delete the old files. To
assign different names Scriptcase patterns, can use the following macros:
sc_set_csv_name
sc_set_pdf_name
sc_set_rtf_name
sc_set_xml_name
sc_set_xls_name
sc_set_word_name
Ex1: sc_set_xls_name = my_file. xls;
Ex2: sc_set_csv_name = sc_my_new_file. csv;
NOTE: 1) These macros should be used in the event onApplicationInit. 2) Even using the macro, remained the prefix sc_ (as Ex2), the Scriptcase will delete the file when it reaches
the configured timeout limit (see the setting File Lifetime in the production environment).

Macros Scope
Variables - Authentication Authentication Variables
These variables must be defined on applications with PDF export on environments with integrated authentication.
Macros Scope
Grid Application Form Application
onApplicationInit onScriptInit
onFooter
onGroupBy
onScriptInit
sc_appmenu_add_item (Menu_Name, Id_Item, Id_Parent, Label, Aplication, Parameters, Icon, Hint, Target)
Adds dinamically an item to a menu application.
Macros Scope
63
onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_create (Menu_Name)
This macro initializes the array used in the dimanically creation of the menu application. It must be informed the menu application name as parameter.
Macros Scope
onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_exist_item (Menu_Name, Id_Item)

Verify if a menu item exists and returns true or false.
menu_name Menu application name
Macros Scope
onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_remove_item (Menu_Name, Id_Item)

Remove dinamically a menu item. To use this macro it is necessary to execute the macro sc_appmenu_create before.
Parmetro Descrio
menu_name Menu application name
Macros Scope
onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_reset (Menu_Name)
This macro resets the array used in the dynamic creation of a menu application.
Macros Scope
onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_update_item (Menu_Name, Id_Item, Id_Parent, Label, Aplication, Parameters, Icon, Hint, Target)
Updates an application menu item dinamically
Macros Scope
64
onLoad onLoad
sc_btn_disable (button_id, on/off)

This macros is used to disable or enable buttons from a Menu application.
Macros Scope
onApplicationInit onLoad
onLoad
sc_menu_delete (Id_Item1)
This macro removes menu items passed as parameters. Can be use in menu applications or tree menu.
Macros Scope
onLoad onLoad
sc_menu_disable (Id_Item1)
This macro deactivates menu items pass as parameters. Can be used in menu applications or tree menus.
Macros Scope
onLoad onLoad
sc_menu_force_mobile (boolean)
This Macro is used to force the creation of menus to mobile devices. The parameter (true or false) is optional. If no value is passed, it will use the value true ( enable mobile mode)
Ex1: sc_menu_force_mobile(true); Ex2: sc_menu_force_mobile(false);

Macros Scope
onLoad onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_menu_item
This variable is only avaliable for menu application and it has the objective of giving acess to a menu item that was selected, this way the user can take desicions before to run the
application.
Macros Scope
onExecute onApplicationInit
onExecute
sc_script_name
This macro is available to the MENU applications to access the application name that was selected in the menu. It allows the user to make dacisions before executing the application if
a pre-process is required to that application.
Macros Scope
65
onExecute onExecute
1
Macro x Applications x Events
HOME MACROS MACRO X APPLICATIONS X
EVENTS
ajaxFieldonBlur
Aplicao Calendrio Aplicao Formulrio Aplicao Controle
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message

sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_error_exit
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_get_language
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_include_library sc_include sc_include
sc_lookup sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_label sc_label
sc_reset_connection_new sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_select sc_reset_global sc_reset_global
sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_global sc_select sc_select
sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode
sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_set_global
sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection sc_sql_injection
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_time_diff
sc_warning sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_url_library
Variables - Database sc_warning sc_warning
sc_webservice sc_webservice
Variables - Databases Variables - Database
Onchange
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript

sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_concat
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_edit
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_connection_new
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_conv
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_date_dif
sc_decode sc_decode sc_date_dif_2
sc_encode sc_encode sc_date_empty
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_decode
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_encode
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_error_exit
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_error_message
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_field_display
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_field_readonly
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_format_num
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_format_num_region
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_get_language
sc_include_library sc_include sc_get_regional
sc_lookup sc_include_library sc_get_theme
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_label sc_include
sc_reset_connection_new sc_lookup sc_include_library
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit sc_label
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new sc_lookup
sc_select sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new
sc_set_global sc_select sc_reset_global
sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans
sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_select
sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_set_global
sc_warning sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_time_diff
Variables - Database sc_warning sc_trunc_num
sc_webservice sc_url_library
Variables - Database sc_warning
sc_webservice
Variables - Database
2
OnClick
Aplicao Calendrio Aplicao Consulta Aplicao Formulrio Aplicao Controle
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_refresh sc_begin_trans sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript

sc_ajax_message sc_calc_dv sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans sc_commit_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_concat sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_concat sc_date_conv sc_concat sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_date_dif sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_date_dif_2 sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date_empty sc_date sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_decode sc_date_conv sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_encode sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_exec_sql sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty sc_format_num sc_date_empty sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_format_num_region sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_label sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_exit sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_error_exit sc_error_exit
sc_error_message sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_error_message sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_field_display sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly sc_lookup sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num sc_mail_send sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_reset_global sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_get_regional sc_rollback_trans sc_get_language sc_get_language
sc_get_theme sc_select sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_include sc_set_fetchmode sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_include_library sc_set_global sc_include sc_include
sc_lookup sc_sql_injection sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_sql_protect sc_label sc_label
sc_reset_connection_new sc_time_diff sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_reset_global sc_trunc_num sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_rollback_trans sc_vl_extenso sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_select sc_where_current sc_reset_global sc_reset_global
sc_set_fetchmode sc_where_filter sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_focus sc_where_orig sc_select sc_select
sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode
sc_sql_injection sc_set_focus sc_set_global
sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection sc_time_diff
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_trunc_num
sc_warning sc_trunc_num sc_url_library
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_warning
Variables - Database sc_warning sc_webservice
sc_webservice Variables - Database
OnFocus

sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_message
sc_concat sc_concat sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_error_exit
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_get_language
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_lookup sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_label sc_label
sc_reset_connection_new sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_select sc_reset_global sc_reset_global
sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_global sc_select sc_select
sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode
sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_set_global
sc_trunc_num sc_sql_injection sc_sql_injection
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_time_diff
sc_warning sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_url_library
Variables - Database sc_warning sc_warning
sc_webservice sc_webservice
3
onAfterDelete
Aplicao Calendrio Aplicao Formulrio
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_display sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_delete sc_error_delete
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit
sc_error_message sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region
sc_get_regional sc_get_language
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional
sc_include sc_get_theme
sc_include_library sc_include
sc_lookup sc_include_library
sc_mail_send sc_lookup
sc_master_value sc_mail_send
sc_redir sc_master_value
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_redir
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_new
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global
sc_select sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select
sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library sc_url_exit
sc_user_logout sc_url_library
sc_warning sc_user_logout
sc_webservice sc_warning
sc_zip_file sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onAfterDeleteAll
Aplicao Formulrio
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_format_num_region
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
4
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
Aplicao Formulrio
onAfterInsert
sc_block_display sc_block_display
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_insert sc_error_insert
sc_zip_file
onAfterInsertAll
Aplicao Formulrio
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
5
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
Aplicao Formulrio
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onAfterUpdate
sc_block_display sc_block_display
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_update sc_error_update
sc_zip_file
onAfterUpdateAll
Aplicao Formulrio
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
6
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
Aplicao Formulrio
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onApplicationInit
Aplicao Calendrio Aplicao Grfico Aplicao Consulta Aplicao Filtro Aplicao Formulrio Aplicao Controle Aplicao Menu Aplicao Menu rvore Aplicao Report PDF
sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf

sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_appmenu_add_item sc_appmenu_add_item sc_calc_dv
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_change_connection sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_appmenu_create sc_appmenu_create sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_date sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_appmenu_exist_item sc_appmenu_exist_item sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date sc_date sc_date sc_appmenu_remove_item sc_appmenu_remove_item sc_date
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_appmenu_reset sc_appmenu_reset sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_appmenu_update_item sc_appmenu_update_item sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode sc_decode sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_decode sc_decode sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode sc_decode sc_encode sc_encode sc_encode sc_btn_disable sc_commit_trans sc_encode
sc_format_num sc_field_display sc_encode sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_calc_dv sc_date sc_format_num
sc_get_language sc_format_num sc_field_init_off sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region sc_commit_trans sc_date_dif sc_get_theme
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_language sc_get_language sc_concat sc_date_dif_2 sc_image
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_format_num_region sc_get_regional sc_get_regional sc_get_regional sc_connection_edit sc_decode sc_include
sc_image sc_get_theme sc_redir sc_get_theme sc_get_theme sc_get_theme sc_connection_new sc_encode sc_language
sc_include sc_hide_groupby_rule sc_reset_apl_conf sc_include sc_image sc_image sc_date sc_exec_sql sc_redir
sc_include_library sc_image sc_reset_apl_status sc_include_library sc_include sc_include sc_date_dif sc_format_num_region sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_language sc_include sc_reset_change_connection sc_language sc_include_library sc_include_library sc_date_dif_2 sc_get_language sc_reset_apl_status
sc_ldap_login sc_include_library sc_reset_global sc_reset_apl_conf sc_language sc_language sc_decode sc_get_regional sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_ldap_logout sc_language sc_set_global sc_reset_apl_status sc_ldap_login sc_ldap_login sc_encode sc_get_theme sc_reset_connection_new
sc_ldap_search sc_redir sc_set_groupby_rule sc_reset_connection_edit sc_ldap_logout sc_ldap_logout sc_exec_sql sc_language sc_reset_global
sc_master_value sc_reset_apl_conf sc_set_language sc_reset_connection_new sc_ldap_search sc_ldap_search sc_format_num sc_lookup sc_set_language
sc_redir sc_reset_apl_status sc_set_pdf_name sc_reset_global sc_master_value sc_redir sc_format_num_region sc_mail_send sc_set_regional
sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_change_connection sc_set_regional sc_set_global sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_get_language sc_menu_delete sc_set_theme
sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_connection_edit sc_set_theme sc_set_language sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_get_regional sc_menu_disable sc_site_ssl
sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_connection_new sc_time_diff sc_set_regional sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connection sc_get_theme sc_menu_force_mobile sc_time_diff
n sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_global sc_trunc_num sc_set_theme sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_connection_edit sc_image sc_menu_item sc_trunc_num
sc_reset_connection_new sc_set_global Variables - Authentication sc_site_ssl sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_new sc_include sc_reset_apl_conf sc_warning
sc_reset_global sc_set_groupby_rule sc_time_diff sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_global sc_include_library sc_reset_apl_status sc_zip_file
sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_trunc_num sc_reset_global sc_set_focus sc_language sc_reset_menu_delete
sc_set_language sc_set_pdf_name sc_url_exit sc_set_global sc_set_global sc_lookup sc_reset_menu_disable
sc_set_regional sc_set_regional sc_url_library sc_set_language sc_set_language sc_mail_send sc_set_global
sc_set_theme sc_set_theme sc_warning sc_set_regional sc_set_regional sc_menu_delete sc_set_language
sc_site_ssl sc_site_ssl sc_webservice sc_set_theme sc_set_theme sc_menu_disable sc_set_regional
sc_time_diff sc_time_diff sc_zip_file sc_site_ssl sc_site_ssl sc_redir sc_set_theme
sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_time_diff sc_reset_apl_conf sc_warning
sc_url_exit sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num sc_reset_apl_status sc_zip_file
sc_url_library sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_url_exit sc_reset_change_connection
sc_warning sc_warning sc_url_library sc_url_library sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_webservice sc_webservice sc_warning sc_warning sc_reset_connection_new
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_webservice sc_reset_global
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file sc_reset_menu_delete
sc_reset_menu_disable
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onBeforeDelete
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
sc_error_continue sc_error_continue
7
sc_zip_file
onBeforeDeleteAll
Aplicao Formulrio
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onBeforeInsert
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
8
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_include_library
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_zip_file
onBeforeInsertAll
Aplicao Formulrio
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onBeforeUpdate
sc_changed sc_changed
sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
9
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_include_library
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_zip_file
onBeforeUpdateAll
Aplicao Formulrio
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onExecute
Aplicao Blank Aplicao Menu Aplicao Menu rvore
sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf

sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_change_connection sc_concat sc_concat
sc_commit_trans sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_concat sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_connection_edit sc_date sc_date
sc_connection_new sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_date sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_conv sc_decode sc_decode
sc_date_dif sc_encode sc_encode
sc_date_dif_2 sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_date_empty sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_decode sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_encode sc_get_language sc_get_language
10
sc_exec_sql sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_format_num sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_format_num_region sc_include sc_include
sc_get_language sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_get_regional sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_get_theme sc_mail_send sc_mail_send
sc_image sc_menu_item sc_menu_item
Aplicao Blank Aplicao Menu Aplicao Menu rvore
sc_include sc_redir sc_redir
sc_include_lib sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_include_library sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_language sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_rollback_trans sc_script_name
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_script_name sc_select
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_select sc_set_fetchmode
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_global
sc_log_add sc_set_global sc_sql_injection
sc_log_split sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num
sc_lookup sc_time_diff sc_url_library
sc_mail_send sc_trunc_num sc_warning
sc_make_link sc_url_library sc_webservice
sc_redir sc_warning sc_zip_file
sc_reset_apl_conf sc_webservice Variables - Database
sc_reset_apl_status sc_zip_file
sc_reset_change_connection Variables - Database
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onFilterInit
Aplicao Filtro
sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_language
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
11
onFilterRefresh
Aplicao Filtro
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
onFilterSave
Aplicao Filtro
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onFilterValidate
Aplicao Filtro
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
12
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
Aplicao Filtro
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onFooter
Aplicao Grfico Aplicao Consulta Aplicao ReportPDF

sc_concat sc_concat sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_date sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_date_conv sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date_dif sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_date_empty sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_format_num sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode sc_format_num_region sc_decode
sc_encode sc_get_language sc_encode
sc_exec_sql sc_get_regional sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num sc_get_theme sc_format_num
sc_get_groupby_rule sc_image sc_get_language
sc_get_language sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_get_theme
sc_get_regional sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_get_theme sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_include_library sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_rollback_trans sc_lookup
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_select sc_mail_send
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_set_fetchmode sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_lookup sc_set_global sc_reset_connection_new
sc_mail_send sc_sql_injection sc_reset_global
sc_make_link sc_sql_protect sc_select
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_time_diff sc_set_fetchmode
sc_reset_connection_new sc_trunc_num sc_set_global
sc_reset_global sc_vl_extenso sc_sql_injection
sc_select sc_where_current sc_time_diff
sc_set_fetchmode sc_where_filter sc_trunc_num
sc_set_global sc_where_orig sc_warning
sc_sql_injection Variables - Authentication sc_where_current
sc_time_diff Variables - Database sc_where_filter
sc_trunc_num Variables - Totalling sc_where_orig
sc_url_library Variables - Totalling (group by) sc_zip_file
sc_warning Variables - Database
sc_webservice Variables - Totalling
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
Variables - Totalling
onGroupBy
Aplicao Consulta
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_exec_sql
sc_groupby_label
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
13
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
Aplicao Consulta
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
Variables - Authentication
Variables - Totalling (group by)
onHeader
Aplicao Grfico Aplicao Consulta Aplicao ReportPDF

sc_change_connection sc_commit_trans sc_change_connection
sc_commit_trans sc_concat sc_commit_trans
sc_concat sc_date sc_concat
sc_connection_edit sc_date_conv sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_date_dif sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date_dif_2 sc_date
sc_date_conv sc_date_empty sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif sc_decode sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_encode sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty sc_exec_sql sc_date_empty
sc_decode sc_format_num sc_decode
sc_encode sc_format_num_region sc_encode
sc_exec_sql sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_field_disabled
sc_format_num sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_format_num
sc_get_groupby_rule sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_get_language
sc_get_language sc_lookup sc_get_regional
sc_get_regional sc_mail_send sc_get_theme
sc_get_theme sc_reset_global sc_include
sc_include sc_rollback_trans sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_include_library sc_select sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_select_order sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_select_where sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_set_fetchmode sc_lookup
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_set_global sc_mail_send
sc_lookup sc_sql_injection sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_mail_send sc_time_diff sc_reset_connection_new
sc_make_link sc_trunc_num sc_reset_global
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_vl_extenso sc_rollback_trans
sc_reset_connection_new sc_where_current sc_select
sc_reset_global sc_where_filter sc_set_fetchmode
sc_rollback_trans sc_where_orig sc_set_global
sc_select Variables - Database sc_sql_injection
sc_set_fetchmode sc_time_diff
sc_set_global sc_trunc_num
sc_sql_injection sc_user_logout
sc_time_diff sc_warning
sc_trunc_num sc_where_current
sc_url_library sc_where_filter
sc_user_logout sc_where_orig
sc_warning sc_zip_file
sc_webservice Variables - Database
sc_where_current Variables - Totalling
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
onScriptInit
Aplicao Calendrio Aplicao Grfico Aplicao Consulta Aplicao Formulrio Aplicao Controle Aplicao ReportPDF
sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf

sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_calc_dv
sc_btn_copy sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_btn_copy sc_btn_display sc_change_connection
sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection sc_change_connection sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection sc_concat
sc_change_connection sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_change_connection sc_commit_trans sc_connection_edit
sc_commit_trans sc_concat sc_concat sc_commit_trans sc_concat sc_connection_new
sc_concat sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_concat sc_connection_edit sc_date
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_connection_edit sc_connection_new sc_date_conv
sc_connection_new sc_date sc_date sc_connection_new sc_date sc_date_dif
sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_decode
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_encode
sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_date_empty sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_exec_sql
sc_date_empty sc_encode sc_decode sc_date_empty sc_encode sc_field_color
sc_decode sc_exec_sql sc_encode sc_decode sc_error_continue sc_field_display
sc_encode sc_field_display sc_exec_sql sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_format_num
sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_field_color sc_exec_sql sc_error_message sc_get_theme
sc_exit sc_get_groupby_rule sc_field_display sc_exit sc_exec_sql sc_image
sc_field_display sc_get_language sc_format_num sc_field_display sc_exit sc_include
sc_field_readonly sc_get_regional sc_format_num_region sc_field_readonly sc_field_display sc_label
sc_format_num sc_get_theme sc_get_groupby_rule sc_format_num sc_field_readonly sc_language
sc_form_show sc_image sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_format_num sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_get_language sc_include sc_get_regional sc_form_show sc_format_num_region sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_get_regional sc_include_library sc_get_theme sc_get_language sc_form_show sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_get_theme sc_label sc_hide_groupby_rule sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_image sc_language sc_image sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_lookup
sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_include sc_image sc_get_theme sc_mail_send
sc_include_library sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_include_lib sc_include sc_image sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_label sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_include_library sc_include_library sc_include sc_reset_apl_status
14
sc_language sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_label sc_label sc_include_library sc_reset_change_connection
sc_lookup sc_lookup sc_language sc_language sc_label sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_mail_send sc_mail_send sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lookup sc_language sc_reset_connection_new
sc_master_value sc_make_link sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_set_fetchmode
sc_redir sc_redir sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_set_global
sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_conf sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_redir sc_master_value sc_set_language
sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_apl_status sc_log_add sc_reset_apl_conf sc_redir sc_set_regional
Aplicao Calendrio Aplicao Grfico Aplicao Consulta Aplicao Formulrio Aplicao Controle Aplicao ReportPDF
sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_change_connection sc_log_split sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_apl_conf sc_set_theme
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit sc_lookup sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_apl_status sc_site_ssl
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new sc_mail_send sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_change_connection sc_sql_injection
sc_reset_global sc_reset_global sc_make_link sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_edit sc_time_diff
sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans sc_redir sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_new sc_trunc_num
sc_select sc_select sc_reset_apl_conf sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_user_logout
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select_field sc_reset_apl_status sc_select sc_select sc_warning
sc_set_global sc_select_order sc_reset_change_connection sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode sc_where_current
sc_set_language sc_select_where sc_reset_connection_edit sc_set_global sc_set_focus sc_where_filter
sc_set_regional sc_set_fetchmode sc_reset_connection_new sc_set_language sc_set_global sc_where_orig
sc_set_theme sc_set_global sc_reset_global sc_set_regional sc_set_language sc_zip_file
sc_site_ssl sc_set_language sc_rollback_trans sc_set_theme sc_set_regional Variables - Database
sc_sql_injection sc_set_regional sc_select sc_site_ssl sc_set_theme
sc_time_diff sc_set_theme sc_select_field sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl
sc_trunc_num sc_site_ssl sc_select_order sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection
sc_url_exit sc_sql_injection sc_select_where sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff
sc_url_library sc_time_diff sc_set_fetchmode sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num
sc_user_logout sc_trunc_num sc_set_global sc_url_library sc_url_exit
sc_warning sc_url_exit sc_set_language sc_user_logout sc_url_library
sc_webservice sc_url_library sc_set_regional sc_warning sc_user_logout
sc_zip_file sc_user_logout sc_set_theme sc_webservice sc_warning
sc_warning sc_site_ssl sc_zip_file sc_webservice
sc_webservice sc_sql_injection Variables - Authentication sc_zip_file
sc_where_current sc_sql_protect
sc_where_filter sc_time_diff
sc_where_orig sc_trunc_num
sc_zip_file sc_url_exit
Variables - Database sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
Variables - Authentication
onLoad
Aplicao Calendrio Aplicao Formulrio Aplicao Controle Aplicao Menu Aplicao Menu rvore
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_alert sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf

sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_begin_trans sc_apl_status sc_apl_status
sc_btn_copy sc_btn_copy sc_block_display sc_appmenu_add_item sc_appmenu_add_item
sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_appmenu_create sc_appmenu_create
sc_btn_new sc_btn_new sc_calc_dv sc_appmenu_exist_item sc_appmenu_exist_item
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection sc_appmenu_remove_item sc_appmenu_remove_item
sc_change_connection sc_change_connection sc_commit_trans sc_appmenu_reset sc_appmenu_reset
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_concat sc_appmenu_update_item sc_appmenu_update_item
sc_concat sc_concat sc_connection_edit sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_connection_new sc_btn_disable sc_btn_disable
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_date sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_date sc_date sc_date_conv sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_concat sc_concat
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_date sc_date
sc_decode sc_decode sc_encode sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_encode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_error_message sc_decode sc_decode
sc_field_disabled sc_field_disabled sc_exec_sql sc_encode sc_encode
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_field_disabled sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_field_display sc_format_num sc_format_num
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_field_readonly sc_format_num_region sc_format_num_region
sc_form_show sc_format_num_region sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_language
sc_get_language sc_form_show sc_format_num_region sc_get_regional sc_get_regional
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_form_show sc_get_theme sc_get_theme
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_image sc_image
sc_image sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_include sc_include
sc_include sc_image sc_get_theme sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_include_library sc_include sc_image sc_language sc_language
sc_label sc_include_library sc_include_library sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_label sc_label sc_mail_send sc_mail_send
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lookup sc_menu_delete sc_menu_delete
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_mail_send sc_menu_disable sc_menu_disable
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_master_value sc_menu_force_mobile sc_menu_force_mobile
sc_log_split sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_redir sc_redir sc_redir
sc_lookup sc_log_split sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_apl_status
sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_reset_global sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_change_connection
sc_redir sc_master_value sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_redir sc_select sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_edit sc_set_fetchmode sc_reset_global sc_reset_global
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_new sc_set_focus sc_reset_menu_delete sc_reset_menu_delete
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_set_global sc_reset_menu_disable sc_reset_menu_disable
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_site_ssl sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_sql_injection sc_select sc_select
sc_set_focus sc_set_fetchmode sc_sql_protect sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global sc_set_focus sc_time_diff sc_set_global sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_trunc_num sc_set_language sc_set_language
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_url_exit sc_set_regional sc_set_regional
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection sc_url_library sc_set_theme sc_set_theme
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_user_logout sc_site_ssl sc_site_ssl
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_sql_injection sc_sql_injection
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_webservice sc_time_diff sc_time_diff
sc_user_logout sc_url_library sc_zip_file sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num
sc_warning sc_user_logout Variables - Database sc_url_library sc_url_library
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_warning sc_warning
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_webservice sc_webservice
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file sc_zip_file
15
Variables - Database Variables - Database
onNavigate
Aplicao Calendrio Aplicao Formulrio Aplicao Controle Aplicao Menu Aplicao Menu rvore
Aplicao Consulta Aplicao Formulrio
sc_calc_dv sc_block_display
sc_commit_trans sc_btn_display
sc_concat sc_calc_dv
sc_date sc_commit_trans
sc_date_conv sc_concat
sc_date_dif sc_connection_edit
sc_date_dif_2 sc_connection_new
sc_date_empty sc_date
sc_decode sc_date_conv
sc_encode sc_date_dif
sc_exec_sql sc_date_dif_2
sc_format_num sc_date_empty
sc_format_num_region sc_decode
sc_get_groupby_rule sc_encode
sc_get_language sc_error_exit
sc_get_regional sc_error_message
sc_get_theme sc_exec_sql
sc_include sc_field_disabled
sc_label sc_field_display
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_field_readonly
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_format_num
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_format_num_region
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_get_language
sc_lookup sc_get_regional
sc_make_link sc_get_theme
sc_rollback_trans sc_include
sc_select sc_include_library
sc_set_fetchmode sc_label
sc_sql_injection sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_sql_protect sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_time_diff sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_trunc_num sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_vl_extenso sc_lookup
sc_where_current sc_mail_send
sc_where_filter sc_master_value
sc_where_orig sc_reset_connection_edit
Variables - Database sc_reset_connection_new
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onRecord
Aplicao Consulta Aplicao Formulrio Aplicao ReportPDF

sc_calc_dv sc_block_display sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans sc_btn_display sc_change_connection
sc_concat sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans
sc_date sc_change_connection sc_concat
sc_date_conv sc_commit_trans sc_connection_edit
sc_date_dif sc_concat sc_connection_new
sc_date_dif_2 sc_connection_edit sc_date
sc_date_empty sc_connection_new sc_date_conv
sc_decode sc_date sc_date_dif
sc_encode sc_date_conv sc_date_dif_2
sc_exec_sql sc_date_dif sc_date_empty
sc_field_color sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode
sc_field_style sc_date_empty sc_encode
sc_format_num sc_decode sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num_region sc_encode sc_field_color
sc_get_groupby_rule sc_exec_sql sc_get_language
sc_get_language sc_field_disabled_record sc_get_regional
sc_get_regional sc_field_display sc_get_theme
sc_get_theme sc_field_readonly sc_include
sc_include sc_format_num sc_link
sc_include_library sc_format_num_region sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_link sc_get_language sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_get_regional sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_get_theme sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_image sc_lookup
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_include sc_mail_send
sc_lookup sc_include_library sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_mail_send sc_label sc_reset_connection_new
sc_make_link sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_reset_global
sc_reset_global sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_rollback_trans
sc_rollback_trans sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_select
sc_select sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_set_fetchmode
sc_seq_register sc_lookup sc_set_global
sc_set_fetchmode sc_mail_send sc_sql_injection
sc_set_global sc_master_value sc_sql_protect
sc_sql_injection sc_reset_connection_edit sc_time_diff
sc_sql_protect sc_reset_connection_new sc_trunc_num
sc_time_diff sc_reset_global sc_url_exit
sc_trunc_num sc_rollback_trans sc_user_logout
16
sc_vl_extenso sc_select sc_warning
sc_where_current sc_set_fetchmode sc_where_current
sc_where_filter sc_set_global sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig sc_site_ssl sc_where_orig
Variables - Database sc_sql_injection sc_zip_file
Variables - Totalling sc_time_diff Variables - Database
sc_trunc_num Variables - Totalling
Aplicao Consulta Aplicao Formulrio Aplicao ReportPDF
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onRefresh

sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_block_display
sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_btn_display
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_changed
sc_concat sc_concat sc_commit_trans
sc_date sc_date sc_concat
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_connection_edit
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_connection_new
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_date_conv
sc_decode sc_decode sc_date_dif
sc_encode sc_encode sc_date_dif_2
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_date_empty
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_decode
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_encode
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_error_exit
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_error_message
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_exec_sql
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_field_display
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_field_readonly
sc_include_library sc_include sc_format_num
sc_label sc_include_library sc_format_num_region
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_label sc_get_language
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_get_regional
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_get_theme
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_include
sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_include_library
sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_mail_send
sc_reset_global sc_master_value sc_master_value
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_redir
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_reset_connection_new
sc_set_focus sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans
sc_set_global sc_set_focus sc_select
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_set_focus
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection sc_set_global
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num
sc_warning sc_url_library sc_url_library
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_warning
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_webservice
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file
onValidate
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_alert

sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_apl_conf
sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_apl_status
sc_btn_delete sc_btn_delete sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_insert sc_btn_insert sc_calc_dv
sc_btn_update sc_btn_update sc_commit_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_concat
sc_changed sc_changed sc_connection_edit
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_connection_new
sc_concat sc_concat sc_date
sc_date sc_date sc_date_conv
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_encode
sc_decode sc_decode sc_error_exit
sc_encode sc_encode sc_error_message
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_exec_sql
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_field_display
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_field_readonly
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_format_num_region
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_get_theme
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_include
sc_form_show sc_format_num_region sc_include_library
sc_get_language sc_form_show sc_language
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_ldap_login
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_ldap_logout
sc_image sc_get_theme sc_ldap_search
sc_include sc_image sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_include_library sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_ldap_login sc_include_library sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_ldap_logout sc_ldap_login sc_lin_digitavel_banco
17
sc_ldap_search sc_ldap_logout sc_lookup
sc_log_add sc_ldap_search sc_mail_send
sc_lookup sc_log_add sc_make_link
sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_redir
sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_redir sc_master_value sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global sc_redir sc_reset_change_connection
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_new
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_reset_global
sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode sc_rollback_trans
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_select
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_set_fetchmode
sc_sql_protect sc_sql_injection sc_set_global
sc_time_diff sc_sql_protect sc_set_language
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_set_regional
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_set_theme
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_site_ssl
sc_user_logout sc_url_library sc_sql_injection
sc_warning sc_user_logout sc_sql_protect
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_time_diff
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_trunc_num
sc_zip_file sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onValidateFailure

sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_apl_conf
sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_apl_status
sc_btn_delete sc_btn_delete sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_insert sc_btn_insert sc_calc_dv
sc_btn_update sc_btn_update sc_commit_trans
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_concat
sc_changed sc_changed sc_connection_edit
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_connection_new
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_decode
sc_decode sc_decode sc_encode
sc_encode sc_encode sc_error_exit
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_error_message
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_exec_sql
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_field_display
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_field_readonly
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_format_num
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_format_num_region
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_get_language
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_get_theme
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_image
sc_mail_send sc_include_library sc_include_library
sc_master_value sc_mail_send sc_lookup
sc_reset_global sc_master_value sc_mail_send
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_redir
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_reset_connection_new
sc_set_global sc_set_fetchmode sc_reset_global
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_rollback_trans
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_select
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection sc_set_fetchmode
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_set_global
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_site_ssl
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_sql_injection
sc_warning sc_url_library sc_time_diff
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_trunc_num
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_url_exit
sc_zip_file sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onValidateSuccess
sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_javascript sc_apl_conf

sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_apl_status
sc_block_display sc_block_display sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_delete sc_btn_delete sc_calc_dv
sc_btn_display sc_btn_display sc_commit_trans
sc_btn_insert sc_btn_insert sc_concat
sc_btn_update sc_btn_update sc_connection_edit
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_connection_new
sc_changed sc_changed sc_date
sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_date_conv
sc_concat sc_concat sc_date_dif
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit sc_date_dif_2
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new sc_decode
sc_date sc_date sc_encode
sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_error_exit
18
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_error_message
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_exec_sql
sc_date_empty sc_date_empty sc_format_num
sc_decode sc_decode sc_format_num_region
sc_encode sc_encode sc_get_language
sc_error_exit sc_error_exit sc_get_regional
sc_error_message sc_error_message sc_get_theme
sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_image
sc_field_display sc_field_display sc_include
sc_field_readonly sc_field_readonly sc_include_library
sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_language
sc_get_language sc_format_num_region sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_get_regional sc_get_language sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_get_theme sc_get_regional sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_include sc_get_theme sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_include_library sc_include sc_lookup
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_include_library sc_mail_send
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_make_link
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_redir
sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_lookup sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_reset_apl_status
sc_mail_send sc_lookup sc_reset_change_connection
sc_redir sc_mail_send sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_redir sc_reset_connection_new
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_global
sc_reset_global sc_reset_connection_new sc_rollback_trans
sc_rollback_trans sc_reset_global sc_select
sc_select sc_rollback_trans sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select sc_set_global
sc_set_focus sc_set_fetchmode sc_set_language
sc_set_global sc_set_focus sc_set_regional
sc_site_ssl sc_set_global sc_set_theme
sc_sql_injection sc_site_ssl sc_site_ssl
sc_time_diff sc_sql_injection sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num sc_time_diff sc_time_diff
sc_url_exit sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library sc_url_exit sc_url_exit
sc_user_logout sc_url_library sc_url_library
sc_warning sc_user_logout sc_user_logout
sc_webservice sc_warning sc_warning
sc_zip_file sc_webservice sc_webservice
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file

Manual Scriptcase9 En-Us

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Manual Scriptcase9 En-Us

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

1

How does ScriptCase work?

At your first access, the username and password is admin

Itll be installed automatically on your Operating System:

Apache Web Server 2.4.15

PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.

Source Guardian 11.0.6

This manual describes the installation of ScriptCase in 2 steps:

1: Select the configurations of the installer.

Selecting the configurations on the installer

This window displays the Welcome message of the installer.

Click on Next to continue.

Click on Next to continue.

Installation Directory : Define the installation path for ScriptCase.

: This button allows you to select a directory or create a new folder.

Click on Next to continue.

PHP Timezone: Select your Timezone.

Click on Next to continue.

Click on Next to install ScriptCase.

Progress Bar : Displays the overall progress of the installation.

7 - All the Apache to run in a private and public network (Firewall)

8 - Completing the Installation.

Open Scriptcase 9.0 : When clicking on finish, ScriptCase will start.

Click on Finish to complete the process.

Itll be installed automatically on your Operating System:

Apache Web Server 2.4.15

PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.

Source Guardian 11.0.6

This manual describes the installation of ScriptCase in 3 steps:

1: Execute the ScriptCase Installer.

2: Select the configurations of the installer.

Executing the ScriptCase Installer

Ex: user@computer:~$ cd /folder/of/downloads

Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ sudo su

3 - Give permissions to run the installation file.

Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ chmod 777 scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run

4 - Execute the installation file.

Ex: user@computer:~/folder/of/downloads$ ./scriptcase_linux_installer_x86_64_en_us_v9.0.000.run

Selecting the configurations on the installer

This window displays the Welcome message of the installer.

Click on Next to continue.

Click on Next to continue.

Installation Directory : Define the installation path for ScriptCase.

Click on Next to continue.

PHP Timezone: Select your Timezone.

Click on Next to continue.

Click on Next to install ScriptCase.

Progress Bar : Displays the overall progress of the installation.

7 - All the Apache to run in a private and public network (Firewall)

8 - Completing the Installation.

View Readme File : When clicking on finish, the Readme file

Open Scriptcase 9.0 : When clicking on finish, ScriptCase will start.

Click on Finish to complete the process.

Itll be installed automatically on your Operating System:

Apache Web Server 2.4.15

PHP 7.0 with the extensions mbstring, zip and gd enabled.

Source Guardian 11.0.6

This manual describes the installation of ScriptCase in 2 steps:

1: Select the configurations of the installer.

Selecting the configurations on the installer

This window displays the Welcome message of the installer.

Click on Next to continue.

Click on Next to continue.